DCS800 Firmware Manual

DCS800 Firmware Manual

DCS800

Firmware manual

DCS800 Drives (20 to 5200 A)

DCS800 Drive Manuals

All the documents available for the drive system DCS800 are listed below:

Language

DCS800 Quick Guide

DCS800 Tools & Documentation CD

DCS800 Converter module

Hardware Manual DCS800 update DCF503B/DCF504B

Firmware Manual DCS800

Drive Tools

DriveWindow 2.x - User's Manual

DriveOPC

DCS800 Applications

PLC Programming with CoDeSys

DCS800 Crane Drive

DCS800 Winder ITC

Manual

DDCS Branching Units - User’s Manual

DCS800 Crane Drive Product note

DCS800-E Panel Solution

Flyer DCS800-E Panel solution

3ADW000191 x x x x x

3ADW000211 x

3ADW000190 x x x x

3ADW000192

3ADW000194 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

3ADW000194Z0301 x

3ADW000193 x x p x x x x x

3ADW000032 x

3ADW000163 x

3ADW000195 x

3ADW000196 x

3ADW000136 p

3ADW000213 x

3BFE64560981 x

3BFE00073846 x

3AFE63988235 x

3BFE64285513

CoDeSys_V23 x x

Program x x

3AST004143

PDC5 EN REVA x p x

3ADW000308 x

3ADW000253z x

3ADW000210 x

3ADW000224 x x

DCS800-A Enclosed Converters

3ADW000213 x

3ADW000198 x

3ADW000091 x

DCS800-R Rebuild System

Extension Modules

RAIO-01 Analog IO Extension

RTAC-03 TTL Pulse Encoder Interface

Serial Communication

DCS500/DCS600 Size A5...A7, C2b, C3 and C4 Upgrade Kits 3ADW000256 x

3ADW000007 x

3ADW000197 x

3AFE64484567 x

3AFE64485733 x

3AFE68570760 x

3AFE64486853 x

3AFE68650500 x

3AFE64661442 x

3AFE64605062 x

Fieldbus Adapter with DC Drives RPBA- (PROFIBUS)

Fieldbus Adapter with DC Drives RCAN-02 (CANopen)

3AFE64504215 x

Fieldbus Adapter with DC Drives RCNA-01 3AFE64506005 x

Fieldbus Adapter with DC Drives RMBA (MODBUS)

3AFE64504223 x

3AFE64498851 x

3AFE64539736 x x -> existing p -> planned

Status 04.2010

DCS800 Drive Manuals-List_j.doc

Safety instructions

What this chapter contains

This chapter contains the safety instructions you must follow when installing, operating and servicing the drive. If ignored, physical injury or death may follow, or damage may occur to the drive, the motor or driven equipment. Read the safety instructions before you work on the unit.

To which products this chapter applies

The information is valid for the whole range of the product DCS800, the converter modules DCS800-S0x size D1 to D7, field exciter units DCF80x, etc. like the

Rebuild Kit DCS800-R00-9xxx.

Usage of warnings and notes

There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual: warnings and notes. Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and/or damage to the equipment, and advise on how to avoid the danger.

Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact, or give information on a subject. The warning symbols are used as follows:

Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause physical injury or death and/or damage to the equipment.

General danger warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by electricity, which can result in physical injury or death and/or damage to the equipment.

Electrostatic sensitive devices warning warns of electrostatic discharge which can damage the equipment.

3

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Safety instructions

4

Installation and maintenance work

These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive, motor cable or motor. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death and/or damage to the equipment.

WARNING!

Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive!

applied.

Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter (impedance at least

1 Mohm) that:

1. Voltage between drive input phases U1, V1 and W1 and the frame is close to 0 V.

2. Voltage between terminals C+ and D- and the frame is close to 0 V. drive or to the external control circuits. Externally supplied control circuits may cause dangerous voltages inside the drive even when the main power on the drive is switched off. on the drive or drive modules. resistance or voltage withstand of the cables or the motor.

D- cables are connected with the proper terminal.

Note:

The motor cable terminals on the drive are at a dangerously high voltage when the main power is on, regardless of whether the motor is running or not.

220 V or 230 V) may be present on the relay outputs of the drive system (e.g. SDCS-IOB-2 and RDIO). isolate the whole drive system from the supply.

Safety instructions

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

5

Grounding

These instructions are intended for all who are responsible for the grounding of the drive. Incorrect grounding can cause physical injury, death and/or equipment malfunction and increase electromagnetic interference.

WARNING!

Ground the drive, motor and adjoining equipment to ensure personnel safety in all circumstances, and to reduce electromagnetic emission and pick-up. marked as required by safety regulations. protective earth (PE ). grounding (e.g. conductive sleeves) of screened cable entries at the cabinet lead-through plate. ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms) power system.

Note:

• Power cable shields are suitable as equipment grounding conductors only when adequately sized to meet safety regulations.

AC or 10 mA DC (stated by EN 50178, 5.2.11.1), a fixed protective earth connection is required.

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Safety instructions

6

Printed circuit boards and fiber optic cables

These instructions are intended for all who handle the circuit boards and fiber optic cables. Ignoring the following instructions can cause damage to the equipment.

WARNING! The printed circuit boards contain components sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Wear a grounding wrist band when handling the boards. Do not touch the boards unnecessarily.

Use grounding strip:

ABB order no.: 3ADV050035P0001

WARNING! Handle the fiber optic cables with care. When unplugging optic cables, always grab the connector, not the cable itself. Do not touch the ends of the fibers with bare hands as the fiber is extremely sensitive to dirt. The minimum allowed bend radius is 35 mm (1.38 in.).

Safety instructions

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

7

Mechanical installation

These notes are intended for all who install the drive. Handle the unit carefully to avoid damage and injury.

WARNING!

DCS800 sizes D4 ... D7: The drive is heavy. Do not lift it alone. Do not lift the unit by the front cover. Place units D4 and D5 only on its back.

DCS800 sizes D5 ... D7: The drive is heavy. Lift the drive by the lifting lugs only. Do not tilt the unit. The unit will overturn from a tilt of about 6 degrees. installing. Electrically conductive dust inside the unit may cause damage or lead to malfunction.

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Safety instructions

8

Operation

Safety instructions

These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation of the drive or operate the drive. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death and/or damage to the equipment.

WARNING!

Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service, make sure that the motor and all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range provided by the drive. The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds above and below the base speed.

(disconnecting mains); instead, use the control panel keys and

, or commands via the I/O board of the drive.

You can use a disconnect switch (with fuses) to disconnect the electrical components of the drive from the mains for installation and maintenance work. The type of disconnect switch used must be as per EN 60947-3, Class B, so as to comply with EU regulations, or a circuit-breaker type which switches off the load circuit by means of an auxiliary contact causing the breaker's main contacts to open. The mains disconnect must be locked in its

"OPEN" position during any installation and maintenance work. desk and at all other control panels requiring an emergency stop function. Pressing the STOP button on the control panel of the drive will neither cause an emergency stop of the motor, nor will the drive be disconnected from any dangerous potential.

To avoid unintentional operating states, or to shut the unit down in case of any imminent danger according to the standards in the safety instructions it is not sufficient to merely shut down the drive via signals "RUN", "drive OFF" or "Emergency Stop" respectively

"control panel" or "PC tool".

The operating instructions cannot take into consideration every possible case of configuration, operation or maintenance. Thus, they mainly give such advice only, which is required by qualified personnel for normal operation of the machines and devices in industrial installations.

If in special cases the electrical machines and devices are intended for use in non-industrial installations - which may require stricter safety regulations (e.g. protection against contact by children or similar) - these additional safety measures for the installation must be provided by the customer during assembly.

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

9

Note:

• When the control location is not set to Local (L not shown in the status row of the display), the stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive. To stop the drive using the control panel, press the

LOC/REM key and then the stop key .

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Safety instructions

10

Table of contents

Safety instructions 3

What this chapter contains......................................................................................................... 3

To which products this chapter applies ...................................................................................... 3

Usage of warnings and notes..................................................................................................... 3

Installation and maintenance work ............................................................................................. 4

Grounding ....................................................................................................................... 5

Mechanical installation ............................................................................................................... 7

Operation ................................................................................................................................... 8

Table of contents 10

Introduction 23

Chapter overview.......................................................................................................... 23

Before You Start ........................................................................................................... 23

What this manual contains ........................................................................................... 23

Start-up 24

Chapter overview.......................................................................................................... 24

General ......................................................................................................................... 24

Start-up procedure ................................................................................................................... 25

Tools............................................................................................................................. 25

Checking with the power switched off .......................................................................... 25

Checking with the power switched on .......................................................................... 27

Commissioning a DCS800 ....................................................................................................... 28

Connect DCS800 to PC with DriveWindow Light ..................................................................... 28

Commissioning a DCS800 with the wizard .............................................................................. 29

Commissioning a DCS800 with DriveWindow.......................................................................... 30

Requirements ............................................................................................................... 30

01, 02 Macro assistant / Name plate data .................................................................... 30

03 Autotuning field current controller ............................................................................ 31

04 Autotuning armature current controller .................................................................... 31

05 Speed feedback assistant ....................................................................................... 32

Analog tacho fine tune procedure ................................................................ 32

06 Autotuning speed controller ..................................................................................... 32

07 Field weakening assistant ....................................................................................... 33

Manual tuning........................................................................................................................... 34

I/O configuration ........................................................................................................... 34

Field current controller .................................................................................................. 34

Armature current controller ........................................................................................... 35

Control principle ........................................................................................... 35

Manual tuning............................................................................................... 36

Analog tacho................................................................................................................. 41

Manual tuning............................................................................................... 42

Speed controller ........................................................................................................... 42

Basics........................................................................................................... 42

Manual tuning............................................................................................... 43

EMF controller .............................................................................................................. 45

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

11

Basics............................................................................................................45

Manual tuning................................................................................................45

Flux linearization............................................................................................................47

Basics............................................................................................................47

Manual tuning................................................................................................48

Thyristor diagnosis ........................................................................................................50

Basics............................................................................................................50

Check all thyristors ........................................................................................50

Check individual firing pulses ........................................................................50

Firmware description 52

Chapter overview...........................................................................................................52

Identification of the firmware versions ...........................................................................52

Start / stop sequences ..............................................................................................................53

General..........................................................................................................................53

Switch on sequence ......................................................................................................53

Start the drive ................................................................................................................54

Stop the drive ................................................................................................................55

Field excitation ..........................................................................................................................58

General..........................................................................................................................58

Field Reversal................................................................................................................58

Field control...................................................................................................58

Field reference hysteresis .............................................................................59

Force field current direction...........................................................................59

Reversal time ................................................................................................59

Bumpless transition .......................................................................................59

Optitorque......................................................................................................................59

Field current reference gain ..........................................................................59

Field current monitoring.................................................................................................60

Field minimum trip .........................................................................................60

Flux reversal..................................................................................................60

Field reversal hysteresis................................................................................60

Field reversal active ......................................................................................60

Field Heating .................................................................................................................60

Overview .......................................................................................................60

Modes of operation........................................................................................61

E-stop ............................................................................................................62

Field exciter mode.....................................................................................................................63

General..........................................................................................................................63

Large field exciter controlled by a DCS800 armature converter....................................63

Parameters to be set in the DCS800 armature converter: ............................64

Parameters to be set in large field exciters: ..................................................64

Field current autotuning for large field exciters: ............................................65

Stand alone field exciter ................................................................................................66

Parameters to be set in the stand alone field exciter: ...................................66

Field current autotuning for stand alone field exciter:....................................67

DC-breaker, DC-contactor ........................................................................................................68

General..........................................................................................................................68

HVCB controlled externally, DC-breaker controlled by the drive...................................68

DC-contactor US version ..........................................................................................................69

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

12

AC- and DC-breaker controlled by the drive................................................................. 71

No AC-breaker, DC-breaker controlled by the drive ..................................................... 72

AC-breaker controlled by the drive, DC-breaker controlled externally.......................... 73

No AC-breaker, DC-breaker controlled externally ........................................................ 74

Command Trip DC-breaker .......................................................................................... 74

Dynamic braking ...................................................................................................................... 75

General ......................................................................................................................... 75

Operation ...................................................................................................................... 75

Activation...................................................................................................... 75

Function........................................................................................................ 75

Deactivation.................................................................................................. 76

Position counter ....................................................................................................................... 78

General ......................................................................................................................... 78

Counting procedure ...................................................................................................... 78

Synchronization ............................................................................................................ 78

I/O configuration

Communication

81

Chapter overview.......................................................................................................... 81

Digital inputs (DI’s) ................................................................................................................... 81

SDCS-CON-4 / SDCS-IOB-2........................................................................................ 81

1 st

and 2 nd

RDIO-01 ....................................................................................................... 81

Configuration ................................................................................................................ 82

Digital outputs (DO’s) ............................................................................................................... 84

SDCS-CON-4 / SDCS-IOB-2........................................................................................ 84

1 st

and 2 nd

RDIO-01 ....................................................................................................... 84

Configuration ................................................................................................................ 85

Analog inputs (AI’s) .................................................................................................................. 87

SDCS-CON-4 ............................................................................................................... 87

SDCS-IOB-3 ................................................................................................................. 87

1 st

RAIO-01 ................................................................................................................... 88

2 nd

RAIO-01................................................................................................................... 88

Configuration ................................................................................................................ 89

Scaling.......................................................................................................................... 89

Analog outputs (AO’s) .............................................................................................................. 91

SDCS-CON-4 / SDCS-IOB-3........................................................................................ 91

1 st

RAIO-01 ................................................................................................................... 91

2 nd

RAIO-01................................................................................................................... 92

Configuration ................................................................................................................ 92

Scaling.......................................................................................................................... 93

94

Chapter overview.......................................................................................................... 94

DCSLink with SDCS-DSL-4 ..................................................................................................... 94

General ......................................................................................................................... 94

Excitation, commissioning a FEX-4.......................................................................................... 94

Layout FEX-4................................................................................................................ 94

Layout SDCS-DSL-4 .................................................................................................... 94

Set the FEX-4 type ....................................................................................................... 95

Set the node numbers, transmission speed and the communication supervision ........ 95

Set the DCSLink ........................................................................................................... 96

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

13

Set the supply of the FEX-4...........................................................................................97

Checking the FEX-4 ......................................................................................................97

Master-follower, commissioning................................................................................................98

Set the DCSLink hardware ............................................................................................98

Set the node ID numbers and transmission speed........................................................99

Activate the mailboxes...................................................................................................99

Activate the communication supervision .......................................................................99

Send and receive values .............................................................................................100

Firmware structure.......................................................................................................101

Additional settings .......................................................................................................102

Drive-to-drive communication .................................................................................................103

Set the DCSLink hardware ..........................................................................................103

Set the node ID numbers and transmission speed......................................................104

Activate the mailboxes.................................................................................................104

Activate the communication supervision .....................................................................104

Send and receive values .............................................................................................105

12-pulse ..................................................................................................................................106

Set the DCSLink hardware ..........................................................................................106

Set the node numbers, transmission speed and the communication supervision.......107

DDCS channels with SDCS-COM-8 .......................................................................................108

General........................................................................................................................108

Integer scaling on the DDCS link.................................................................................108

Ch0 communication to overriding control................................................................................109

ABB overriding control.................................................................................................109

Parameter setting example..........................................................................................109

Received data set table ...............................................................................................110

Transmitted data set table ...........................................................................................111

Fieldbus communication (N-type)................................................................................111

Ch1 I/O devices ......................................................................................................................112

Ch2 Master-follower link..........................................................................................................112

General........................................................................................................................112

Link configuration ........................................................................................................112

Master..........................................................................................................................112

Followers .....................................................................................................................113

Firmware structure.......................................................................................................113

Toggle between speed- and torque control .................................................................115

Follower diagnostics ....................................................................................................115

Master-follower link specification.................................................................................115

Ch3 commissioning and maintenance tools............................................................................116

DriveWindow ...............................................................................................................116

Ethernet communication for monitoring with Ethernet adapter NETA-01 ...............................117

General........................................................................................................................117

NETA-01 - DCS800 .....................................................................................................117

Related documentation................................................................................................117

NETA-01 configuration ................................................................................................117

Mechanical and electrical installation ..........................................................................118

Drive configuration.......................................................................................................118

CANopen communication with fieldbus adapter RCAN-01 .....................................................119

General........................................................................................................................119

RCAN-01 - DCS800 ....................................................................................................119

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

14

Related documentation............................................................................................... 119

Overriding control configuration.................................................................................. 119

EDS file....................................................................................................................... 119

Mechanical and electrical installation ......................................................................... 119

Drive configuration...................................................................................................... 119

Parameter setting example 1 using group 51 ............................................................. 119

Further information ..................................................................................................... 121

Parameter setting example 2 using groups 90 and 92 ............................................... 122

Switch on sequence ................................................................................................... 124

ControlNet communication with fieldbus adapter RCNA-01................................................... 125

General ....................................................................................................................... 125

RCNA-01 - DCS800 ................................................................................................... 125

Related documentation............................................................................................... 125

Overriding control configuration.................................................................................. 125

EDS file....................................................................................................................... 125

Mechanical and electrical installation ......................................................................... 125

Drive configuration...................................................................................................... 125

Parameter setting example 1 using ABB Drives assembly......................................... 125

Parameter setting example 2 using Vendor specific assembly .................................. 127

Setting of parameter groups 51, 90 and 92 ................................................................ 128

Further information ..................................................................................................... 128

Switch on sequence ................................................................................................... 128

DeviceNet communication with fieldbus adapter RDNA-01 ................................................... 129

General ....................................................................................................................... 129

RDNA-01 - DCS800 ................................................................................................... 129

Related documentation............................................................................................... 129

Overriding control configuration.................................................................................. 129

EDS file....................................................................................................................... 129

Mechanical and electrical installation ......................................................................... 129

Drive configuration...................................................................................................... 129

Parameter setting example 1 using ABB Drives assembly......................................... 129

Parameter setting example 2 using User specific assembly ...................................... 131

Setting of parameter groups 51, 90 and 92 ................................................................ 132

Further information ..................................................................................................... 132

Switch on sequence ................................................................................................... 132

Ethernet/IP communication with fieldbus adapter RETA-01 .................................................. 133

General ....................................................................................................................... 133

RETA-01 - DCS800 .................................................................................................... 133

Related documentation............................................................................................... 133

EDS file....................................................................................................................... 133

Mechanical and electrical installation ......................................................................... 133

Drive configuration...................................................................................................... 133

Parameter setting example using Ethernet/IP ABB Drives communication profile..... 133

Up to 4 data words ..................................................................................................... 135

Up to 12 data words ................................................................................................... 135

Switch on sequence ................................................................................................... 138

Modbus (RTU) communication with fieldbus adapter RMBA-01 ............................................ 139

General ....................................................................................................................... 139

RMBA-01 - DCS800 ................................................................................................... 139

Related documentation............................................................................................... 139

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

15

Mechanical and electrical installation ..........................................................................139

Drive configuration.......................................................................................................139

Parameter setting example … .....................................................................................139

… when controlling a drive ..........................................................................................139

… when used for monitoring only ................................................................................141

Setting of PLC, parameter groups 90 and 92 ..............................................................143

Switch on sequence ....................................................................................................143

Modbus/TCP communication with fieldbus adapter RETA-01 ................................................144

General........................................................................................................................144

RETA-01 - DCS800 .....................................................................................................144

Related documentation................................................................................................144

Mechanical and electrical installation ..........................................................................144

Drive configuration.......................................................................................................144

Parameter setting example using Modbus/TCP ..........................................................144

Switch on sequence ....................................................................................................146

Profibus communication with fieldbus adapter RPBA-01........................................................147

General........................................................................................................................147

RPBA-01 - DCS800.....................................................................................................147

Related documentation................................................................................................147

Overriding control configuration...................................................................................147

Mechanical and electrical installation ..........................................................................147

Drive configuration.......................................................................................................147

Parameter setting example 1 using PPO Type 1 ........................................................147

Parameter setting example 2 using PPO types 2, 4 and 5..........................................148

Communication via group 51.......................................................................................149

Communication via group 90 and group 92.................................................................150

Switch on sequence ....................................................................................................151

Data set table ..........................................................................................................................152

Adaptive Program (AP) 153

Chapter overview.........................................................................................................153

What is the Adaptive Program.....................................................................................153

Features ......................................................................................................................153

How to build the program ............................................................................................154

How to connect the Application Program with the firmware ........................................154

Block Parameter Set for block 1 ..................................................................................155

How to control the execution of the program...............................................................156

DWL AP ..................................................................................................................................157

General........................................................................................................................157

Important keys and buttons .........................................................................................157

Program modes ...........................................................................................................157

Change to Edit mode...................................................................................................157

Insert function blocks...................................................................................................158

Connect function blocks ..............................................................................................159

Set the Time level........................................................................................................161

Saving AP applications................................................................................................161

Function blocks .......................................................................................................................162

General rules ...............................................................................................................162

Block inputs .................................................................................................................162

Block input attributes ...................................................................................163

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

16

Parameter value as an integer input .......................................................... 164

How the block handles the input ................................................................ 164

How to select the input ............................................................................... 164

Constant as an integer input ...................................................................... 165

How to set and connect the input ............................................................... 165

Parameter value as a boolean input........................................................... 166

How the block handles the input ................................................................ 166

Constant as a boolean input....................................................................... 167

How to set and connect the input ............................................................... 167

String input ................................................................................................. 167

How to select the input ............................................................................... 167

Function blocks ...................................................................................................................... 168

ABS ............................................................................................................................ 168

ADD ............................................................................................................................ 169

AND ............................................................................................................................ 169

Bitwise ........................................................................................................................ 170

Bset ............................................................................................................................ 171

Compare ..................................................................................................................... 171

Count .......................................................................................................................... 172

D-Pot .......................................................................................................................... 172

Event .......................................................................................................................... 173

Filter............................................................................................................................ 173

Limit ............................................................................................................................ 174

MaskSet...................................................................................................................... 174

Max ............................................................................................................................. 175

Min .............................................................................................................................. 175

MulDiv......................................................................................................................... 175

NotUsed...................................................................................................................... 176

OR .............................................................................................................................. 176

ParRead ..................................................................................................................... 176

ParWrite...................................................................................................................... 177

PI ................................................................................................................................ 177

PI-Bal .......................................................................................................................... 178

Ramp .......................................................................................................................... 178

Sqrt ............................................................................................................................. 179

SqWav ........................................................................................................................ 179

SR............................................................................................................................... 180

Switch-B ..................................................................................................................... 180

Switch-I ....................................................................................................................... 181

TOFF .......................................................................................................................... 181

TON ............................................................................................................................ 182

Trigg ........................................................................................................................... 182

XOR ............................................................................................................................ 183

Diagram.................................................................................................................................. 184

Signal and parameter list 185

Signals and parameters ......................................................................................................... 185

Signal groups list.................................................................................................................... 185

Parameter groups list ............................................................................................................. 187

Signal and parameter list ....................................................................................................... 190

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

17

Group 1........................................................................................................................190

Physical actual values .................................................................................190

Group 2........................................................................................................................194

Speed controller signals ..............................................................................194

Group 3........................................................................................................................198

Reference actual values..............................................................................198

Group 4........................................................................................................................201

Information ..................................................................................................201

Group 5........................................................................................................................209

Analog I/O ...................................................................................................209

Group 6........................................................................................................................210

Drive logic signals .......................................................................................210

Group 7........................................................................................................................216

Control words ..............................................................................................216

Group 8........................................................................................................................222

Status / limit words ......................................................................................222

Group 9........................................................................................................................228

Fault / alarm words......................................................................................228

Group 10......................................................................................................................244

Start / stop select ........................................................................................244

Group 11......................................................................................................................257

Speed reference inputs ...............................................................................257

Group 12......................................................................................................................264

Constant speeds .........................................................................................264

Group 13......................................................................................................................265

Analog inputs ..............................................................................................265

Group 14......................................................................................................................269

Digital outputs .............................................................................................269

Group 15......................................................................................................................271

Analog outputs ............................................................................................271

Group 16......................................................................................................................273

System control inputs ..................................................................................273

Group 19......................................................................................................................276

Data storage................................................................................................276

Group 20......................................................................................................................278

Limits ...........................................................................................................278

Group 21......................................................................................................................282

Start / stop ...................................................................................................282

Group 22......................................................................................................................286

Speed ramp.................................................................................................286

Group 23......................................................................................................................289

Speed reference..........................................................................................289

Group 24......................................................................................................................294

Speed control ..............................................................................................294

Group 25......................................................................................................................299

Torque reference.........................................................................................299

Group 26......................................................................................................................300

Torque reference handling ..........................................................................300

Group 30......................................................................................................................304

Fault functions .............................................................................................304

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

18

Group 31..................................................................................................................... 315

Motor 1 temperature ................................................................................... 315

Group 34..................................................................................................................... 317

DCS800 Control Panel display ................................................................... 317

Group 40..................................................................................................................... 318

PID control.................................................................................................. 318

Group 42..................................................................................................................... 321

Brake control .............................................................................................. 321

Group 43..................................................................................................................... 327

Current control............................................................................................ 327

Group 44..................................................................................................................... 333

Field excitation ........................................................................................... 333

Group 45..................................................................................................................... 340

Field converter settings .............................................................................. 340

Group 47..................................................................................................................... 347

12-pulse operation...................................................................................... 347

Group 49..................................................................................................................... 348

Shared motion ............................................................................................ 348

Group 50..................................................................................................................... 360

Speed measurement .................................................................................. 360

Group 51..................................................................................................................... 367

Fieldbus...................................................................................................... 367

Group 52..................................................................................................................... 368

Modbus....................................................................................................... 368

Group 60, …, 69 ......................................................................................................... 369

Application program parameters ................................................................ 369

Group 70..................................................................................................................... 370

DDCS control ............................................................................................. 370

Group 71..................................................................................................................... 375

Drivebus ..................................................................................................... 375

Group 83..................................................................................................................... 375

Adaptive Program control ........................................................................... 375

Group 84..................................................................................................................... 377

Adaptive Program....................................................................................... 377

Group 85..................................................................................................................... 380

User constants ........................................................................................... 380

Group 86..................................................................................................................... 382

Adaptive Program outputs .......................................................................... 382

Group 88..................................................................................................................... 383

Internal ....................................................................................................... 383

Group 90..................................................................................................................... 385

Receiving data sets addresses 1 ............................................................... 385

Group 91..................................................................................................................... 387

Receiving data sets addresses 2 ............................................................... 387

Group 92..................................................................................................................... 388

Transmit data sets addresses 1 ................................................................. 388

Group 93..................................................................................................................... 390

Transmit data sets addresses 2 ................................................................. 390

Group 94..................................................................................................................... 391

DCSLink control ......................................................................................... 391

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

19

Group 97......................................................................................................................399

Measurement ..............................................................................................399

Group 98......................................................................................................................407

Option modules ...........................................................................................407

Group 99......................................................................................................................415

Start-up data ...............................................................................................415

DCS800 Control Panel operation 420

Chapter overview.........................................................................................................420

Start-up........................................................................................................................420

DCS800 Control Panel ................................................................................................420

Display overview..........................................................................................................421

General display features..............................................................................................421

Output mode................................................................................................................422

Other modes................................................................................................................423

Maintenance ................................................................................................................428

Fault tracing 429

Chapter overview.........................................................................................................429

General........................................................................................................................429

Fault modes ................................................................................................429

Converter protection ...............................................................................................................429

Auxiliary undervoltage .................................................................................................429

Armature overcurrent...................................................................................................429

Converter overtemperature .........................................................................................429

Auto-reclosing (mains undervoltage)...........................................................................430

Mains synchronism......................................................................................................431

Mains overvoltage .......................................................................................................431

Communication loss ....................................................................................................431

Fan, field and mains contactor acknowledge ..............................................................432

External fault................................................................................................................432

Bridge reversal ............................................................................................................433

Analog input monitor....................................................................................................433

Motor protection ......................................................................................................................435

Armature overvoltage ..................................................................................................435

Residual current detection...........................................................................................435

Measured motor temperature ......................................................................................435

Klixon...........................................................................................................................438

Motor thermal model....................................................................................................438

Field overcurrent..........................................................................................................441

Armature current ripple................................................................................................441

Speed feedback monitor..............................................................................................442

Stall protection.............................................................................................................443

Overspeed protection ..................................................................................................443

Current rise..................................................................................................................444

Field undercurrent .......................................................................................................444

Tacho / pulse encoder polarity ....................................................................................444

Tacho range ................................................................................................................444

Status messages ....................................................................................................................445

Display of status, fault and alarm signals ....................................................................445

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

20

Categories of signals and display options .................................................. 445

General messages ..................................................................................................... 446

Power-up errors (E) .................................................................................................... 446

Fault signals (F) .......................................................................................................... 447

SDCS-COM-8 messages ........................................................................... 464

Alarm signals (A) ........................................................................................................ 465

Disappearing system alarm ........................................................................................ 475

User defined alarm by Adaptive Program................................................................... 475

Notices........................................................................................................................ 477

Appendix A: Firmware structure diagrams 479

Appendix B: SDCS-CON-4 Terminal Allocation 484

485 Appendix C: Index of signals and parameters

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

21

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Chapters not yet available

22

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

23

Introduction

Chapter overview

This chapter describes the purpose, contents and the intended use of this manual.

Before You Start

The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the information necessary to control and program the drive.

Study carefully the Safety instructions at the beginning of this manual before attempting any work on or with the drive. Read through this manual before startingup the drive. The installation and commissioning instructions given in the DCS800

Hardware Manual and DCS800 Quick Guide must also be read before proceeding.

This manual describes the standard DCS800 firmware.

What this manual contains

The

Safety instructions

can be found at the beginning of this manual.

Introduction to this manual

, the chapter you are currently reading, introduces you to this manual.

Start-up

, this chapter describes the basic start-up procedure of the drive.

Firmware description

, this chapter describes how to control the drive with standard

firmware.

I/O configuration

, this chapter describes the I/O configuration of digital and analog

inputs and outputs with different hardware possibilities.

Communication

, this chapter describes the communication capabilities of the drive.

Adaptive Program (AP)

, this chapter describes the basics of the Adaptive Program and instructs how to build a program.

Signal and parameter list

, this chapter contains all signals and parameters.

DCS800 Control Panel operation

, this chapter describes the handling of the

DCS800 Control Panel.

Fault Tracing

, this chapter describes the protections and fault tracing of the drive.

Appendix A: Firmware structure diagram

Appendix B: SDCS-CON-4 Terminal Allocation

Appendix C: Index of signal and parameters

Introduction to this manual

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

24

Start-up

Chapter overview

This chapter describes the basic start-up procedure of the drive. A more detailed description of the signals and parameters involved in the procedure can be found in section

Signal and parameter list.

General

The drive can be operated:

 locally from DriveWindow, DriveWindow Light or DCS800 Control Panel

 respectively remote from local I/O or overriding control.

The following start-up procedure uses DriveWindow (for further information about

DriveWindow, consult its online help). However, parameters can also be changed with DriveWindow Light or the DCS800 Control Panel.

The start-up procedure includes actions that need only be taken when powering up the drive for the first time in a new installation (e.g. entering the motor data). After the start-up, the drive can be powered up without using these start-up functions again. The start-up procedure can be repeated later if the start-up data needs to be altered.

Refer to section

Fault tracing

in case problems should arise. In case of a major problem, disconnect mains and wait for 5 minutes before attempting any work on the drive, the motor, or the motor cables.

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

25

Start-up procedure

The

Safety Instructions

at the beginning of this manual have to be observed with extreme care during the start-up procedure!

The start-up procedure should only be carried out by a qualified electrician.

Check the mechanical and electrical installation the drive according to the DCS800

Hardware Manual.

Tools

For drive commissioning following software tools are mandatory:

 DriveWindow Light including commissioning wizard and DWL AP for

Adaptive Program

and

 DriveWindow for fast drive monitoring using SDCS-COM-8.

For drive commissioning following tools are mandatory in addition to standard tools:

 An oscilloscope including memory function with either galvanically isolating transformer or isolating amplifier for safe measurements.

 A clamp on current probe. In case the scaling of the DC load current needs to be checked it must be a DC clamp on current probe.

 A voltmeter.

Make sure that all equipment in use is suitable for the voltage level applied to the power part!

Checking with the power switched off

Check the settings of:

 the main breaker (e.g. overcurrent = 1.6 * I n

, short circuit current = 10 * I n

, time for thermal tripping = 10 s),

 time, overcurrent, thermal and voltage relays,

 the earth fault protection (e.g. Bender relay)

Check the insulation of the mains voltage cables or busbars between the secondary side of the dedicated transformer and the drive:

 disconnect the dedicated transformer from its incoming voltage,

 check that all circuits between the mains and the drive (e.g. control / auxiliary voltage) are disconnected,

 measure the insulation resistance between L1 - L2, L1 - L3, L2 - L3, L1 -

PE, L2 - PE, L3 - PE,

 the result should be Ms

Check the installation:

 crosscheck the wiring with the drawings,

 check the mechanical mounting of the motor and pulse encoder or analog tacho,

 make sure that the motor is connected in a correct way (armature, field, serial windings, cable shields),

 check the connections of the motor fan if existing,

 make sure that the converter fan is connected correctly especially in modules size D6 and D7 were star or delta connection is possible,

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

26

 if a pulse encoder is used make sure that pulse encoder's auxiliary voltage connection corresponds to its voltage and that the channel connection corresponds to correct direction of rotation,

 check that the shielding of the pulse encoder's cable is connected to the TE bar of the DCS800,

 if an analog tacho is used make sure that it is connected to the proper voltage input at the SDCS-CON-4:

X3:1 - X3:4 (90 - 270 V)

X3:2 - X3:4 (30 - 90 V)

X3:3 - X3:4 (8 - 30 V)

 for all other cables make sure that both ends of the cables are connected and they do not cause any damage or danger when power is being switched on

Measuring the insulation resistance of the motor cables and the motor:

 isolate the motor cables from the drive before testing the insulation resistance or voltage withstand of the cables or the motor,

Start-up

Instructions how to measure the insulation resistance

 measure the insulation resistance between:

1. + cables and PE,

2. - cables and PE,

3. armature cables and field cables,

4. field - cable and PE,

5. field + cable and PE,

 the result should be Ms

Setting of Jumpers:

The boards of the DCS800 include jumpers to adapt the boards to different applications. The position of the jumpers must be checked before connecting voltage. For specific jumper settings consult the DCS800 Hardware Manual.

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Check following items for each drive and mark the differences in the delivery documents:

 motor, analog tacho or pulse encoder and cooling fan rating plates data,

 direction of motor rotation,

 maximum and minimum speed and if fixed speeds are used,

 speed scaling factors: e.g. gear ratio, roll diameter,

 acceleration and deceleration times,

 operating modes: e.g. stop mode, E-stop mode,

 the amount of motors connected

Checking with the power switched on

There is dangerous voltage inside the cabinet!

Switching the power on:

 prior to connecting the voltage proceed as follows:

1. ensure that all the cable connections are checked and that the connections can't cause any danger,

2. close all doors of enclosed converter before switching power on,

3. be ready to trip the supply transformer if anything abnormal occurs,

4. switch the power on

Measurements made with power on:

 check the operation of the auxiliary equipment,

 check the circuits for external interfaces on site:

1. E-stop circuit,

2. remote control of the main breaker,

3. signals connected to the control system,

4. other signals which remain to be checked

Connecting voltage to the drive:

 check from the delivery diagrams the type of boards and converters which are used in the system,

 check all time relay and breaker settings,

 close the supply disconnecting device (check the connection from the delivery diagrams),

 close all protection switches one at a time and measure for proper voltage

27

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

28

Commissioning a DCS800

Nominal values of the converter can be found in group 4, check following signals:

ConvNomVolt (4.04), nominal AC converter voltage in V read from

TypeCode (97.01) or S ConvScaleVolt (97.03),

ConvNomCur (4.05), nominal converter DC current in A read from

TypeCode (97.01) or S ConvScaleCur (97.02),

ConvType (4.14), recognized converter type read from TypeCode (97.01),

QuadrantType (4.15), recognized converter quadrant type read from

TypeCode (97.01) or S BlockBrdg2 (97.07),

MaxBridgeTemp (4.17), maximum bridge temperature in degree centigrade read from TypeCode (97.01) or S MaxBrdgTemp (97.04)

If signals are not correct adapt them, see group 97 in this manual.

Connect DCS800 to PC with DriveWindow Light

 Connect a normal serial cable from the PC COM port to X34 on the drive:

 Start DriveWindow Light and check the communication settings:

Start-up

Example with COM1.

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

29

Commissioning a DCS800 with the wizard

To launch the commissioning wizard start DriveWindow Light and press the Wizard button:

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Start-up

30

Commissioning a DCS800 with DriveWindow

Requirements

1. Before starting with the commissioning, connect the drive (via Ch3 on

SDCS-COM-8) with DriveWindow (via e.g. NDPA-02 and NDPC-12). All workspaces are ‘online’ workspaces, thus use Ch3 NodeAddr (70.22) = 1.

2. The preconfigured workspaces are available from Your local ABB agent or can be found - after the DCS800 CD (tools CD) is installed - under:

Location of workspaces

01, 02 Macro assistant / Name plate data

1. Open the workspace 01, 02 DCS800 Name plate data & macro

assistant.dww

1

.

2. Set all parameters to default by means of ApplMacro (99.08) = Factory and

ApplRestore (99.07) = Yes. Check with MacroSel (8.10).

3. Enter the motor data, the mains (supply) data and the most important protections [M1SpeedMin (20.01), M1SpeedMax (20.02), ArmOvrCurLev

(30.09), M1OvrSpeed (30.16), Language (99.01), M1NomVolt (99.02),

M1NomCur (99.03), M1BaseSpeed (99.04), NomMainsVolt (99.10) and

M1NomFldCur (99.11)].

4. After filling out the parameters it is - in most cases - possible to turn the motor for the first time.

5. Select an application macro by means of ApplMacro (99.08) = <macro> and ApplRestore (99.07) = Yes. Check with MacroSel (8.10).

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

31

03 Autotuning field current controller

1. Open the workspace 03 DCS800 Autotuning field current controller.dww

1

.

2. Enter the field circuit data [FldCtrlMode (44.01), M1NomFldCur (99.11) and

M1UsedFexType (99.12)].

3. Switch the drive to local mode (DriveWindow, DCS800 Control Panel or local I/O).

4. Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode (99.06) = FieldCurAuto and set On within 20 s.

5. During the autotuning the main respectively field contactor will be closed, the field circuit is measured by means of increasing the field current to nominal field current and the field current control parameters are set. The armature current is not released while the autotuning is active and thus the motor should not turn.

6. When the autotuning is finished successfully, check M1KpFex (44.02),

M1TiFex (44.03) and M1PosLimCtrl (45.02) - parameters set by the

autotuning - for confirmation.

7. If the autotuning fails A121 AutotuneFail is set. For more details check

Diagnosis (9.11) and repeat the autotuning.

04 Autotuning armature current controller

1. Open the workspace 04 DCS800 Autotuning armature current

controller.dww

1

.

2. Enter the basic current limitations and the motor nominal current [TorqMax

(20.05), TorqMin (20.06), M1CurLimBrdg1 (20.12), M1CurLimBrdg2 (20.13)

and M1NomCur (99.03)].

Attention:

Do not change the default values of M1ArmL (43.09) and M1ArmR (43.10)!

Changing them will falsify the results of the autotuning.

3. Switch the drive to local mode (DriveWindow, DCS800 Control Panel or local I/O).

4. Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode (99.06) = ArmCurAuto and set On and Run within 20 s.

5. During the autotuning the main contactor will be closed, the armature circuit is measured by means of armature current bursts and the armature current control parameters are set. The field current is not released while the autotuning is active and thus the motor should not turn, but due to remanence in the field circuit about 40% of all motors will turn (create torque). These motors have to be locked.

6. When the autotuning is finished successfully, check M1KpArmCur (43.06),

M1TiArmCur (43.07), M1DiscontCurLim (43.08), M1ArmL (43.09) and

M1ArmR (43.10) - parameters set by the autotuning - for confirmation.

7. If the autotuning fails A121 AutotuneFail is set. For more details check

Diagnosis (9.11) and repeat the autotuning.

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

32

05 Speed feedback assistant

1. Open the workspace 05 DCS800 Speed feedback assistant.dww

1

.

2. Enter the EMF speed feedback parameters and - if applicable - the parameters for pulse encoder 1, pulse encoder 2 or the analog tacho

[M1SpeedMin (20.01), M1SpeedMax (20.02), M1EncMeasMode (50.02),

M1SpeedFbSel (50.03), M1EncPulseNo (50.04), M1TachoVolt1000

(50.13), M1NomVolt (99.02) and M1BaseSpeed (99.04)].

3. Switch the drive to local mode (DriveWindow, DCS800 Control Panel or local I/O).

4. Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode (99.06) = SpdFbAssist and set On and Run within 20 s.

5. The speed feedback assistant detects the kind of speed feedback - EMF, pulse encoder 1, pulse encoder 2 or analog tacho - the drive is using.

6. During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor - if existing

- will be closed and the motor will run up to base speed [M1BaseSpeed

(99.04)]. During the whole procedure the drive will be in EMF speed control

despite the setting of M1SpeedFbSel (50.03).

7. When the autotuning is finished successfully, check M1SpeedFbSel (50.03)

- parameter set by the autotuning - for confirmation.

8. If the autotuning fails A121 AutotuneFail is set. For more details check

Diagnosis (9.11) and repeat the autotuning.

Analog tacho fine tune procedure

1. In case an analog tacho is detected [M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) = Tacho] it is recommended to fine tune the analog tacho.

2. Switch the drive to local mode (DriveWindow, DCS800 Control Panel or local I/O).

3. Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode (99.06) = TachFineTune and set On and Run within 20 s.

4. Measure the motor speed with a hand held tacho and write the value into

M1TachoAdjust (50.12).

5. Check SpeedActTach (1.05) against SpeedRef4 (2.18).

6. Stop the autotuning by removing Run and On via the DriveWindow control panel.

06 Autotuning speed controller

1. Open the workspace 06 DCS800 Autotuning speed controller.dww

1

.

2. Enter the basic speed, torque and current limits, the speed filter times and the motor base speed [M1SpeedMin (20.01), M1SpeedMax (20.02),

TorqMax (20.05), TorqMin (20.06), M1CurLimBrdg1 (20.12),

M1CurLimBrdg2 (20.13), SpeedErrFilt (23.06), SpeedErrFilt2 (23.11),

SpeedFiltTime (50.06) and M1BaseSpeed (99.04)].

Attention:

For better results set the filters, especially when using EMF speed feedback.

3. Switch the drive to local mode (DriveWindow, DCS800 Control Panel or local I/O).

4. Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode (99.06) = SpdCtrlAuto and set On and Run within 20 s.

5. During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor - if existing

- will be closed, the ramp is bypassed and torque respectively current limits

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

33

are valid. The speed controller is tuned by means of speed bursts up to base speed [M1BaseSpeed (99.04)] and the speed controller parameters are set.

Attention:

During the autotuning the torque and/or current limits will be reached.

6. When the autotuning is finished successfully, check KpS (24.03) and TiS

(24.09) - parameters set by the autotuning - for confirmation.

7. If the autotuning fails A121 AutotuneFail is set. For more details check

Diagnosis (9.11) and repeat the autotuning.

Attention:

The assistant is using the setting of M1SpeedFbSel (50.03). If using setting

Encoder, Encoder2 or Tacho make sure the speed feedback is working properly!

07 Field weakening assistant

1. Open the workspace 07 DCS800 Field weakening assistant.dww

1

.

2. Enter the motor data and the field circuit data [M1SpeedMin (20.01),

M1SpeedMax (20.02), M1FldMinTrip (30.12), FldCtrlMode (44.01),

M1NomVolt (99.02), M1BaseSpeed (99.04) and M1NomFldCur (99.11)].

3. Switch the drive to local mode (DriveWindow, DCS800 Control Panel or local I/O).

4. Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode (99.06) = EMF FluxAuto and set On and Run via within 20 s.

5. During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor - if existing

- will be closed and the motor will run up to base speed [M1BaseSpeed

(99.04)]. The EMF controller data are calculated, the flux linearization is

tuned by means of a constant speed while decreasing the field current and the EMF controller respectively flux linearization parameters are set.

6. When the autotuning is finished successfully, check KpEMF (44.09), TiEMF

(44.10), FldCurFlux40 (44.12), FldCurFlux70 (44.13) and FldCurFlux90

(44.14) - parameters set by the autotuning - for confirmation.

7. If the autotuning fails A121 AutotuneFail is set. For more details check

Diagnosis (9.11) and repeat the autotuning.

1

: before opening the workspaces, the drive has to be connected to DriveWindow

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Start-up

34

Manual tuning

I/O configuration

To set the in- and outputs see chapter

I/O configuration .

Field current controller

Manual tuning of the field current controller:

 connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode,

 monitor Mot1FldCurRef (1.29) and FldCurRefM1 (3.30),

 set M1FldMinTrip (30.12) = 0 %,

 set M1FldRefMode (45.05) = M1FldRefExt,

 give On via DriveWindow,

 use M1FldRefExt (45.06) to step the field current controller,

 tune the field current controller by means of M1KpFex (44.02) and M1TiFex

(44.03),

o

steps size: about 2 % - 5 % of nominal field current (do not hit any limits during the step and the step response, e.g. max. field current,

or supply voltage), o

step response time: 50 ms - 60 ms (count only from 10 % to 90 %), o

where to step: 30 %, 60 % and 80 % of nominal field current, step reference optimal curve p-part too low p-part too high i-part too short

Field current controller step responses

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

35

DriveWindow manual tuning field current controller

 set M1FldRefExt (45.06) = 0 %,

 remove On via DriveWindow,

 set M1FldMinTrip (30.12) and M1FldRefMode (45.05) back to their original settings

Armature current controller

To keep a PI-controller as fast as possible idealistically the integral part should

Control principle

stay at zero. The worst case is that the integral part is running into the limits and thus needs a long time to recover. To prevent this and to achieve an integral part as small as possible two feed forwards are used for the current controller:

1. During discontinuous current the signal from the current controller is boosted by means of the discontinuous current adaptation, depending on discontinuous current limit, current reference and EMF. The discontinuous current limit has to be determent during the commissioning.

2. Additionally the EMF itself is used as feed forward. Unfortunately it is not possible to measure the EMF directly. It has to be calculated by means of following formula:

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

36

EMF

U

A

(

R

A

*

I

A

L

A

*

dI

A dt

)

The values for the resistance (R

A

) and the inductance (L

A

) of the motor have to be determent during the commissioning.

Manual tuning

M

I ref

I

A

_

R

A

* I

A

+ L

A

* dI

A

/ dt

Voltage measurement

_

U

A

EMF

Current controller p-part i-part

+

EMF

Discontinuous current adaptation

Discontinuous current limit

Control principle armature current controller

Thus the manual tuning of the armature current controller has to be splitted into three parts:

1. determine resistance and inductance of the motor,

2. determine discontinuous current limit of the motor,

3. manual tuning of the armature current controller (p- and i-part)

Run On

DriveWindow information

Signal

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

37

Part 1, determine resistance and inductance of the motor:

 connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode,

 monitor EMF VoltActRel (1.17) and CurRefUsed (3.12),

 set CurSel (43.02) = CurRefExt,

 set M1KpArmCur (43.06), M1TiArmCur (46.07), M1DiscontCurLim (46.08),

M1ArmL (43.09) and M1ArmR (46.10) to default,

 set M1UsedFexType (99.12) = NotUsed,

 give On and Run via DriveWindow,

 use DriveWindow to step the armature current controller and watch the

EMF,

 make sure the motor is not turning (Attention: let the drive run only for a short time),

Before tuning of M1ArmL (43.09) and M1ArmR (46.10)

 tune M1ArmR (46.10) until the EMF is as close as possible to zero and dose not change it’s value during the current step,

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

38

After tuning of M1ArmR (46.10)

 It is not possible to tune M1ArmL (43.09) manually.

Thus set M1ArmL (43.09) = 0!

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

39

 remove On and Run via DriveWindow,

 set CurSel (43.02) and M1UsedFexType (99.12) back to their original settings

Part 2, determine discontinuous current limit of the motor:

 connect an oscilloscope to the fixed AO I-act (X4:9 / 10 on the SDCS-CON-

4 or X4:5 / 6 on the SDCS-IOB-3),

 connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode,

 set CurSel (43.02) = CurRefExt,

 set M1DiscontCurLim (46.08) to default,

 set M1UsedFexType (99.12) = NotUsed,

 give On and Run via DriveWindow,

 use DriveWindow to increase the armature current reference,

 make sure the motor is not turning (Attention: let the drive run only for a short time),

 watch the current bubbles and increase the current reference until the current is continuous,

I

Actual current waveform

Discontinuous current

Current is discontinuous t

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Start-up

40

I

Actual current waveform

Current is continuous t

Continuous current

 remove On and Run via DriveWindow,

 set CurSel (43.02) and M1UsedFexType (99.12) back to their original settings,

 copy the current reference used in DriveWindow and paste it into

M1DiscontCurLim (46.08)

Part 3, manual tuning of the armature current controller:

 connect an oscilloscope to the fixed AO I-act (X4:9 / 10 on the SDCS-CON-

4 or X4:5 / 6 on the SDCS-IOB-3),

 connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode,

 set CurSel (43.02) = CurRefExt,

 set M1UsedFexType (99.12) = NotUsed,

 give On and Run via DriveWindow,

 use DriveWindow to step the armature current controller,

 make sure the motor is not turning (Attention: let the drive run only for a short time),

 tune the armature current controller by means of M1KpArmCur (43.06) and

M1TiArmCur (46.07),

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

I optimal t

I p-part too high t

I i-part too short t

I i-part too long t

I p-part too low and i-part too long t

Armature current controller step responses

 remove On and Run via DriveWindow,

 set CurSel (43.02) and M1UsedFexType (99.12) back to their original settings

Analog tacho

In case an analog tacho is used for speed feedback it has to be tuned.

Speed reference

DriveWindow information

Run On

41

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

42

Manual tuning

Manual tuning of the analog tacho:

 set speed and analog tacho parameters, o

M1SpeedMin (20.01), o

M1SpeedMax (20.02), o

M1OvrSpeed (30.16), o

M1BaseSpeed (99.04) and o

tacho voltage at 1000 rpm with M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13),

 the maximum tacho speed is calculated automatically and shown in

M1TachoMaxSpeed (88.25),

 the needed tacho connection is calculated automatically and shown in

TachoTerminal (4.25),

Speed controller

When tuning the drive, change one parameter at a time, then monitor the effect on

Basics

the step response and possible oscillations. The effect of each parameter change must be checked over a wide speed range and not just at one point. The set speed controller values mainly depend on:

 the relationship between the motor power and the attached masses,

 backlashes and natural frequencies of the attached mechanics (filtering)

The step response tests must be carried out at different speeds, from minimum up to maximum speed, at several different points. The whole speed range must also be tested carefully, e.g. at 25 % - 30 % of maximum speed (step has to be in base

Start-up

Analog tacho connections

 check the tacho connections and change them accordingly,

 set M1TachoTune (88.27) = 1.000 (default),

 make sure that the drive is in EMF control - M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) =

EMF,

 give On and Run via DriveWindow,

 use DriveWindow to set a constant speed reference,

 measure speed actual at the motor shaft using a hand held tacho,

 rescale M1TachoTune (88.27) in small steps, e.g. +/- 0.005 until the speed actual measured at the shaft and the speed actual measured with the analog tacho match, see SpeedActTach (1.05),

 remove On and Run via DriveWindow

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

speed range) and 80 % of maximum speed (step has to be in field weakening area) in order to find any oscillation points.

A suitable speed step is about 2 % of maximum speed. A too large step reference or incorrect values of the speed controller might force the drives into torque / current limits, damage the mechanical parts (e.g. gear boxes) or cause tripping of the drive.

43

Manual tuning

Speed reference

DriveWindow information

Run On

Manual tuning of the speed controller:

 connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode,

 monitor MotSpeed (1.04) and SpeedRef4 (2.18),

 give On and Run via DriveWindow,

 use DriveWindow to set a constant speed reference,

 use SpeedCorr (23.04) to step the speed controller,

 tune the speed controller by means of KpS (24.03) and TiS (24.09), o

steps size: 2 % of maximum speed (do not hit any limits during the step and the step response, e.g. torque or current limits), o

disable the i-part by setting TiS (24.09) = 0 ms, o

increase KpS (24.03) until the step response shows an overshoot, o

decrease KpS (24.03) about 30 %, o

adjust TiS (24.09) in such a way, that there is no overshoot or only a slight overshoot, depending on the application (the function of the ipart is to reduce as quickly as possible the difference between speed reference and speed actual), o

step response time: 100 ms (count only from 10 % to 90 %) in cold mills and 60 ms in rod and bar mills, o

where to step: 25 % - 30 % of maximum speed (step has to be in base speed range) and 80 % of maximum speed (step has to be in field weakening area), o

filter time •n: e.g. 5 ms - 10 ms [see SpeedErrFilt (23.06) and

SpeedErrFilt2 (23.11)] or

o

filter time speed actual: e.g. 5 ms - 10 ms [see SpeedFiltTime

(50.06)],

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

44

n

A B C D E t

A: undercompensated, p-part too small and i-part too short

B: undercompensated, p-part too small

C: normal

D: normal, when a low impact speed drop is required

E: overcompensated, p-part too large and i-part too short

Speed controller step responses

Start-up

DriveWindow manual tuning speed controller

 set SpeedCorr (23.04) = 0 %,

 remove On and Run via DriveWindow

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

45

EMF controller

Basics

In case the motor needs to be used in the field weakening area the EMF controller has to be tuned. The EMF controller needs to have a quick response. Usually 2 to

3 times slower than the field current controller.

The tuning has to be done in the field weakening area, because the EMF controller is blocked in the base speed range.

EMF 5 % step

EMF ref n

Field weakening point

EMF reference for manual tuning EMF controller

Manual tuning

Speed reference

DriveWindow information

Run On

Manual tuning of the EMF controller:

 connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode,

 monitor EMF VoltActRel (1.17) and VoltRef2 (3.26),

 set FldCtrlMode (44.01) = EMF,

 set EMF CtrlPosLim (44.07) = 100 %,

 set EMF CtrlNegLim (44.08) = -100 %,

 give On and Run via DriveWindow,

 use DriveWindow to set a constant speed reference in the field weakening area,

 use VoltCorr (44.25) to step the EMF controller,

 tune the EMF controller by means of KpEMF (44.09) and TiEMF (44.10), o

steps size: 2 % - 5 % (do not hit any limits during the step and the step response), o

step response time: 2 - 3 times slower than the field current controller, o

where to step: in the field weakening area,

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

46

step reference i-part too long optimal curve p-part too high

EMF controller step responses

Start-up

DriveWindow manual tuning EMF controller

 set VoltCorr (44.25) = 0 %,

 remove On and Run via DriveWindow.

 set FldCtrlMode (44.01), EMF CtrlPosLim (44.07) and EMF CtrlNegLim

(44.08) back to their original settings

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

47

Flux linearization

Basics

In case the motor needs to be used in the field weakening area the flux linearization has to be set. The flux linearization is needed because of the nonlinear relation of flux and field current due to saturation effects of the field winding.

Flux

Flux linearization

90%

70%

40%

P4412 P4413 P4414

Field current

Flux of DC-motor versus field current

The magnetization of the motor starts to saturate at a certain field current and thus the flux does not increase linearly. For this reason the field current cannot be directly used to calculate the flux inside the motor.

In base speed area EMF and speed are directly proportional because the flux is kept constant:

Example:

If the nominal armature voltage is 440 V and the motor is running at half speed with full flux, then the armature voltage is about 220 V. Now the flux is reduced to

50 % at constant speed, then the armature voltage drops to about 110 V.

Since the EMF is directly proportional to the flux it is possible to define a relationship between the field current and the flux by means of measuring the armature voltage without load (= EMF).

Thus the main idea of the flux linearization is to find field currents which produces desired EMF-voltage at a certain speed. The flux linearization is done by means of a function block defined by 3 values:

 field current at 40 % flux, FldCurFlux40 (44.12),

 field current at 70 % flux, FldCurFlux70 (44.13),

 field current at 90 % flux, FldCurFlux90 (44.14)

The intermediate values are interpolated. During commissioning all 3 parameters must be set, if the flux linearization is needed.

Speed reference

DriveWindow information

Run On

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

48

Manual tuning

Manual tuning of the flux linearization:

 connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode,

 make sure the speed feedback device is either encoder or analog tacho -

M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) = Encoder or Tacho - and not EMF!

 monitor MotSpeed (1.04), ArmVoltAct (1.14) and Mot1FldCurRel (1.29),

 set M1FldMinTrip (30.12) = 10 %,

 set FldCtrlMode (44.01) = EMF,

 set EMF CtrlPosLim (44.07) = 0 %,

 set EMF CtrlNegLim (44.08) = 0 %,

 set FldCurFlux40 (44.12), FldCurFlux70 (44.13) and FldCurFlux90 (44.14) to default,

 give On and Run via DriveWindow,

 use DriveWindow to run the motor at e.g. half base speed,

 make sure, that the motor is running without load,

 read ArmVoltAct (1.14), e.g. the measured value is 220 V,

 reduce the flux with FluxCorr (44.27) until ArmVoltAct (1.14) reaches 90 % of the 1 st

measurement,

 read the value of Mot1FldCurRel (1.29), keep it in mind and write it into

FldCurFlux90 (44.14) after this procedure is finished,

 reduce the flux with FluxCorr (44.27) until ArmVoltAct (1.14) reaches 70 % of the 1 st

measurement,

 read the value of Mot1FldCurRel (1.29), keep it in mind and write it into

FldCurFlux70 (44.13) after this procedure is finished,

 reduce the flux with FluxCorr (44.27) until ArmVoltAct (1.14) reaches 40 % of the 1 st

measurement,

 read the value of Mot1FldCurRel (1.29), keep it in mind and write it into

FldCurFlux40 (44.12) after this procedure is finished,

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

49

DriveWindow manual tuning flux linearization

 set FluxCorr (44.27) = 0 %,

 remove On and Run via DriveWindow,

 set FldCurFlux90 (44.14), FldCurFlux70 (44.13) and FldCurFlux40 (44.12) to the determined values,

 set M1FldMinTrip (30.12), FldCtrlMode (44.01), EMF CtrlPosLim (44.07) and EMF CtrlNegLim (44.08) back to their original settings

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

50

Thyristor diagnosis

Basics

Thyristor diagnosis basically provides two possibilities:

1. check all thyristors of the drive for proper function or

2. check individual firing pulses

Check all thyristors

Speed reference

DriveWindow information

Run On

Thyristor diagnosis for all thyristors:

 connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode,

 set ServiceMode (99.06 ) = ThyDiagnosis,

 set TestFire (97.28) = Off,

 give On and Run via DriveWindow,

Check individual firing pulses

The main contactor is closed and the thyristor diagnosis is started. After the thyristor diagnosis is finished:

 the result is written into Diagnosis (9.11),

 the ServiceMode (99.06) is automatically set back to NormalMode and

 the drive is automatically switched off.

Check individual firing pulses:

 make sure, that the main contactor cannot close (e.g. disconnect the digital output controlling the main contactor) or that the mains voltage is off (e.g. high voltage breaker is open),

 connect a current clamp to one of the firing pulse cables,

 connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode,

 set ServiceMode (99.06 ) = ThyDiagnosis,

 set TestFire (97.28) = V11, …, V26 depending individual firing pulse to be checked,

Start-up

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

C1 (+)

V11

F11

V24 V13

F13

V26 V15

F15

V22

branching fuse

U1

V1

W1

F14 F16 F12

V14 V21 V16 V23 V12 V25

branch

D1 (-)

principle_B6_a.dsf

 give On and Run via DriveWindow, the main contactor should not pick up,

 make sure, that the mains voltage is zero,

 check the firing pulse with the current clamp,

 remove On and Run via DriveWindow,

 set ServiceMode (99.06 ) back to NormalMode,

TestFire (97.28) is automatically set back to Off.

51

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Start-up

52

Firmware description

Chapter overview

This chapter describes how to control the drive with standard firmware.

Identification of the firmware versions

The DCS800 is controlled by the SCDS-CON-4. The firmware version and type can be checked from:

FirmwareVer (4.01) and

FirmwareType (4.02)

The DDCS communication is handled by the SDCS-COM-8. The firmware revision can be checked from:

Com8SwVersion (4.11)

The firmware revisions of the field exciters can be checked from:

Mot1FexSwVer (4.08) and

Mot2FexSwVer (4.09)

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

53

Start / stop sequences

General

The drive is controlled by control words [MainCtrlWord (7.01) or UsedMCW (7.04)].

The MainStatWord (8.01) provides the hand shake and interlocking for the overriding control.

The overriding control uses the MainCtrlWord (7.01) or hardware signals to command the drive. The actual status of the drive is displayed in the MainStatWord

(8.01).

The marks (e.g.

) describe the order of the commands according to Profibus standard. The overriding control can be:

 AC 800M via DDCS communication,

 serial communication (e.g. Profibus),

 hardware signals - see CommandSel (10.01) = Local I/O,

 master-follower communication,

 Adaptive Program or

 application program.

Switch on sequence

Dec.

Hex.

Bit

Reset

Off (before On)

On (main cont. On)

Run (with reference)

E-Stop

Start inhibit

15 ... 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

1 x x 1 x x x x x x x

1270 04F6

1 0 0 0 x x x 0 1 1 0

1142 0476

1 0 0 0 x x x 0 1 1 1

1143 0477

1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1151 047F

1 x x x 1 1 1 1 0 1 1

1147 047B

1 x x x x x x x x 0 x

1140 0474

Examples for the MainCtrlWord (7.01)

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Firmware description

54

Start the drive

The start sequence given below is only valid for MainContCtrlMode (21.16) = On.

Attention:

All signals have to be maintained. On- and Run [MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 0 and 1] commands are only taken over with their rising edges.

Overriding Control

MainCtrlWord (7.01)

Drive

MainStatWord (8.01)

When the drive is ready to close the main contactor RdyOn state is set

 

RdyOn = 1; (bit 0)

The overriding control commands

On

On = 1; (bit 0)

The drive closes the main contactor, the field contactor and the contactors for converter and motor fans. After the mains voltage and all acknowledges are checked and the field current is established, the drive sets state RdyRun.

 

RdyRun = 1; (bit 1)

The overriding control commands

Run

Run = 1; (bit 3)

The drive releases the ramp, all references, all controllers and sets state RdyRef

 

RdyRef = 1; (bit 2)

Now the drive follows the speed or torque references

Note:

To give On and Run at the same time set OnOff1 (10.15) = StartStop (10.16).

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Stop the drive

The drive can be stopped in two ways, either by taking away the On command directly which opens all contactors as fast as possible after stopping the drive according to Off1Mode (21.02) or by means of the following sequence:

Overriding Control Drive

MainCtrlWord (7.01) MainStatWord (8.01)

The overriding control removes Run

Run = 0; (bit 3)

In speed control mode, the drive stops according to StopMode

(21.03).

In torque control mode, the torque reference is reduced to zero according to TorqRefA FTC (25.02) respectively TorqRampDown

(25.06), depending on the used

torque reference channel (A or B).

When zero speed or zero torque is reached the state RdyRef is removed.

 

RdyRef = 0; (bit 2)

The overriding control can keep the

On command if the drive has to be started up again

The overriding control removes On

On = 0; (bit 0)

All contactors are opened - the fan contactors stay in according to

FanDly (21.14) - and the state

RdyRun is removed

 

RdyRun = 0; (bit 1)

Besides in MainStatWord (8.01), the drive’s state is shown in DriveStat (8.08).

55

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Firmware description

56

START (On, Run) STOP (Run is taken away)

AuxSupplyOn

FieldCurrent

6

Torque

SpeedRefUsed (2.17)

SpeedLev (50.10)

ZeroSpeedLim (20.03)

On (Off1N)

MCW (7.01) Bit:

0

Off2N 1

Off3N

Run

RampOutZero

2

3

4

RampHold

RampInZero

Reset

Inching1

Inching2

RemoteCmd

8

9

10

5

6

7

MSW (8.01) Bit:

RdyOn

RdyRun

RdyRef

Tripped

Off2NStatus

Off3NStatus

0

OnInhibited

Alarm

AtSetpoint

Remote

AboveLimit

3

4

1

2

9

10

7

8

5

6

2

1

3

4

ZeroSpeed

(8.02) Bit 11

BrakeCmd

(8.02) Bit 8

Speed ramp output clamped

CmdFansOn

(6.03) Bit 0

CmdMainContactorOn

(6.03) Bit 7

M1BrakeDly

(42.03)

8

5 Behaviour depends on Off1Mode (21.02) and StopMode (21.03)

6 Behaviour depends on FldHeatSel (21.18) and M1FldMinTrip (30.12)

7 Behaviour depends on FanDly (21.14)

8 Behaviour depends on M1BrakeCtrl (42.01)

Start stop seq.dsf

100%

0%

0%

5

Motor speed

5

5

5

5

5

M1BrakeCloseDly (42.04)

7

0

0

0

1

0 rpm

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

1

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

57

START (On, Run) ESTOP (E-Stop (7.01, Bit:2) wurde gedrückt)

Hilfsspannung ein

Feldstrom

6

Drehmoment

SpeedRefUsed (2.17)

SpeedLev (50.10)

ZeroSpeedLim (20.03)

On (Off1N)

MCW (7.01) Bit:

0

Off2N

Off3N

Run

RampOutZero

RampHold

RampInZero

Reset

Inching1

Inching2

RemoteCmd

MSW (8.01) Bit:

RdyOn

RdyRun

RdyRef

Tripped

Off2NStatus

0

Off3NStatus

OnInhibited

Alarm

AtSetpoint

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Remote

AboveLimit

8

9

10

9

10

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

2

1

3

4

ZeroSpeed

BrakeCmd

(8.02) Bit 11

(8.02) Bit 8

Drehzahlrampenausgang clamped

CmdFansOn

(6.03) Bit 0

CmdMainContactorOn

(6.03) Bit 7

M1BrakeDly

(42.03)

8

5 Verhalten abhängig von Off1Mode (21.02) und StopMode (21.03)

6 Verhalten abhängig von FldHeatSel (21.18) und M1FldMinTrip (30.12)

7 Verhalten abhängig von FanDly (21.14)

8 Verhalten abhängig von BrakeEStopMode (42.09)

9 Verhalten abhängig von EStopMode (21.04)

Nicht relevant

100%

0%

0%

Motordrehzahl

9

9

9

9

9

9

M1BrakeCloseDly (42.04)

0

1

7

0

0

0 U/min

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

1

Start stop seq_b.dsf

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

58

Field excitation

General

Depending on the application the DCS800 has the capability to use several different kinds of field exciters or combinations of them. The differences of the field exciters and their functions are explained here.

Field Reversal

Changing the field current direction is needed when the armature converter has only one bridge (2-quadrant). Field reversal is changing the direction of the field current. Thus the direction of the speed is changing and it is possible to regenerate energy back into the mains. For example to decelerate a large inertia.

To initiate the field reversal the sign of TorqRefUsed (2.13) is taken and defines the desired direction of the field current. Armature converters with two anti-parallel bridges (4-quadrant) do not require field reversal.

Field control

Overview field reversal and optitorque

Field reversal is activated by means of FldCtrlMode (44.01):

Mode Functionality Armature converter

2-Q or 4-Q Fix

EMF

Fix/Rev

constant field (no field weakening), EMF controller blocked, field reversal blocked, optitorque blocked, default field weakening active, EMF controller released, field reversal blocked, optitorque blocked constant field (no field weakening), EMF controller blocked, field reversal active, optitorque blocked field weakening active, EMF controller released,

2-Q or 4-Q

2-Q

EMF/Rev

2-Q

Fix/Opti

field reversal active, optitorque blocked constant field (no field weakening), EMF controller blocked, field reversal blocked, optitorque active

2-Q or 4-Q

EMF/Opti

field weakening active, EMF controller released, 2-Q or 4-Q field reversal blocked, optitorque active

Fix/Rev/Opti

constant field (no field weakening), EMF controller 2-Q

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Field reference hysteresis

59

blocked, field reversal active, optitorque active

EMF/Rev/Opti field weakening active, EMF controller released,

field reversal active, optitorque active

2-Q

To prevent field reversal from continuous toggling due to a too small torque reference, a torque reference hysteresis is available. The hysteresis is symmetrical and is set by FldRefHyst (45.10):

TorqRefUsed (2.13)

FldRefHyst (45.10)

Force field current direction

Reversal time

Bumpless transition

Field reference hysteresis

With ForceFldDir (45.07) it is possible to force and clamp the field current direction.

This gives the user the possibility to control the field current direction or change it in case of need. Thus unnecessary field current changes at low torque are prevented and it is also possible to release field reversal for certain occasions, e.g. jogging or E-stop.

The physical reversal time can be reduced by increasing the input voltage of the field exciter and using Optitorque.

Please note that the output voltage of the field exciter is limited by means of

M1PosLimCtrl (45.02) or M2PosLimCtrl (45.16). This can also increase the

physical reversal time.

The output of the speed ramp is updated by means of the actual speed to ensure a bumpless transition, if RevDly (43.14) is greater than 25 ms and RevMode (43.16)

= Soft.

Optitorque

Field current reference gain

Due to high inductances of motors, the field reversal takes a relatively long time. In certain cases this time can be reduced by means of optitorque - see FldCtrlMode

(44.01). In case the process requires only a small torque during field reversal, the

field current is decreased and the armature current is increased prior to the field current change. This speeds up the field reversal. The rate of the field current reduction depends on the process. E.g. if the speed direction is changed rather slowly, the required torque may also be quite small. This allows the reduction of the field current. Thus by means of optitorque it is possible to shorten the field reversal time.

In optitorque mode the field current will be reduced proportionally to TorqRefUsed

(2.13). The relation between TorqRefUsed (2.13) and field current is defined by

FldRefGain (45.11):

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

60

100 %

I f

TorqRefUsed (2.13)

FldRefGain (45.11)

Field current reference gain

For example with FldRefGain (45.11) = 20 %, 100 % field current is generated at

TorqRefUsed (2.13) = 20 %.

Field current monitoring

During normal operation the field current is compared with M1FldMinTrip (30.12).

Field minimum trip

The drive trips with F541 M1FexLowCur [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 8] if the field current drops below this limit and is still undershot when FldMinTripDly (45.18) is elapsed.

During field reversal the situation is different. M1FldMinTrip (30.12) is disabled for

Flux reversal

Field reversal hysteresis

Field reversal active

FldCtrlMode (44.01) = Fix/Opti, EMF/Opti, Fix/Rev/Opti or EMF/Rev/Opti. In this

case the trip level is automatically set to 50 % of FldCurRefM1 (3.30). The drive trips with F541 M1FexLowCur [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 8] if 50 % of FldCurRefM1

(3.30) is still undershot when FldMinTripDly (45.18) is elapsed.

If actual flux and armature voltage of the motor cannot follow the field current during field reversal it is necessary to delay the active field direction.

FluxRevMonDly (45.08) is the maximum allowed time within Mot1FldCurRel (1.29)

and the internal motor flux doesn’t correspond to each other during field reversal.

During this time F522 SpeedFb [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 5] is disabled.

The sign of Mot1FldCurRel (1.29) is used to generate the field reversal acknowledge. To avoid signal noise problems a small hysteresis - defined by means of FldRevHyst (45.09) - is needed.

While the field reversal is in progress - see CurCtrlStat2 (6.04), bit 11,

 the current controller is blocked,

 the I-part of the speed controller frozen,

 the output of the speed ramp is updated by means of the actual speed, if

RevDly (43.14) is greater than 25 ms and RevMode (43.16) = Soft

Field Heating

Overview

Field heating (also referred to as “field warming and field economy”) is used for a couple of reasons.

Previous generations of DC-drives used voltage-controlled field supplies, meaning that the only thing the field supply could directly control was the field voltage. For

DC-motors to maintain optimal torque it is important to maintain the field current.

Ohm’s law (U = R*I) tells us that voltage equals resistance multiplied by current.

So as long as resistance remains constant, current is proportional to voltage. But field resistance increases with temperature. Therefore, a cold motor would have a

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Modes of operation

61

higher field current than a warm motor, even though voltage remained unchanged.

To keep the resistance and thus the current constant, the field was left on to keep it warm. Then the voltage-controlled field supply works just fine.

The new generation of drives, including all field supplies used with the DCS800, are current controlled. Thus the field supply directly controls field current. This means that field heating may no longer be necessary when the DCS800 is employed.

Another reason field heating is used is to keep moisture out of the motor.

Following parameters are used to turn on and control field heating:

FldHeatSel (21.18),

M1FldHeatRef (44.04)

There are basically two modes of operation. In both modes, the field current will be at a reduced level, determined by M1FldHeatRef (44.04).

FldHeatSel (21.18) = On:

 Field heating is on, as long as On = 0 [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0], Off2N = 1

[UsedMCW (7.04) bit 1] and Off3N = 1 [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 2].

In general, field heating will be on as long as the OnOff input is not set and no Coast Stop or E-stop is pending.

Condition On [UsedMCW

Power up

Start drive

(7.04) bit 0]

0

1

Normal stop 1

 0

Off2N [UsedMCW

(7.04) bit 1]*

1

1

1

Result

reduced field current** normal field current normal field current, then reduced** after stop

Coast Stop while running field is turned off as motor coasts to stop and cannot turned back on again as long as

Coast Stop is pending

*see Off2 (10.08)

**the field current will be at the level set by means of M1FldHeatRef (44.04) while motor is stopped

FldHeatSel (21.18) = OnRun:

 Field heating is on as long as On = 1, Run = 0 [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3],

Off2N = 1 and Off3N = 1.

In general, field heating will be on as long as the OnOff input is set, the

Start/Stop input is not set and no Coast Stop or E-stop is pending.

On [UsedMCW

(7.04) bit 0]

0

1

Run [UsedMCW

(7.04) bit 3]

x

0

Off2N [UsedMCW

(7.04) bit 1]*

x

1

Result

field is turned off reduced field current**

1 1 1 current

1 normal field current, then reduced** after stop

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

62

E-stop

field is turned off as motor coasts to stop and cannot turned back on again as long as

Coast Stop is pending

*see Off2 (10.08)

**the field current will be at the level set by means of M1FldHeatRef (44.04) while motor is stopped

In both modes of operation, if the E-stop - see E Stop (10.09) - is pending the field will be turned off. It cannot be turned back on again as long as the E-stop is pending. If the E-stop is cleared while in motion, the motor will be stopped according to E StopMode (21.04) and then field and drive will be turned off.

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

63

Field exciter mode

General

The standard DCS800 module can be operated as large field exciter by simply setting parameters. It is either controlled by a DCS800 armature converter or can be configured as stand alone field exciter.

The field exciter mode uses the standard armature current controller as field current controller. Thus the current of the converter [ConvCurAct (1.16)] equals the field current of the motor. For these configurations an overvoltage protection

(DCF505 or DCF506) is mandatory.

Large field exciter controlled by a DCS800 armature converter

Overriding control

CommandSel (10.01) =

MainCtrlWord

DCS800 armature

DCS800 excitation

X52

DCSLink

X52

DCF505,

DCF506

M

Communication in field exciter mode

Large field exciters are fully controlled via the DCSLink:

DCSLinkNodeID (94.01) = 1, default

M1FexNode (94.08) = 21, default

M2FexNode (94.09) = 30, default

Single drive with one or two large field exciters: single drive

P94.01 = 1

P94.08 = 21

P94.09 = 30

1

P94.01 = 21

2 st nd

excitation

excitation

P94.01 = 30

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

64

In the large field exciters set OperModeSel (43.01) = FieldConv and CommandSel

(10.01) = FexLink as source for the control word (OnOff1, StartStop and Reset).

The reference is selected by CurSel (43.02) = FexCurRef. In the armature converter the field current is set by means of M1NominalFldCur (99.11) and in the large field exciter the current is set by means of M1NomCur (99.03).

To close the field contactor use CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 7.

Parameters to be set in the DCS800 armature converter:

M1FldMinTrip (30.12)

FldCtrlMode (44.01)

FexTimeOut (94.07)

M1FexNode (94.08)

xxx %

1 = EMF sets level for F541 M1FexLowCur

EMF controller released, field weakening active - depending on the application

FldMinTripDly (45.18)

2000 ms (def.) delays F541 M1FexLowCur

DCSLinkNodeID (94.01)

1

100 ms (def.)

21 (def.) causes F516 M1FexCom

Use the same node number as in

DCSLinkNodeID (94.01) of the field exciter

I

FN

= xxx A, rated field current

M1NomFldCur (99.11)

xxx A

M1UsedFexType (99.12) 8 = DCS800-S01,

9 = DCS800-S02

Parameters to be set in large field exciters:

Before starting with the commissioning set all parameters to default by means of

ApplMacro (99.08) = Factory and ApplRestore (99.07) = Yes. Check with

MacroSel (8.10).

CommandSel (10.01)

MotFanAck (10.06)

OvrVoltProt (10.13)

ArmOvrVoltLev (30.08)

4 = FexLink

0 = NotUsed

2 = DI2

500 %

1 = FieldConv depending on hardware connection to DCF506 to suppress F503 ArmOverVolt if this does not help, increase M1NomVolt (99.02)

OperModeSel (43.01)

CurSel (43.02)

8 = FexCurRef

M1DiscontCurLim (43.08)

0 %

RevDly (43.14)

50 ms

FldCtrlMode (44.01)

0 = Fix (def.)

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

DCSLinkNodeID (94.01)

DevLimPLL (97.13)

21 (def.)

20 °

M1NomVolt (99.02)

M1NomCur (99.03)

NomMainsVolt (99.10)

xxx V xxx A xxx V

M1UsedFexType (99.12)

0 = NotUsed

I

Use the same node number as in M1FexNode

(94.08) of the armature module

to suppress blocking of current controller see

CuCtrlStat2 (6.04) bit 13

U

FN

FN

U

= xxx V, rated field voltage

= xxx A, rated field current

NetN

= xxx V; nominal supply voltage (AC)

Field current autotuning for large field exciters:

The field current autotuning has to be started directly in the large field exciter:

ServiceMode (99.06)

M1KpArmCur (43.06)

2 = FieldCurAuto Give the On and Run command within 20 s xxx

M1TiArmCur (43.07)

xxx

M1DiscontCurLim (43.08)

0 %

Is set by field current autotuning

Is set by field current autotuning

Is set to zero by field current autotuning

65

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Firmware description

66

Stand alone field exciter

Overriding control

CommandSel (10.01) =

MainCtrlWord

DCS800 excitation

DCF505,

DCF506

CommandSel (10.01) =

Local I/O

Stand alone field exciter

In the stand alone field exciters set OperModeSel (43.01) = FieldConv and

CommandSel (10.01) = Local I/O or MainCtrlWord as source for the control word

(OnOff1, StartStop and Reset). The reference is selected by CurSel (43.02) =

CurRefExt or AI1 to AI6. The field exciter mode uses the standard armature current controller as field current controller. Thus the field current is set by means of M1NomCur (99.03).

To close the field contactor use CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 7.

Parameters to be set in the stand alone field exciter:

Before starting with the commissioning set all parameters to default by means of

ApplMacro (99.08) = Factory and ApplRestore (99.07) = Yes. Check with

MacroSel (8.10).

CommandSel (10.01)

MotFanAck (10.06)

OvrVoltProt (10.13)

ArmOvrVoltLev (30.08)

OperModeSel (43.01)

Firmware description

0 = Local I/O (def.),

1 = MainCtrlWord

0 = NotUsed

2 = DI2

500 %

1 = FieldConv depending on hardware connection to

DCF506 to suppress F503 ArmOverVolt if this does not help, increase M1NomVolt (99.02)

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

67

CurSel (43.02)

1 = CurRefExt,

2 = AI1,

3 = AI2,

4 = AI3,

5 = AI4,

6 = AI5,

7 = AI6

CurRefExt (43.03)

xxx %

M1DiscontCurLim (43.08)

0 %

RevDly (43.14)

FldCtrlMode (44.01)

DevLimPLL (97.13)

50 ms

0 = Fix (def.)

20 °

M1NomVolt (99.02)

M1NomCur (99.03)

NomMainsVolt (99.10)

xxx V xxx A xxx V

M1UsedFexType (99.12)

0 = NotUsed

I depending on the connection e.g. written to by overriding control to suppress blocking of current controller see

CuCtrlStat2 (6.04) bit 13

U

FN

FN

U

= xxx V, rated field voltage

= xxx A, rated field current

NetN

= xxx V; nominal supply voltage (AC)

Field current autotuning for stand alone field exciter:

The field current autotuning has to be started directly in the stand alone field exciter:

ServiceMode (99.06)

M1KpArmCur (43.06)

xxx

M1TiArmCur (43.07)

xxx

M1DiscontCurLim (43.08)

0 %

Is set by field current autotuning

Is set by field current autotuning

Is set to zero by field current autotuning

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Firmware description

68

DC-breaker, DC-contactor

General

The DC-breaker is used to protect the DC-motor or - in case of too low mains voltage or voltage dips - the generating bridge of the drive from overcurrent. In case of an overcurrent the DC-breaker is forced open by its own tripping spring.

DC-breakers have different control inputs and trip devices:

 an On / Off coil with a typical time delay of 100 to 200 ms,

 a high speed tripping coil (e.g. Secheron = CID) to trip the DC-breaker within 2 ms from e.g. the drive,

 an internal tripping spring which is released by overcurrent and set mechanically

There are different ways how to control the DC-breaker depending on the available hardware and the customers on / off philosophy. Following are the most common examples.

Attention:

If a DC breaker is used and DC voltage measurement is taken inside the converter module (D1 – D4 modules and D5 – D7 in default

configuration) then deselect the automatic offset compensation by setting OffsetUDC (97.24) = 0

HVCB controlled externally, DC-breaker controlled by the drive

I > I max trip command

HVCB

On command

Main contactor acknowledge see MainContAck (10.21)

Time delay

Command

Coast Stop see

MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 1

Command

MainContactorOn

see CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 7

Command

Trip DC-breaker

see CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 14/15

Main contactor acknowledge see

MainContAck (10.21)

DC-breaker Trip DC-breaker

M

HVCB controlled externally, DC-breaker controlled by the drive

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

69

In the above example the High Voltage Circuit Breaker (HVCB) is controlled externally (e.g. by the operator). The result is checked by means of MainContAck

(10.21). In case the main contactor acknowledge is missing F524 MainContAck

[FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 7] is set. Usually HVCB are equipped with an overcurrent relay, which can trip the HVCB. To protect the drive a 50 ms to 100 ms pretriggered trip command must be connected to Off2 (Coast Stop) [MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 1]. Additionally the trip command from the HVCB should also trip the DC-

breaker.

DC-breaker is controlled by the drive. The drive closes and opens the DC-breaker with the command MainContactorOn. The result is checked by means of

MainContAck (10.21). In case the main contactor acknowledge is missing F524

MainContAck [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 7] is set.

The DC-breaker can be tripped actively by the command Trip DC-breaker.

DC-contactor US version

If using a DC contactor, you must connect an auxiliary contact to a digital input of your choice and set para. MainContAck accordingly. Set the following parameters:

MainContAck (10.21)

= DI1 (or any input you choose for the DC cont. auxiliary contact)

DO8BitNo (14.16)

= 10

MainContCtrlMode (21.16) = DCcontact (3)

Set these parameters AFTER macros are loaded but BEFORE the drive is commissioned.

Digital output 8 (DO8) must be used to turn the DC-contactor on and off.

DC-contactor US:

DC-contactor US K1.1 is a special designed contactor with 2x NO contacts for C1 and D1 connection and 1x NC contact for connection of Dynamic Brake resistor RB.

The contactor should be controlled by CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 10.

The acknowledge can be connected to parameter: MainContAck (10.21)

DCBreakAck (10.23)

MainContactorOn (6.03) bit 7

DynamicBrakingOn (6.03) bit 8

US DCBreakerOn (6.03) bit 10

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Firmware description

70

If using Dynamic Braking, the drive allows you to select the stopping method under three different situations. Parameters 21.02, 21.03 and 21.04 select the stopping method for loss of the OnOff, run command (StartStop, Jog1, Jog2, etc.), and

E-Stop input, respectively.

Each can be set to:

In order to command the drive to perform a DB stop, one or more of these parameters must be set to DynBraking. Most users will want the drive to ramp stop when OnOff or a run command (StartStop, Jog1, Jog2, etc.) input is cleared, and dynamically brake when the E-Stop input is cleared. In that case, use the following settings:

= RampStop

• = DynBraking

However, any case is allowed and the final decision is left to the user.

Other parameters control stops during faults.

See:

LocalLossCtrl (30.27) ComLossCtrl (30.28)

FaultStopMode (30.30) SpeedFbFltMode (30.36)

If using EMF feedback with dynamic braking, set:

Where: t = the time (sec) it normally takes the motor to stop during dynamic braking

Attention:

If the motor voltage measurement is connected to the motor terminals (D5 – D7 with modified SDCS-PIN-51) then set:

MainContCtrl (21.16) = On

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

AC- and DC-breaker controlled by the drive

AC-breaker

Command

MainContactorOn

see CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 7

Main contactor acknowledge see MainContAck (10.21)

Command

Trip DC-breaker

see CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 14/15

DC-breaker acknowledge see DC BreakAck (10.23)

DC-breaker

M

AC- and DC-breaker controlled by the drive

In the above example both, the AC- and the DC-breaker are controlled by the drive. The drive closes and opens both breakers with the command

MainContactorOn. The result is checked by means of MainContAck (10.21) and

DC BreakAck (10.23). In case the main contactor acknowledge is missing F524

MainContAck [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 7] is set. In case the DC-breaker acknowledge is missing A103 DC BreakAck [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 2] is set, is forced to 150° and single firing pulses are given.

The DC-breaker can be tripped actively by the command Trip DC-breaker.

71

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Firmware description

72

No AC-breaker, DC-breaker controlled by the drive

Command

MainContactorOn

see CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 7

Command

Trip DC-breaker

see CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 14/15

Main contactor acknowledge see MainContAck (10.21)

DC-breaker

M

No AC-breaker, DC-breaker controlled by the drive

In the above example no AC-breaker is used and the DC-breaker is controlled by the drive. The drive closes and opens the DC-breaker with the command

MainContactorOn. The result is checked by means of MainContAck (10.21). In case the main contactor acknowledge is missing F524 MainContAck [FaultWord2

(9.02) bit 7] is set.

The DC-breaker can be tripped actively by the command Trip DC-breaker.

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

AC-breaker controlled by the drive, DC-breaker controlled externally

AC-breaker

Command

MainContactorOn

see CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 7

Main contactor acknowledge see MainContAck (10.21)

Command

Trip DC-breaker

see CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 14/15

DC-breaker acknowledge see DC BreakAck (10.23)

External DC-breaker on command

(e.g. from operator)

DC-breaker

M

AC-breaker controlled by the drive, DC-breaker controlled externally

In the above example the AC-breaker is controlled by the drive. The drive closes and opens the AC-breaker with the command MainContactorOn. The result is checked by means of MainContAck (10.21). In case the main contactor acknowledge is missing F524 MainContAck [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 7] is set.

The DC-breaker is controlled externally (e.g. by the operator). The result is checked by means of DC BreakAck (10.23). In case the DC-breaker acknowledge is missing A103 DC BreakAck [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 2] is set, is forced to 150° and single firing pulses are given.

The DC-breaker can be tripped actively by the command Trip DC-breaker.

73

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Firmware description

74

No AC-breaker, DC-breaker controlled externally

Command

Trip DC-breaker

see CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 14/15

Main contactor acknowledge see MainContAck (10.21)

External DC-breaker on command

(e.g. from operator)

DC-breaker

M

No AC-breaker, DC-breaker controlled externally

In the above example no AC-breaker is used and the DC-breaker is controlled externally (e.g. by the operator). The result is checked by means of MainContAck

(10.21). In case the main contactor acknowledge is missing F524 MainContAck

[FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 7] is set.

The DC-breaker can be tripped actively by the command Trip DC-breaker.

Command Trip DC-breaker

Command Trip DC-breaker

The firmware sets the:

 command Trip DC-breaker (continuous signal) [CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 14] and

 command Trip DC-breaker (4 s pulse signal) [CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 15] by means of

F512 MainsLowVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 11] in regenerative mode,

F502 ArmOverCur [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 1] or

F539 FastCurRise [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 6] (see chapter

Motor protection

)

In case a digital output - see group 14 - is assigned to one of the two signals, it is updated immediately after detecting the fault and thus actively tripping the DCbreaker.

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Dynamic braking

General

The drive can be stopped by dynamic braking. The principle is to transfer the power of the machine inertia into a braking resistor. Therefore the armature circuit has to be switched over from the drive to a braking resistor. Additionally flux and field current have to be maintained.

Operation

Activation

Dynamic braking can be activated by all stop modes, in cases of a fault or due to communication breaks:

Off1Mode (21.02) when UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0 On is set to low,

StopMode (21.03) when UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3 Run is set to low,

E StopMode (21.04) when UsedMCW (7.04) bit 2 Off3N is set to low,

FaultStopMode (30.30) in case of a trip level 4 fault,

SpeedFbFltMode (30.36) in case of a trip level 3 fault,

LocalLossCtrl (30.27) when local control is lost,

ComLossCtrl (30.28) when communication is lost,

Ch0 ComLossCtrl (70.05) when communication is lost and

Ch2 ComLossCtrl (70.15) when communication is lost.

In addition dynamic braking can be forced by setting AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 5 to high. At the same time UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3 Run must be set to low.

75

Function

Application example of dynamic braking

During dynamic braking the field current is maintained by keeping the field exciter activated. It is recommended to supply external / internal field exciters via a short time UPS to make sure that the field is maintained during mains failure.

OnBoard field exciters (D1 to D4) will be supplied via the main contactor, thus

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

76

Deactivation

CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 7 stays high (MainContactorOn) until zero speed is

reached.

① The activation of dynamic braking immediately sets CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 6 to high (dynamic braking active).

② Dynamic braking forces the armature current to zero and opens the DC-breaker by setting CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 14 to high (Trip DC-breaker).

After the armature current is zero and the DC-breaker acknowledge is gone

CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 8 is set to high (DynamicBrakingOn). This signal is

connected to a digital output (see group 14) and used to close the brake contactor.

As soon as the brake contactor is closed dynamic braking starts and decreases the speed.

With DynBrakeAck (10.22) it is possible to select a digital input for the brake resistor acknowledge. This input sets A105 DynBrakeAck [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit

4] as long as the acknowledge is present. Thus the drive cannot be started or restarted while dynamic braking is active, except FlyStart (21.10) = FlyStartDyn.

Dynamic braking is deactivated as soon as zero speed is reached and

AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 11 ZeroSpeed is set to high.

In case of dynamic braking with EMF feedback [M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) = EMF] there is no valid information about the motor speed and thus no zero speed information. To prevent an interlocking of the drive after dynamic braking the speed is assumed zero after DynBrakeDly (50.11) is elapsed:

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

77

Dynamic braking sequence

For usage of US style DC-breakers see MainContCtrlMode (21.16).

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Firmware description

78

Position counter

General

The position counter is used for position measurements. It can be synchronized, that is preset, with an initial value. The counter output value and its initial value are

32-bit signed values. The 32-bit position value is sent to and received as two 16-bit values. Thus the low word dose not possess a sign.

Counting procedure

The position counting is only possible when using an encoder, see M1SpeedFbSel

(50.03). Its measurement mode is selected by means of M1EncMeasMode (50.02)

and PosCountMode (50.07). Counting is increasing when the motor is rotating forward and decreasing when the motor is rotating backward. A loss free algorithm is used in order to avoid an increasing error due to rounding errors.

Synchronization

The position counter can be synchronized with an initial value. This initial value is set by means of PosCountInitLo (50.08) and PosCountInitHi (50.09).

At the synchronization event the position counter output - PosCountLow (3.07) and

PosCountHigh (3.08) - is preset with the initial value and SyncRdy [AuxStatWord

(8.02), bit 5] is set:

PosCountInitLo (50.08)PosCountLow (3.07)

PosCountInitHi (50.09)

PosCountHigh (3.08)

The synchronization command is chosen by means of SyncCommand (10.04). It can either be SyncCommand [AuxCtrlWord (7.02), bit 9] or hardware. The fastest synchronization is achieved by the encoder zero pulse. Synchronization by DI7 is delayed due to its scan time and additional hardware filter times.

The synchronization can be inhibited by setting SyncDisable [AuxCtrlWord (7.02), bit 10].

SyncRdy [AuxStatWord (8.02), bit 5] can be reset by means of ResetSyncRdy

[AuxCtrlWord (7.02), bit 11].

With PosSyncMode (50.15) either single or cyclic synchronization is selected. With single synchronization, the next synchronization event must be released with

ResetSyncRdy [AuxCtrlWord (7.02), bit 11].

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

79

DI7

>

& forward direction reverse direction

>

& forward direction reverse direction

Pulse encoder 1: zero channel

SyncCommand [AuxCtrlWord (7.02), bit 9]

&

&

&

&

SyncCommand (10.04)

SyncDisable [AuxCtrlWord (7.02), bit10]

ResetSyncRdy [AuxCtrlWord (7.02), bit 11]

PosCountInitLo (50.08)

PosCountInitHi (50.09)

Pulse encoder 1: pulses

ADD

7

8

4

5

1

Mux

O

2

3

6

9

10

Sel

&

Fault DCS800

OR

Cyclic

PosSyncMode (50.15)

S

O

R

>

Single

+

+

Pulse encoder 1 position counter logic

SyncRdy [AuxStatWord (8.02), bit 5]

PosCountLow (3.07)

PosCountHigh (3.08)

DCS800 FW pos count.dsf

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Firmware description

80

Pulse encoder 2 position counter logic

Firmware description

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

81

I/O configuration

Chapter overview

This chapter describes the I/O configuration of digital and analog inputs and outputs with different hardware possibilities.

Digital inputs (DI’s)

The basic I/O board is the SDCS-CON-4 with 8 standard DI’s. All 8 standard DI’s can be replaced with SDCS-IOB-2 and extended by means of one or two RDIO-01 digital I/O extension modules. Thus the maximum number of DI’s is 14.

The hardware source is selected by:

DIO ExtModule1 (98.03) for DI9 to DI11

DIO ExtModule2 (98.04) for DI12 to DI14 and

IO BoardConfig (98.15)

Note:

The maximum amount of digital I/O extension modules is two regardless if an

AIMA-01 board is used.

SDCS-CON-4 / SDCS-IOB-2

On the SDCS-CON-4 the standard DI's are filtered and not isolated. On the SDCS-

IOB-2 the standard DI’s are filtered and isolated. Selectable hardware filtering time

(DI7 and DI8 on the SDCS-IOB-2):

 2 ms or 10 ms (jumper S7 and S8)

Input voltages:

 24 VDC to 48 VDC, 115 VAC or 230 VAC depending on the hardware

 for more details see DCS800 Hardware Manual

Scan time for DI1 to DI6:

 5 ms

Scan time for DI7 and DI8:

 3.3 ms / 2.77 ms (synchronized with mains frequency)

1

st

and 2

nd

RDIO-01

The extension DI’s are isolated and filtered. Selectable hardware filtering time:

 2 ms or 5 ms to 10 ms

Input voltages:

 24 VDC to 250 VDC, 110 VAC to 230 VAC

 for more details see RDIO-01 User’s Manual

Scan time for DI9 to DI14:

 5 ms connected at SDCS-CON-4

 14 ms connected via SDCS-COM-8

Attention:

To ensure proper connection and communication of the RDIO-01 boards with the

SDCS-CON-4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery.

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

82

Configuration

All DI’s can be read from DI StatWord (8.05):

0 1 yes

1 2 yes

2 3 yes

3 4 yes

4 5 yes

5 6 yes

6 7 yes

7 8 yes

8 9 yes

9 10 yes

10 11 yes

11 12 no

12 13 no

13 14 no

ConvFanAck (10.20)

MotFanAck (10.06)

MainContAck (10.21)

Off2 (10.08)

E Stop (10.09)

Reset (10.03)

OnOff1 (10.15)

StartStop (10.16)

-

-

-

Configurable = yes:

The DI’s can be connected to several converter functions and it is possible to invert the DI’s - DI1Invert (10.25) to DI11Invert (10.35). In addition the DI’s can be used by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

Configurable = no:

The DI’s can only be used by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

Configurable DI’s are defined by means of following parameters:

Direction (10.02)

Reset (10.03)

SyncCommand (10.04)

MotFanAck (10.06)

HandAuto (10.07)

Off2 (10.08)

E Stop (10.09)

ParChange (10.10)

OvrVoltProt (10.13)

OnOff1 (10.15)

StartStop (10.16)

Jog1 (10.17)

Jog2 (10.18)

ConvFanAck (10.20)

MainContAck (10.21)

DynBrakeAck (10.22)

DC BreakAck (10.23)

Ref1Mux (11.02)

Ref2Mux (11.12)

MotPotUp (11.13)

MotPotDown (11.14)

MotPotMin (11.15)

Ramp2Select (22.11)

Par2Select (24.29)

TorqMux (26.05)

ResCurDetectSel (30.05)

ExtFaultSel (30.31)

ExtAlarmSel (30.32)

M1KlixonSel (31.08)

M1BrakeAckSel (42.02)

FldBoostSel (44.17)

M2KlixonSel (49.38)

ZeroCurDetect (97.18)

ResetAhCounter (97.21)

Following restrictions apply:

 The position counter synchronization is fixed assigned to input DI7, if

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

activated via SyncCommand (10.04)

 DI12 to DI14 are only available in the DI StatWord (8.05), thus they can only be used by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control

83

Structure of DI’s

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

I/O configuration

84

Digital outputs (DO’s)

The basic I/O board is the SDCS-CON-4 with 7 standard DO’s. Standard DO8 is located on the SDCS-PIN-4 for units size D1 - D4 or SDCS-POW-4 for units size

D5 - D7. All 8 standard DO’s can be replaced with SDCS-IOB-2 and extended by means of one or two RDIO-01 digital I/O extension modules. Thus the maximum number of DO’s is 12.

The hardware source is selected by:

DIO ExtModule1 (98.03) for DO9 and DO10

DIO ExtModule2 (98.04) for DO11 and DO12

IO BoardConfig (98.15)

Note:

The maximum amount of digital I/O extension modules is two regardless if an

AIMA-01 board is used.

SDCS-CON-4 / SDCS-IOB-2

On the SDCS-CON-4 the standard DO’s are relay drivers. DO8 is located on the

SDCS-PIN-4 and is isolated by means of a relay. If the SDCS-IOB-2 is being used

DO6 and DO7 are isolated by means of optocouplers, while the others (DO1 to

DO5 and DO8) are isolated by means of relays.

Output values SDCS-CON-4:

 DO1 to DO7 max. 50 mA / 22 VDC at no load

 for more details see DCS800 Hardware Manual

Output values SDCS-PIN-4:

 DO8 max. 3 A / 24 VDC, max. 0.3 A / 115 VDC / 230 VDC or max. 3 A /

230 VAC

 for more details see DCS800 Hardware Manual

Output values SCDS-IOB-2:

 DO6 and DO7: max. 50 mA / 24 VDC

 all others: max. 3 A / 24 VDC, max. 0.3 A / 115 VDC / 230 VDC or max. 3 A

/ 250 VAC

 for more details see DCS800 Hardware Manual

Cycle time for DO1 to DO8:

 5 ms

1

st

and 2

nd

RDIO-01

The extension DO’s are isolated by means of relays.

Output values:

 max. 5 A / 24 VDC, max. 0.4 A / 120 VDC or max. 1250 VA / 250 VAC

 for more details see RDIO-01 User’s Manual

Cycle time for DO9 to DO12:

 5 ms connected at SDCS-CON-4

 14 ms connected via SDCS-COM-8

Attention:

To ensure proper connection and communication of the RDIO-01 boards with the

SDCS-CON-4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery.

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

85

Configuration

All DO’s can be read from DO StatWord (8.06): bit DO configurable

0 1 yes FansOn; CurCtrlStat1 (6.03)

1 2 yes

2 3 yes

FieldOn; CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit0 bit5

MainContactorOn; CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit7

3 4 yes

4 5 yes

5 6 yes

6 7 yes

7 8 yes

8 9 no

9 10 no

10 11 no

11 12 no

-

-

-

-

MainContactorOn; CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit7

Configurable = yes:

The DO’s can be connected to any integer or signed integer of the drive by means of group 14. It is possible to invert the DO’s by simply negate DO1Index (14.01) to

DO8Index (14.15). In addition the DO’s can be used by Adaptive Program,

application program or overriding control if the corresponding DOxIndex (14.xx) is set to zero - see DO CtrlWord (7.05).

Configurable = no:

The DO’s can only be used by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control - see DO CtrlWord (7.05).

Note:

DO8 is only available as relay output on the SDCS-PIN-4, if no SDCS-IOB-2 is used.

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

I/O configuration

86

DO CtrlWord (7.05)

bit 0: DO1 bit 1: DO2 bit 2: DO3 bit 3: DO4 bit 4: DO5 bit 5: DO6 bit 6: DO7 bit 7: DO8 bit 8: DO9 bit 9: DO10 bit 10: DO11 bit 11: DO12

DO1Index (14.01)

DO1BitNo (14.02)

DO2Index (14.03)

DO2BitNo (14.04)

DO3Index (14.05)

DO3BitNo (14.06)

DO4Index (14.07)

DO4BitNo (14.08)

DO5Index (14.09)

DO5BitNo (14.10)

DO6Index (14.11)

DO6BitNo (14.12)

DO7Index (14.13)

DO7BitNo (14.14)

DO8Index (14.15)

DO8BitNo (14.16)

Source selection DO’s

0

DOxIndex

COMP

 0

DO CtrlWord

default

FansOn

FieldOn

MainContactorOn

-

-

-

-

MainContactorOn

Inversion of DO’s

1

1

IO BoardConfig (98.15)

SDCS-CON-4 SDCS-IOB-2

DO1Index (14.01)

DO2Index (14.03)

DO3Index (14.05)

DO4Index (14.07)

DO5Index (14.09)

DO6Index (14.11)

DO7Index (14.13)

DO8Index (14.15)

DO1

X7:1 X4:1,2

DO2

X7:2 X4:3,4

DO3

X7:3 X4:5,6

DO4

X7:4 X4:7,8

DO5

X7:5 X5:1,2

DO6

X7:6 X5:3,4

DO7

DO8

X7:7 X5:5,6

SDCS-PIN-4 /

SDCS-POW-4

X96

X5:7,8

1 st

RDIO-01

DIO ExtModule1

(98.03)

X21

X22

2 nd

RDIO-01

DIO ExtModule2

(98.04)

X21

X22

D

O

St at

W or d

(8.

06

) bit

0:

D

O

1 bit

1:

D

O

2 bit

2:

D

O

3 bit

3:

D

O

4 bit

4:

D

O

5 bit

5:

D

O

6 bit

6:

D

O

7 bit

7:

D

O

8 bit

8:

D

O

9 bit

9:

D

O

10 bit

10

:

D

O

11 bit

11

:

D

O

12

Structure of DO’s

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

87

Analog inputs (AI’s)

The basic I/O board is the SDCS-CON-4 with 4 standard AI’s. All 4 standard AI’s can be replaced with SDCS-IOB-3 and extended by means of one or two RAIO-01 analog I/O extension modules. Thus the maximum number of AI’s is 8.

The hardware source is selected by:

AIO ExtModule (98.06) for AI5 and AI6

AIO MotTempMeas (98.12) for AI7 and AI8

IO BoardConfig (98.15)

Note:

The maximum amount of analog I/O extension modules is two regardless if an

AIMA-01 board is used.

SDCS-CON-4

Hardware setting:

 switching from voltage input to current input by means of jumper S2 and S3

 for more details see DCS800 Hardware Manual

Input range AI1 and AI2 set by parameter:

 10 V, 0 V to 10 V, 2 V to 10 V, 5 V offset, 6 V offset

 20 mA, 0 mA to 20 mA, 4 mA to 20 mA, 10 mA offset, 12 mA offset

Input range AI3 and AI4 set by parameter:

 10 V, 0 V to 10 V, 2 V to 10 V, 5 V offset, 6 V offset

Resolution:

 15 bits + sign

Scan time for AI1 and AI2:

 3.3 ms / 2.77 ms (synchronized with mains frequency)

Scan time for AI3 and AI4:

 5 ms

Additional functions:

 motor temperature measurement for a PTC connected to AI2 - see section

Motor protection

SDCS-IOB-3

Hardware setting:

 switching from voltage input to current input by means of jumper S1

 the hardware gain for AI2 and AI3 can be increased by 10 with jumpers S2 and S3, thus the input range changes e.g. from

10 V to 1 V

 for more details see DCS800 Hardware Manual

Input range AI1 to AI4 set by parameter:

 10 V, 0 V to 10 V, 2 V to 10 V, 5 V offset, 6 V offset

 20 mA, 0 mA to 20 mA, 4 mA to 20 mA, 10 mA offset, 12 mA offset

Resolution:

 15 bits + sign

Scan time for AI1 and AI2:

 3.3 ms / 2.77 ms (synchronized with mains frequency)

Scan time for AI3 and AI4:

 5 ms

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

88

Additional functions:

 motor temperature measurement for PT100 or PTC connected to AI2 and

AI3 - see section

Motor protection

 residual current detection monitor input via AI4 - see section

Motor protection

1

st

RAIO-01

Hardware setting:

 input range and switching from voltage to current by means of a DIP switch,

 for more details see RAIO-01 User’s Manual

Input range AI5 and AI6 set by parameter:

 10 V, 0 V to 10 V, 2 V to 10 V, 5 V offset, 6 V offset

 20 mA, 0 mA to 20 mA, 4 mA to 20 mA, 10 mA offset, 12 mA offset

Resolution:

 11 bits + sign

Scan time for AI5 and AI6:

 10 ms connected at SDCS-CON-4

 14 ms connected via SDCS-COM-8

Additional functions:

 all AI’s are galvanically isolated

Attention:

To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO-01 board with the

SDCS-CON-4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery.

2

nd

RAIO-01

Hardware setting:

 AI7 and AI8 are only used for motor temperature measurement, thus set 0

V to 2 V for 1 PT100 respectively 0 V to 10 V for 2 or 3 PT100 using the

DIP switch

 for more details see RAIO-01 User’s Manual

Resolution:

 11 bits + sign

Scan time for AI7 and AI8:

 10 ms connected at SDCS-CON-4

 14 ms connected via SDCS-COM-8

Additional functions:

 all AI’s are galvanically isolated

 motor temperature measurement for PT100 connected to AI7 and AI8 - see

section

Motor protection

,

Attention:

To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO-01 board with the

SDCS-CON-4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery.

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

89

Configuration

The value of AI1 to AI6 and AITacho can be read from group 5.

1 yes -

2 yes -

3 yes -

4 yes -

5 yes -

6 yes -

Scaling

Configurable = yes:

The AI’s can be connected to several converter functions and it is possible to scale them by means of group 13. In addition the AI’s can be read by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

Configurable = temperature:

The AI’s can only be used by the motor temperature measurement - see

M1TempSel (31.05) and M2TempSel (49.35).

Configurable AI’s are defined by means of following parameters:

Ref1Sel (11.03)

Ref2Sel (11.06)

TorqUsedMaxSel (20.18)

TorqUsedMinSel (20.19)

TorqRefA Sel (25.10)

TorqCorrect (26.15)

ResCurDetectSel (30.05)

M1TempSel (31.05)

M1StrtTorqRefSel (42.07)

CurSel (43.02)

M2TempSel (49.35)

M2StrtTorqRefSel (49.44)

Following restrictions apply:

 the residual current detection input is fixed assigned to AI4, if activated via

ResCurDetectSel (30.05)

 the motor temperature measurement is fixed assigned to AI2 and AI3 respectively AI7 and AI8, if activated via

M1TempSel

(

31.05

) respectively

M2TempSel (49.35)

Bipolar signal:

±10V/±20mA Bi

-10V,

-20mA

Firmware signal

Unipolar signal:

Firmware signal

0-10V/0-20mA Uni

2-10V/4-20mA Uni

100%

100%

P1302

P1301

10V,

20mA

-100%

Input voltage, current

P1303=0-10V Uni

P1302=n.a.

0%

0V,

0mA

P1301

Input voltage, current

10V,

20mA

Unipolar signal:

Firmware signal

5V/10mA Offset

100%

6V/12mA Offset

0%

-100%

P1302=n.a.

0V

P1303=5V Offset

Input voltage, current

P1301

10V,

20mA

P1303=±10V Bi

DWL-assistant.dsf

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

90

SDCS-IOB-3

X3:3

X3:4

X3:5

X3:6

X3:7

X3:8

X3:9

X3:10

X3:11

X3:12

IO BoardConfig (98.15)

1 st

RAIO-01

X1:1

X1:2

X1:3

X1:4

AIO ExtModule (98.06)

It is possible to scale AI1 to AI6 with 3 parameters each:

 the range of each AI is set by means of a jumper - distinguishing between current and voltage - and ConvModeAI1 (13.03) to ConvModeAI6 (13.27)

 +100 % of the input signal connected to an AI is scaled by means of

AI1HighVal (13.01) to AI6HighVal (13.25)

 -100 % of the input signal connected to an AI is scaled by means of

AI1LowVal (13.02) to AI6LowVal (13.26)

Example:

In case the min. / max. voltage (

10 V) of AI1 should equal 250 % of

TorqRefExt (2.24), set:

TorqRefA Sel (25.10) = AI1

ConvModeAI1 (13.03) =

10V Bi

AI1HighVal (13.01) = 4000 mV

AI1LowVal (13.02) = -4000 mV

Scaling Scaling

SpeedActTach (1.05)

X3:1 to

X3:4

X3:5

X3:6

AITacho

AI1

ConvMode

AI1 (13.03)

Input value

AITacho

Val (5.01)

AI1 Val (5.03)

AI1HighVal (13.01)

AI1LowVal (13.02)

X3:7

X3:8

AI2

ConvMode

AI2 (13.07)

AI2 Val (5.04)

AI2HighVal (13.05)

AI2LowVal (13.06)

X3:9

X3:10

AI3

ConvMode

AI3 (13.11)

AI3 Val (5.05)

AI3HighVal (13.09)

AI3LowVal (13.10)

TorqCorrect (26.15)

X4:1

X4:2

AI4

ConvMode

AI4 (13.15)

AI4 Val (5.06)

AI4HighVal (13.13)

AI4LowVal (13.14)

AI5

AI6

ConvMode

AI5 (13.23)

ConvMode

AI6 (13.27)

AI5 Val (5.07)

AI6 Val (5.08)

AI5HighVal (13.21)

AI5LowVal (13.22)

AI6HighVal (13.25)

AI6LowVal (13.26)

M2TempSel (49.35)

The residual current detection is fixed assigned to AI4

(X3:11 and X3:12).

The motor temperature measurement is fixed assigned to AI2 and AI3 respectively AI7 and AI8.

2 nd

RAIO-01

X1:1

X1:2

X1:3

X1:4

AI7

AI8

AIO MotTempMeas (98.12)

Structure of AI’s

Structure of AIs.dsf

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

91

Analog outputs (AO’s)

The basic I/O board is the SDCS-CON-4 with 3 standard AO’s. Two AO’s are programmable, the third one is fixed and used to display the actual armature current taken directly from the burden resistors. All 3 standard AO’s can be replaced with SDCS-IOB-3 and extended by means of one or two RAIO-01 analog

I/O extension modules. Thus the maximum number of AO’s is 7.

The hardware source is selected by:

AIO ExtModule (98.06) for AO3 and AO4

AIO MotTempMeas (98.12) for AO5 and AO6

IO BoardConfig (98.15)

Note:

The maximum amount of analog I/O extension modules is two regardless if an

AIMA-01 board is used.

SDCS-CON-4 / SDCS-IOB-3

Output range AO1 and AO2 set by parameter:

 10 V, 0 V to 10 V, 2 V to 10 V, 5 V offset, 6 V offset

Output range fixed AO I-act:

 8 V equals the minimum of 325 % M1NomCur (99.03) or 230 %

ConvNomCur (4.05)

 see also IactScaling (4.26)

 for more details see DCS800 Hardware Manual

Resolution:

 11 bits + sign

Cycle time for AO1 and AO2:

 5 ms

Cycle time fixed AO I-act:

 directly taken from hardware

Additional functions:

 the gain of the fixed AO I-act can be adjusted by means of R110 on the

SDCS-IOB-3

1

st

RAIO-01

Output range AO3 and AO4 set by parameter:

 0 mA to 20 mA, 4 mA to 20 mA, 10 mA offset, 12 mA offset

Resolution:

 12 bits

Cycle time for AO3 and AO4:

 5 ms connected at SDCS-CON-4

 14 ms connected via SDCS-COM-8

Additional functions:

 all AO’s are galvanically isolated

Attention:

To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO-01 board with the

SDCS-CON-4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery.

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

92

2

nd

RAIO-01

Hardware settings:

 AO5 and AO6 are only used for motor temperature measurement, no additional setting needed

 for more details see RAIO-01 User’s Manual

Resolution:

 12 bits

Cycle time for AO5 and AO6:

 5 ms connected at SDCS-CON-4

 14 ms connected via SDCS-COM-8

Additional functions:

 all AO’s are galvanically isolated

 motor temperature measurement for PT100 connected to AO5 and AO6 -

see section

Motor protection

Attention:

To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO-01 board with the

SDCS-CON-4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery.

Configuration

The value of AO1 and AO2 can be read from group 5.

1 yes -

2 yes -

3 yes -

4 yes -

Curr fixed

Configurable = yes:

The AO’s can be connected to any integer or signed integer of the drive by means of group 15. It is possible to invert the AO’s by simply negate IndexAO1 (15.01) to

IndexAO4 (15.16). In addition the AO’s can be used by Adaptive Program,

application program or overriding control if the corresponding IndexAOx (15.xx) is set to zero - see CtrlWordAO1 (15.02) to CtrlWordAO4 (15.17).

Configurable = temperature:

The AO’s can only be used by the motor temperature measurement - see

M1TempSel (31.05) and M2TempSel (49.35).

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

93

Scaling

Bipolar signal:

±10V Bi

Output voltage

10V

P1505

-100%

100%

Firmware signal

Unipolar signal:

Output voltage

10V

0-10V Uni

2-10V Uni

P1505

P1503=0-10V Uni

0V

0% 100%

Firmware signal

Unipolar signal:

Output voltage

5V Offset

6V Offset

10V

P1505

P1503=5V Offset

0V

Firmware signal

Source

IndexAO1 (15.01)

CtrlWordAO1 (15.02)

IndexAO2 (15.06)

CtrlWordAO2 (15.07)

Hardware

IndexAO3 (15.11)

CtrlWordAO3 (15.12)

IndexAO4 (15.15)

CtrlWordAO4 (15.16)

M1TempSel (31.05)

M2TempSel (49.35)

M1TempSel (31.05)

M2TempSel (49.35)

-10V

P1503=±10V Bi

DWL-assistant.dsf

It is possible to scale AO1 to AO4 with 2 parameters each:

 the range of each AO is set by means of ConvModeAO1 (15.03) to

ConvModeAO4 (15.18)

 if the range is set to bipolar or unipolar signals with offset, 100 % of the input signal connected to an AO is scaled by means of ScaleAO1 (15.06) to

ScaleAO4 (15.20)

 If the range is set to unipolar signals without offset, only +100 % of the input signal connected to an AO is scaled by means of ScaleAO1 (15.06) to

ScaleAO4 (15.20). The smallest value is always zero.

 It is possible to invert the AO’s by simply negate IndexAO1 (15.01) to

IndexAO4 (15.16)

Example:

In case the min. / max. voltage (

10 V) of AO1 should equal 250 % of

TorqRefUsed (2.13), set:

IndexAO1 (15.01) = 213

ConvModeAO1 (15.03) =

10V Bi

ScaleAO1 (15.05) = 4000 mV

Source selection AO’ ’ s Inversion of AO’s

0

COMP

0

IndexAOx

1

1

CtrlWordAOx

Default Scaling

ConvModeAO1 (15.03)

ScaleAO1 (15.05)

ConvModeAO2 (15.08)

ScaleAO2 (15.10)

IndexAO1 (15.01)

IndexAO2 (15.06)

IO BoardConfig (98.15)

Output value

AO1 Val (5.11)

AO1

AO2 Val (5.12)

AO2 fixed AO

SDCS CON -4

X4:7

X4:10

X4:8

X4:10

X4:9

X4:10

X4:1

X4:2

X4:3

X4:4

X4:5

X4:6

ConvModeAO3 (15.13)

ScaleAO3 (15.15)

ConvModeAO4 (15.18)

ScaleAO4 (15.20)

IndexAO3 (15.11)

IndexAO4 (15.15)

AO3

AO4

1 st

RAIO

X2:1

X2:2

01

X2:3

X2:4

AO5

2 nd

RAIO 01

X2:1

X2:2

-

X2:3

X2:4

AIO ExtModule

(98.06)

AIO MotTempMeas

(98.12)

Structure of AO’s

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

94

Communication

Chapter overview

This chapter describes the communication capabilities of the drive.

DCSLink with SDCS-DSL-4

General

The DCSLink is a multi-purpose twisted pair bus for the DCS800. All functions using the same hardware and can be used at the same time. The DCSLink can be used for excitation, master-follower, drive-to-drive communication and 12-pulse.

Excitation, commissioning a FEX-4

Layout FEX-4

240

X110

P2

P1

T110

T113

Field X100

T112

T111

D800

S800

U730

S801

U731

R106

V110

X101

Mains

R107

R108

X7

Fex4_layout_a.dsf

X1: 24 V supply

X1:1 24 V DC

X1:2 0 V DC

Layout SDCS-DSL-4

X3: DSL Link

X3:1 GND B

X3:2 CAN L

X3:3 CAN H

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Set the FEX-4 type

The FEX-4 can be used in 4 different applications:

FEX-425-Int (as internal field exciter of a D5 module with up to 25 A)

DCF803-0016 (as external field exciter with up to 16 A)

DCF803-0035 (as external field exciter with up to 35 A) and

FEX-4 Term5A (as internal or external field exciter with max. 5 A)

Firmware (armature converter) Hardware (FEX-4)

M1UsedFexType (99.12) = FEX-425-Int,

DCF803-0016 or DCF803-0035

95

M1UsedFexType (99.12) = FEX-4 Term5A

Set the node numbers, transmission speed and the communication supervision

In all bus systems unique node ID numbers are required and have to be set in the armature converter and the FEX-4. Two stations with the same node ID number are not allowed.

For example set the armature converter node ID number to 1 and the FEX-4 node

ID number to 13.

The communication supervision is activated in the armature converter.

Also the transmission speed of all converters has to match:

Firmware (armature converter)

DCSLinkNodeID (94.01) = 1

Hardware (FEX-4)

-

BaudRate (94.02) = 500 kBit/s

FexTimeOut (94.07) = 100 ms

M1FexNode (94.08) = 13

S1100:4 S1100:5 S1100:6 kBit/s

-

OFF OFF ON 500

S801 S800

1 3

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

96

Set the DCSLink

Bus- and ground termination:

The DCSLink is a bus system using twisted pair cables. Therefore bus termination is mandatory at the two physical ends of the bus.

Hardware (SDCS-DSL-4) Hardware (FEX-4)

jumper S1 = 1-2 if bus termination is needed jumper S1100:1 = ON if bus termination is needed jumper S2 sets the ground termination jumper S1100:2 and S1100:3 set the ground termination

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

97

Set the supply of the FEX-4

The FEX-4 can be either supplied by 1-phase or by 3-phases:

Firmware (armature converter)

M1OperModeFex4 (45.22) = 3-phase

Hardware (FEX-4)

M1OperModeFex4 (45.22) = 1-phase

Checking the FEX-4

There are several signals to check the FEX-4 installation:

Firmware (armature converter)

Mot1FexType (4.06)

shows the FEX-4 type as chosen with

M1UsedFexType

(99.12)

Hardware (FEX-4)

yellow (U731) or green (U730) LED is blinking: waiting for DCSLink communication

DCSLinkStat1 (4.18)

or

DCSLinkStat2 (4.19)

show the status of the field exciter node as chosen with

M1FexNode (94.08)

yellow (U731) or green (U730) LED is steady:

DCSLink communication is OK

For further information consult the DCS800 Hardware Manual.

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Communication

98

Master-follower, commissioning

Set the DCSLink hardware

Bus- and ground termination:

The DCSLink is a bus system using twisted pair cables. Therefore bus termination is mandatory at the two physical ends of the bus.

Communication

In the above example termination is mandatory at the master and the 10 th

follower.

SDCS-DSL-4

jumper S1 = 1-2 sets the bus termination jumper S2 sets the ground termination

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

99

Set the node ID numbers and transmission speed

In all bus systems unique node ID numbers are required and have to be set in the master and all followers. Two stations with the same node ID number are not allowed.

For example set the masters node ID number to 1 and add one for each follower.

Also the transmission speed of all converters has to match:

Firmware master Firmware first follower Firmware 10 th

follower

BaudRate (94.02) = 500kBit/s BaudRate BaudRate (94.02) = 500kBit/s

Activate the mailboxes

The master-follower communication utilizes 4 mailboxes for data transfer. Thus data transfer to any device / node in the system is possible.

Positive mailbox node ID numbers only transmit data, negative only receive data.

To get communication mailbox node ID pairs (e.g. 5 and -5) are needed:

Firmware master Firmware first follower Firmware 10 th

follower

MailBox1 (94.12) = -5

Attention:

Positive mailbox node ID numbers must be unique. Negative mailbox node ID numbers can be used by several mailboxes.

The master mailbox one for example is set to 5 and thus transmitting data. Mailbox one of the followers is set to -5 and thus receiving data.

Activate the communication supervision

The communication supervision is activated by means of MailBoxCycle1 (94.13).

The function of MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) is depending on the setting of MailBox1

(94.12).

If MailBox1 (94.12) is positive:

 data will be transmitted.

MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) sets the transmitting and receiving intervals.

 if MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) is set to 3 ms the transmit and receiving intervals are synchronized with mains frequency, either 3.3 ms or 2.77 ms.

 values from 1 - 2 ms are too fast and will generate a fault.

 the communication is inactive, if MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) is set to 0 ms.

If MailBox1 (94.12) is negative:

 data will be received.

MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) sets the communication timeout. This is the time delay before a drive-to-drive or master-follower communication break is declared. Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl (30.28) either F544

P2PandMFCom [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 11] or A112 P2PandMFCom

[AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 11] is set.

 the communication fault and alarm are inactive, if MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) is set to 0 ms.

Attention:

The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time parameter:

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

100

Firmware master

TrmtRecVal1.3 (94.16) = 210

TrmtRecVal1.4 (94.17) = 0

Follower parameters (sinks)

TrmtRecVal1.1 (94.14) = 701

Firmware first follower Firmware 10 th

follower

(94.13)

MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) = 200

Send and receive values

Each mailbox can transmit / receive up to 4 values depending on the sign of the mailbox node ID number. The master-follower communication usually needs to send 3 values from the master to the followers, thus the follower is completely controlled by the master:

Master parameters (source)

TrmtRecVal1.1 (94.14) = 701 or 704

TrmtRecVal1.2 (94.15) = 217

MainCtrlWord (7.01) or UsedMCW (7.04)

SpeedRefUsed (2.17)

TorqRef3 (2.10)

not used

TrmtRecVal1.2 (94.15) = 2301

TrmtRecVal1.3 (94.16) = 2501

TrmtRecVal1.4 (94.17) = 0

CommandSel (10.01) = MainCtrlWord

MainCtrlWord (7.01)

SpeedRef (23.01)

TorqRefA (25.01)

not used

TorqSel (26.01) = Torque or Add

Master signal TorqRef3 (2.10) is send via master parameter TrmtRecVal1.3

(94.16) to follower signal TorqRefA (25.01) via follower parameter TrmtRecVal1.3 (94.16).

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

101

Firmware structure

MailBox1 (94.12) = 5, configures the masters first mailbox to transmit data:

Torque reference and torque selection (3.3 m s)

Panel

DW

DWL

TorqR ef2

Torque selector

2.09

TorqR ef2

Master:

2.09

Speed 1

0

25.10

25.01

TorqR efA Sel

TorqRefA2501

AI1…AI6

TorqRefExt

2.24

Filter

25.03

+

Local

Lim iter

2.08

TorqR ef1

Torque 2

Min 3

2

3

1

0

4 5 6

TorqR ef3

2.10

LoadShare

25.02

TorqRefA FTC

Max 4

TorqR efB

25.04

Torque ramp 20.09

TorqM axTref

20.10

TorqM inTref

2.19

TorqM axAll

+

Add 5

+

2.20

25.05

TorqR am pUp

TorqM inAll

25.06

Lim 6

TorqR am pDown

26.05

TorqM ux

NotUsed

DI1, … , DI11

MC W Bit 11, …, M CW Bit15

ACW Bit 12, …, ACW Bit 15

TorqSel

26.04

26.01

TorqM uxMode

TorqSel2601 (0…6)

Speed/Torq (1 or 2)

Speed/Min (1 or 3)

Speed/Max (1 or 4)

Speed/Limit (1 or 6)

23.03

21.02

21.03

21.04

30.27

30.28

30.30

42.10

49.40

70.05

70.15

TorqSelMod

Off1Mode

S topM ode

E StopMode

LocalLoossCtrl

Comm LossCtrl

FaultStopMode

M1TorqProvTim e

M2TorqProvTim e

Ch0 C om LossCtrl

Ch2 C om LossCtrl

Master parameter TrmtRecVal1.3 (94.16) = 210 sends the torque value to the follower

Follower:

MailBox1 (94.12) = -5, configures followers first mailbox to receive data

Follower parameter TrmtRecVal1.3 (94.16) = 2501 gets the torque value from the master

Torque reference and torque selection (3.3 m s)

Panel

DW

DWL

TorqR ef2

Torque selector

2.09

TorqR ef2

2.09

Speed 1

0

25.10

25.01

TorqR efA Sel

TorqRefA2501

AI1…AI6

TorqRefExt

2.24

Filter

25.03

+

Local

Lim iter

2.08

TorqR ef1

Torque 2

Min 3

2

3

1

0

4 5 6

TorqR ef3

2.10

LoadShare

25.02

TorqRefA FTC

Max 4

TorqR efB 25.04

Torque ramp 20.09

20.10

TorqM axTref

TorqM inTref

2.19

TorqM axAll

+

Add 5

+

2.20

25.05

TorqR am pUp

TorqM inAll

Lim 6

25.06

TorqR am pDown

26.05

TorqM ux

NotUsed

DI1, … , DI11

MC W Bit 11, …, M CW Bit15

ACW Bit 12, …, ACW Bit 15

TorqSel

26.04

26.01

TorqM uxMode

TorqSel2601 (0…6)

Speed/Torq (1 or 2)

Speed/Min (1 or 3)

Speed/Max (1 or 4)

Speed/Limit (1 or 6)

23.03

21.02

21.03

21.04

30.27

30.28

30.30

42.10

49.40

70.05

70.15

TorqSelMod

Off1Mode

S topM ode

E StopMode

LocalLoossCtrl

Comm LossCtrl

FaultStopMode

M1TorqProvTim e

M2TorqProvTim e

Ch0 C om LossCtrl

Ch2 C om LossCtrl

For further information consult the DCS800 Hardware Manual.

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

102

Additional settings

Field weakening:

In case of field weakening all followers must have a speed feedback via encoder, tacho or MotSpeed (1.04) - see M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) = External.

Note:

When connecting the output of one encoder to two drives a splitter has to be used.

Connection to overriding control:

In case followers are connected to an overriding control make sure, that the overriding control is not writing on the same signals (via group 51 and / or group

90) as the master (via the master-follower link). There is always a problem when two sources writing on one sink. Be very carefully with e.g. MainCtrlWord (7.01),

SpeedRef (23.01), TorqRefA (25.01), ...

E-stop:

In case of an E-stop the master must be in control of all followers. Thus set:

E Stop (10.09) = NotUsed and

TorqSelMod (26.03) = Fix in all followers.

Feedback from the followers to the master:

The feedback from the followers to the master has to be set up manually using drive-to-drive communication and Adaptive Program or application program.

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

103

Drive-to-drive communication

Set the DCSLink hardware

Bus- and ground termination:

The DCSLink is a bus system using twisted pair cables. Therefore bus termination is mandatory at the two physical ends of the bus.

In the above example termination is mandatory at drive 1 and drive 2.

SDCS-DSL-4

jumper S1 = 1-2 sets the bus termination jumper S2 sets the ground termination

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

104

Set the node ID numbers and transmission speed

In all bus systems unique node ID numbers are required and have to be set in the master and all followers. Two stations with the same node ID number are not allowed.

For example set the 1 st

drives node ID number to 1 and the 2 nd

drives node ID number to 2.

Also the transmission speed of all converters has to match:

Firmware 1 st

drive Firmware 2 nd

drive

Activate the mailboxes

The drive-to-drive communication utilizes 4 mailboxes for data transfer. Thus data transfer to any device / node in the system is possible.

Positive mailbox node ID numbers only transmit data, negative only receive data.

To get communication mailbox node ID pairs (e.g. 5 / -5 and 6 / -6) are needed:

Firmware 1 st

drive Firmware 2 nd

drive

Attention:

Positive mailbox node ID numbers must be unique. Negative mailbox node ID numbers can be used by several mailboxes.

Activate the communication supervision

The communication supervision is activated by means of MailBoxCycle1 (94.13).

The function of MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) is depending on the setting of MailBox1

(94.12).

If MailBox1 (94.12) is positive:

 data will be transmitted.

MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) sets the transmitting and receiving intervals.

 if MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) is set to 3 ms the transmit and receiving intervals are synchronized with mains frequency, either 3.3 ms or 2.77 ms.

 values from 1 - 2 ms are too fast and will generate a fault.

 the communication is inactive, if MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) is set to 0 ms.

If MailBox1 (94.12) is negative:

 data will be received.

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

105

MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) sets the communication timeout. This is the time delay before a drive-to-drive or master-follower communication break is declared. Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl (30.28) either F544

P2PandMFCom [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 11] or A112 P2PandMFCom

[AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 11] is set.

 the communication fault and alarm are inactive, if MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) is set to 0 ms.

Attention:

The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time parameter:

Firmware 1 st

drive Firmware 2 nd

drive

Send and receive values

Each mailbox can transmit / receive up to 4 values depending on the sign of the mailbox node ID number.

1 st

mailbox

TrmtRecVal1.1 (94.14)

TrmtRecVal1.2 (94.15)

TrmtRecVal1.3 (94.16)

TrmtRecVal1.4 (94.17)

2 nd

mailbox

TrmtRecVal2.1 (94.20)

TrmtRecVal2.2 (94.21)

TrmtRecVal2.3 (94.22)

TrmtRecVal2.4 (94.23)

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Communication

106

12-pulse

Set the DCSLink hardware

Bus- and ground termination:

The DCSLink is a bus system using twisted pair cables. Therefore bus termination is mandatory at the two physical ends of the bus.

Communication

In the above example termination is mandatory at the 12-pulse master and the excitation.

SDCS-DSL-4

jumper S1 = 1-2 sets the bus termination jumper S2 sets the ground termination

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

107

Set the node numbers, transmission speed and the communication supervision

In all bus systems unique node ID numbers are required and have to be set in the

12-pulse master, 12-pulse slave and the excitation. Two stations with the same node ID number are not allowed.

For example set the 12-pulse master node ID number to 1, the 12-pulse slave node ID number to 31 and the excitation node ID number to 21.

The 12-pulse and excitation communication supervision is activated in the 12-pulse master.

Also the transmission speed of all converters has to match:

Firmware 12-pulse master Firmware 12-pulse slave Firmware excitation

BaudRate (94.02) = 500kBit/s BaudRate BaudRate (94.02) = 500kBit/s

12P TimeOut (94.03) = 100

- - ms

12P SlaNode (94.04) = 31

- -

FexTimeOut (94.07) = 100 ms

- -

M1FexNode (94.08) = 21

- -

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Communication

108

DDCS channels with SDCS-COM-8

General

The following table describes the usage of the DDCS channels of the SDCS-COM-

8 board.

SDCS-COM-81 SDCS-COM-82

Ch0 Overriding control or NETA-01 connection

10 Mb (e.g. FCI,

AC 800M)

5 Mb (fieldbus adapter)

Ch1

Ch2

I/O extensions via AIMA board 5 Mb

Master-follower link 10 Mb

5 Mb

10 Mb

Ch3 DriveWindow or NETA-01 connection

10 Mb 10 Mb

The communication protocol of Ch0 to Ch3 is DDCS (Distributed Drives

Communication System). The Ch0 of the SDCS-COM-8 supports either DDCS or

DriveBus, see Ch0 DriveBus (71.01). Both, the DDCS and DriveBus link between the overriding control and the drive, using data sets for information exchange.

Each data set is a package of three words (signals or parameters). If a data set is received by the drive the corresponding data set is automatically transmitted to the overriding control as response:

Drive Received data Transmitted data

 data set 10 data set 11



 data set 12 data set 13



The data received from the overriding control affects only the RAM (not FPROM) memory in the drive.

Integer scaling on the DDCS link

Communication between the drive and the overriding control uses 16 bit integer values. The overriding control has to use the information given in integer scaling to be able to change values of parameters properly.

Example1:

If TorqMaxSPC (20.07) is written to from the overriding control an integer value of

100 corresponds to 1 % torque.

Example2:

If SpeedRef (23.01) is written to from the overriding control 20.000 equals the speed (in rpm) shown in SpeedScaleAct (2.29).

1.08 MotTorq (motor torque)

Motor torque in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23):

 Filtered by means of a 6 th

order FIR filter (sliding average filter), filter time is 1 mains voltage period.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

109

Ch0 communication to overriding control

ABB overriding control

The communication between the overriding control and the SDCS-COM-8 via Ch0 uses data sets. The data sets are connected to the firmware by read- and write

pointers - see sections

Received data set table

and

Transmitted data set table

.

Received and transmitted values are set according to groups 90 to 93. Received data sets are typically connected to MainCtrlWord (7.01) and SpeedRef (23.01), whereas transmitted data sets are connected to MainStatWord (8.01) and

MotSpeed (1.04).

Parameter setting example

The following table lists the parameters which need to be defined when setting up the communication between the drive and ABB overriding control.

Drive parameters

CommandSel (10.01)

Ref1Sel (11.03)

Ch0 NodeAddr (70.01)

Ch0 LinkControl (70.02)

Ch0 BaudRate (70.03)

Ch0 TimeOut (70.04)

Ch0 ComLossCtrl (70.05)

Ch0 HW Config (70.06)

Settings

MainCtrlWord

Comments

SpeedRef2301

0 - 254 Ch0 node address

10

4 Mbits/s

100

RampStop

Ring or Star

CH0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24)

10

Ch0 LED light intensity for ABB overriding control

Time delay for communication loss detection

Reaction to communication loss detection

Ch0 topology selection use either data set range 1 to

16 or data set range 10 to 25

CommModule (98.02)

Ch0 DriveBus (71.01)

COM-8/AC800x

No or Yes Ch0 communication mode selection

DCS800 parameter setting for ABB overriding control

Note:

 20.000 speed units (decimal) for speed reference [SpeedRef (23.01)] and speed actual [MotSpeed (1.04)] corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct

(2.29). That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale (50.01) respectively

M1SpeedMin (20.01) or M1SpeedMax (20.02).

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Communication

110

Received data set table

Send from the overriding control to the drive (typical).

Addresses for data received from the overriding control

Data set number

(70.24) + 0

Data set index

2

Update time

2 ms

COM-8

CON-4

1 ms

Selection parameter

(90.01)

(90.02)

(90.03)

Default value

701

2301

2501

(70.24) + 2

(70.24) + 4

(70.24) + 6

(70.24) + 8

(70.24) + 10

(70.24) + 12

(70.24) + 14

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2 ms

2 ms

2 ms

1 ms

1 ms

1 ms

10 ms

20 ms

10 ms

20 ms

10 ms

20 ms

10 ms

20 ms

(90.16)

(90.17)

(90.18)

(91.01)

(91.02)

(91.03)

(91.04)

(91.05)

(91.06)

(90.04)

(90.05)

(90.06)

(90.07)

(90.08)

(90.09)

(90.10)

(90.11)

(90.12)

(90.13)

(90.14)

(90.15)

702

703

Parameter name

(default values)

MainCtrlWord

SpeedRef

TorqRefA

AuxCtrlWord

AuxCtrlWord2

Note:

The update time is the time within the drive is reading values from the data sets.

Since the drive is a communication slave, the actual cycle time depends on the cycle time of the communication master.

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

111

Transmitted data set table

Send from the drive to the overriding control (typical).

Addresses for data transmitted to the overriding control

Data set number

(70.24) + 1

Data set index

2

Update time

2 ms

CON-4

COM-8

1 ms

Selection parameter

(92.01)

(92.02)

(92.03)

Default value

801

104

209

(70.24) + 3

(70.24) + 5

(70.24) + 7

(70.24) + 9

(70.24) + 11

(70.24) + 13

(70.24) + 15

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2 ms

2 ms

2 ms

10 ms

10 ms

10 ms

10 ms

1 ms

1 ms

1 ms

20 ms

20 ms

20 ms

20 ms

(92.16)

(92.17)

(92.18)

(93.01)

(93.02)

(93.03)

(93.04)

(93.05)

(93.06)

(92.04)

(92.05)

(92.06)

(92.07)

(92.08)

(92.09)

(92.10)

(92.11)

(92.12)

(92.13)

(92.14)

(92.15)

806

124

122

904

906

907

908

803

805

802

101

108

901

902

903

Parameter name

(default values)

MainStatWord

MotSpeed

TorqRef2

AuxStatWord

MotSpeedFilt

MotTorq

FaulWord1

FaulWord2

FaulWord3

FaulWord4

AlarmWord1

AlarmWord2

AlarmWord3

LimWord

DI StatWord

DO StatWord

BridgeTemp

Mot1TempMeas

Note:

The update time is the time within the drive is reading values from the data sets.

Since the drive is a slave, the actual communication cycle time depends on the master’s cycle time.

Fieldbus communication (N-type)

The communication between the N-type fieldbus adapter and the SDCS-COM-8 uses data sets. The data set base address is set by means of CH0 DsetBaseAddr

(70.24) = 1. The communication for the fieldbus adapters is activated by means of

CommModule (98.02) = COM-8/Nxxx. The contents of the fieldbus data sets is set

by means of the same pointers as for the ABB overriding control data sets - see sections

Received data set table

and

Transmitted data set table

. Received and transmitted values are set according to groups 90 to 93. Also the update times are the same.

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

112

Ch1 I/O devices

All optional I/O devices are connected via AIMA-01 board to Ch1. The SDCS-

COM-8 is the master in the communication link. Each device has an individual address, set with switches on the I/O device. Before use, each I/O device must be activated by means of a parameter in group 98.

See also:

I/O Module Adapter AIMA-01; User’s Manual

Ch2 Master-follower link

General

Link configuration

Ch2 on the SDCS-COM-8 board is used for the master-follower link between the drives. Ch2 is configurable by Ch2 MaFoMode (70.09) either to be master or follower in the communication in broadcast mode. Typically the speed controlled process master drive is configured also to be the communication master.

Master

The master-follower link is designed for applications in which the system is operated by several drives and the shafts are coupled to each other via gearing, chains, belts etc. The master controls all followers via a fiber optic serial communication link. Pulse encoders are recommended for the master and all followers.

The master is typically speed controlled and the other drives follow the master’s torque or speed reference. In general, torque control or window control of the followers should be used when the motor shafts of the master and the followers drives are fixed coupled to each other via gearing, chains, belts etc. and no speed differences between the drives is possible.

The master mode is selected by Ch2 MaFoMode (70.09). The torque reference source address is defined in the master by Ch2 MasSig3 (70.12) to be sent via broadcast to the followers. Also two other signals can be sent through the link if required. Their addresses are defined by Ch2 MasSig1 (70.10) and Ch2 MasSig2

(70.11). Typical / default addresses are:

Signal addresses in the master

Update time

2 ms

2 ms

2 ms

Parameter name and index of the default values

MainCtrlWord (7.01) or UsedMCW (7.04)

SpeedRefUsed (2.17)

TorqRef3 (2.10)

Master drive selection parameters

Ch2 MasSig1 (70.10)

Ch2 MasSig2 (70.11)

Ch2 MasSig3 (70.12)

Above parameters are not valid in the follower. The master cyclically sends Ch2

MasSig1 … 3 in one DDCS message as broadcast every 2 ms.

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

113

Followers

The follower mode is selected by Ch2 MaFoMode (70.09). To control start and stop from the master set CommandSel (10.01) = MainCtrlWord. The connections are selected by Ch2 FolSig1 (70.18), Ch2 FolSig2 (70.19) and Ch2 FolSig3 (70.20) according to the following table:

Signal addresses in the follower

Update time

Parameter name and index of the default values

MainCtrlWord (7.01)

2 ms

2 ms

2 ms

SpeedRef (23.01)

TorqRefA (25.01)

Follower drive selection parameters

Ch2 FolSig1 (70.18)

Ch2 FolSig2 (70.19)

Ch2 FolSig3 (70.20)

Above parameters are not valid in the master. The follower cyclically reads Ch2

FolSig1 … 3 every 2 ms.

Note:

In default setting master signal TorqRef3 (2.10) is send via master parameter Ch2

MasSig3 (70.12) to follower signal TorqRefA (25.01) via follower parameter Ch2

FolSig3 (70.20).

Firmware structure

Ch2 MasSig2 (70.11) and Ch2 MasSig3 (70.12)

Torque reference and torque selection (3.3 m s)

Panel

DW

DWL

TorqR ef2

2.09

TorqR ef2

Master:

Ch2 MaFoMode (70.09) = Master, activates read pointer Ch2 MasSig1 (70.10),

2.09

Torque selector

Speed 1

0

25.10

25.01

TorqR efA Sel

TorqRefA2501

AI1…AI6

TorqRefExt

2.24

Filter

25.03

+

Local

Lim iter

2.08

TorqR ef1

Torque 2

Min 3

2

3

1

0

4 5 6

TorqR ef3

2.10

LoadShare

25.02

TorqRefA FTC

Max 4

TorqR efB 25.04

Torque ramp 20.09

20.10

TorqM axTref

TorqM inTref

2.19

TorqM axAll

+

Add 5

+

2.20

25.05

TorqR am pUp

TorqM inAll

Lim 6

25.06

TorqR am pDown

26.05

TorqM ux

NotUsed

DI1, … , DI11

MC W Bit 11, …, M CW Bit15

ACW Bit 12, …, ACW Bit 15

TorqSel

26.04

26.01

TorqM uxMode

TorqSel2601 (0…6)

Speed/Torq (1 or 2)

Speed/Min (1 or 3)

Speed/Max (1 or 4)

Speed/Limit (1 or 6)

23.03

21.02

21.03

21.04

30.27

30.28

30.30

42.10

49.40

70.05

70.15

TorqSelMod

Off1Mode

S topM ode

E StopMode

LocalLoossCtrl

Comm LossCtrl

FaultStopMode

M1TorqProvTim e

M2TorqProvTim e

Ch0 C om LossCtrl

Ch2 C om LossCtrl

Master parameter Ch2 MasSig3 (70.12) = 210 sends the torque value to the follower

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

114

Follower:

Ch2 MaFoMode (70.09) = Follower, activates write pointer Ch2 FolSig1 (70.18),

Ch2 FolSig2 (70.19) and Ch2 FolSig3 (70.20)

Follower parameter Ch2 FolSig3 (70.20) = 2501 gets the torque value from the master

Torque reference and torque selection (3.3 m s)

Panel

DW

DWL

TorqR ef2

Torque selector

2.09

TorqR ef2

25.10

25.01

TorqR efA Sel

TorqRefA2501

AI1…AI6

TorqRefExt

2.24

Filter

25.03

+

Local

2.09

Lim iter

2.08

TorqR ef1

Speed 1

Torque 2

Min 3

0

2

3

1 0

4 5 6

TorqR ef3

2.10

LoadShare

25.02

TorqRefA FTC

Max 4

TorqR efB 25.04

Torque ramp 20.09

TorqM axTref

20.10

TorqM inTref

2.19

TorqM axAll

+

Add 5

+

2.20

25.05

TorqR am pUp

TorqM inAll

25.06

Lim 6

TorqR am pDown

26.05

TorqM ux

NotUsed

DI1, … , DI11

MC W Bit 11, …, M CW Bit15

ACW Bit 12, …, ACW Bit 15

TorqSel

26.04

26.01

TorqM uxMode

TorqSel2601 (0…6)

Speed/Torq (1 or 2)

Speed/Min (1 or 3)

Speed/Max (1 or 4)

Speed/Limit (1 or 6)

23.03

21.02

21.03

21.04

30.27

30.28

30.30

42.10

49.40

70.05

70.15

TorqSelMod

Off1Mode

S topM ode

E StopMode

LocalLoossCtrl

Comm LossCtrl

FaultStopMode

M1TorqProvTim e

M2TorqProvTim e

Ch0 C om LossCtrl

Ch2 C om LossCtrl

Master-follower firmware structure

SDCS-COM-8x

SDCS-COM-8x

D100

D100

SDCS-COM-8x

D200 D100

V6

D200

D400

V6

D200

D400

V6

D400

V1

V1

X19 V1

X19

X19 plastic optic fibre com8_bus conn_a.dsf

30 m - SDCS-COM-8 Rev D and higher

Master-follower fiber optic cable connection (see also DCS800 Hardware Manual)

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

115

Toggle between speed- and torque control

In some application, both speed- and torque control of the followers are required, e.g. if it is necessary to accelerate all drives along the same speed ramp up to a certain speed before the torque control can be started. In those cases, a flying switch over between speed- and torque controls is required. The switch over can be done by e.g. the overriding control using TorqSel (26.01). See also TorqMux

(26.05) and TorqMuxMode (26.04).

Follower diagnostics

All the followers receive the torque reference via TorqRefA (25.01). All followers are able to detect communication breaks, after the first valid message is received.

The action due to a communication break is defined by Ch2 TimeOut (70.14) and

Ch2 ComLossCtrl (70.15). Feedback for all alarms and faults from the followers

must be handled by the overriding control through the Ch0 on the SDCS-COM-8 board.

Master-follower link specification

Size of the link: One master and maximum ten followers are allowed. If more than ten followers are required, a local ABB agent should be consulted.

Configuration: Link is configurable by the overriding control using Ch2

MaFoMode (70.09). This makes possible to change between master and follower

by the overriding control without changes in the hardware.

Transmission rate: 4 Mbit/s

Total performance of the link: 2 ms (between master and followers)

Protocol: Distributed Drives Communication System, DDCS

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Communication

116

Ch3 commissioning and maintenance tools

DriveWindow

DriveWindow can be connected to Ch3 in either ring (max. 5 drives) or star connection using NDBU-xx branching units, see Ch3 HW Config (70.21). The node numbers - Ch3 NodeAddr (70.32) - must be set for each drive individually before starting the communication through the connection. This setting has to be made by a point to point connection using the DCS800 Control Panel, DriveWindow or

DriveWindow Light. The new node address becomes valid after the next SDCS-

COM-8 power-up. The SDCS-COM-8 Ch3 has been configured to be a slave in the communication point of view. With DeviceName (99.09) and DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string (name) with a maximum of 12 characters for individual drive identification. See also:

Configuration Instructions NDBU-85/95; 3ADW000100,

Optical DDCS Communication Link; 3BFE64285513 and

DDCS Cabling and Branching; 3AFE63988235

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

117

Ethernet communication for monitoring with Ethernet adapter NETA-01

General

This chapter gives information using the Ethernet adapter NETA-01 together with the DCS800.

NETA-01 - DCS800

The Ethernet communication for monitoring with the drive requires the options

NETA-01 and SDCS-COM-8.

The NETA-01 is connected to the SDCS-COM-8 usually via Ch3. Ch0 can be used as well.

Following browser based remote monitoring functions are released for DC-drives:

 Parameters Read and write parameters

 Signals

Read

 Fault logger

Show fault logger

Clear fault logger

Save faults to a file in the NETA-01

Download saved fault logger files via FTP

 Data logger

Select values and set all trigger conditions

Upload samples and show as values or as graphs

Save samples as files in the NETA-01

Download saved data logger files via FTP

 Status word

MainStatWord (8.01) is shown after clicking on the lamp

Note:

Bit 11 (EXT_CTRL_LOC) and bit 12 (RUN_ENABLE) are not used for DC-drives

Note:

Data set communication and motor control (e.g. local control of the drives via

NETA-01) are not released for the DCS800.

Related documentation

User’s Manual Ethernet Adapter Module NETA-01.

The quoted page numbers correspond to the User’s Manual.

NETA-01 configuration

The NETA-01 homepage can be called by using a browser (e.g. internet explorer).

Note:

Before connecting the NETA-01 via Ch3 with the DCS800 check, that Tool

Channel (Ch3) of the NETA-01 configuration is ticked otherwise group 51

(Fieldbus) will be overwritten.

Note:

When connecting the NETA-01 with the DCS800 make sure to use Ch3 (tool channel) on the SDCS-COM-8, otherwise group 51 (Fieldbus) will be overwritten.

Ch0 can be used too, but then group 51 (Fieldbus) will be overwritten and cannot be used for other serial communication.

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

118

More details about the NETA-01 configuration see page 55 of the User’s Manual.

Mechanical and electrical installation

The adapter module is mounted onto a standard mounting rail outside the drive.

Drive configuration

The DCS800 needs no special settings when using Ch3 concerning the released functions.

Firmware compatibility:

SDCS-CON-4: firmware version 1.8 or higher, see FirmwareVer (4.01)

SDCS-COM-8: firmware version 1.3 or higher, see Com8SwVersion (4.11)

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

119

CANopen communication with fieldbus adapter RCAN-01

General

This chapter gives additional information using the CANopen adapter RCAN-01 together with the DCS800.

RCAN-01 - DCS800

The CANopen communication with the drive requires the option RCAN-01.

Related documentation

User’s Manual CANopen Adapter Module RCAN-01.

The quoted page numbers correspond to the User’s Manual.

Overriding control configuration

Supported operation mode is PDO21 (see page 43 and 44).

EDS file

The EDS file for RCAN-01 and DCS800 is available. Please ask Your local ABB agent for the newest one concerning the current DCS800 firmware.

Mechanical and electrical installation

If not already done so insert RCAN-01 into slot 1 of the drive.

Drive configuration

The CANopen adapter is activated by means of CommModule (98.02).

Please note that the DCS800 works with the operation mode PDO21 (see page 43 and 44).

Parameter setting example 1 using group 51

Communication via group 51 is using 4 data words in each direction. The following table shows the parameter setting using group 51.

Drive parameters

CommandSel (10.01)

Ref1Sel (11.03)

CommModule (98.02)

Settings

MainCtrlWord

SpeedRef2301

Fieldbus

Comments

ModuleType (51.01)

Node ID (51.02)

Baudrate (51.03)

PDO21 Cfg (51.04)

RX-PDO21-Enable (51.05)

CANopen*

1**

8**

1

769 set node address as required

8 = 1 MBits/s

0 = Configuration via CANopen objects

1 = Configuration via RCAN-01 adapter parameters

This value has to be calculated with 300 Hex = 768 + Node ID

(51.02).

Here 768 + 1 = 769

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

120

Communication

RX-PDO21-TxType (51.06)

255

RX-PDO21-1stObj (51.07)

8197

255 = Asynchronous (see page 83)

2005 Hex = 8197 =

Transparent Control Word

(see page 62)

RX-PDO21-1stSubj (51.08)

0

RX-PDO21-2ndObj (51.09)

8198 2006 Hex = 8198 =

Transparent Reference

RX-PDO21-2ndSubj

(51.10)

RX-PDO21-3rdObj (51.11)

16409

Speed (see page 62)

0

This value has to be calculated with 4000 Hex = 16384 + parameter group number.

E.g. with TorqRefA (25.01) follows 16384 + 25 = 16409

(see page 64)

RX-PDO21-3rdSubj (51.12) 1

RX-PDO21-4thObj (51.13)

16391

This value has to be taken from the parameters index.

E.g. with TorqRefA (25.01) follows 1 (see page 64)

This value has to be calculated with 4000 Hex = 16384 + parameter group number.

E.g. with AuxCtrlWord (7.02) follows 16384 + 7 = 16391

(see page 64)

RX-PDO21-4thSubj (51.14)

2

TX-PDO21-Enable (51.15)

641

This value has to be taken from the parameters index.

E.g. with AuxCtrlWord (7.02) follows 2 (see page 64)

This value has to be calculated with 280 Hex = 640 + Node ID

(51.02).

Here 640 + 1 = 641

TX-PDO21-TxType (51.16)

255

TX-PDO21-EvTime (51.17)

10

TX-PDO21-1stObj (51.18)

8199

255 = Asynchronous (see page 83)

10 = 10 ms

2007 Hex = 8199 =

Transparent Status Word

(see page 62)

TX-PDO21-1stSubj (51.19)

0

TX-PDO21-2ndObj (51.20)

8200 2008 Hex = 8200 =

Transparent Actual Speed

(see page 62)

TX-PDO21-2ndSubj (51.21)

0

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

121

TX-PDO21-3rdObj (51.22)

TX-PDO21-3rdSubj (51.23)

TX-PDO21-4thObj (51.24)

TX-PDO21-4thSubj (51.25)

16386

9

16392

2

This value has to be calculated with 4000 Hex = 16384 + parameter group number.

E.g. with TorqRef2 (2.09) follows 16384 + 2 = 16386

(see page 64)

This value has to be taken from the parameters index.

E.g. with TorqRef2 (2.09) follows 9 (see page 64)

This value has to be calculated with 4000 Hex = 16384 + parameter group number.

E.g. with AuxStatWord (8.02) follows 16384 + 8 = 16392

(see page 64)

This value has to be taken from the parameters index.

E.g. with AuxStatWord (8.02) follows 2 (see page 64)

TransparentIProfil (51.26)

FBA PAR REFRESH

(51.27)

1

1 = Transparent

DONE, default If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA

PAR REFRESH (51.27) =

RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter.

* Read-only or automatically detected by CANopen adapter

** The values can be automatically set via the rotary switches of the RCAN-01

DCS800 parameter setting using group 51

Note:

 20.000 speed units (decimal) for speed reference [SpeedRef (23.01)] and speed actual [MotSpeed (1.04)] corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct

(2.29). That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale (50.01) respectively

M1SpeedMin (20.01) or M1SpeedMax (20.02).

Further information

RX and TX parameters 51.07, …, 51.14 and 51.18, …, 51.25 are directly connected to the desired DCS800 parameters. Take care, that the used parameters are deleted from group 90 and 92 to prevent data trouble.

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

122

Parameter setting example 2 using groups 90 and 92

Communication via groups 90 and 92 is using 4 data words in each direction. The following table shows the parameter setting using groups 90 and 92.

Drive parameters

CommandSel (10.01)

Ref1Sel (11.03)

CommModule (98.02)

Settings

MainCtrlWord

Comments

SpeedRef2301

Fieldbus

DsetXVal1 (90.01)

DsetXVal2 (90.02)

DsetXVal3 (90.03)

DsetXplus2Val1 (90.04)

DsetXplus1Val1 (92.01)

DsetXplus1Val2 (92.02)

DsetXplus1Val3 (92.03)

DsetXplus3Val1 (92.04)

701, default

2301, default

2501, default

702, default

801, default

104, default

209, default

802, default

MainCtrlWord (7.01);

output data word 1 (control word) 1 st

data word from overriding control to drive

SpeedRef (23.01);

output data word 2 (speed reference) 2 nd

data word from overriding control to drive

TorqRefA (25.01);

output data word 3 (torque reference) 3 rd

data word from overriding control to drive

AuxCtrlWord (7.02);

output data word 4 (auxiliary control word) 4 th

data word from overriding control to drive

MainStatWord (8.01);

input data word 1 (status word)

1 st

data word from drive to overriding control

MotSpeed (1.04);

input data word 2 (speed actual) 2 nd

data word from drive to overriding control

TorqRef2 (2.09);

input data word 3 (torque reference) 3 rd

data word from drive to overriding control

AuxStatWord (8.02);

input data word 4 (auxiliary status word) 4 th

data word from drive to overriding control

ModuleType (51.01)

Node ID (51.02)

Baudrate (51.03)

PDO21 Cfg (51.04)

CANopen*

1**

8**

1 set node address as required

8 = 1 MBits/s

0 = Configuration via CANopen objects

1 = Configuration via RCAN-01 adapter parameters

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

RX-PDO21-Enable (51.05)

RX-PDO21-TxType (51.06)

RX-PDO21-1stObj (51.07)

RX-PDO21-1stSubj (51.08)

RX-PDO21-2ndObj (51.09)

RX-PDO21-2ndSubj

(51.10)

RX-PDO21-3rdObj (51.11)

16384

RX-PDO21-3rdSubj (51.12) 3

RX-PDO21-4thObj (51.13)

16384

RX-PDO21-4thSubj (51.14)

TX-PDO21-Enable (51.15)

TX-PDO21-TxType (51.16)

769

255

16384

1

16384

2

7

641

255

TX-PDO21-EvTime (51.17)

10

TX-PDO21-1stObj (51.18)

16384

TX-PDO21-1stSubj (51.19)

4

TX-PDO21-2ndObj (51.20)

16384

TX-PDO21-2ndSubj (51.21)

5

123

This value has to be calculated with 300 Hex = 768 + Node ID

(51.02).

Here 768 + 1 = 769

255 = Asynchronous (see page 83)

4000 Hex = 16384 = Control

Word (see page 63);

Data set 1 word 1

1 Hex = 1 = Control Word

(see page 63);

Data set 1 word 1

4000 Hex = 16384 =

Reference 1 (see page 63);

Data set 1 word 2

2 Hex = 2 = Reference 1 (see page 63);

Data set 1 word 2

4000 Hex = 16384 =

Reference 2 (see page 63);

Data set 1 word 3

3 Hex = 3 Reference 2 (see page 63);

Data set 1 word 3

4000 Hex = 16384 =

Reference 3 (see page 63);

Data set 3 word 1

7 Hex = 7 Reference 3 (see page 63);

Data set 3 word 1

This value has to be calculated with 280 Hex = 640 + Node ID

(51.02).

Here 640 + 1 = 641

255 = Asynchronous (see page 83)

10 = 10 ms

4000 Hex = 16384 = Status

Word (see page 63);

Data set 2 word 1

4 Hex = 4 = Status Word (see page 63);

Data set 2 word 1

4000 Hex = 16384 = Actual

Value 1 (see page 63);

Data set 2 word 2

5 Hex = 5 = Actual Value 1

(see page 63);

Data set 2 word 2

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

124

TX-PDO21-3rdObj (51.22)

TX-PDO21-3rdSubj (51.23)

TX-PDO21-4thObj (51.24)

16384

6

16384

4000 Hex = 16384 = Actual

Value 2 (see page 63);

Data set 2 word 3

6 Hex = 6 = Actual Value 2

(see page 63);

Data set 2 word 3

4000 Hex = 16384 = Actual

TX-PDO21-4thSubj (51.25)

10

Value 3 (see page 63);

Data set 4 word 1

A Hex = 10 = Actual Value 3

(see page 63);

Data set 4 word 1

TransparentIProfil (51.26)

FBA PAR REFRESH

1

1 = Transparent

DONE, default

If a fieldbus parameter is

(51.27)

changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA

PAR REFRESH (51.27) =

RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter.

* Read-only or automatically detected by CANopen adapter

** The values can be automatically set via the rotary switches of the RCAN-01

DCS800 parameter setting using groups 90 and 92

Note:

 20.000 speed units (decimal) for speed reference [SpeedRef (23.01)] and speed actual [MotSpeed (1.04)] corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct

(2.29). That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale (50.01) respectively

M1SpeedMin (20.01) or M1SpeedMax (20.02).

Switch on sequence

Please see the example at the end of this chapter.

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

125

ControlNet communication with fieldbus adapter RCNA-01

General

This chapter gives additional information using the ControlNet adapter RCNA-01 together with the DCS800.

RCNA-01 - DCS800

The ControlNet communication with the drive requires the option RCNA-01.

Related documentation

User’s Manual ControlNet Adapter Module RCNA-01.

The quoted page numbers correspond to the User’s Manual.

Overriding control configuration

Please refer to the Scanner documentation for information how to configure the system for communication with RCNA-01.

EDS file

The EDS file for RCNA-01 and DCS800 is available. Please ask Your local ABB agent for the newest one concerning the current DCS800 firmware.

Mechanical and electrical installation

If not already done so insert RCNA-01 into slot 1 of the drive (see page 17).

Drive configuration

The ControlNet adapter is activated by means of CommModule (98.02).

Please note that the DCS800 works with the instances User transparent

assembly and Vendor specific assembly.

The instances Basic speed control and Extended speed control (instance 20 /

70 and 21 / 71) are supported since firmware version 2.x. With these instances it is not possible to use the full flexibility of the DCS800.

For more information see User’s Manual.

Parameter setting example 1 using ABB Drives assembly

ABB Drives assembly is using 2 data words in each direction. The following table shows the parameter setting using this profile.

Drive parameters

CommandSel (10.01)

Ref1Sel (11.03)

CommModule (98.02)

Settings

MainCtrlWord

Comments

SpeedRef2301

Fieldbus

DsetXVal1 (90.01)

701, default

MainCtrlWord (7.01);

output data word 1 (control word) 1 st

data word from overriding control to drive

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

126

Communication

DsetXVal2 (90.02)

DsetXplus1Val1 (92.01)

DsetXplus1Val2 (92.02)

2301, default

801, default

104, default

SpeedRef (23.01);

output data word 2 (speed reference) 2 nd

data word from overriding control to drive

MainStatWord (8.01);

input data word 1 (status word)

1 st

data word from drive to overriding control

MotSpeed (1.04);

input data word 2 (speed actual) 2 nd

data word from drive to overriding control

ModuleType (51.01)

Module macid (51.02)

CONTROLNET*

4** set node address as required

Module baud rate (51.03)

2**

HW/SW option (51.04)

0

2 = 500 kBits/s

0 = Hardware

Stop function (51.05)

NA

1 = Software not applicable when using

ABB Drives assembly

Output instance (51.06)

Input instance (51.07)

Output I/O par 1 (51.08) to

Input I/O par 9 (51.25)

100

101

NA

100 = ABB Drives assembly

101 = ABB Drives assembly not applicable when using

ABB Drives assembly

VSA I/O size (51.26)

FBA PAR REFRESH

(51.27)

NA not applicable when using

ABB Drives assembly

DONE, default If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA

PAR REFRESH (51.27) =

RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter.

* Read-only or automatically detected by ControlNet adapter.

** If HW/SW option (51.04) = 0 (Hardware), the values are automatically set via the rotary switches of the RCNA-01.

DCS800 parameter setting using ABB Drives assembly

Note:

 20.000 speed units (decimal) for speed reference [SpeedRef (23.01)] and speed actual [MotSpeed (1.04)] corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct

(2.29). That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale (50.01) respectively

M1SpeedMin (20.01) or M1SpeedMax (20.02).

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

127

Parameter setting example 2 using Vendor specific assembly

Vendor specific assembly can run with up to 9 data words in each direction. The following table shows the parameter setting using this profile.

Drive parameters

CommandSel (10.01)

Ref1Sel (11.03)

CommModule (98.02)

Settings

MainCtrlWord

Comments

SpeedRef2301

Fieldbus

ModuleType (51.01)

Module macid (51.02)

CONTROLNET*

4**

Module baud rate (51.03)

5

HW/SW option (51.04)

0 set node address as required

5 = 5 MBits/s

0 = Hardware

Stop function (51.05)

Output instance (51.06)

NA

102

1 = Software not applicable when using

Vendor specific assembly

102 = Vendor specific

Input instance (51.07)

Output I/O par 1 (51.08) to

Input I/O par 9 (51.25)

103

1 - 18

assembly

103 = Vendor specific

assembly

Set these values according table:

Setting of parameter groups

51, 90 and 92 depending on desired data words and according to the desired numbers of data words

VSA I/O size (51.26)

FBA PAR REFRESH

(51.27)

1 - 9 Defines the length of the

Vendor specific assembly in pairs of data words. E.g. a parameter value of 4 means 4 word as output and 4 words as input.

DONE, default

If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA

PAR REFRESH (51.27) =

RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter.

* Read-only or automatically detected by ControlNet adapter

** If HW/SW option (51.04) = 0 (Hardware), the values are automatically set via the rotary switches of the RCNA-01

DCS800 parameter setting using Vendor specific assembly

Note:

 20.000 speed units (decimal) for speed reference [SpeedRef (23.01)] and speed actual [MotSpeed (1.04)] corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct

(2.29). That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale (50.01) respectively

M1SpeedMin (20.01) or M1SpeedMax (20.02).

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

128

Setting of parameter groups 51, 90 and 92

*For proper communication shown values have to be used

Setting of parameter groups 51, 90 and 92 depending on desired data words

Further information

Output and input parameters 51.08, …, 51.25 can also be connected directly to the desired DCS800 parameters. In this case please take care that the RCNA-01 adapter gets the changed values and also take care, that the used parameters are deleted from group 90 to prevent data trouble.

Switch on sequence

Please see the example at the end of this chapter.

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

129

DeviceNet communication with fieldbus adapter RDNA-01

General

This chapter gives additional information using the DeviceNet adapter RDNA-01 together with the DCS800.

RDNA-01 - DCS800

The DeviceNet communication with the drive requires the option RDNA-01.

Related documentation

User’s Manual DeviceNet Adapter Module RDNA-01.

The quoted page numbers correspond to the User’s Manual.

Overriding control configuration

Supported assemblies with DCS800 are ABB Drives assembly (Output instance:

100; Input instance: 101) and User specific assembly (Output instance: 102;

Input instance: 103) (see page 35).

The assemblies Basic speed control and Extended speed control (20 / 70 and

21 / 71) are supported since DCS800 firmware version 2.x.

EDS file

The EDS file for RDNA-01 and DCS800 is available. Please ask Your local ABB agent for the newest one concerning the current DCS800 firmware.

Mechanical and electrical installation

If not already done so insert RDNA-01 into slot 1 of the drive (see page 21).

Drive configuration

The DeviceNet adapter is activated by means of CommModule (98.02).

Please note that the DCS800 works with the instances ABB Drives assembly and

User specific assembly.

The instances Basic speed control and Extended speed control (20 / 70 and 21

/ 71) are supported since firmware version 2.x. With these instances it is not possible to use the full flexibility of the DCS800.

For more information see User’s Manual.

Parameter setting example 1 using ABB Drives assembly

ABB Drives assembly is using 2 data words in each direction. The following table shows the parameter setting using this profile.

Drive parameters

CommandSel (10.01)

Ref1Sel (11.03)

CommModule (98.02)

Settings

MainCtrlWord

Comments

SpeedRef2301

Fieldbus

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

130

Communication

DsetXVal1 (90.01)

DsetXVal2 (90.02)

DsetXplus1Val1 (92.01)

DsetXplus1Val2 (92.02)

701, default

2301, default

801, default

104, default

MainCtrlWord (7.01);

output data word 1 (control word) 1 st

data word from overriding control to drive

SpeedRef (23.01);

output data word 2 (speed reference) 2 nd

data word from overriding control to drive

MainStatWord (8.01);

input data word 1 (status word)

1 st

data word from drive to overriding control

MotSpeed (1.04);

input data word 2 (speed actual) 2 nd

data word from drive to overriding control

ModuleType (51.01)

Module macid (51.02)

Module baud rate (51.03)

HW/SW option (51.04)

Stop function (51.05)

DEVICENET*

4**

2**

0

NA set node address as required

2 = 500 kBits/s

0 = Hardware

1 = Software not applicable when using

ABB Drives assembly

Output instance (51.06)

Input instance (51.07)

Output I/O par 1 (51.08) to

Input I/O par 9 (51.25)

100

101

NA

100 = ABB Drives assembly

101 = ABB Drives assembly not applicable when using

ABB Drives assembly

VSA I/O size (51.26)

FBA PAR REFRESH

(51.27)

NA not applicable when using

ABB Drives assembly

DONE, default

If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA

PAR REFRESH (51.27) =

RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter.

* Read-only or automatically detected by DeviceNet adapter

** If HW/SW option (51.04) = 0 (Hardware), the values are automatically set via the DIP switches of the RDNA-01

DCS800 parameter setting using ABB Drives assembly

Note:

 20.000 speed units (decimal) for speed reference [SpeedRef (23.01)] and speed actual [MotSpeed (1.04)] corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct

(2.29). That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale (50.01) respectively

M1SpeedMin (20.01) or M1SpeedMax (20.02).

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

131

Parameter setting example 2 using User specific assembly

User specific assembly can run with up to 9 data words in each direction. The following table shows the parameter setting using this profile.

Drive parameters

CommandSel (10.01)

Ref1Sel (11.03)

CommModule (98.02)

Settings

MainCtrlWord

Comments

SpeedRef2301

Fieldbus

ModuleType (51.01)

Module macid (51.02)

DEVICENET*

4**

Module baud rate (51.03)

2**

HW/SW option (51.04)

0

Stop function (51.05)

Output instance (51.06)

NA

102 set node address as required

2 = 500 kBits/s

0 = Hardware

1 = Software not applicable when using

User specific assembly

102 = User specific

assembly

103 = User specific

Input instance (51.07)

103

Output I/O par 1 (51.08) to

Input I/O par 9 (51.25)

1 - 18

assembly

Set these values according table:

Setting of parameter groups

51, 90 and 92 depending on desired data words and according to the desired numbers of data words

VSA I/O size (51.26)

FBA PAR REFRESH

(51.27)

1 - 9

Defines the length of the User

specific assembly in pairs of data words. E.g. a parameter value of 4 means 4 word as output and 4 words as input.

DONE, default

If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA

PAR REFRESH (51.27) =

RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter.

* Read-only or automatically detected by DeviceNet adapter

** If HW/SW option (51.04) = 0 (Hardware), the values are automatically set via the DIP switches of the RDNA-01

DCS800 parameter setting using User specific assembly

Note:

 20.000 speed units (decimal) for speed reference [SpeedRef (23.01)] and speed actual [MotSpeed (1.04)] corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct

(2.29). That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale (50.01) respectively

M1SpeedMin (20.01) or M1SpeedMax (20.02).

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

132

Setting of parameter groups 51, 90 and 92

*For proper communication shown values have to be used

Setting of parameter groups 51, 90 and 92 depending on desired data words

Further information

Output and input parameters 51.08, …, 51.25 can also be connected directly to the desired DCS800 parameters. In this case please take care that the RDNA-01 adapter gets the changed values and also take care, that the used parameters are deleted from group 90 to prevent data trouble.

Switch on sequence

Please see the example at the end of this chapter.

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

133

Ethernet/IP communication with fieldbus adapter RETA-01

General

This chapter gives additional information using the Ethernet adapter RETA-01 together with the DCS800.

RETA-01 - DCS800

The Ethernet/IP communication with the drive requires the option RETA-01.

Related documentation

User’s Manual Ethernet Adapter Module RETA-01.

The quoted page numbers correspond to the User’s Manual.

EDS file

The EDS file for RETA-01 and DCS800 is available. Please ask Your local ABB agent for the newest one concerning the current DCS800 firmware.

Mechanical and electrical installation

If not already done so insert RETA-01 into slot 1 of the drive.

Drive configuration

The Ethernet adapter is activated by means of CommModule (98.02).

Please note that the DCS800 works with the instances 102 / 103, if Protocol

(51.16) is set to 2 (Ethernet/IP ABB Drives communication profile).

The instances 100 / 101, 20 / 70 and 21 / 71 are supported since firmware version

2.x, if Protocol (51.16) is set to 1 (Ethernet/IP AC/DC communication profile).

With these instances it is not possible to use the full flexibility of the DCS800.

For more information see User’s Manual.

Parameter setting example using Ethernet/IP ABB Drives communication profile

Ethernet/IP ABB Drives communication profile uses up to 4 data words in each direction by default. The internal connection from and to the DCS800 has to be done by means of parameter group 51.

Ethernet/IP ABB Drives communication profile uses up to 12 data words in each direction. The configuration has to be done via fieldbus link configuration using Vendor Specific Drive I/O Object (Class 91h).

Drive parameters

CommandSel (10.01)

Ref1Sel (11.03)

CommModule (98.02)

Settings

MainCtrlWord

Comments

SpeedRef2301

Fieldbus

DsetXVal1 (90.01)

701, default

MainCtrlWord (7.01);

output data word 1 (control word) 1 st

data word from overriding control to drive

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

134

Communication

DsetXVal2 (90.02)

DsetXplus1Val1 (92.01)

DsetXplus1Val2 (92.02)

ModuleType (51.01)

Comm rate (51.02)

DHCP (51.03)

IP address 1 (51.04)

IP address 2 (51.05)

IP address 3 (51.06)

IP address 4 (51.07)

Subnet mask 1 (51.08)

Subnet mask 2 (51.09)

Subnet mask 3 (51.10)

Subnet mask 4 (51.11)

GW address 1 (51.12)

GW address 2 (51.13)

GW address 3 (51.14)

GW address 4 (51.15)

Protocol (51.16)

Modbus timeout (51.17)

Stop function (51.18)

Output 1 (51.19)

Output 2 (51.20)

Output 3 (51.21)

2301, default

801, default

104, default

SpeedRef (23.01);

output data word 2 (speed reference) 2 nd

data word from overriding control to drive

MainStatWord (8.01);

input data word 1 (status word)

1 st

data word from drive to overriding control

MotSpeed (1.04);

input data word 2 (speed actual) 2 nd

data word from drive to overriding control

ETHERNET

TCP*

0

0

192**

168**

0**

1**

Auto-negotiate; automatic, set baud rate as required

DHCP disabled;

IP address setting from following parameters e.g. IP address:

192.168.0.1

255.255.255.0

255

255

0

0 e.g. gateway address:

0.0.0.0

0

0

0

2

1 = Ethernet/IP AC/DC

communication profile

22

0

1

2 = Ethernet/IP ABB Drives

communication profile

0 = no monitoring

1 = 100 ms

22 = 2200 ms

0 = Ramp stop

2

3 data word 1; setting via parameter 90.01 data word 2; setting via parameter 90.02 data word 3; setting via parameter 90.03

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

135

Output 4 (51.22)

Input 1 (51.23)

Input 2 (51.24)

Input 3 (51.25)

Input 4 (51.26)

7

4

5

6

10 data word 4; setting via parameter 90.04 data word 1; setting via parameter 92.01 data word 2; setting via parameter 92.02 data word 3; setting via parameter 92.03 data word 4; setting via parameter 92.04

FBA PAR REFRESH

(51.27)

DONE, default

If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA

PAR REFRESH (51.27) =

RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter.

* Read-only or automatically detected by Ethernet adapter

** If all DIP switches (S1) are OFF; the IP address is set according to parameters

51.04, …, 51.07. In case at least one DIP switch is on, the last byte of the IP address [IP address 4 (51.07)] is set according to the DIP switches (see page 42).

DCS800 parameter setting using Ethernet/IP ABB Drives communication

profile

Note:

 20.000 speed units (decimal) for speed reference [SpeedRef (23.01)] and speed actual [MotSpeed (1.04)] corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct

(2.29). That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale (50.01) respectively

M1SpeedMin (20.01) or M1SpeedMax (20.02).

Up to 4 data words

The content of Input/Output 1 to 4 can be configured with the RETA-01 configuration parameters. Please see table RETA-01 Ethernet/IP configuration parameters, which contains all the necessary basic settings.

Up to 12 data words

The DCS800 supports up to 12 data words in each direction. The first configuration of the RETA-01 adapter has to be done according to the table RETA-01

Ethernet/IP configuration parameters, which contains all the necessary basic settings.

The additional desired data words have to be configured via the fieldbus network using Vendor Specific Drive I/O Object (Class 91h). The adapter will automatically save the configuration.

The table RETA-01 Ethernet/IP configuration parameters shows the index configuration numbers and the corresponding data words (via data sets).

Please note:

The grayed index is also addressed via group 51, please set the outputs and inputs to the same configuration numbers as shown in the table

RETA-01 Ethernet/IP configuration parameters.

Example:

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

136

AuxCtrlWord (7.03).

To do:

AuxCtrlWord (7.03) is the default content of DsetXplus2Val2 (90.05). The

corresponding index configuration number of DsetXplus2Val2 (90.05) is

8. So the configuration has to be done using the following values in the

IP address (all values are in hex): service

0x10

(write single) class

0x91

(drive IO map function) instance

0x01

(index05) data 08 00 (2 char hex value)

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

137

RETA-01 Ethernet/IP configuration parameters

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Communication

138

After configuration the packed telegram is defined:

Switch on sequence

Please see the example at the end of this chapter.

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

139

Modbus (RTU) communication with fieldbus adapter RMBA-01

General

This chapter gives additional information using the Modbus adapter RMBA-01 together with the DCS800.

RMBA-01 - DCS800

The Modbus communication with the drive requires the option RMBA-01.

The protocol Modbus RTU (Remote Terminal Unit using serial communication) is supported.

Related documentation

User’s Manual Modbus Adapter Module RMBA-01.

The quoted page numbers correspond to the User’s Manual.

Mechanical and electrical installation

If not already done so insert RMBA-01 into a slot of the drive. Slot 1 has to be used, if the Modbus should control the drive.

Drive configuration

The Modbus adapter is activated by means of CommModule (98.02) and

ModBusModule2 (98.08).

The serial communication parameters of the RMBA-01 adapter have to be set by means of group 52.

Up to 12 data words in each direction are possible.

Parameter setting example …

The Modbus adapter can be either used to control the drive with the overriding control system or only for monitoring purposes together with another fieldbus which is responsible for the control. Therefore different parameter settings are necessary.

… when controlling a drive

In data set mode (cyclic communication) the drive will be controlled from the overriding control using the Modbus.

Up to 12 data words in each direction are possible. The following table shows the parameter settings.

Drive parameters

CommandSel (10.01)

Ref1Sel (11.03)

CommModule (98.02)

ModBusModule2 (98.08)

Settings

MainCtrlWord

Comments

SpeedRef2301

Modbus

Slot1

StationNumber (52.01)

BaudRate (52.02)

Parity (52.03)

1, …, 247

5

4 desired station number

5 = 9600 Baud

4 = Even

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

140

Communication

DsetXVal1 (90.01)

DsetXVal2 (90.02)

DsetXVal3 (90.03)

701, default

2301, default

2501, default

MainCtrlWord (7.01);

output data word 1 (control word) 1 st

data word from overriding control to drive

(40001 => data word 1.1)

SpeedRef (23.01);

output data word 2 (speed reference) 2 nd

data word from overriding control to drive

(40002 => data word 1.2)

TorqRefA (25.01);

output data word 3 (torque reference) 3 rd

data word from overriding control to drive

(40003 => data word 1.3) up to, …,

DsetXplus6Val3 (90.12)

0, default not connected; output data word 12 (not connected) 12 th

data word from overriding control to drive

(40021 <= data word 7.3)

DsetXplus1Val1 (92.01)

DsetXplus1Val2 (92.02)

DsetXplus1Val3 (92.03)

801, default

104, default

209, default

MainStatWord (8.01);

input data word 1 (status word)

1 st

data word from drive to overriding control

(40004 <= data word 2.1)

MotSpeed (1.04);

input data word 2 (speed actual) 2 nd

data word from drive to overriding control

(40005 <= data word 2.2)

TorqRef2 (2.09);

input data word 3 (torque reference) 3 rd

data word from drive to overriding control

(40006 <= data word 2.3) up to, …, input data word 12 (alarm word

2) 12 th

data word from drive to overriding control

(40024 <= data word 8.3)

DCS800 parameter setting using a Modbus controlling the drive

Note:

New settings of group 52 take effect only after the next power up of the adapter.

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

141

Note:

 20.000 speed units (decimal) for speed reference [SpeedRef (23.01)] and speed actual [MotSpeed (1.04)] corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct

(2.29). That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale (50.01) respectively

M1SpeedMin (20.01) or M1SpeedMax (20.02).

… when used for monitoring only

For monitoring only read commands are supported.

Up to 24 data words for monitoring are possible, because the 12 data words written to by the overriding control (see group 90) can also be read. The following table shows the parameter settings.

Drive parameters

CommModule (98.02)

Settings Comments

ModBusModule2 (98.08)

FldBusModbus FldBusModbus means controlling the drive by means of another R-type fieldbus adapter - see description of

CommModule (98.02)

Slot2 or

Slot3

depends on the location of the adapter

StationNumber (52.01)

BaudRate (52.02)

Parity (52.03)

1, …, 247

5

4 desired station number

5 = 9600 Baud

4 = Even

DsetXVal1 (90.01)

DsetXVal2 (90.02)

DsetXVal3 (90.03)

701, default

2301, default

2501, default

MainCtrlWord (7.01);

output data word 1 (control word) 1 st

data word from overriding control to drive

(40001 => data word 1.1)

SpeedRef (23.01);

output data word 2 (speed reference) 2 nd

data word from overriding control to drive

(40002 => data word 1.2)

TorqRefA (25.01);

output data word 3 (torque reference) 3 rd

data word from overriding control to drive

(40003 => data word 1.3) up to, …,

DsetXplus6Val3 (90.12)

0, default not connected; output data word 12 (not connected) 12 th

data word from overriding control to drive

(40021 <= data word 7.3)

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

142

DsetXplus1Val1 (92.01)

DsetXplus1Val2 (92.02)

DsetXplus1Val3 (92.03)

801, default

104, default

209, default

MainStatWord (8.01);

input data word 1 (status word)

1 st

data word from drive to overriding control

(40004 <= data word 2.1)

MotSpeed (1.04);

input data word 2 (speed actual) 2 nd

data word from drive to overriding control

(40005 <= data word 2.2)

TorqRef2 (2.09);

input data word 3 (torque reference) 3 rd

data word from drive to overriding control

(40006 <= data word 2.3) up to, …, input data word 12 (alarm word

2) 12 th

data word from drive to overriding control

(40024 <= data word 8.3)

DCS800 parameter setting using a Modbus monitoring the drive

Note:

New settings of group 52 take effect only after the next power up of the adapter.

Note:

 20.000 speed units (decimal) for speed reference [SpeedRef (23.01)] and speed actual [MotSpeed (1.04)] corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct

(2.29). That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale (50.01) respectively

M1SpeedMin (20.01) or M1SpeedMax (20.02).

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Setting of PLC, parameter groups 90 and 92

143

Setting of PLC, parameter groups 90 and 92 depending on desired data words

Switch on sequence

Please see the example at the end of this chapter.

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

144

Modbus/TCP communication with fieldbus adapter RETA-01

General

This chapter gives additional information using the Ethernet adapter RETA-01 together with the DCS800.

RETA-01 - DCS800

The Modbus/TCP communication with the drive requires the option RETA-01.

The protocol Modbus TCP (Ethernet) is supported.

Related documentation

User’s Manual Ethernet Adapter Module RETA-01.

The quoted page numbers correspond to the User’s Manual.

Mechanical and electrical installation

If not already done so insert RETA-01 into slot 1 of the drive.

Drive configuration

The Ethernet adapter is activated by means of CommModule (98.02).

Please note that the DCS800 works with Modbus/TCP, if Protocol (51.16) is set to

0 (Modbus/TCP).

Parameter setting example using Modbus/TCP

Modbus/TCP is using 4 data words in each direction. The following table shows the parameter setting using this protocol.

Drive parameters

CommandSel (10.01)

Ref1Sel (11.03)

CommModule (98.02)

Settings

MainCtrlWord

SpeedRef2301

Fieldbus

Comments

DsetXVal1 (90.01)

DsetXVal2 (90.02)

DsetXplus1Val1 (92.01)

DsetXplus1Val2 (92.02)

701, default

2301, default

801, default

104, default

MainCtrlWord (7.01); output data word 1 (control word)

1 st

data word from overriding control to drive

SpeedRef (23.01); output data word 2 (speed reference) 2 nd

data word from overriding control to drive

MainStatWord (8.01); input data word 1 (status word) 1 st data word from drive to overriding control

MotSpeed (1.04); input data word 2 (speed actual)

2 nd

data word from drive to overriding control

ModuleType (51.01)

ETHERNET

TCP*

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Comm rate (51.02)

DHCP (51.03)

IP address 1 (51.04)

IP address 2 (51.05)

IP address 3 (51.06)

IP address 4 (51.07)

Subnet mask 1 (51.08)

Subnet mask 2 (51.09)

Subnet mask 3 (51.10)

Subnet mask 4 (51.11)

GW address 1 (51.12)

GW address 2 (51.13)

GW address 3 (51.14)

GW address 4 (51.15)

Protocol (51.16)

Modbus timeout (51.17)

Stop function (51.18)

Output 1 (51.19)

Output 2 (51.20)

Output 3 (51.21)

Output 4 (51.22)

Input 1 (51.23)

Input 2 (51.24)

Input 3 (51.25)

Input 4 (51.26)

FBA PAR REFRESH

(51.27)

145

0

0

192**

168**

0**

1**

Auto-negotiate; automatic, set baud rate as required

DHCP disabled;

IP address setting from following parameters e.g. IP address:

192.168.0.1

255.255.255.0

255

255

0

0 e.g. gateway address:

0.0.0.0

0

0

0

0

22

NA

1

0 = Modbus/TCP

0 = no monitoring

1 = 100 ms

22 = 2200 ms not applicable when using

Modbus/TCP data word 1; setting via

2

3

7

4

5

6

10 parameter 90.01 data word 2; setting via parameter 90.02 data word 3; setting via parameter 90.03 data word 4; setting via parameter 90.04 data word 1; setting via parameter 92.01 data word 2; setting via parameter 92.02 data word 3; setting via parameter 92.03 data word 4; setting via parameter 92.04

DONE, default If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA

PAR REFRESH (51.27) =

RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter.

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

146

* Read-only or automatically detected by Ethernet adapter

** If all DIP switches (S1) are OFF; the IP address is set according to parameters

51.04, …, 51.07. In case at least one DIP switch is on, the last byte of the IP address [IP address 4 (51.07)] is set according to the DIP switches (see page 42).

DCS800 parameter setting using Modbus/TCP protocol

Note:

 20.000 speed units (decimal) for speed reference [SpeedRef (23.01)] and speed actual [MotSpeed (1.04)] corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct

(2.29). That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale (50.01) respectively

M1SpeedMin (20.01) or M1SpeedMax (20.02).

Switch on sequence

Please see the example at the end of this chapter.

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

147

Profibus communication with fieldbus adapter RPBA-01

General

This chapter gives additional information using the Profibus adapter RPBA-01 together with the DCS800.

RPBA-01 - DCS800

The Profibus communication with the drive requires the option RPBA-01.

Related documentation

User’s Manual PROFIBUS DP Adapter Module RPBA-01.

The quoted page numbers correspond to the User’s Manual.

Overriding control configuration

Supported operation mode is VENDOR SPECIFIC for ABB Drives (see page 19 and 20).

The RPBA-01 uses data consistent communication, meaning that the whole data frame is transmitted during a single program cycle. Some overriding controls handle this internally, but others must be programmed to transmit data consistent telegrams.

Mechanical and electrical installation

If not already done so insert RPBA-01 into slot 1 of the drive (see page 21).

Drive configuration

The Profibus adapter is activated by means of CommModule (98.02) (see page

22).

Please note that the DCS800 works only with the ABB Drives profile.

Parameter setting example 1 using PPO Type 1

ABB Drives profile (Vendor-specific) with PPO Type 1 (DP-V0) (see page 25).

The first two data words (PZD1 OUT, PZD2 OUT) from the overriding control to the drive are fixed connected as control word and speed reference at the Profibus side and cannot be changed.

The first two data words (PZD1 IN, PZD2 IN) from the drive to the overriding control are fixed connected as status word and speed actual at the Profibus side and cannot be changed.

Drive parameters

CommandSel (10.01)

Ref1Sel (11.03)

CommModule (98.02)

Settings

MainCtrlWord

SpeedRef2301

Fieldbus

Comments

DsetXVal1 (90.01)

701, default

MainCtrlWord (7.01);

PZD1 OUT (control word) 1 st data word from overriding control to drive

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

148

DsetXVal2 (90.02)

DsetXplus1Val1 (92.01)

DsetXplus1Val2 (92.02)

2301, default

801, default

104, default

SpeedRef (23.01);

PZD2 OUT (speed reference)

2 nd

data word from overriding control to drive

MainStatWord (8.01);

PZD1 IN (status word) 1 st

data word from drive to overriding control

MotSpeed (1.04);

PZD2 IN (speed actual) 2 nd data word from drive to overriding control

ModuleType (51.01)

Node address (51.02)

Baud rate (51.03)

PPO-type (51.04)

PROFIBUS DP*

4 set node address as required

1500*

PPO1*

DP Mode (51.21)

FBA PAR REFRESH

(51.27)

0

DONE, default If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA

PAR REFRESH (51.27) =

RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter.

* Read-only or automatically detected by Profibus adapter

DCS800 parameter setting using PPO Type 1

Note:

 20.000 speed units (decimal) for speed reference [SpeedRef (23.01)] and speed actual [MotSpeed (1.04)] corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct

(2.29). That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale (50.01) respectively

M1SpeedMin (20.01) or M1SpeedMax (20.02).

Parameter setting example 2 using PPO types 2, 4 and 5

The first two data words (PZD1 OUT, PZD2 OUT) from the overriding control to the drive are fixed connected as control word and speed reference at the Profibus side and cannot be changed.

The first two data words (PZD1 IN, PZD2 IN) from the drive to the overriding control are fixed connected as status word and speed actual at the Profibus side and cannot be changed.

Further data words are to be connected to desired parameters respectively signals by means of parameters in group 51:

PZD3 OUT (51.05) means 3 rd

data word from overriding control to drive,

PZD3 IN (51.06) means 3 rd

data word from Drive to overriding control to

PZD10 OUT (51.18) means 10 th

PZD10 IN (51.19) means 10 th

data word from overriding control to drive,

data word from drive to overriding control or by means of setting parameters in group 90 and group 92.

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Communication via group 51

E.g. the 3 rd

data word from overriding control to drive should be the torque reference and the 3 rd

data word from the drive to the overriding control should be the actual motor torque. Therefore following settings have to be made:

PZD3 OUT (51.05) = 2501 [TorqRefA (25.01)] and

PZD3 IN (51.06) = 107 [MotTorqFilt (1.07)].

After changing parameters in group 51 please don’t forget to reset the RPBA-01 adapter by means of FBA PAR REFRESH (51.27) = RESET. Now the corresponding parameters in group 90 and group 92 are disabled.

Attention:

Make sure, that the used parameters, like TorqRefA (25.01) are removed from groups 90 and 91.

PROFIBUS DP

RPBA-01 SDCS-CON-4

CYCLIC

DCS800

PZD1 out

PZD2 out

PZD3 out

:

PZD10 out

3

19

51.05

:

51.19

3...19

>100

6...22

51.06

:

51.20

>100

90.01

90.02

90.03

:

90.10

Parameter,

Signals

PZD1 in

PZD2 in

PZD3 in

:

PZD10 in

6

22

92.01

92.02

92.03

:

92.10

Parameter,

Signals

149

PB setting data words.dsf

Setting of data words using only group 51 or using group 90 and group 92

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

150

Communication via group 90 and group 92

The other possibility - perhaps more familiar - is to connect via group 90 and group

92.

Again the 3 rd

data word from overriding control to drive should be the torque reference and the 3 rd

data word from the drive to the overriding control should be the actual motor torque. Therefore following settings have to be made (values see table below):

PZD3 OUT (51.05) = 3 and

PZD3 IN (51.06) = 6.

After changing parameters in group 51 please don’t forget to reset the RPBA-01 adapter by means of FBA PAR REFRESH (51.27) = RESET. Now the corresponding parameters in group 90 and group 92 are enabled. Following settings have to be made now:

DsetXVal3 (90.03) = 2501 [TorqRefA (25.01)] and

DsetXplus1Val3 (92.03) = 107 [MotTorqFilt (1.07)].

Communication

Setting of data words using group 90 and group 92

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

151

Switch on sequence

Dec.

Hex.

Bit 15 ... 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

Reset

Off (before On)

On (main cont. On)

Run (with reference)

1 x x 1 x x x x x x x

1270 04F6

1 0 0 0 x x x 0 1 1 0

1142 0476

1 0 0 0 x x x 0 1 1 1

1143 0477

1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1151 047F

E-Stop 1 x x x 1 1 1 1 0 1 1

1147 047B

Start inhibit 1 x x x x x x x x 0 x

1140 0474

Examples for the MainCtrlWord (7.01)

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Communication

152

Data set table

A lot of fieldbus communications use the data set table to transmit data words. The next table shows the configuration number of each data word and the corresponding pointer:

2.2

2.3

3.1

3.2

3.3

4.1

4.2

1.1

1.2

1.3

2.1

4.3

5.1

5.2

5.3

6.1

6.2

6.3

9

10

11

7

8

5

6

1

2

3

4

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

90.01

90.02

90.03

90.04

90.05

90.06

90.07

90.08

90.09

92.01

92.02

92.03

92.04

92.05

92.06

92.07

92.08

92.09

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

19

20

21

22

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

8.2

8.3

9.1

9.2

9.3

10.1

10.2

7.1

7.2

7.3

8.1

10.3

11.1

11.2

11.3

12.1

12.2

12.3

90.10

90.11

90.12

90.13

90.14

90.15

90.16

90.17

90.18

92.10

92.11

92.12

92.13

92.14

92.15

92.16

92.17

92.18

13.1

13.2

13.3

14.1

14.2

14.3

15.1

15.2

15.3

16.1

16.2

16.3

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

37

38

39

40

91.01

91.02

91.03

91.04

91.05

91.06

Configuration numbers of each data word and its corresponding pointer

93.01

93.02

93.03

93.04

93.05

93.06

Communication

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

153

Adaptive Program (AP)

Chapter overview

This chapter describes the basics of the Application Program and instructs how to build an application. All needed parameters can be found in the groups 83 to 86.

What is the Adaptive Program

Conventionally, the user can control the operation of the drive by parameters. Each parameter has a fixed set of choices or a setting range. The parameters make adapting of the drive easy, but the choices are limited. It is not possible to customize the drive any further. AP makes customizing possible without the need of a special programming tool or language:

 AP is using function blocks,

 DWL AP is the programming and documentation tool.

The maximum size of AP is 16 function blocks. The program may consist of several separate functions.

Features

The Adaptive Program of DCS800 provides the following features:

 16 function blocks

 more than 20 block types

 password protection

 4 different cycle times selectable

 shift functions for function blocks

 debug functions

• output forcing

• breakpoint

• single step

• single cycle

 additional output write pointer parameter for each block (group 86)

 10 additional user constants (group 85) used as data container

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Adaptive Program

154

How to build the program

The programmer connects a function block to other blocks through a Block

Parameter Set. The sets are also used for reading values from the firmware and transferring data to the firmware. Each Block Parameter Set consists of six parameters in group 84 and a write pointer in group 86.

The programmer connects a function block to other blocks through a Block

Parameter Set. The sets are also used for reading values from the firmware and transferring data to the firmware. Each Block Parameter Set consists of six parameters in group 84 and a write pointer in group 86. The figure below shows the use of Block Parameter Set 1 in the firmware (parameters 84.04 to 84.09 and

86.01):

Block1Type (84.04) selects the function block type.

Block1In1 (84.05) selects the source of IN1. A negative value means that the source will be inverted.

Block1In2 (84.06) selects the source of IN2. A negative value means that the source will be inverted.

Block1In3 (84.07) selects the source of IN3. A negative value means that the source will be inverted.

Block1Attrib (84.08) defines the attributes of the inputs.

Block1Output (84.09) provides the value of the function block output, which can be used further for other input selections. The user cannot edit this parameter value.

 The output value is also available in write pointer Block1Out (86.01).

Block1Out (86.01) contains the destination parameter, into which the value

is written.

How to connect the Application Program with the firmware

The outputs of the Adaptive Program need to be connected to the firmware. For that purpose there are two possibilities:

 The outputs, e.g. Block1Output (84.09), can be selected for further functions.

 The output values are available in the write pointers, e.g. Block1Out (86.01).

These parameters contain the destination parameters, into which the values are written.

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

155

Block Parameter Set for block 1

Block Parameter Set 1

Select

Type

ABS

...

XOR

84.04

Select

Input 1

Act. Signal/

Parameter table

1.01

1.02

...

99.99

84.05

Select

Input 2

0

1

0

1

INT

Boolean

Signal

Output

Read pointer of

MF channel group 70

AP FB group 84

Dataset table group 92

DCS Link

Mailbox group 94

84.06

Select

Input 3

INT

Boolean e.g.

I1

ADD

+

I2 O

I3

Function

84.09

Write pointer

0

1

INT

Boolean

86.01

84.07

Set

Attribute

15 0 Bit

HEX

84.08

input 3 bit sel.

input 2 bit sel.

input 1 bit sel.

3 2 1

Input

To use an input as a constant value, the bit belonging to the input must be set high.

This function offers the opportunity to isolate a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word. It is used to connect the Boolean inputs of a function block to a certain bit of a packed Boolean word. With:

Bit 0 == 0000 == 0h

Bit 1 == 0001 == 1h

Example:

Add a constant value and an external additional reference to the speed reference:

1. Set 84.04 = 2 (selection of ADD function)

2. Set 84.05 = xx.xx (selection of the speed reference for Input 1)

3. Set 84.06 = xx.xx (selection of an external ref for Input 2)

4. Set 84.07 = 1500 (constant value for Input 3)

5. Set 84.08 = 4000h (because Input 3 = constant

 Bit 14=1  4000h)

6. Set 86.01 = xx.xx (write processed value to destination parameter for further processing)

7. 84.09: contains the processed value

Act. Signal/

Parameter table

7.01

7.02

...

99.99

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

156

How to control the execution of the program

The Adaptive Program executes the function blocks in numerical order according to the block number 1, …, 16. All blocks use the same time level. This cannot be changed by the user. The user can:

 select the operation mode of the program (stop, start, editing, single cycling, single stepping)

 adjust the execution time level of the program and

 activate or de-activate blocks.

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

DWL AP

General

Another way to create applications is with DWL AP. It is a program plugged into

DriveWindow Light and can be opened with Tools and DriveAP for DCS800:

157

Important keys and buttons

DWL AP is controlled by means of following keys and buttons:

Keys and buttons

Ctrl + left mouse button on a box

or function block

Shift + left mouse button on the

red cross

Function

Change / insert function blocks, connect in- and outputs in Edit mode

View actual values in Start mode

Cancel

Help

Abort the action

Open the online help

Program modes

There are 5 modes for the Adaptive Program, see AdapProgCmd (83.01):

Stop: the Adaptive Program is not running and cannot be edited,

Start: the Adaptive Program is running and cannot be edited,

Edit: the Adaptive Program is not running and can be edited,

SingleCycle and SingleStep are used for testing.

Change to Edit mode

Use Ctrl + left mouse button on 83.01 Adaptive Program Control and set to Edit:

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Adaptive Program

158

Insert function blocks

Use Ctrl + left mouse button on one of the yellow boxes. This opens the pop-up window Insert / Change / Remove Block:

Adaptive Program

In this manner it is possible to insert up to 16 function blocks from the list to the desktop. With the button Change Block xx the selected block will be changed. The button Insert Before Block xx means that the new block will be inserted before the selected block. Button Insert After Block xx means that the new block will be inserted after the selected block.

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

159

Connect function blocks

Function blocks can be connected to other blocks or to firmware parameters. To connect use Ctrl + left mouse button on the red cross at the input. This opens the pop-up window Set Pointer Parameter. This window provides several connection possibilities:

 Connect a Parameter from the list and set the bit in case of connecting a packed boolean value:

 Connect a Constant value to the input:

 In Advanced mode choose the parameter with group * 100 + index, e.g.

MainCtrlWord (7.01) == 701:

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

160

Select Undefined if no connection is required:

 Connections of outputs to firmware parameters can be done by means of the output pointers on the right side of the desktop:

If an output of a function block should be connected with an input of a function block simply select the output’s parameter at the input.

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Set the Time level

Saving AP applications

It is possible to save AP applications as *.ap files :

161

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Adaptive Program

162

Function blocks

General rules

The use of block input 1 (BlockxIn1) is compulsory (it must not be left

unconnected). Use of input 2 (BlockxIn2) and input 3 (BlockxIn3) is voluntary for the most blocks. As a rule of thumb, an unconnected input does not affect the output of the block.

The Attribute Input (BlockxAttrib) is to set with the attributes, like declaration of constant and bits, of all three inputs. DWL AP does this automatically.

The constant attribute defines a block constant which can only be changed or modified in EDIT mode.

Block inputs

The blocks use two input formats:

 integer or

 boolean

The used format depends on the function block type. For example, the ADD block uses integer inputs and the OR block boolean inputs.

Note:

The inputs of the block are read when the execution of the block starts, not simultaneously for all blocks!

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

163

Block input attributes

Block inputs gets the parameter of signal source or user constants (e.g. 85.01).

Depending on the used block function and depending on the desired function the attributes of all three inputs are to be set as integer, constant or as selection of a bit of a 16-bit word source.

Therefore it is used a 16-bit word, which is defined as following:

F u n ctio n b lo ck

inp u t 3 bit

F u n ctio n b lo ck

inp u t 2 bit

F u n ctio n b lo ck

inp u t 1 bit

*

BlockParamSet_ovw_a.dsf

*

this type of constant defines a Block Constant, which can only be modified in EDIT mode.

Example:

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

2 0 0 A

HEX

Example of attribute parameter, with

BlockxIn1 as boolean, bit 10

BlockxIn2 as constant

BlockxIn3 as integer

 Bits converted into hex, the value 200A (H) is to be set into parameter BlockxAttrib.

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Adaptive Program

164

Parameter value as an integer input

How the block handles the input

The block reads the selected value in as an integer.

Note:

The parameter selected as an input should be an integer value. The internal

scaling for each parameter can be found in chapter

Parameters

.

How to select the input

 Scroll to the input selection parameter of the block and switch to edit mode

(Enter).

 Set the address, from which the input value is to be read, with group * 100 + index, e.g. AccTime1 (22.01) = 2201. A negative address (e.g. -2201) will act an inversion of the connected value.

The figure below shows the DCS800 Control Panel display when the input

BlockxIn1 (with e.g. x = 1 for 1. block) selection parameter is in edit mode.

Display of panel

REM  PAR EDIT--------------------

Connection to

503 as output of AI1

(group x 100 + index)

8405 Block1In1

503

CANCEL

SAVE

Example:

AI1 is supplied with a voltage source of 5.8 V. AI1 is connected to the block as follows:

 Scroll to Block1In1 (84.05) and shift to edit mode (Enter). Set to 503, because the value of AI1 is shown in group 5 with index 3 - AI1 Val (05.03) == 05 * 100

+ 3 = 503.

 The value at the input of the block is 5800, since the integer scaling of AI1 Val

(05.03) is 1000 == 1 V see chapter

Parameters

.

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

165

Constant as an integer input

How to set and connect the input

•Option 1

 Scroll to the input selection parameter of the block and switch to edit mode

(Enter).

 Give the constant value to this input parameter (arrow keys).

 Accept by Enter.

 Scroll to attribute parameter, e.g. Block1Attrib (4.08).

 Set the bit for constant attribute of this input in Block1Attrib (4.08).

 Accept by Enter.

The constant may have a value from -32768 to 32767. The constant cannot be changed while the Application Program is running. The figures below shows the

DCS800 Control Panel display when Block1In2 (84.06) is in edit mode and the constant field is visible:

Display of panel

REM  PAR EDIT--------------------

Value of the desired constant

8406 Block1In2

-10000

CANCEL

Display of panel

SAVE

REM  PAR EDIT--------------------

Setting of constant value of Block1In2 input

8408 Block1Attrib

2000 hex

CANCEL

SAVE

Option 2

 User constants 85.01 to 85.10 are reserved for the Adaptive Program and can be used for custom setting. Parameters 19.01 to 19.12 can be used in the same way, but are not stored in the flash.

 Connect the user constant to a block as usual by the input selection parameter.

The user constants can be changed while the Adaptive Program is running. They may have values from -32767 to 32767.

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

166

Parameter value as a boolean input

How the block handles the input

The block:

 reads the selected value as an integer,

 uses the bit defined by the bit field as the boolean input and

 interprets bit value 1 as true and 0 as false.

Example:

The figure below shows the value of Block1In3 (84.07) when the input is connected to DI2. All digital inputs are available in DI StatWord (8.05). Bit 0 corresponds to

DI1 and bit 1 to DI2.

Display of panel

REM  PAR EDIT--------------------

Connection to 805 as output of DI's

(group x 100 + index)

8407 Block1In3

805

CANCEL

Display of panel

SAVE

REM  PAR EDIT--------------------

Setting of bit 1 of block1In3

8408 Block1Attrib

0100 hex

CANCEL SAVE

Note:

The parameter selected as an input should have a packed boolean value (binary data word).

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

167

Constant as a boolean input

How to set and connect the input

 Scroll to the input selection parameter of the block and switch to edit mode

(Enter).

 Give the constant. If boolean value true is needed, set the constant to 1. If boolean value false is needed, set to 0.

 Accept by Enter.

 Scroll to attribute parameter (BlockxAttrib).

 Set the bit for constant attribute of this input in BlockxAttrib parameter.

 Accept by Enter.

String input

How to select the input

With the EVENT block the text from fault, alarm or notice lists will be selected. To change the text DriveWindow and SDCS-COM-8 are required.

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Adaptive Program

168

Function blocks

General

Each of the 16 function blocks has three input parameters IN1 to IN3, which can be connected to the firmware, outputs of other function blocks or constants. Boolean values are interpreted like this:

 1 as true and

 0 as false.

A 4 th

parameter is used for the attributes of the inputs. The attribute has to be edited manually, if the functions blocks are edited with the DCS800 Control Panel,

DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light. The attribute is set automatically when DWL

AP is used. The output OUT can connected with the inputs of function blocks. To write output values into firmware parameters connect the necessary output pointer

(group 86) to the desired parameter.

ABS

Type

Arithmetical function

Illustration

ABS

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

Operation

OUT is the absolute value of IN1 multiplied by IN2 and divided by IN3.

OUT = |IN1| * IN2 / IN3

ABS

IN1

IN2

IN3

MUL

DIV

OUT

Connections

IN1, IN2 and IN3:

OUT:

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

ADD

AND

169

Type

Arithmetical function

Illustration

Operation

ADD

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

OUT is the sum of the inputs.

OUT = IN1 + IN2 + IN3

Connections

IN1, IN2 and IN3:

OUT:

Type

Logical function

Illustration

Operation

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

AND

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

OUT is true if all connected inputs are true. Otherwise the OUT is false. Truth table:

IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT (binary) OUT (value on display)

1 1 1

Connections

IN1, IN2 and IN3:

OUT:

True (All bits 1) -1 boolean

16 bit integer (packed boolean)

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Adaptive Program

170

Bitwise

Type

Logical function

Illustration

Bitwise

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

Operation

The block compares bits of three 16 bit word inputs and forms the output bits as follows:

OUT = (IN1 OR IN2) AND IN3.

Example:

Single bit:

IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT

0 0 0 0

0 1 0 0

1 0 0 0

1 1 0 0

0 0 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 1 1

1 1 1 1

Example:

Whole word:

Input bits

[word]

15 0

20518 => IN1

0

1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0

4896 => IN2

0 0 0

1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

17972 => IN3

0

1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

0

1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

IN1

IN2

1

IN3

&

OUT

=> OUT

Output

[word]

16932

Connections

IN1, IN2 and IN3:

OUT:

16 bit integer (packed boolean)

16 bit integer (packed boolean)

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

171

Bset

Type

Operation

Logical function

Compare

Illustration

Operation

Bset

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

With Bset it is possible to set the value of a certain bit in a word. Connect the word to be processed at IN1. Define the number of the bit to be changed at IN2. Define the desired bit value at IN3 (1 for true and 0 for false). OUT is the result of the operation.

Connections

IN1:

IN2:

IN3:

OUT:

16-bit integer (packed boolean); word to be processed e.g.

MainCtrlWord (7.01)

0 … 15; bit to be changed boolean; desired bit value

16-bit integer (packed boolean), result

Type

Arithmetical function

Illustration

Compare

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

Output bits 0, 1 and 2 (bits 4 ... 15 are not used):

If IN1 > IN2

 OUT = 001 OUT bit 0 is true,

 if IN1 = IN2

 OUT = 010 OUT bit 1 is true and

 if IN1 < IN2

 OUT = 100 OUT bit 2 is true.

Output bit 3:

- If IN1 > IN2, OUT = 1ddd OUT bit 3 is true and remains true until

IN1 < (IN2 - IN3), after which bit 3 is false.

2 ... bit 3

IN1

IN2

Output bit 4...15: not used

OUT integer value, which is shown on display, is the sum of the bits:

bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

OUT (value on display)

Connections

IN1, IN2 and IN3:

OUT:

16 bit integer values (15 bits + sign)

16 bit integer (packed boolean)

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

172

Count

D-Pot

Type

Arithmetical function

Illustration

Count

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

Operation

The counter counts the rising edges of IN1. Rising edges at IN2 reset the counter. IN3 limits OUT. IN3 > 0: OUT increases to the set limit. IN3 < 0: OUT increases up to the absolute maximum value (32768). When the maximum value is reached the output will be set to 0 and the counter starts counting from zero.

Connections

IN1:

IN2:

IN3:

OUT: boolean; counts rising edges boolean; reset input (high active)

16 bit integer (15 bit + sign); limit

15 bit integer (15 bit + sign); shows the counted value

Type

Arithmetical function

Illustration

D-Pot

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

Operation

IN1 increases OUT. IN2 decreases OUT. The absolute value of IN3 is the ramp time in ms which is needed to increase OUT from 0 to 32767. With positive IN3 the output range is limited from 0 to 32767. With negative IN3 the output range is between -

32767 and +32767. If both IN1 and IN2 are true, IN2 overwrites IN1.

Connections

IN1:

IN2:

IN3:

OUT: boolean; ramp up boolean; ramp down

16 bit integer (15 bit + sign); ramp time scale

16 bit integer (15 bit + sign); ramp value

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

173

Event

Filter

Type

Display function

Illustration

Operation

Event

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

IN1 triggers the event. IN2 selects the fault, alarm or notice. IN3 is the event delay in ms.

IN1 Activation input (boolean)

0 -> 1 trigger event

IN2 Selection of the message to be displayed. There exist 15 different messages, which are selected by using numbers. The default message is shown in the brackets. It can be changed by means of string parameters.

301 (APAlarm1) 601 (APFault1) 801 (………..)

String1 (85.11)

302 (APAlarm2) 602 (APFault2) 802 (………..) String2 (85.12)

303 (APAlarm3) 603 (APFault3) 803 (………..) String3 (85.13)

304 (APAlarm4) 604 (APFault4) 804 (………..) String4 (85.14)

305 (APAlarm5) 605 (APFault5) 805 (………..) String5 (85.15)

Connections

IN1: boolean

IN2: Text of alarm, fault or notice. Must be defined via String1 (85.11) to

String5 (85.15) and connected to IN2

IN3: 16 bit integer

Type

Arithmetical function

Illustration

Operation

Filter

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

OUT is the filtered value of IN1. IN2 is the filter time in ms.

OUT = IN1 (1 - e

-t/IN2

)

Note:

The internal calculation uses 32 bits accuracy to avoid offset errors.

Connections

IN1:

IN2:

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign); value to be filtered

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign); filter time in ms

OUT: 16 bit integer (15 bits + sign); filtered value

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

174

Limit

MaskSet

Type

Logical function

Illustration

Operation

Limit

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

The value, connected to IN1 will be limited with IN2 as upper limit and IN3 as lower limit. OUT is the limited input value. OUT stays 0, if IN3 is >= IN2.

Connections

IN1:

IN2:

IN3:

OUT:

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign); value to be limited

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign); upper limit

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign); lower limit

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign); limited value

Type

Logical function

Illustration

Operation

MaskSet

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

The block sets or resets the bits in IN1 and IN2.

Example:

IN3 = set IN3 = reset

IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT

Example:

Whole word with IN3 = set

Input

[word]

15 bits

0

26214 => IN1

0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

-13108 => IN2

1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0

Whole word with IN3 = reset

=> OUT

Output

[word]

-4370

Connections

IN1:

IN2:

IN3:

OUT:

Adaptive Program

16 bit integer (packed boolean); word input

16 bit integer (packed boolean); word input boolean; set / reset IN2 in IN1

16 bit integer (packed boolean); result

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Max

Min

MulDiv

Type

Arithmetical function

Illustration

Operation

Max

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

OUT is the highest input value.

OUT = MAX (IN1, IN2, IN3)

Note:

An open input will ignored.

Connections

IN1, IN2 and IN3:

OUT:

Type

Arithmetical function

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

Illustration

Operation

Min

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

OUT is the lowest input value.

OUT = MIN (IN1, IN2, IN3)

Note: An open input will be set to as zero.

Connections

Input IN1, IN2 and IN3: 16 bit integer values (15 bits + sign)

Output OUT: 16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

Type

Arithmetical function

Illustration

Operation

MulDiv

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

OUT is the IN1 multiplied with IN2 and divided by IN3.

OUT = (IN1 * IN2) / IN3

Connections

Input IN1, IN2 and IN3: 16 bit integer values (15 bits + sign)

Output OUT: 16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

175

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

OR

176

NotUsed

Type

Illustration

-

Operation

Connections

-

Block is not enabled and not working, default

Type

Illustration

Logical function

Operation

OR

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

OUT is true if any of the connected inputs is true. Otherwise the OUT is false. Truth table:

IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT (binary) OUT (value on display)

0 0 0 False 0)

ParRead

Connections

IN1, IN2 and IN3:

OUT:

Type

Parameter function boolean values

16 bit integer value (packed boolean)

Illustration

ParRead

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

Operation

OUT shows the value of a parameter, which is defined with IN1 as group and IN2 as index.

Example:

Reading AccTime1 (22.01):

IN1 = 22 and IN2 = 01

Connections

IN1:

IN2:

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign); group

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign); index

OUT: 16 bit integer (15 bits + sign); parameter value

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

177

ParWrite

PI

Type

Parameter function

Illustration

ParWrite

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

Operation

Value of IN1 is written into a parameter defined by IN2 as group * 100 + index, e.g.

MainCtrlWord (7.01) == 701. The block will be activated with a change of IN1. IN3 determines if the value is saved in the flash.

Attention:

Cyclic saving of values in the flash will damage it! Do not set IN3 constantly to true!

OUT gives the error code, if parameter access is denied.

Example:

Set AccTime1 (22.01) = 150, not saving into flash:

IN1 = 150, desired value

IN2 = 2201, this must be a defined as a constant and not as a parameter

IN3 = false

Connections

IN1:

IN2:

IN3:

OUT:

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign); desired value

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign); group * 100 + index boolean; true = save in flash, false = don’t save in flash

16 bit integer (packed boolean); error code

Type

Arithmetical controller

Illustration

PI

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

Operation

OUT is IN1 multiplied by (IN2 / 100) plus integrated IN1 multiplied by (IN3 / 100).

O

I

1 *

I

2 / 100

I

3 / 100

*

I

1

Note:

The internal calculation uses 32 bits accuracy to avoid offset errors.

Connections

IN1:

IN2:

IN3:

OUT:

16 bit integer (15 bit + sign); error (e.g. speed error)

16 bit integer (15 bit + sign); p-part (30 == 0.3, 100 == 1)

16 bit integer (15 bit + sign); i-part (250 == 2.5, 5,000 == 50)

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign); the range is limited from -20,000 to

+20,000

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Adaptive Program

178

PI-Bal

Ramp

Type

Arithmetical function

Illustration

PI-Bal

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

Operation

The PI-Bal block initializes the PI block. The PI-Bal block must follow directly behind the PI block and can only be used together with the PI block.

When IN1 is true, the PI-Bal block writes the value of IN2 directly into OUT of the PI block. When IN1 is false, the PI-Bal block releases OUT of the PI block. Normal operation continues starting with the set output value - bumpless transition.

Connections

IN1:

IN2: boolean; true = balance PI block, false = no balancing

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign); balance value

OUT: affects PI block

Type

Arithmetical function

Illustration

Operation

Ramp

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

IN1 is the input. IN2 and IN3 are the times. OUT increases or decreases until the input value is reached. n

IN2 IN3

Connections

IN1:

IN2:

IN3:

OUT: t

IN3 IN2

DCS800 FW ramp.dsf

16 bit integer (15 bit + sign); ramp input

16 bit integer (15 bit + sign); ramp up time in ms (related to 20,000)

16 bit integer (15 bit + sign); ramp down time in ms, (related to 20,000)

16 bit integer (15 bit + sign); ramp output

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

179

Sqrt

SqWav

Type

Arithmetical function

Illustration

Operation

Sqrt

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

OUT is the square root of IN1 * IN2. With IN3 = true IN1 and IN2 are read as absolute values:

OUT

|

IN

1 | * |

IN

2 |

With IN3 = false OUT is set to zero if IN1 * IN2 is negative:

OUT

OUT

0

IN

1 *

IN

2 ;

if if

IN

1 *

IN

2

0

IN

1 *

IN

2

0

Connections

IN1:

IN2:

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

IN3: boolean

OUT: 16 bit integer

Type

Arithmetical function

Illustration

Operation

SqWav

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

OUT alternates between the value of IN3 and zero (0), if the block is enabled with IN1

= true. The period is set with IN2 in ms.

Connections

IN1:

IN2:

IN3:

OUT: boolean; true = enable SqWav, false = disable SqWav

16 bit integer; cycle time in ms

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign); height of square wave

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign); square wave

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Adaptive Program

180

SR

Type

Operation

Logical function

Switch-B

Illustration

Operation

SR

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

Set/reset block. IN1 (S) sets OUT. IN2 (R) or IN3 (R) reset OUT. If IN1, IN2 and IN3 are false, the current value remains at OUT. The SR is reset dominant. Truth table:

IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT (binary) OUT (value on display)

1 0 0 true (all bits 1)

0

0

0

-1

0

0

0

Connections

IN1, IN2 and IN3:

OUT:

Type

Logical function boolean

16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

Illustration

Switch-B

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

OUT is equal to IN2 if IN1 is true. OUT is equal to IN3 if IN1 is false.

IN1 OUT

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

Connections

IN1: boolean (only bit 0 is valid)

IN2 and IN3: boolean

OUT: 16 bit integer (packed boolean)

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

181

Switch-I

Type

Illustration

Operation

Arithmetical function

Switch-I

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

OUT is equal to IN2 if IN1 is true and equal to IN3 if IN1 is false.

TOFF

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

Connections

IN1: boolean (only bit 0 is valid)

IN2 and IN3: 16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

OUT: 16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

Type

Logical function

Illustration

Operation

TOFF

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

OUT is true when IN1 is true. OUT is false when IN1 has been false for a time >= IN2.

OUT remains true as long as IN1 is true plus the time defined in IN2.

IN1

1

0

IN2 IN2

t

OUT

All bits 1

All bits 0

t

Connections

IN1: boolean,

IN2: 16 bit integer; delay time in ms (IN3 = false) or s (IN3 = true)

IN3:

OUT: boolean; determines unit of time

16 bit integer (packed boolean); result with values on display: True = -

1, false = 0

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

182

TON

Type

Logical function

Illustration

Operation

TON

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

OUT is true when IN1 has been true for a time equal or longer than IN2.

IN1

1

0

OUT

IN2

All bits 1

All bits 0

IN2

time

Values on display: True = -1, false = 0

With IN3 = False the delay time of IN2 is scaled in ms, with IN3 = True the delay time of IN2 is scaled in s

Connections

Input IN1 and IN3:

Input IN2:

Output OUT: boolean value

16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)

16 bit integer value (packed boolean)

Type

Logical function

Trigg

Illustration

Operation

Trigg

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

The rising edge of IN1 sets OUT bit 0 for one program cycle.

The rising edge of IN2 sets OUT bit 1 for one program cycle.

The rising edge of IN3 sets OUT bit 2 for one program cycle.

T = Program cycle

IN1

1

0

OUT, Bit 0

1

0

T T t t

Connections

IN1, IN2 and IN3:

OUT:

Adaptive Program

boolean

16 bit integer (packed boolean)

time

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

XOR

Type

Logical function

Illustration

XOR

IN1

IN2

IN3

OUT

Operation

OUT is true if one input is true, otherwise OUT is false. Truth table:

IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT (binary) OUT (value on display)

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

1 true (all bits 1) true (all bits 1) true (all bits 1) true (all bits 1)

0

-1

-1

0

-1

0

0

-1

IN1

1

IN2

=

=

IN3

OUT

Connections

IN1, IN2 and IN3:

OUT: boolean

16 bit integer value (packed boolean)

183

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Adaptive Program

184

Diagram

Blank block diagram sheet on which the Adaptive Program can be documented.

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

185

Signal and parameter list

Signals and parameters

This chapter contains all signals and parameters.

Signal groups list

Signals are measured and calculated actual values of the drive. This includes the control-, status-, limit-, fault- and alarm words. The drive’s signals can be found in groups 1 to 9. None of the values inside these groups is stored in the flash and thus volatile.

Note:

All signals in group 7 can be written to by means of DWL, DCS800 Control Panel,

Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

The following table gives an overview of all signal groups:

Group Description

1 Physical actual values

Comment

2

Speed controller signals

3

Reference actual values

4

Information self

5

Analog I/O

6

Drive logic signals

7

Control words command

8

Status / limit words

detection on operation and limits

9

Fault / alarm words

diagnosis

Index

Signal / Parameter name

1.08 MotTorq (motor torque)

Motor torque in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23):

 Filtered by means of a 6 th

order FIR filter (sliding average filter), filter time is 1 mains voltage period.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

Used speed reference selected with:

Ref1Mux (11.02) and Ref1Sel (11.03) or

Ref2Mux (11.12) and Ref2Sel (11.06)

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

186

Sample of signals

All signals are read-only. However the overriding control can write to the control words, but it only affects the RAM.

Min., max., def.:

Minimum, maximum and default values are not valid for groups 1 to 9.

Unit:

Shows the physical unit of a signal, if applicable. The unit is displayed in the

DCS800 Control Panel and PC tools.

E/C:

By means of USI Sel (16.09) it is possible to change between compact (C) and extended (E) signal and parameter list. The compact list contains only signals and parameters used for a typical commissioning.

Group.Index:

Signal and parameter numbers consists of group number and its index.

Integer Scaling:

Communication between the drive and the overriding control uses 16 bit integer values. The overriding control has to use the information given in integer scaling to read the value of the signal properly.

Example1:

If MotTorq (1.08) is read from the overriding control an integer value of 100 corresponds to 1 % torque.

Example2:

If SpeedRefUsed (2.17) is read from the overriding control 20.000 equals the speed (in rpm) shown in SpeedScaleAct (2.29).

Type:

The data type is given with a short code:

I = 16-bit integer value (0, …, 65536)

SI = 16-bit signed integer value (-32768, …, 32767)

C = text string (ENUM)

Volatile:

Y = values are NOT stored in the flash, they will be lost when the drive is deenergized

N = values are stored in the flash, they will remain when the drive is deenergized

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

187

Parameter groups list

This chapter explains the function and valid values or selections for all parameters.

They are arranged in groups by their function. The following table gives an overview of all parameter groups:

25

26

30

31

34

40

42

43

44

45

47

49

50

16

19

20

21

22

23

24

Group Description

10

Start / stop select

11

Speed reference inputs

12

13

14

15

Constant speeds

Analog inputs

Digital outputs

Analog outputs

System control inputs

Data storage

Limits

Start / stop

Speed ramp

Speed reference

Speed control

Torque reference

Torque reference handling

Fault functions

Motor 1 temperature

PID control

Brake control

Current control

Field excitation

Shared motion

Field converter settings

12-pulse operation

Speed measurement

DCS800 Control Panel display

86

88

90

91

92

93

94

97

98

99

51

52

Fieldbus

Modbus

60…69

Application program parameters

70

DDCS control

71

83

84

85

Drivebus

Adaptive Program control

Adaptive Program

User constants

Adaptive Program outputs

Internal

Receiving data sets addresses 2

Transmit data sets addresses 1

Transmit data sets addresses 2

DCSLink control

Measurement

Option modules

Start-up data

Receiving data sets addresses 1

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

188

Index

Signal / Parameter name

20.07 TorqMaxSPC (maximum torque speed controller)

Maximum torque limit - in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) - at the output of the speed controller:

TorqRef2 (2.09)

Note:

The used torque limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. other torque limits, current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

23.01 SpeedRef (speed reference)

Main speed reference input for the speed control of the drive. Can be connected to SpeedRefUsed

(2.17) via:

Ref1Mux (11.02) and Ref1Sel (11.03) or

Ref2Mux (11.12) and Ref2Sel (11.06)

Internally limited from:

Int. Scaling: (2.29)

( 2 .

29 ) *

Type:

32767

20000

SI

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

Volatile: Y

rpm

Sample of parameters

Parameter changes by DCS800 Control Panel, DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light are stored in the flash. Changes made by the overriding control are only stored in the RAM.

Min., max., def.:

Minimum and maximum value or selection of parameter.

Default value or default selection of parameter.

Unit:

Shows the physical unit of a parameter, if applicable. The unit is displayed in the

DCS800 Control Panel and PC tools.

E/C:

By means of USI Sel (16.09) it is possible to change between compact (C) and extended (E) signal and parameter list. This influences parameter display of

DCS800 Control Panel. The compact list contains only signals and parameters used for a typical commissioning.

Group.Index:

Signal and parameter numbers consists of group number and its index.

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

189

Integer Scaling:

Communication between the drive and the overriding control uses 16 bit integer values. The overriding control has to use the information given in integer scaling to change the value of the parameter properly.

Example1:

If TorqMaxSPC (20.07) is written to from the overriding control an integer value of

100 corresponds to 1 %.

Example2:

If SpeedRef (23.01) is written to from the overriding control 20.000 equals the speed (in rpm) shown in SpeedScaleAct (2.29).

Type:

The data type is given with a short code:

I = 16-bit integer value (0, …, 65536)

SI = 16-bit signed integer value (-32768, …, 32767)

C = text string (ENUM)

Volatile:

Y = values are NOT stored in the flash, they will be lost when the drive is deenergized

N = values are stored in the flash, they will remain when the drive is deenergized

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

190

Signal and parameter list

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Physical actual values

Filtered actual speed feedback:

 Choose motor speed feedback with M1SpeedFbSel (50.03)

 Filtered with 1 s and

SpeedFiltTime (50.06)

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.02 SpeedActEMF (speed actual EMF)

Actual speed calculated from EMF.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.03 SpeedActEnc (speed actual encoder 1)

Actual speed measured with pulse encoder 1.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.04 MotSpeed (motor speed)

Actual motor speed:

 Choose motor speed feedback with M1SpeedFbSel (50.03). If M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) is set to External the signal is updated by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

SpeedFiltTime (50.06)

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.01

AITachoVal

Analog tacho scaling

M1SpeedScale (50.01)

M1TachoAdjust (50.12)

M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13)

1.05

SpeedActTach

speed_act_tach_a.dsf

1.05 SpeedActTach (speed actual tacho)

Actual speed measured with analog tacho.

Note:

This value is only valid, if an analog tacho is connected!

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.06 MotCur (motor current)

Relative actual motor current in percent of M1NomCur (99.03).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

191

Index

Signal / Parameter name

1.07 MotTorqFilt (filtered motor torque)

Relative filtered motor torque in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23):

 Filtered by means of a 6 th

order FIR filter (sliding average filter), filter time is 1 mains voltage period plus

TorqActFiltTime (97.20)

Note:

The cycle time is 20 ms

Note:

The value is calculated the following way:

MotTorqFil t

( 1 .

07 )

Flux

Re

fFldWeak

( 3 .

24 ) *

MotCur

( 1 .

06 )

100

with

Flux

Re

fFldWeak

( 3 .

24 )

FluxMax

*

M

1

BaseSpeed

( 99 .

04 )

MotSpeed

( 1 .

04 )

;

for n

M

1

BaseSpeed

( 99 .

04 )

or

Flux

Re

fFldWeak

( 3 .

24 )

FluxMax

100 %;

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type:

for n

M

1

BaseSpeed

( 99 .

04 )

or M

1

UsedFexTyp e

( 99 .

12 )

NotUsed

SI Volatile: Y

Motor torque in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23):

 Filtered by means of a 6 th

order FIR filter (sliding average filter), filter time is 1 mains voltage period.

Note:

The cycle time is 20 ms

Note:

The value is calculated the following way:

MotTorq

( 1 .

08 )

Flux

Re

fFldWeak

( 3 .

24 ) *

MotCur

( 1 .

06 )

100

with

Flux

Re

fFldWeak

( 3 .

24 )

FluxMax

*

M

1

BaseSpeed

( 99 .

04 )

MotSpeed

( 1 .

04 )

;

for n

M

1

BaseSpeed

( 99 .

04 )

or

Flux

Re

fFldWeak

( 3 .

24 )

FluxMax

100 %;

for n

M

1

BaseSpeed

( 99 .

04 )

or M

1

UsedFexTyp e

( 99 .

12 )

NotUsed

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.09 CurRipple (current ripple)

Relative current ripple monitor output in percent of M1NomCur (99.03).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

Relative filtered current ripple monitor output in percent of M1NomCur (99.03):

 Filtered with 200 ms

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

Relative actual mains voltage in percent of NomMainsVolt (99.10).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: Y

1.12 MainsVoltAct (actual mains voltage)

Actual mains voltage:

 Filtered with 10 ms

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

192

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Relative actual armature voltage in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02).

Note:

the value is also influenced by AdjUDC (97.23)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.14 ArmVoltAct (actual armature voltage)

Actual armature voltage:

 Filtered with 10 ms

Note:

the value is also influenced by AdjUDC (97.23)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.15 ConvCurActRel (relative actual converter current [DC])

Relative actual converter current in percent of ConvNomCur (4.05).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI

Volatile: Y

1.16 ConvCurAct (actual converter current [DC])

Actual converter current:

 Filtered with 10 ms

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: SI

Volatile: Y

1.17 EMF VoltActRel (relative actual EMF)

Relative actual EMF in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02):

EMF VoltActRel (1.17).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.18 Unused

1.19 Unused

(motor

 Motor 1 calculated temperature from motor thermal model in percent - see

M1AlarmLimLoad (31.03) and M1FaultLimLoad (31.04). Used for motor overtemperature protection.

M1AlarmLimLoad (31.03)

M1FaultLimLoad (31.04)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I

Volatile: Y

(motor

 Motor 2 calculated temperature from motor thermal model in percent - see

M2AlarmLimLoad (49.33) and M2FaultLimLoad (49.34). Used for motor overtemperature protection.

M2AlarmLimLoad (49.33)

M2FaultLimLoad (49.34)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: Y

1.22 Mot1TempMeas (motor 1 measured temperature)

Motor 1 measured temperature. Used for motor overtemperature protection:

 Unit depends on setting of M1TempSel (31.05):

0 = NotUsed -

1 = 1 to 6 PT100 °C

2 = PTC

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C / 1

/ 1

Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

193

Index

Signal / Parameter name

1.23 Mot2TempMeas (motor 2 measured temperature)

Motor 2 measured temperature. Used for motor overtemperature protection:

 Unit depends on setting of M2TempSel (49.35):

0 = NotUsed -

1 = 1 to 6 PT100 °C

2 = PTC

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C / 1

/ 1

Type: I Volatile: Y

1.24 BridgeTemp (actual bridge temperature)

Actual bridge temperature in degree centigrade.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C Type: I Volatile: Y

1.25 CtrlMode (control mode)

Used control mode:

see TorqSel (26.01)

0 = NotUsed -

1 = SpeedCtrl speed control

2 = TorqCtrl torque control

4 = VoltCtrl voltage control, if CtrlModeSel (43.08) = PowerSupply2

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C

Volatile: Y

1.26 Unused

1.27 Unused

1.28 Unused

1.29 Mot1FldCurRel (motor 1 relative actual field current)

Motor 1 relative field current in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.30 Mot1FldCur (motor 1 actual field current)

Motor 1 field current:

 Filtered with 500 ms

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 A Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.31 Mot2FldCurRel (motor 2 relative actual field current)

Motor 2 relative field current in percent of M2NomFldCur (49.05).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI

Volatile: Y

1.32 Mot2FldCur (motor 2 actual field current)

Motor 2 field current:

 Filtered with 500 ms

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 A Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.33 ArmCurActSl (12-pulse slave actual armature current)

Actual armature current of 12-pulse slave:

 Valid in 12-pulse master only

 Valid for 12-pulse parallel only

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.34 Unused

1.35 ArmCurAll (12-pulse parallel master and slave actual armature current)

Sum of actual armature current for 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave:

 Filtered with 10 ms

 Valid in 12-pulse master only

 Valid for 12-pulse parallel only

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: SI

Volatile: Y

1.36 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

194

Index

Signal / Parameter name

1.37 DC VoltSerAll (12-pulse serial master and slave actual DC voltage)

Sum of actual armature voltage for 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave:

 Valid in 12-pulse master only

 Valid for 12-pulse serial/sequential only

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: SI

Volatile: Y

1.38 MainsFreqAct (internal mains frequency)

Calculated and internally controlled mains frequency. Output of PLL controller. See also:

DevLimPLL (97.13)

KpPLL (97.14)

TfPLL (97.15)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Hz Type: I

Volatile: Y

1.39 AhCounter (ampere-hour counter)

Ampere hour counter.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1kAh Type: I

Volatile: Y

1.40 Unused

Calculated process/line speed:

 Scaled with WinderScale (50.17)

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 m/min Type: SI

Volatile: Y

1.42 SpeedActEnc2 (speed actual encoder 2)

Actual speed measured with pulse encoder 2.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

Speed controller signals

2.01 SpeedRef2 (speed reference 2)

Speed reference after limiter:

M1SpeedMin (20.01)

M1SpeedMax (20.02)

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI

Volatile: Y

2.02 SpeedRef3 (speed reference 3)

Speed reference after speed ramp and jog input.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.03 SpeedErrNeg (

n)

n = speed actual - speed reference.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.04 TorqPropRef (proportional part of torque reference)

P-part of the speed controller’s output in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

I-part of the speed controller’s output in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI

Volatile: Y

2.06 TorqDerRef (derivation part of torque reference)

D-part of the speed controller’s output in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

195

Index

Signal / Parameter name

2.07 TorqAccCompRef (torque reference for acceleration compensation)

Acceleration compensation output in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.08 TorqRef1 (torque reference 1)

Relative torque reference value in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) after limiter for the external torque reference:

TorqMaxTref (20.09)

TorqMinTref (20.10)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI

Volatile: Y

2.09 TorqRef2 (torque reference 2)

Output value of the speed controller in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) after limiter:

TorqMaxSPC (20.07)

TorqMinSPC (20.08)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI

Volatile: Y

2.10 TorqRef3 (torque reference 3)

Relative torque reference value in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) after torque selector:

TorqSel (26.01)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI

Volatile: Y

2.11 TorqRef4 (torque reference 4)

= TorqRef3 (2.10) + LoadComp (26.02) in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI

Volatile: Y

2.12 Unused

2.13 TorqRefUsed (used torque reference)

Relative final torque reference value in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) after torque limiter:

TorqMax (20.05)

TorqMin (20.06)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI

Volatile: Y

2.14 TorqCorr (torque correction)

Relative additional torque reference in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23):

TorqCorrect (26.15)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI

Volatile: Y

Acceleration/deceleration (speed reference change) at the output of the speed reference ramp.

Int. Scaling: (2.29)/s Type: SI Volatile: Y

Used speed reference selected with:

Ref1Mux (11.02) and Ref1Sel (11.03) or

Ref2Mux (11.12) and Ref2Sel (11.06)

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.18 SpeedRef4 (speed reference 4)

= SpeedRef3 (2.02) + SpeedCorr (23.04).

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.19 TorqMaxAll (torque maximum all)

Relative calculated positive torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23). Calculated from the smallest maximum torque limit, field weakening and armature current limits:

TorqUsedMax (2.22)

FluxRefFldWeak (3.24) and

M1CurLimBrdg1 (20.12)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

196

Index

Signal / Parameter name

2.20 TorqMinAll (torque minimum all)

Relative calculated negative torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23). Calculated from the largest minimum torque limit, field weakening and armature current limits:

TorqUsedMax (2.22)

FluxRefFldWeak (3.24) and

M1CurLimBrdg2 (20.13)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.21 Unused

2.22 TorqUsedMax (used torque maximum)

Relative positive torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23). Selected with:

TorqUsedMaxSel (20.18)

Connected to torque limiter after TorqRef4 (2.11).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.23 TorqUsedMin (used torque minimum)

Relative negative torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23). Selected with:

TorqUsedMinSel (20.19)

Connected to torque limiter after TorqRef4 (2.11).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.24 TorqRefExt (external torque reference)

Relative external torque reference value in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) after torque reference

A selector:

TorqRefA (25.01) and

TorqRefA Sel (25.10)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.25 Unused

2.26 TorqLimAct (actual used torque limit)

Shows parameter number of the actual active torque limit:

0 = 0 no limitation active

1 = 2.19 TorqMaxAll (2.19) is active, includes current limits and field weakening

2 = 2.20 TorqMinAll (2.20) is active, includes current limits and field weakening

3 = 2.22 TorqUsedMax (2.22) selected torque limit is active

4 = 2.23 TorqUsedMin (2.23) selected torque limit is active

5 = 20.07 TorqMaxSPC (20.07) speed controller limit is active

6 = 20.08 TorqMinSPC (20.08) speed controller limit is active

7 = 20.09 TorqMaxTref (20.09) external reference limit is active

8 = 20.10 TorqMinTref (20.10) external reference limit is active

9 = 20.22 TorqGenMax (20.22) regenerating limit is active

10 = 2.08 TorqRef1 (2.08) limits TorqRef2 (2.09), see also TorqSel (26.01)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

2.27 Unused

2.28 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

The value of SpeedScaleAct (2.29) equals 20.000 internal speed units.

Currently used speed scaling in rpm for MotSel (8.09) = Motor1:

 20.000 speed units == M1SpeedScale (50.01), in case M1SpeedScale (50.01)  10

 20.000 speed units == maximum absolute value of M1SpeedMin (20.01) and

M1SpeedMax (20.02), in case M1SpeedScale (50.01) < 10 or mathematically:

 If (50.01)  10 then 20.000 == (50.01) in rpm

 If (50.01) < 10 then 20.000 == Max [|(20.01)|, |(20.02)|] in rpm

197

Currently used speed scaling in rpm for MotSel (8.09) = Motor2:

 20.000 speed units == M2SpeedScale (49.22), in case M2SpeedScale (49.22)  10

 20.000 speed units == maximum absolute value of M2SpeedMin (49.19) and

M2SpeedMax (49.20), in case M2SpeedScale (49.22) < 10 or mathematically:

 If (49.22)  10 then 20.000 == (49.22) in rpm

 If (49.22) < 10 then 20.000 == Max [|(49.19)|, |(49.22)|] in rpm

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 rpm Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.30 SpeedRefExt1 (external speed reference 1)

External speed reference 1 after reference 1 multiplexer:

Ref1Mux (11.02)

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.31 SpeedRefExt2 (external speed reference 2)

External speed reference 2 after reference 2 multiplexer:

Ref2Mux (11.12)

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

Speed reference after ramp

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

198

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Reference actual values

3.01 DataLogStatus (status data logger)

0 = NotInit data logger not initialized

1 = Empty

2 = Running data logger is empty data logger is running (activated)

3 = Triggered

4 = Filled

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

data logger is triggered but not filled jet data logger is triggered and filled (data can be uploaded)

Type: C Volatile: Y

3.02 Unused

3.03 SquareWave (square wave)

Output signal of the square wave generator:

Pot1 (99.15),

Pot2 (99.16),

SqrWavePeriod (99.17),

SqrWaveIndex (99.18) and

TestSignal (99.19)

Int. Scaling: 1==1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.04 Unused

3.05 PosCount2Low (position counter low value encoder 2)

Position counter low word pulse encoder 2:

PosCount2InitLo (50.21)

 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode (50.07):

0 = PulseEdges 1 == 1 pulse edge

1 = Scaled

2 = Rollover

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

0 == 0° and 65536 == 360°

0 == 0° and 65536 == 360°

Type: C Volatile: Y

3.06 PosCount2High (position counter high value encoder 2)

Position counter high word pulse encoder 2:

PosCount2InitHi (50.22)

 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode (50.07):

0 = PulseEdges 1 == 65536 pulse edges

1 = Scaled 1 == 1 revolution

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

3.07 PosCountLow (position counter low value encoder 1)

Position counter low word pulse encoder 1:

PosCountInitLo (50.08)

 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode (50.07):

0 = PulseEdges 1 == 1 pulse edge

1 = Scaled

2 = Rollover

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

0 == 0° and 65536 == 360°

0 == 0° and 65536 == 360°

Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

199

Index

Signal / Parameter name

3.08 PosCountHigh (position counter high value encoder 1)

Position counter high word pulse encoder 1:

PosCountInitHi (50.09)

 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode (50.07):

0 = PulseEdges 1 == 65536 pulse edges

1 = Scaled 1 == 1 revolution

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

3.09 PID Out (output PID controller)

PID controller output value in percent of the used PID controller input (see group 40).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.10 Unused

3.11 CurRef (current reference)

Relative current reference in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) after adaption to field weakening.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

Relative current reference in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) after current limitation:

M1CurLimBrdg1 (20.12)

M1CurLimBrdg2 (20.13)

MaxCurLimSpeed (43.17) to (43.22)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.13

ArmAlpha (armature

, firing angle)

Firing angle (

).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ° Type: I Volatile: Y

3.14 Unused

3.15 ReactCur (reactive current)

Relative actual reactive motor current in percent of M1NomCur (99.03).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.16 Unused

3.17 ArmAlphaSl (12-pulse slave armature

, firing angle)

Firing angle (

) of 12-pulse slave converter:

 Valid in 12-pulse master only

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ° Type: I Volatile: Y

3.18 Unused

3.19 Unused

3.20 PLL In (phase locked loop input)

Actual measured mains voltage cycle (period) time. Is used as input of the PLL controller. The value should be:

 1/50 Hz = 20 ms = 20,000

 1/60 Hz = 16.7 ms = 16,667

See also:

DevLimPLL (97.13)

KpPLL (97.14)

TfPLL (97.15)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

3.21 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

200

Index

Signal / Parameter name

I-part of the current controller’s output in percent of M1NomCur (99.03).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.23 CurActPeak (relative actual armature peak current)

Relative actual armature peak current in percent of M1NomCur (99.03).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.24 FluxRefFldWeak (flux reference for field weakening)

Relative flux reference for speeds above the field weakening point (base speed) in percent of nominal flux.

For proper scaling, setting of CtrlModeSel (43.05) = PowerSupply1 divides the value of

FluxRefFldWeak (3.24) by 2.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.25 VoltRef1 (EMF voltage reference 1)

Selected relative EMF voltage reference in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02):

EMF RefSel (46.03)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.26 VoltRef2 (EMF voltage reference 2)

Relative EMF voltage reference in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02) after ramp and limitation (input to

EMF controller):

VoltRefSlope (46.06)

VoltPosLim (46.07)

VoltNegLim (46.08)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.27 FluxRefEMF (flux reference after EMF controller)

Relative EMF flux reference in percent of nominal flux after EMF controller.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.28 FluxRefSum (sum of flux reference)

FluxRefSum (3.28) = FluxRefEMF (3.27) + FluxRefFldWeak (3.24) in percent of nominal flux.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.29 Unused

3.30 FldCurRefM1 (motor 1 field current reference)

Relative motor 1 field current reference in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.31 FldCurRefM2 (motor 2 field current reference)

Relative motor 2 field current reference in percent of M2NomFldCur (49.05).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Information

4.01 FirmwareVer (firmware version)

Name of the loaded firmware version. The format is:

yyy or -yyy with: yyy = consecutively numbered version and -yyy = single phase firmware for demo units.

Int. Scaling: - Type: C Volatile: Y

Type of the loaded firmware version. The format is:

80 =

87 =

Int. Scaling: -

Standard firmware

Heating firmware

Type: C Volatile: Y

4.03 ApplicName (name of application program)

Name of the running application program:

0 = NoMemCard

1 = Inactive no Memory Card plugged in

A Memory Card is plugged in, but the application program is inactive.

Use ParApplSave (16.06) = EableAppl to activate the application program.

2 = NoApplic the Memory Card is empty (no application program available)

3 = <application name> name of the running application program

Int. Scaling: - Type: C Volatile: Y

4.04 ConvNomVolt (converter nominal AC voltage measurement circuit)

Adjustment of AC voltage measuring channels (SDCS-PIN-4 or SDCS-PIN-51). Read from

TypeCode (97.01) or set with S ConvScaleVolt (97.03):

 Read from TypeCode (97.01) if S ConvScaleVolt (97.03) = 0

 Read from S ConvScaleVolt (97.03) if S ConvScaleVolt (97.03)  0

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: Y

4.05 ConvNomCur (converter nominal DC current measurement circuit)

Adjustment of DC current measuring channels (SDCS-PIN-4 or SDCS-PIN-51). Read from

TypeCode (97.01) or set with S ConvScaleCur (97.02):

 Read from TypeCode (97.01) if S ConvScaleCur (97.02) = 0

 Read from S ConvScaleCur (97.02) if S ConvScaleCur (97.02)  0

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: Y

201

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

202

Index

Signal / Parameter name

4.06 Mot1FexType (motor 1 type of field exciter)

Motor 1 field exciter type. Read from M1UsedFexType (99.12):

0 = NotUsed no or third party field exciter connected

1 = OnBoard

2 = FEX-425-Int

3 = DCF803-0035

4 = DCF803-0050

5 = DCF804-0050

6 = DCF803-0060 integrated 1-Q field exciter (for sizes D1 - D4 only), default internal 1-Q 25 A field exciter (for size D5 only) used for field currents from 0.3 A to 25 A (terminals X100.1 and X100.3) external 1-Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0.3 A to 35 A

(terminals X100.1 and X100.3) external 1-Q 50 A field exciter (DCF803-0050 or DCF503B-0050) external 4-Q 50 A field exciter (DCF804-0050 or DCF504B-0050) external 1-Q 60 A field exciter; not implemented yet

7 = DCF804-0060

8 = DCS800-S01 external 4-Q 60 A field exciter; not implemented yet external 2-Q 3-phase field exciter

9 = DCS800-S02 external 4-Q 3-phase field exciter

10 = DCF803-0016 external 1-Q 16 A field exciter used for field currents from 0.3 A to 16 A

(terminals X100.1 and X100.3)

11 = reserved to

14 = reserved

15 = ExFex AITAC third party field exciter, acknowledge via AITAC

16 = ExFex AI1 third party field exciter, acknowledge via AI1

17 = ExFex AI2

18 = ExFex AI3

19 = ExFex AI4 third party field exciter, acknowledge via AI2 third party field exciter, acknowledge via AI3 third party field exciter, acknowledge via AI4

20 = FEX-4-Term5A internal 2-Q 25 A field exciter (FEX-425-Int), external 2-Q 16 A field exciter (DCF803-0016) or external 2-Q 35 A field exciter (DCF803-

0035) used for field currents from 0.3 A to 5 A (terminals X100.2 and

X100.3)

21 = VariFexType see DCS800 MultiFex motor control (3ADW000309)

22 = Exc-Appl-1 see DCS800 Series wound motor control (3ADW000311)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

203

Index

Signal / Parameter name

4.07 Mot2FexType (motor 2 type of field exciter)

Motor 2 field exciter type. Read from M2UsedFexType (49.07):

0 = NotUsed no or third party field exciter connected

1 = OnBoard

2 = FEX-425-Int

3 = DCF803-0035

4 = DCF803-0050

5 = DCF804-0050

6 = DCF803-0060 integrated 1-Q field exciter (for sizes D1 - D4 only), default internal 1-Q 25 A field exciter (for size D5 only) used for field currents from 0.3 A to 25 A (terminals X100.1 and X100.3) external 1-Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0.3 A to 35 A

(terminals X100.1 and X100.3) external 1-Q 50 A field exciter (DCF803-0050 or DCF503B-0050) external 4-Q 50 A field exciter (DCF804-0050 or DCF504B-0050) external 1-Q 60 A field exciter; not implemented yet

7 = DCF804-0060

8 = DCS800-S01 external 4-Q 60 A field exciter; not implemented yet external 2-Q 3-phase field exciter

9 = DCS800-S02 external 4-Q 3-phase field exciter

10 = DCF803-0016 external 1-Q 16 A field exciter used for field currents from 0.3 A to 16 A

(terminals X100.1 and X100.3)

11 = reserved to

14 = reserved

15 = ExFex AITAC third party field exciter, acknowledge via AITAC

16 = ExFex AI1 third party field exciter, acknowledge via AI1

17 = ExFex AI2

18 = ExFex AI3

19 = ExFex AI4 third party field exciter, acknowledge via AI2 third party field exciter, acknowledge via AI3 third party field exciter, acknowledge via AI4

20 = FEX-4-Term5A internal 2-Q 25 A field exciter (FEX-425-Int), external 2-Q 16 A field exciter (DCF803-0016) or external 2-Q 35 A field exciter (DCF803-

0035) used for field currents from 0.3 A to 5 A (terminals X100.2 and

X100.3)

21 = reserved

22 = Exc-Appl-1

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

see DCS800 Series wound motor control (3ADW000311)

Type: C Volatile: Y

4.08 Mot1FexSwVer (motor 1 firmware version of field exciter)

Motor 1 field exciter firmware version. The format is:

yyy with: yyy = consecutively numbered version.

This signal is set during initialization of the drive. New values are shown after the next power-up.

Int. Scaling: - Type: C Volatile: Y

4.09 Mot2FexSwVer (motor 2 firmware version of field exciter)

Motor 2 field exciter firmware version. The format is:

yyy with: yyy = consecutively numbered version.

This signal is set during initialization of the drive. New values are shown after the next power-up.

Int. Scaling: - Type: C Volatile: Y

4.10 Unused

SDCS-COM-8 firmware version. The format is:

yyy with: yyy = consecutively numbered version.

This signal is set during initialization of the drive. New values are shown after the next power-up.

Int. Scaling: Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

204

Index

Signal / Parameter name

4.12 ApplicVer (application version)

Version of the loaded application program. The format is:

yyy with: yyy = consecutively numbered version.

Int. Scaling: - Type: C Volatile: Y

4.13 DriveLibVer (drive library version)

Version of the loaded function block library. The format is:

yyy with: yyy = consecutively numbered version.

Int. Scaling: - Type: C Volatile: Y

4.14 ConvType (converter type)

Recognized converter type. Read from TypeCode (97.01):

8 = ManualSet set by user, if S ConvScaleCur (97.02) and / or S ConvScaleVolt

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

4.15 QuadrantType (quadrant type of converter; 1 or 2 bridges)

Recognized converter quadrant type. Read from TypeCode (97.01) or set with S BlockBrdg2

(97.07):

 Read from TypeCode (97.01) if S BlockBrdg2 (97.07) = 0

 Read from S BlockBrdg2 (97.07) if S BlockBrdg2 (97.07)  0

0 = BlockBridge2 bridge 2 blocked (== 2-Q operation)

1 = RelBridge2 bridge 2 released (== 4-Q operation), default

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

4.16 ConvOvrCur (converter overcurrent [DC] level)

Converter current tripping level. This signal is set during initialization of the drive. New values are shown after the next power-up.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: Y

4.17 MaxBridgeTemp (maximum bridge temperature)

Maximum bridge temperature in degree centigrade. Read from TypeCode (97.01) or set with S

MaxBrdgTemp (97.04):

 Read from TypeCode (97.01) if S MaxBrdgTemp (97.04) = 0

 Read from S MaxBrdgTemp (97.04) if S MaxBrdgTemp (97.04)  0

The drive trips with F504 ConvOverTemp [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 3], when MaxBridgeTemp (4.17) is reached. A104 ConvOverTemp [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 3] is set, when the actual converter temperature is approximately 5°C below MaxBridgeTemp (4.17).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

4.18 DCSLinkStat1 (DCSLink status 1 of field exciter nodes)

Status of DCSLink for field exciter nodes 1 to 16:

B0

B1

Node1 1

0

Node2 1

0

DCSLink node1 active and OK

DCSLink node1 not active or faulty

DCSLink node2 active and OK

DCSLink node2 not active or faulty

B2 Node3 1

0

DCSLink node3 active and OK

DCSLink node3 not active or faulty

B3 Node4 1 DCSLink node4 active and OK

0 DCSLink node4 not active or faulty

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4

B5

B6

Node5 1

0

Node6 1

0

Node7 1

0

DCSLink node5 active and OK

DCSLink node5 not active or faulty

DCSLink node6 active and OK

DCSLink node6 not active or faulty

DCSLink node7 active and OK

DCSLink node7 not active or faulty

B7 Node8 1

0

DCSLink node8 active and OK

DCSLink node8 not active or faulty

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 Node9 1

0

DCSLink node9 active and OK

DCSLink node9 not active or faulty

B9

B10

B11

Node10 1

0

Node11 1

0

Node12 1

0

DCSLink node10 active and OK

DCSLink node10 not active or faulty

DCSLink node11 active and OK

DCSLink node11 not active or faulty

DCSLink node12 active and OK

DCSLink node12 not active or faulty

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 Node13 1 DCSLink node13 active and OK

B13

B14

0

Node14 1

0

Node15 1

0

DCSLink node13 not active or faulty

DCSLink node14 active and OK

DCSLink node14 not active or faulty

DCSLink node15 active and OK

DCSLink node15 not active or faulty

B15 Node16 1

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

0

Type:

DCSLink node16 active and OK

DCSLink node16 not active or faulty

C Volatile: Y

205

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

206

Index

Signal / Parameter name

4.19 DCSLinkStat2 (DCSLink status 2 of field exciter nodes)

Status of DCSLink for field exciter nodes 17 to 32:

Bit Name Value

B0

B1

Node17

Node18

1

0

1

0

DCSLink node17 active and OK

DCSLink node17 not active or faulty

DCSLink node18 active and OK

DCSLink node18 not active or faulty

B2 Node19 1

0

DCSLink node19 active and OK

DCSLink node19 not active or faulty

B3 Node20 1 DCSLink node20 active and OK

0 DCSLink node20 not active or faulty

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4

B5

B6

Node21

Node22

Node23

1

0

1

0

1

0

DCSLink node21 active and OK

DCSLink node21 not active or faulty

DCSLink node22 active and OK

DCSLink node22 not active or faulty

DCSLink node23 active and OK

DCSLink node23 not active or faulty

B7

Node24

1

0

DCSLink node24 active and OK

DCSLink node24 not active or faulty

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 Node25 1

0

DCSLink node25 active and OK

DCSLink node25 not active or faulty

B9 Node26

B10 Node27

B11 Node28

1

0

1

0

1

0

DCSLink node26 active and OK

DCSLink node26 not active or faulty

DCSLink node27 active and OK

DCSLink node27 not active or faulty

DCSLink node28 active and OK

DCSLink node28 not active or faulty

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 Node29 1 DCSLink node29 active and OK

B13 Node30

B14 Node31

0

1

0

1

0

DCSLink node29 not active or faulty

DCSLink node30 active and OK

DCSLink node30 not active or faulty

DCSLink node31 active and OK

DCSLink node31 not active or faulty

B15 Node32

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

1

0

Type:

DCSLink node32 active and OK

DCSLink node32 not active or faulty

C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

207

Index

Signal / Parameter name

4.20 Ext IO Stat (external IO status)

Status of external I/O:

B0

B1

1

0

1

0 first RAIO-xx detected, see AIO ExtModule (98.06) first RAIO-xx not existing or faulty second RAIO-xx detected, see AIO MotTempMeas (98.12) second RAIO-xx not existing or faulty

B2 1 RRIA-xx

0 RRIA-xx not existing or faulty

B3 1 RTAC-xx

0 RTAC-xx not existing or faulty

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 1 first RDIO-xx detected, see DIO ExtModule1 (98.03)

B5

0

1 first RDIO-xx not existing or faulty second RDIO-xx detected, see DIO ExtModule2 (98.04)

0 second RDIO-xx not existing or faulty

B6 1 -

0 -

B7 1 -

0 -

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 1 -

0 -

B9 1 -

0 -

B10 1

0

B11 1

SDCS-DSL-4 detected, see DCSLinkNodeID (94.01)

SDCS-DSL-4 not existing or faulty

SDCS-IOB-2x detected, see IO BoardConfig (98.15)

0 SDCS-IOB-2x not existing or faulty

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 1

0

SDCS-IOB-3 detected, see IO BoardConfig (98.15)

SDCS-IOB-3 not existing or faulty

B13 1 SDCS-COM-8

0

B14 1

SDCS-COM-8 not existing or faulty

RMBA-xx (Modbus) detected, see CommModule (98.02) and

ModBusModule2 (98.08)

0

B15 1

0

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

RMBA-xx (Modbus) not existing or faulty

SDCS-MEM-8 (Memory Card) detected

SDCS-MEM-8 (Memory Card) not existing or faulty

Type: C Volatile: Y

4.21 CPU Load (load of processor)

The calculating power of the processor is divided into two parts:

CPU Load (4.21) shows the load of the firmware and

ApplLoad (4.22) shows the load of the application.

Neither should reach 100%.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: Y

4.22 ApplLoad (load of application)

The calculating power of the processor is divided into two parts:

CPU Load (4.21) shows the load of the firmware and

ApplLoad (4.22) shows the load of the application.

Neither should reach 100%.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

208

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Calculated nominal motor torque.

Note:

the value is calculated the following way:

MotTorqNom

( 4 .

23 )

2

60

*

*

M

1

NomVolt

( 99 .

02 )

M

1

MotCur

( 99 .

03 ) *

M

1

ArmR

( 43 .

10 )

*

M

1

NomCur

( 99 .

03 )

M

1

BaseSpeed

( 99 .

04 )

Values above 65000 can not be displayed

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Nm Type: I Volatile: Y

4.24 ProgressSignal (progress signal for auto tunings)

Progress signal for auto tunings used for Startup Assistants.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: Y

4.25 TachoTerminal (tacho terminal to be used)

Depending on the analog tacho output voltage - e.g. 60 V at 1000 rpm - and the maximum speed of the drive system - which is the maximum of SpeedScaleAct (2.29), M1OvrSpeed (30.16) and

M1BaseSpeed (99.04) - different inputs connections at the SDCS-CON-4 have to be used:

TachoTerminal (4.25) shows which terminal has to be used depending on the setting of

M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13) and the actual maximum speed of the drive system:

0 = NotUsed

1 = X3:3 8-30V

M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13) = 0 V, no analog tacho used or not set jet result if M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13)

 1 V

2 = X3:2 30-90V result

 1 V

3 = X3:1 90-120V result

 1 V successfully measured by means of the speed feedback assistant

Note:

TachoTerminal (4.25) is also valid for motor 2 depending on setting of ParChange (10.10) and

MacroChangeMode (16.05).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

4.26 IactScaling (scaling of the fixed actual current output I-act)

Scaling of analog output for the actual output current in Ampere per 10 V output voltage. See terminals SDCS-CON-4 X4:9 and SDCS-IOB-3 X4:5.

Note:

The scaling can also be adjusted by means of R110 when using a SDCS-IOB-3.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: SI Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

209

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Analog I/O

5.01 AITacho Val (analog input for tacho)

Measured actual voltage at analog tacho input. The integer scaling may differ, depending on the connected hardware and jumper setting.

Note:

A value of 11 V equals 1.25 * M1OvrSpeed (30.16)

Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.02 Unused

5.03 AI1 Val (analog input 1 value)

Measured actual voltage at analog input 1. The integer scaling may differ, depending on the connected hardware and jumper settings.

Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.04 AI2 Val (analog input 2 value)

Measured actual voltage at analog input 2. The integer scaling may differ, depending on the connected hardware and jumper settings.

Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.05 AI3 Val (analog input 3 value)

Measured actual voltage at analog input 3. The integer scaling may differ, depending on the connected hardware and jumper settings.

Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.06 AI4 Val (analog input 4 value)

Measured actual voltage at analog input 4. The integer scaling may differ, depending on the connected hardware and jumper settings.

Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.07 AI5 Val (analog input 5 value)

Measured actual voltage at analog input 5. The integer scaling may differ, depending on the connected hardware and DIP-switch settings.

Available only with RAIO extension module see AIO ExtModule (98.06).

Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.08 AI6 Val (analog input 6 value)

Measured actual voltage at analog input 6. The integer scaling may differ, depending on the connected hardware and DIP-switch settings.

Available only with RAIO extension module see AIO ExtModule (98.06).

Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.09 Unused

5.10 Unused

5.11 AO1 Val (analog output 1 value)

Measured actual voltage at analog output 1.

Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.12 AO2 Val (analog output 2 value)

Measured actual voltage at analog output 2.

Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

210

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Drive logic signals

6.01 SystemTime (converter system time)

Shows the time of the converter in minutes. The system time can be either set by means of

SetSystemTime (16.11) or via the DCS800 Control Panel.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 min Type: I Volatile: Y

6.02 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

(1 st

current controller status)

1 st

current controller status word:

Bit Value Comment

B0 1

0 command

Fault signals

of this

B1 1 manual one mains phase missing

B2 1 -

0 -

B3 1

0 motor heating function active motor heating function not active

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 1

0

B5 1

0

B6 1

0

B7 1 field direction reverse field direction forward command to switch excitation on: FieldOn command to switch excitation off: FieldOff dynamic braking active / started dynamic braking not active command to close main contactor: MainContactorOn

0 command to open main contactor: MainContactorOff

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 1 command to close contactor for dynamic braking resistor (armature current is zero): DynamicBrakingOn

0

B9 1

0

B10 1 command to open contactor for dynamic braking resistor: DynamicBrakingOff drive is generating drive is motoring command to close the US style changeover DC-breaker (close the DC-breaker,

0 open the resistor breaker): US DCBreakerOn command to open the US style changeover DC-breaker (open the DC-breaker, close the resistor breaker): US DCBreakerOff

B11 1 firing pulses active (on)

0 firing pulses blocked

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 1

B13 1

0

B14 1 zero current detected current not zero

B15 1

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

211

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

212

Index

Signal / Parameter name

(2 nd

6.04 CurCtrlStat2 current controller status)

2 nd

current controller status word. The current controller will be blocked, CurRefUsed (3.12) is forced to zero and ArmAlpha (3.13) is forced to the value of ArmAlphaMax (20.14) if any of the bits is set (0 == OK):

B0 1 overcurrent,

B1 1

B2 1

B3 1 mains overvoltage (AC), F513 MainsOvrVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 12] mains undervoltage (AC), F512 MainsLowVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 11] waiting for reduction of EMF to match the mains voltage [see RevVoltMargin

(44.21)]

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 1 F533 12PRevTime [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 0], F534 12PCurDiff [FaultWord3

(9.03) bit 1] or F557 ReversalTime [FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 8]

B5 1 OperModeSel (43.01) = 12P…..: partner blocked)

OperModeSel (43.01) = FieldExciter: Overvoltage protection active

(freewheeling)

B6 1

0

B7 1 motor 1 field exciter selftest faulty, F529 M1FexNotOK [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit

12] motor 1 field exciter selftest OK motor 1 field exciter not ready, F537 M1FexRdyLost [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 4]

0 motor 1 field exciter ready

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 1 motor 2 field exciter selftest faulty, F530 M2FexNotOK [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit

0

13] motor 2 field exciter selftest OK

B9 1

0

B10 1 motor 2 field exciter not ready, F538 M2FexRdyLost [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 5] motor 2 field exciter ready waiting for zero current

B11 1 field reversal active, armature current controller is blocked

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 1 -

0 -

B13

B14

1

0

1 current controller not released, because DevLimPLL (97.13) is reached no action mains not in synchronism (AC), F514 MainsNotSync [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit

13]

B15 1 Current controller not released. This bit is set in case of a relevant fault (Fxxx) or an alarm (Axxx) of alarm level 3.

Note:

A set bit does not necessarily lead to a fault message it depends also on the status of the drive.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

213

Index

Signal / Parameter name

6.05 SelBridge (selected bridge)

Selected (current-conducting) bridge:

0 = NoBridge no bridge selected

1 = Bridge1 bridge 1 selected (motoring bridge)

2 = Bridge2 bridge 2 selected (generating bridge)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

6.06 Unused

6.07 Unused

6.08 Unused

6.09 CtrlStatMas (12-pulse master control status)

12-pulse master control status:

Bit Value Comment

B0 1 command

B1 1 command active)

B2 1

0 motor heating function active motor heating function not active

B3 1 command

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 1 command field Off

B5 1 dynamic

B6 1

0

12-pulse serial operation, see OperModeSel (43.01)

12-pulse parallel operation, see OperModeSel (43.01)

B7 1 command

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 1 -

0 -

B9 1 -

0 -

B10 1 waiting for reduction of EMF to match the mains voltage [see

RevVoltMargin (44.21)]

B11 1 autotuning armature current controller active

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 1 zero current detected + RevDly (43.14) is elapsed

B13 1

B14 1 command to change direction of current (bridge change over active)

CurCtrlStat2 (6.04) > 0 (current controller is blocked)

B15 1 CurRefUsed (3,12) negative

0 CurRefUsed (3.12) positive

 The control bits B3 to B6 (Reset, On, Run and Off2N) are only valid in the 12-pulse slave, if in the 12-pulse slave CommandSel (10.01) = 12P Link

 Valid in 12-pulse master and slave

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

214

Index

Signal / Parameter name

12-pulse slave control status:

Bit Value Comment

B0 1 -

0 -

B1 1 -

0 -

B2 1 -

0 -

B3 1 Tripped

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 1 -

0 -

B5 1 -

0 -

B6 1

0

12-pulse serial operation, see OperModeSel (43.01)

12-pulse parallel operation, see OperModeSel (43.01)

B7 1 -

0 -

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 1 -

0 -

B9 1 -

0 -

B10 1 -

0 -

B11 1 -

0 -

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 1 -

0 -

B13 1 bridge change over active

B14 1 CurCtrlStat2 (6.04) > 0 (current controller is blocked)

B15 1 CurRefUsed (3,12) negative

0 CurRefUsed (3.12) positive

 Valid in 12-pulse master and slave

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

6.11 Unused

Motor 1 field exciter status:

0 = NotUsed no field exciter connected

1 = OK

2 = ComFault field exciter and communication OK

F516 M1FexCom [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 15], communication faulty

3 = FexFaulty F529 M1FexNotOK [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 12], field exciter selftest faulty

4 = FexNotReady F537 M1FexRdyLost [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 4], field exciter not ready

5 = FexUnderCur F541 M1FexLowCur [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 8], field exciter undercurrent

6 = FexOverCur F515 M1FexOverCur [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 14], field exciter overcurrent

7 = WrongSetting check setting of M1UsedFexType (99.12) and M2UsedFexType (49.07)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Motor 1 field exciter status:

0 = NotUsed no field exciter connected

1 = OK

2 = ComFault field exciter and communication OK

F519 M2FexCom [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 2], communication faulty

3 = FexFaulty F530 M2FexNotOK [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 13], field exciter selftest faulty

4 = FexNotReady F538 M2FexRdyLost [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 5], field exciter not ready

5 = FexUnderCur F542 M2FexLowCur [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 9], field exciter undercurrent

6 = FexOverCur F518 M2FexOverCur [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 1], field exciter overcurrent

7 = WrongSetting check setting of M1UsedFexType (99.12) and M2UsedFexType (49.07)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

215

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

216

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Control words

All signals in this group - except UsedMCW (7.04) - can be written to my means of DWL, DCS800

Control Panel, Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

The main control word contains all drive depending commands and can be written to by Adaptive

Program, application program or overriding control:

Bit Name

B0

With MainContCtrlMode (21.16) = On: Contactors are closed, field exciter and fans are started.

With MainContCtrlMode (21.16) = On&Run:

RdyRun flag in MainStatWord (8.01) is forced to 1

(21.02).

B1 Off2N 1 Off2 (Emergency Off / Coast Stop) firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

Off2N has priority over OffN3 and On.

B2 Off3N 1 Off3 (E-stop)

StopMode (21.04).

Off3N has priority over On.

B3

(21.03).

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4

B5

B6

RampOutZero

1 no

0 speed ramp output is forced to zero

0 released and the drive is running with the selected speed reference. freeze (hold) speed ramp

RampInZero 1 no

0 speed ramp input is forced to zero

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

B7 Reset 1 acknowledge fault indications with the positive edge

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8

Inching1

1 constant speed defined by FixedSpeed1 (23.02), active only with CommandSel (10.01) =

MainCtrlWord and RampOutZero = RampHold =

RampInZero = Run = 0; Inching2 overrides

Inching1 alternatively Jog1 (10.17) can be used

B9 Inching2 1 constant speed defined by FixedSpeed2 (23.03), active only with CommandSel (10.01) =

MainCtrlWord and RampOutZero = RampHold =

RampInZero = Run = 0; Inching2 overrides

Inching1 alternatively Jog2 (10.18) can be used

B10 RemoteCmd 1 overriding control enabled (overriding control has to set this value to 1)

B11 aux. control

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type:

x

I

[SpeedRef (23.01), AuxSpeedRef (23.13), TorqRefA

(25.01) and TorqRefB (25.04)] are retained. On control place change - see CommandSel (10.01) - the drive is stopped. The aux. control bits (B11 to B15) are not affected. used by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 aux. control x used by Adaptive Program, application program or

B13 aux. control x overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters used by Adaptive Program, application program or

B14 aux. control x overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters used by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters

B15 aux. control x used by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters

Volatile: Y

217

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

218

Index

Signal / Parameter name

7.02 AuxCtrlWord (auxiliary control word 1, ACW1)

The auxiliary control word 1 can be written to by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control:

Bit Name

B0 RestartDataLog 1

B1 TrigDataLog 1 restart data logger trigger data logger (see note)

B2 RampBypass 1 bypass speed ramp (speed ramp output is forced to value of speed ramp input)

B3 BalRampOut 1 speed ramp output is forced to BalRampRef (22.08)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 LimSpeedRef4 1 SpeedRef4 (2.18) is not limited

0 SpeedRef4 (2.18) is limited by M1SpeedMax (20.02) /

M1SpeedMin (20.01) respectively by M2SpeedMax

(49.19) / M2SpeedMin (49.20)

B5 DynBrakingOn 1 force dynamic braking independent from Off1Mode

(21.02), StopMode (21.03) or E StopMode (21.04)

B6 HoldSpeedCtrl 1 freeze (hold) the I-part of the speed controller

B7 WindowCtrl 1

0

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 BalSpeedCtrl 1 speed controller output is forced to BalRef (24.11)

B9 SyncCommand 1 release window control block window control positioning: synchronizing command from overriding control for pulse encoder 1 or pulse encoder 2 or both pulse encoders depending if SyncCommand (10.04) and / or SyncCommand2 (10.05) is set to

SyncCommand

B10 SyncDisable 1

B11 ResetSyncRdy 1 positioning: block synchronizing command

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 aux. control x used by, Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control to control various functions selected

B13

B14 aux. control aux. control x x by parameters used by, Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters used by, Adaptive Program, application program or

B15 aux. control x overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters used by, Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters

Note:

The data logger contains six channels with 1024 samples each.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

219

Index

Signal / Parameter name

The auxiliary control word 2 can be written to by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control:

Bit Name

B0 reserved

B1 reserved

Value Comment

1

0

1

0

B2 reserved

B3 reserved

1

0

1

0

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4

DisableBridge1

1 bridge 1 blocked

0

B5

DisableBridge2

1

0

B6 SupprArmCurDev 1 bridge 1 released bridge 2 blocked bridge 2 released

A114 ArmCurDev [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 12] blocked, usually used for non motoric applications

B7 ForceAlphaMax

0 A114 ArmCurDev [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 12] released

1 force single firing pulses and set firing angle (

α) to

0

ArmAlphaMax (20.14) normal firing pulses released

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 DriveDirection 1 drive direction reverse (see note1), changes the signs of

B9 reserved

0

1

B10 DirectSpeedRef 1

MotSpeed (1.04) and CurRef (3.11) drive direction forward (see note1)

0 speed ramp output is overwritten and forced to

DirectSpeedRef (23.15)

B11 TorqProvOK

0

1 speed ramp is active

Selected motor torque proving is OK. This bit to be set by

Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control

[see also M1TorqProvTime (42.10)].

B12 ForceBrake

0 Selected motor torque proving is inactive. This bit is to be set by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 selected motor, the brake remains closed (applied) (see note2)

0

B13 ResetTorqMem 1 selected motor, the brake is controlled by the internal brake logic in group 42 (Brake control) reset torque memory (valid only if M1StrtTorqRefSel (42.07)

= Memory)

B14 reserved

B15 ResetPIDCtrl

0

1

0

1

0 reset and hold PID-controller release PID controller

Note1:

Changes of DriveDirection become active only in drive state RdyRun. Changing the speed direction of a running drive (RdyRef state) by means of DriveDirection is not possible.

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

220

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Note2:

If ForceBrake is set the brake remains closed (applied).

If the Run [MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 3] command is given to a drive in state RdyOn or RdyRef

[MainStatWord (8.01) bit 0 and 1], the brake logic will be started up to the point of the brake open command.

A drive in state Running [MainStatWord (8.01) bit 2] will be stopped by ramp, the brake will be closed (applied), but the drive will remain in state Running.

Int. Scaling: 1== 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

7.04 UsedMCW (used main control word, UMCW)

Internal used (selected) main control word is read only and contains all drive depending commands. The selection is depending on the drives local/remote control setting, CommandSel

(10.01) and HandAuto (10.07).

The bit functionality of bit 0 to bit 10 is the same as the in the MainCtrlWord (7.01). Not all functions are controllable from local control or local I/O mode. to

B11 reserved to

B15 reserved

7.01

MCW B10

Hand/Auto 10.07

CommandSel 10.01

Panel

DW

DWL

7.04

MainCtrlWord (MCW)

UsedMCW (UMCW)

Bit0 On (Off1N)

OnOff1

10.15

Local

Bit0 On (Off1N)

Bit1 Off2N (Coast Stop)

Off2

10.08

Local

Bit1 Off2N (Coast Stop)

10.08

Off2

&

Bit2 Off3N (E-Stop)

E Stop

10.09

Local

&

Bit2 Off3N (E-Stop)

10.09

E-Stop

Bit3 Run Bit3 Run

StartStop

10.16

Local

Bit4 RampOutZero

Bit4 RampOutZero

1 1

Bit5 RampHold

Bit5 RampHold

1 1

Bit6 RampInZero

Bit6 RampInZero

1 1

Bit7 Reset

Bit7 Reset

Reset

10.03

Local

Bit8 Inching1

Bit8 Inching1

0

0

Bit9 Inching2

Bit9 Inching2

0

0

Bit10 RemoteCmd

Bit10 RemoteCmd

1

1

Bit11…Bit15 aux. control

Attention:

The UsedMCW (7.04) is write protected, thus it is not possible to write on the used main control word by means of Master-follower, Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

7.05 DO CtrlWord (digital output control word, DOCW)

The DO control word 1 can be written to by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control. To connect bits of the DO CtrlWord (7.05) with DO1 to DO8 use the parameters in group

14 (Digital outputs). DO9 to DO12 are directly sent to the extension I/O. Thus they are only available for Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

B0

B1

B2

B3

DO1

DO2

DO3

DO4 this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group

14 (Digital outputs) this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group

14 (Digital outputs) this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group

14 (Digital outputs) this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group

14 (Digital outputs)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 DO5 this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group

B5

B6

DO6

DO7

14 (Digital outputs) this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group

14 (Digital outputs) this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group

14 (Digital outputs)

B7

B8

DO8

DO9 this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group

14 (Digital outputs)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------this bit is written directly to DO1 of the extension IO defined by DIO

ExtModule1 (98.03)

B9 DO10 this bit is written directly to DO2 of the extension IO defined by DIO

ExtModule1 (98.03)

B10 DO11 this bit is written directly to DO1 of the extension IO defined by DIO

ExtModule2 (98.04) this bit is written directly to DO2 of the extension IO defined by DIO B11 DO12

ExtModule2 (98.04)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 reserved to

B15 reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

7.06 RFE CtrlWord (control word resonance frequency eliminator, RFECW)

The Resonance Frequency Eliminator control word can be written to by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control:

Bit Name

B0

B1

FilterRelease 1

0

BalFilter

1 release the RFE filter with a static 1 block the RFE filter with a static 0

Balance the RFE filter after a parameter change. Use a pulse of

 10 ms ().

B2 reserved to

B15 reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

221

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

222

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Status / limit words

8.01 MainStatWord (main status word, MSW)

Main status word:

Bit Name Value Comment

B0 RdyOn 1

0 ready to switch on not ready to switch on

B1

RdyRun

B2

RdyRef

B3

1

0 ready to generate torque not ready to generate torque

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 Off2NStatus 1 Off2 not active

B5

0 Off2 (OnInhibit state) active

Off3NStatus 1 Off3 not active

B6

0 Off3 (OnInhibit state) active

OnInhibited 1 OnInhibited state is active after a:

 fault

 Emergency Off / Coast Stop (Off2)

 E-stop (Off3)

OnInhibited via digital input Off2 (10.08) or E Stop

(10.09)

0 OnInhibit state not active

B7

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 AtSetpoint 1 SpeedRef4 (2.18) - and actual value -

MotSpeed (1.04) - in the tolerance zone

MotSpeed (1.04) - out of the tolerance zone

B9

B10 AboveLimit 1

0 speed greater than defined in SpeedLev (50.10) speed lower or equal than defined SpeedLev (50.10)

B11 reserved

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 reserved to

B15 reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

8.02 AuxStatWord (auxiliary status word, ASW)

Auxiliary status word:

Bit Name

B0 DataLogReady 1

0 contents of data logger is readable contents of data logger is not readable

B1 OutOfWindow 1 actual speed is out of window defined by WinWidthPos

(23.08) and WinWidthNeg (23.09)

B2 E-StopCoast

0

1 actual speed is inside the defined window

E-stop function has failed, see E StopDecMin (21.05), E

StopDecMax (21.06) and DecMonDly (21.07)

B3 User1 1 User1 active, see ApplMacro (99.08)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 User2 1 User2 active, see ApplMacro (99.08)

B5 SyncRdy 1 positioning: synchronization is done either for pulse encoder 1 or pulse encoder 2 or both pulse encoders depending on the setting of SyncCommand (10.04) and

B6 Fex1Ack

0

1

SyncCommand2 (10.05), enabled only if PosSyncMode

(50.15) = Single positioning: synchronizing not done motor 1 field exciter acknowledged

B7 Fex2Ack 1 motor 2 field exciter acknowledged

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 BrakeCmd 1 selected motor, command to open (lift) the brake is given, see group 42 (Brake control)

0 selected motor, command to close (apply) the brake is given

B9 Limiting

B10 TorqCtrl

B11 ZeroSpeed

1

0

1 drive is in a limit, see LimWord (8.03) drive is not in a limit, drive is torque controlled

1 actual motor speed is in the zero speed limit defined by

M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) or M2ZeroSpeedLim (49.04)

0 actual motor speed is out of the zero speed limit

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 EMFSpeed 1

B13 FaultOrAlarm 1

0

B14 DriveDirectionNeg 1

0

1 fault or alarm indication no fault or alarm indication negative drive direction active - controlled by bit 8 of

AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03) positive drive direction active - controlled by bit 8 of

AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03) auto reclosing logic is active B15 AutoReclosing

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

223

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

224

Index

Signal / Parameter name

8.03 LimWord (limit word, LW)

Limit word:

B0

B1

B2

B3

TorqMax (20.05) or TorqMaxAll (2.19)

TorqMin (20.06) or TorqMinAll (2.20)

TorqMaxSPC (20.07) or TorqMaxAll (2.19)

TorqMinSPC (20.08) or TorqMinAll (2.20)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4

B5

B6

B7

TorqMaxTref (20.09)

TorqMinTref (20.10)

M1SpeedMax (20.02) or M2SpeedMax (49.20)

M1SpeedMin (20.01) or M2SpeedMin (49.19)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8

B9

M1CurLimBrdg1 (20.12) or M2CurLimBrdg1 (49.12)

M1CurLimBrdg2 (20.13) or M2CurLimBrdg2 (49.13)

B10 reserved

B11 reserved

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 reserved to

B15 reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

8.04 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

8.05 DI StatWord (digital inputs status word, DISW)

Digital input word, shows the value of the digital inputs before inversion [DI1Invert (10.25), …,

DI11Invert (10.35)]: to drive

Bit Name

B0 DI1

B1 DI2

B2 DI3

Comment / default setting

ConvFanAck (10.20), actual setting depends on macro

MotFanAck (10.06), actual setting depends on macro

MainContAck (10.21), actual setting depends on macro

B3 DI4 Off2 (10.08), actual setting depends on macro

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 DI5

B5 DI6

E Stop (10.09), actual setting depends on macro

Reset (10.03), actual setting depends on macro

B6 DI7

B7 DI8

OnOff (10.15), actual setting depends on macro

StartStop (10.16), actual setting depends on macro

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 DI9 DI1 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 (98.03)

B9 DI10

B10 DI11

DI2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 (98.03)

DI3 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 (98.03)

B11 DI12 DI1 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 (98.04). Only available for Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 DI13 DI2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 (98.04). Only available for Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

DI3 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 (98.04). Only available B13 DI14 for Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

B14 reserved

B15 reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

225

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

226

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Digital output word, shows the value of the digital outputs after inversion:

Bit Name Comment / default setting

B0 DO1 DO1Index (14.01) = 603 and DO1BitNo (14.02) = 15, FansOn, actual setting

B1

B2

DO2

DO3 depends on macro

DO2Index (14.03) = 603 and DO2BitNo (14.04) = 5, FieldOn, actual setting depends on macro

DO3Index (14.05) = 603 and DO3BitNo (14.06) = 7, MainContactorOn, actual setting depends on macro

B3 DO4

B4 DO5

DO4Index (14.07) = 0 and DO4BitNo (14.08) = 0, Not connected, actual setting depends on macro

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

DO5Index (14.09) = 0 and DO5BitNo (14.10) = 0, Not connected, actual setting depends on macro

B5 DO6

B6 DO7

DO6Index (14.11) = 0 and DO6BitNo (14.12) = 0, Not connected, actual setting depends on macro

DO7Index (14.13) = 0 and DO7BitNo (14.14) = 0, Not connected, actual setting depends on macro

B7 DO8 DO8Index (14.15) = 603 and DO8BitNo (14.16) = 7, MainContactorOn, actual setting depends on macro

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 DO9 DO1 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 (98.03), written to by

DO CtrlWord (7.05) bit 8

B9 DO10 DO2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 (98.03), written to by

DO CtrlWord (7.05) bit 9

B10 DO11 DO1 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 (98.04), written to by

DO CtrlWord (7.05) bit 10

B11 DO12 DO2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 (98.04), written to by

DO CtrlWord (7.05) bit 11

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 reserved to

B15 reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

8.07 Unused

8.08 DriveStat (drive status)

Drive status:

0 = OnInhibited drive is in OnInhibit state

1 = ChangeToOff drive is changing to Off

3 = RdyOn

4 = RdyRun drive is ready on drive is ready run

7 = Off3

8 = Off2

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

Signal and parameter list

drive is in Off3 state (E-stop) drive is in Off2 state (Emergency Off or Coast Stop)

Type: C Volatile: Y

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Select motor and field exciter:

0 = Motor1 motor 1 and field exciter 1 are selected

1 = Motor2 motor 2 and field exciter 2 are selected

See ParChange (10.10)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

8.10 MacroSel (selected macro)

Currently selected macro:

1 = Factory

3 = User2 factory (default) parameter set

User2 parameter set

5 = Man/Const manual / constant speed

6 = Hand/Auto hand (manual) / automatic

7 = Hand/MotPot hand (manual) / motor potentiometer

8 = reserved reserved

13 = 2WreDCcontUS 2 wire with US style DC-breaker

14 = 3WreDCcontUS 3 wire with US style DC-breaker

15 = 3WreStandard 3 wire standard

See ApplMacro (99.08)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

8.11 RFE StatWord (status word resonance frequency eliminator)

Resonance Frequency Eliminator control word

Bit Name

B0

FiltParCalcAct

1 internal parameters are being calculated, filter algorithm is skipped

B1 ParUdpReq

B2

B3

FiltReleased

ParChange

1

1

0

1 parameter update request after parameter change

RFE filter is released

RFE filter is blocked parameter have changed

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 reserved to

B15 reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

227

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

228

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Fault / alarm words

9.01 FaultWord1 (fault word 1)

Fault word 1:

Bit Fault text Fault code and trip level

Comment

B0

AuxUnderVolt

F501 1 auxiliary

B1

ArmOverCur

F502 3 armature

B2 ArmOverVolt F503

ArmOvrCurLev (30.09)

B3 ConvOverTemp F504 2 shutdown temperature see MaxBridgeTemp (4.17)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 ResCurDetect F505 1 residual current detection, ResCurDetectSel

(30.05), ResCurDetectLim (30.06),

B5

B6

B7

M1OverTemp

M1OverLoad

I/OBoardLoss

F506

F507

F508

2

2

1

ResCurDetectDel (30.07) motor 1 measured overtemperature,

M1FaultLimTemp (31.07) or M1KlixonSel (31.08) motor 1 calculated overload (thermal model),

M1FaultLimLoad (31.04)

I/O board not found or faulty, DIO ExtModule1

(98.03), DIO ExtModule2 (98.04), AIO ExtModule

(98.06), AIO MotTempMeas (98.12), IO

BoardConfig (98.15)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 M2OverTemp F509 2 motor 2 measured overtemperature,

B9 M2OverLoad F510 2

M2FaultLimTemp (49.37) or M2KixonSel (49.38) motor 2 calculated overload (thermal model),

M2FaultLimLoad (49.34)

B10 ConvFanCur F511 4

B11 MainsLowVolt F512 3 converter fan current, ConvTempDly (97.05) mains low (under-) voltage, PwrLossTrip (30.21),

UNetMin1 (30.22), UNetMin2 (30.23)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 MainsOvrVolt F513 1 mains overvoltage, actual mains voltage is > 1.3 *

NomMainsVolt (99.10) for longer than 10 s

B13 MainsNotSync

B14 M1FexOverCur

B15 M1FexCom

Int. Scaling:

F514

F515

3

1 mains not in synchronism motor 1 field exciter overcurrent, M1FldOvrCurLev

(30.13) motor 1 field exciter communication loss, F516 1

1 == 1 Type: I

FexTimeOut (94.07), DCSLinkNodeID (94.01),

M1FexNode (94.08)

Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

9.02 FaultWord2 (fault word 2)

Fault word 2:

Bit Fault text Fault code and trip level

B0

ArmCurRipple

F517 3

Comment

B1 M2FexOverCur F518 1 armature current ripple, CurRippleMode (30.18),

CurRippleLim (30.19) motor 2 field exciter overcurrent, M2FldOvrCurLev

(49.09)

B2 M2FexCom F519 1

B3 reserved F520 -

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 FieldAck F521 1 selected motor: field acknowledge, check fault message of or at field exciter

B5

SpeedFb

F522 3 motor 2 field exciter communication loss

FexTimeOut (94.07), DCSLinkNodeID (94.01),

M2FexNode (94.09) selected motor: speed feedback, SpeedFbFltSel

(30.17), SpeedFbFltMode (30.36), M1SpeedFbSel

(50.03)

B6 ExtFanAck F523 4 external fan acknowledge missing MotFanAck

(10.06)

B7 MainContAck F524 3 main contactor acknowledge missing,

MainContAck (10.21)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 TypeCode

B9 ExternalDI

B10 ConvFanAck

B11 FieldBusCom

F525 1

F526 1

F527 4

F528 5 type code mismatch, TypeCode (97.01) external fault via binary input, ExtFaultSel (30.31) converter fan acknowledge missing, ConvFanAck

(10.20) fieldbus communication loss, ComLossCtrl

(30.28), FB TimeOut (30.35), CommModule

(98.02)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 M1FexNotOK F529 1 motor 1 field exciter not okay

B13 M2FexNotOK

B14 MotorStalled

F530

F531

1

3 motor 2 field exciter not okay selected motor: motor stalled, StallTime (30.01),

B15 MotOverSpeed

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

F532

Type:

3

I

StallSpeed (30.02), StallTorq (30.03) selected motor: motor overspeed, M1OvrSpeed

(30.16)

Volatile: Y

229

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

230

Index

Signal / Parameter name

9.03 FaultWord3 (fault word 3)

Fault word 3:

Bit

B0

B1

B2

Fault text

12PRevTime

12PCurDiff

12PulseCom

Fault code and trip level

F533

F534

F535

3

3

3

Comment

12-pulse reversal timeout, 12P RevTimeOut (47.05)

12-pulse current difference, DiffCurLim (47.02),

DiffCurDly (47.03)

12-pulse communication loss, 12P TimeOut (94.03),

DCSLinkNodeID (94.01), 12P SlaNode (94.04)

B3 12PSlaveFail F536 4 12-pulse slave failure, this fault message trips the

12-pulse master and appears only in the 12-pulse master

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 M1FexRdyLost F537 1 motor 1 field exciter lost ready-for-operation message while working

B5 M2FexRdyLost F538 1 motor 2 field exciter lost ready-for-operation message while working

B6 FastCurRise F539 1 fast current rise, ArmCurRiseMax (30.10)

B7 COM8Faulty F540 faulty

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 M1FexLowCur F541 1 motor 1 field exciter low (under-) current,

B9 M2FexLowCur F542 1

M1FldMinTrip (30.12), FldMinTripDly (45.18) motor 2 field exciter low (under-) current,

M2FldMinTrip (49.08), FldMinTripDly (45.18)

B11 P2PandMFCom F544 5

ComLossCtrl (70.05), Ch0 TimeOut (70.04), Ch2

ComLossCtrl (70.15), Ch2 TimeOut (70.14)

Peer to peer and master-follower communication loss, ComLossCtrl (30.28), MailBoxCycle1 (94.13),

MailBoxCycle2 (94.19), MailBoxCycle3 (94.25),

MailBoxCycle4 (94.31)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 ApplLoadFail F545 1 application load failure, see Diagnosis (9.11)

B13 LocalCmdLoss F546 5

B14 HwFailure F547 1

B15 FwFailure

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

F548

Type:

1

I

local command loss, LocalLossCtrl (30.27) hardware failure, see Diagnosis (9.11) firmware failure, see Diagnosis (9.11)

Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

9.04 FaultWord4 (fault word 4)

Fault word 4:

Bit Fault text Fault code and trip level

Comment

B0 ParComp F549 fault can be identified in Diagnosis (9.11)

B1 ParMemRead F550 eading the actual parameter set or a user parameter set from either parameter flash or

B2

AIRange

B3 MechBrake

F551

F552

4

3

Memory Card failed (checksum fault) analog input range, AI Mon4mA (30.29) selected motor: mechanical brake, M1BrakeAckSel

(42.02), M1BrakeFltTime (42.05), BrakeFaultFunc

(42.06), M1BrakeLongTime (42.12)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 TachPolarity F553 3 selected motor: tacho respectively pulse encoder polarity

B5

B6

B7

TachoRange reserved

TorqProving

F554

F555

F556

3

3

Overflow of AITacho input reserved for PID-controller selected motor: torque proving, M1TorqProvTime

(42.10), the Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control providing the acknowledge signal TorqProvOK [AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03) bit 11]

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 ReversalTime F557

(43.14)

B9 reserved

B10 reserved

F558

F559 no

B11 APFault1 F601 1 Adaptive Program fault 1

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 APFault2

B13 APFault3

F602

F603

1

1

Adaptive Program fault 2

Adaptive Program fault 3

B14 APFault4

B15 APFault5

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

F604 1

F605 1

Type: I

Adaptive Program fault 4

Adaptive Program fault 5

Volatile: Y

231

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

232

Index

Signal / Parameter name

9.05 UserFaultWord (user defined fault word 1)

User defined fault word. All names are defined by the user via application program:

Bit Fault text Fault code and trip level

Comment

B0 UserFault1 F610

B1 UserFault2 F611

B2 UserFault3 F612

B3 UserFault4 F613

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 UserFault5 F614

B5 UserFault6 F615

B6 UserFault7 F616

B7 UserFault8 F617

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 UserFault9 F618

B9 UserFault10 F619

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

9.06 AlarmWord1 (alarm word 1)

Alarm word 1:

Bit Alarm text Alarm code and alarm level

Comment

B0 Off2ViaDI A101 Off2 (Emergency Off / Coast Stop) pending via digital input, Off2 (10.08)

B1 Off3ViaDI A102 Off3 (E-stop) pending via digital input, E Stop

B2 DC BreakAck A103 3

(10.09) selected motor: DC-breaker acknowledge missing,

DC BreakAck (10.23)

B3 ConvOverTemp A104 2 converter see MaxBridgeTemp (4.17). The converter overtemperature alarm will already appear at approximately 5°C below the shutdown temperature.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 DynBrakeAck A105 1 selected motor: dynamic braking acknowledge is still

B5

B6

M1OverTemp

M1OverLoad

A106

A107

2

2 pending, DynBrakeAck (10.22) motor 1 measured overtemperature,

M1AlarmLimTemp (31.06) motor 1 calculated overload (thermal model),

M1AlarmLimLoad (31.03)

B7 reserved A108 4 no

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 M2OverTemp A109 2 motor 2 measured overtemperature,

M2AlarmLimTemp (49.36)

B9 M2OverLoad A110 2

B10 MainsLowVolt A111 3 motor 2 calculated overload (thermal model),

M2AlarmLimLoad (49.33) mains low (under-) voltage, PwrLossTrip (30.21),

UNetMin1 (30.22), UNetMin2 (30.23)

B11 P2PandMFCom A112 4 Drive-to-drive and master-follower communication loss, ComLossCtrl (30.28), MailBoxCycle1 (94.13),

MailBoxCycle2 (94.19), MailBoxCycle3 (94.25),

MailBoxCycle4 (94.31)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B13 ArmCurDev

B14 TachoRange

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

A114

A115

B15 BrakeLongFalling A116

Type:

3

4

4

I

ComLossCtrl (70.05), Ch0 TimeOut (70.04), Ch2

ComLossCtrl (70.15), Ch2 TimeOut (70.14) armature current deviation

Overflow of AITacho input or M1OvrSpeed (30.16) respectively M2OvrSpeed (49.21) have been changed selected motor: mechanical brake, M1BrakeAckSel

(42.02), BrakeFaultFunc (42.06), M1BrakeLongTime

(42.12)

Volatile: Y

233

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

234

Index

Signal / Parameter name

9.07 AlarmWord2 (alarm word 2)

Alarm word 2:

Bit Alarm text Alarm code and alarm level

B0 ArmCurRipple A117 4

Comment armature current ripple, CurRippleMode (30.18,

CurRippleLim (30.19)

B1 FoundNewAppl A118 1

B2 ApplDiff A119 1 found new application on Memory Card, activate application on Memory Card by means of

ParApplSave (16.06) = EableAppl application on drive and Memory Card are different, activate application on Memory Card by means of

ParApplSave (16.06) = EableAppl

B3 OverVoltProt A120 3 overvoltage protection active, OvrVoltProt (30.13)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 AutotuneFail A121 failure,

B5 MechBrake A122 4 selected motor: mechanical brake, BrakeFaultFunc

(42.06), M1StrtTorqRefSel (42.07), M2StrtTorqRefSel

B6

B7

FaultSuppres

SpeedScale

A123 4

A124 4

(49.44) at least one fault message is mask speed scaling out of range, M1SpeedScale (50.01) and M1BaseSpeed (99.04), the parameter causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis (9.11)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8

SpeedFb

A125 4 selected motor: speed feedback, M1SpeedFbSel

(50.03), SpeedFbFltMode (30.36), SpeedFbFltSel

B9 ExternalDI

B10

AIRange

B11 FieldBusCom

A126 4

A127 4

A128 4

(30.17) external alarm via binary input, ExtAlarmSel (30.32) analog input range, AI Mon4mA(30.29) fieldbus communication loss, ComLossCtrl (30.28)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 ParRestored A129 4 The parameters found in flash were found invalid at power-up (checksum fault). The parameters were

B13

B14

B15

LocalCmdLoss

ParAdded

ParConflict

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

A130 4

A131 4

A132 4

Type: I

restored from the parameter backup. local command loss, LocalLossCtrl (30.27)

A new firmware with a different amount of parameters was downloaded. The new parameters are set to their default values. The parameters causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis (9.11). parameter setting conflict, the parameter causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis (9.11)

Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

9.08 AlarmWord3 (alarm word 3)

Alarm word 3:

Bit Alarm text Alarm code Comment and alarm level

B0 RetainInv A133 - retain data invalid

B1 ParComp A134 alarm can be identified in Diagnosis (9.11)

B2 ParUpDwnLoad A135 4 The checksum verification failed during up- or download of parameters. Please try again.

B3 NoAPTaskTime A136 4 Adaptive Program task for not set in TimeLevSel

(83.04)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 SpeedNotZero A137 1 Re-start of drive is not possible. Speed zero [see

M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) or M2ZeroSpeedLim

(49.04)] has not been reached [only in case FlyStart

(21.10) = StartFrom0]. In case of a trip set On = Run

= 0 to reset the alarm.

B5 Off2FieldBus A138 Off2 (Emergency Off / Coast Stop) pending via fieldbus, Off2 (10.08)

B6 Off3FieldBus A139 Off3 (E-stop) pending via fieldbus, E Stop (10.09)

B7 IllgFieldBus A140 4 the fieldbus parameters in group 51 (fieldbus) are not set according to the fieldbus adapter or the device has not been selected

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 COM8FwVer A141 4 invalid combination of SDCS-CON-4 firmware and

SDCS-COM-8 firmware

B9 MemCardMiss A142 1 Memory missing

B10 MemCardFail A143 1 checksum failure or wrong Memory Card

B11 APAlarm1 A301 4 Adaptive Program alarm 1

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 APAlarm2

B13 APAlarm3

A302

A303

4

4

Adaptive Program alarm 2

Adaptive Program alarm 3

B14 APAlarm4

B15 APAlarm5

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

A304 4 Adaptive Program alarm 4

A305 4 Adaptive Program alarm 5

Type: I Volatile: Y

235

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

236

Index

Signal / Parameter name

9.09 UserAlarmWord (user defined alarm word 1)

User defined alarm word. All names are defined by the user via application program:

Bit Alarm text Alarm code and alarm level

Comment

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

9.10 SysFaultWord (system fault word)

Operating system faults from SDCS-COM-8 board:

Bit Fault text

B0 Factory macro parameter file error

Fault code F default parameters are invalid

B1 User macro parameter file error one of the User macros is invalid

B2 Non Volatile operating system error AMCOS fault, please contact Your local ABB agent

B3 File error in flash problems when writing to the flash memory, please try again

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 Internal time level T2 overflow (100

s) timeout of task T2, if happens frequently please contact Your local ABB agent

B5 Internal time level T3 overflow (1 ms) timeout of task T3, if happens frequently please contact Your local ABB agent

B6 Internal time level T4 overflow (50 ms) timeout of task T4, if happens frequently please contact Your local ABB agent

B7 Internal time level T5 overflow (1 s) timeout of task T5, if happens frequently please contact Your local ABB agent

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 State overflow timeout of task State, if happens frequently please contact Your local ABB agent

B9 Application window ending overflow application on SDCS-COM-8 faulty

B10 Application program overflow

B11 Illegal instruction application on SDCS-COM-8 faulty crash of CPU due to EMC or hardware problems

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 Register stack overflow overflow due to EMC or firmware bug

B13 System stack overflow

B14 System stack underflow overflow due to EMC or firmware bug underflow due to crash of CPU or firmware bug

B15 reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I

-

Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

237

Index

Signal / Parameter name

9.11 Diagnosis (diagnosis)

Attention:

Diagnosis (9.11) is set to zero by means of Reset.

Displays diagnostics messages:

0 = no message

Firmware:

1 = default setting of parameters wrong

2 =

3 =

4 = parameter flash image too small for all parameters reserved illegal write attempt on a signal or write-protected parameter, e.g. writing on UsedMCW (7.04) with

master-follower.

5 = reserved

6 =

7 = wrong type code an un-initialized interrupted has occurred

8, 9 = reserved

10 = wrong parameter value

Autotuning:

11 =

12 =

13 =

14 =

15 =

16 =

17 =

18 =

19 =

20 =

21 = autotuning aborted by fault or removing the Run command [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3] autotuning timeout, Run command [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3] is not set in time motor is still turning, no speed zero indication field current not zero armature current not zero armature voltage measurement circuit open (e.g. not connected) or interrupted, check also current and torque limits armature circuit and/or armature voltage measurement circuit wrongly connected no load connected to armature circuit invalid nominal armature current setting; armature current M1MotNomCur (99.03) is set to zero field current does not decrease when the excitation is switched off field current actual doesn't reach field current reference; no detection of field resistance; field circuit open (e.g. not connected) respectively interrupted no writing of control parameters of speed controller tacho adjustment faulty or not OK or the tacho voltage is too high during autotuning

22 =

23 =

24 =

25 = tuning of speed controller, speed feedback assistant or tacho fine tuning not possible due to speed limitation - see e.g. M1SpeedMin (20.01) and M1SpeedMax (20.02)

Tuning of speed controller, speed feedback assistant or tacho fine tuning not possible due to voltage limitation. During the tuning of the speed controller, the speed feedback assistant or the tacho fine tuning base speed [M1BaseSpeed (99.04)] might be reached. Thus full armature voltage

[M1NomVolt (99.02)] is necessary. In case the mains voltage is too low to provide for the needed armature voltage the autotuning procedure is canceled.

Check and adapt if needed:

Mains voltage

M1NomVolt (99.02)

M1BaseSpeed (99.04) field weakening not allowed, see M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) and FldCtrlMode (44.01) 26 =

27 =

28 =

29 =

30 =

30 =

32 =

33 =

34 =

35 = discontinuous current limit could not be determined due to low current limitation in M1CurLimBrdg1

(20.12) or M1CurLimBrdg2 (20.13) filed current autotuning wrongly started in armature converter, please use the field exciter no field exciter selected, see M1UsedFexType (99.12) reserved

DCS800 Control Panel up- or download not started

DCS800 Control Panel data not up- or downloaded in time reserved

DCS800 Control Panel up -or download checksum faulty

DCS800 Control Panel up- or download software faulty

36 = DCS800 Control Panel up- or download verification failed

37 - 40 reserved

41 = The flash is written to cyclic by Adaptive Program (e.g. block ParWrite) or application program. Cyclic saving of values in the flash will damage it! Do not write cyclic on the flash!

42 - 49 reserved

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

238

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Hardware:

50 = parameter flash faulty (erase)

51 =

52 = parameter flash faulty (program) check connector X12 on SDCS-CON-4 and connector X12 and X22 on SDCS-PIN-4/51

53 - 69 reserved

A132 ParConflict (alarm parameter setting conflict):

70 = no field reversal possible due to ForceFldDir (45.07) = ExtReverse

71 =

72 =

73 = flux linearization parameters not consistent reserved armature data not consistent.

Check if:

M1NomCur (99.03) is set to zero,

M1NomVolt (99.02) and M1NomCur (99.03) are fitting with the drive. In case they are much smaller than the drive the internal calculation of M1ArmL (43.09) and M1ArmR

(43.10) can cause an internal overflow. Set M1ArmL (43.09) and M1ArmR (43.10) to zero.

For M1ArmL (43.09) following limitation is valid:

( 43 .

09 ) * 4096 * ( 99 .

03 )

32767

1000 * ( 99 .

02 )

For M1ArmR (43.10) following limitation is valid:

( 43 .

10 ) * 4096 * ( 99 .

03 )

32767

1000 * ( 99 .

02 )

74 - 76 reserved

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

77 =

78 =

Encoder 1 parameters for motor 1 not consistent. Check:

SpeedScaleAct (2.29)

M1EncMeasMode (50.02)

M1EncPulseNo (50.04)

At scaling speed - see SpeedScaleAct (2.29) - the pulse frequency must be greater than 600 Hz according to following formula:

f

600

Hz

ppr

*

evaluation

*

speed scaling

60

s f

600

Hz

( 50 .

04 ) * ( 50 .

02 ) * ( 2 .

29 )

60

s

E.g. the speed scaling must be

 9 rpm for a pulse encoder with 1024 pulses and A+-/B+- evaluation.

Encoder 1 parameters for motor 2 not consistent. Check:

SpeedScaleAct (2.29)

M2EncMeasMode (49.23)

M2EncPulseNo (49.25)

At scaling speed - see SpeedScaleAct (2.29) - the pulse frequency must be greater than 600 Hz according to following formula:

79 =

f

600

Hz

ppr

*

evaluation

*

speed scaling

60

s f

600

Hz

( 49 .

25 ) * ( 49 .

23 ) * ( 2 .

29 )

60

s

E.g. the speed scaling must be

 9 rpm for a pulse encoder with 1024 pulses and A+-/B+- evaluation.

Encoder 2 parameters not consistent. Check:

SpeedScaleAct (2.29)

Enc2MeasMode (50.18)

Enc2PulseNo (50.19)

At scaling speed - see SpeedScaleAct (2.29) - the pulse frequency must be greater than 600 Hz according to following formula:

f

600

Hz

ppr

*

evaluation

*

speed scaling

60

s f

600

Hz

( 50 .

19 ) * ( 50 .

18 ) * ( 2 .

29 )

60

s

E.g. the speed scaling must be

 9 rpm for a pulse encoder with 1024 pulses and A+-/B+- evaluation.

Autotuning:

80 =

81 =

82 =

83 = speed does not reach setpoint (EMF control) motor is not accelerating or wrong tacho polarity (tacho / encoder) not enough load (too low inertia) for the detection of speed controller parameters drive not in speed control mode, see TorqSel (26.01), TorqSelMod (26.03), TorqMuxMode (26.04)

84 - 89 reserved

239

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

240

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Thyristor diagnosis:

90 = shortcut caused by V1

91 =

92 = shortcut caused by V2 shortcut caused by V3

93 =

94 =

95 =

96 =

97 = shortcut caused by V4 shortcut caused by V5 shortcut caused by V6 thyristor block test failed shortcut caused by V15 or V22

98 =

99 = shortcut caused by V16 or V23 shortcut caused by V11 or V24

100 = shortcut caused by V12 or V25

101 = shortcut caused by V13 or V26

102 = shortcut caused by V14 or V21

103 = motor connected to ground

104 = armature winding is not connected

105 - 120 reserved

AI monitoring:

121 = AI1 below 4 mA

122 = AI2 below 4 mA

123 = AI3 below 4 mA

124 = AI4 below 4 mA

125 = AI5 below 4 mA

126 = AI6 below 4 mA

127 = AITAC below 4 mA

128 - 149 reserved

Option modules:

150 = fieldbus module missing see CommModule (98.02)

151 = SDCS-COM-8 for DDCS- respectively fieldbus communication missing see CommModule (98.02)

152 = SDCS-COM-8 for master-follower communication missing see group 70

153 = reserved

154 = RMBA-xx module missing see group 98

155 = RAIO-xx in option slot on SDCS-CON-4 missing see group 98

156 = RAIO-xx in option slot on AIMA missing see group 98

157 = RDIO-xx in option slot on SDCS-CON-4 missing see group 98

158 = RDIO-xx in option slot on AIMA missing see group 98

159 = RTAC-xx in option slot on SDCS-CON-4 missing see group 98

160 = RTAC-xx in option slot on AIMA missing see group 98

161 = reserved

162 = SDCS-IOB-2x respectively SDCS-IOB-3 connection does not match selection in IO BoardConfig

(98.15)

163 =

164 =

SDCS-DSL-4 missing see group 94 (needed for DCSLink)

SDCS-DSL-4 missing see group 52 (needed for Modbus)

A134 ParComp (alarm parameter compatibility conflict):

10000 … 19999 = the parameter with the compatibility conflict can be identified by means of the last 4 digits

ParNoCyc (notice parameter not cyclic):

20000 … 29999 = the not cyclic parameter, which is being written to by means of a pointer parameter [e.g.

DsetXVal1 (90.01)], can be identified by means of the last 4 digits

F548 FwFailure (fault firmware failure):

20000 … 29999 = the read only parameter, which is being written to by means of a pointer parameter [e.g.

DsetXVal1 (90.01) ], Adaptive Program or application program, can be identified by means of the last 4 digits

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

241

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Thyristor diagnosis:

30000 = possibly trigger pulse channels are mixed up

31xdd = V1 or V11 not conducting

32xdd = V2 or V12 not conducting

33xdd = V3 or V13 not conducting

34xdd = V4 or V14 not conducting

35xdd = V5 or V15 not conducting

36xdd = V6 or V16 not conducting x = 0: only a single thyristor in bridge 1 is not conducting (e.g. 320dd means V2 respectively V12 is not conducting) x = 1 … 6: additionally a second thyristor in bridge 1 is no conducting (e.g. 325dd means V2 and V5 respectively V12 and V15 are not conducting) dd = don’t care, the numbers of this digits do not carry any information about the thyristors of the first bridge.

Example:

36030: means V16 in bridge 1 and V23 in bridge 2 are not conducting

3dd1y = V21 not conducting

3dd2y = V22 not conducting

3dd3y = V23 not conducting

3dd4y = V24 not conducting

3dd5y = V25 not conducting

3dd6y = V26 not conducting y = 0: only a single thyristor in bridge 2 is not conducting (e.g. 3dd20 means V22 is not conducting) y = 1 … 6: additionally a second thyristor in bridge 2 is no conducting (e.g. 3dd25 means V22 and V25 are not conducting) dd = don’t care, the numbers of this digits do not carry any information about the thyristors of the second bridge.

Example:

36030: means V16 in bridge 1 and V23 in bridge 2 are not conducting

A124 SpeedScale (alarm speed scaling):

40000 … 49999 = the parameter with the speed scaling conflict can be identified by means of the last 4 digits

F549 ParComp (fault parameter compatibility conflict):

50000 … 59999= the parameter with the compatibility conflict can be identified by means of the last 4 digits

F545 ApplLoadFail (ControlBuilder DCS800 application programming):

64110 = task not configured

64112 = attempt to run an illegal copy of a program

64113 = retain data invalid caused by SDCS-CON-4 hardware problem

64125 = 5 ms task halted (e.g. task contains an endless loop)

64126 = 10 ms task halted (e.g. task contains an endless loop)

64127 = 20 ms task halted (e.g. task contains an endless loop)

64128 = 50 ms task halted (e.g. task contains an endless loop)

64129 = 100 ms task halted (e.g. task contains an endless loop)

64130 = 200 ms task halted (e.g. task contains an endless loop)

64131 = 500 ms task halted (e.g. task contains an endless loop)

64132 = 1000 ms task halted (e.g. task contains an endless loop)

64133 = application program is using an unsupported DCS800 Drive library version

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

9.12 LastFault (last fault)

Displays the last fault:

F<Fault code> <FaultName> (e.g. F2 ArmOverCur)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

9.13 2 nd

LastFault (2 nd

last fault)

Displays the 2 nd

last fault:

F<Fault code> <FaultName> (e.g. F2 ArmOverCur)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

242

Index

Signal / Parameter name

9.14 3 rd

LastFault (3 rd last fault)

Displays the 3 rd

last fault:

F<Fault code> <FaultName> (e.g. F2 ArmOverCur)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

9.15 Unused

9.16 Unused

Motor 1 field exciter alarm word :

Bit Alarm text Alarm code Comment

B0 reserved

B1 reserved

B2 reserved

B3 reserved

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 reserved

B5 reserved

B6 reserved

B7 reserved

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 reserved

B9 reserved

B10 reserved

B11 reserved

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 reserved

B13 reserved

B14 reserved

B15 reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Motor 1 field exciter fault word :

Bit Fault text

B0 reserved

Fault code

B1 reserved

B2 reserved

B3 reserved

Comment

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 reserved

B5 reserved

B6 reserved

B7 reserved

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 reserved

B9 reserved

B10 reserved

B11 reserved

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 reserved

B13 reserved

B14 reserved

B15 reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Motor 2 field exciter alarm word :

Bit Alarm text Alarm code Comment

B0 reserved

B1 reserved

B2 reserved

B3 reserved

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 reserved

B5 reserved

B6 reserved

B7 reserved

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 reserved

B9 reserved

B10 reserved

B11 reserved

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 reserved

B13 reserved

B14 reserved

B15 reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Motor 2 field exciter fault word :

Bit Fault text

B0 reserved

Fault code

B1 reserved

B2 reserved

B3 reserved

Comment

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 reserved

B5 reserved

B6 reserved

B7 reserved

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 reserved

B9 reserved

B10 reserved

B11 reserved

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 reserved

B13 reserved

B14 reserved

B15 reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

243

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

244

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Start / stop select

10.01 CommandSel (command selector)

UsedMCW (7.04) selector:

0 = Local I/O Drive is controlled via local I/O.

Reset (10.03) = DI6; UsedMCW (7.04) bit 7, default

OnOff1 (10.15) = DI7; UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0, default and

StartStop (10.16) = DI8; UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3, default

1 = MainCtrlWord drive is controlled via MainCtrlWord (7.01)

2 = Key Automatic switchover from MainCtrlWord to Local I/O in case of F528

FieldBusCom [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 11]. It is still possible to control the

3 = 12PLink

4 = FexLink drive via local I/O. OnOff1 (10.15) = DI7; UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0, default and StartStop (10.16) = DI8; UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3, default. The used speed reference is set by means of FixedSpeed1 (23.02).

Drive is controlled from 12-pulse master (OnOff1, StartStop, Off2N and

Reset). Only available when OperModeSel (43.01) = 12P ParaSla or 12P

SerSla.

Drive is controlled from field exciter master (OnOff1, StartStop and

Reset). Only available when OperModeSel (43.01) = FieldExciter.

Note:

Local control mode has higher priority than the selection made with CommandSel (10.01).

Note:

The commands Off2 (10.08), E Stop (10.09) and Reset (10.03) are always active (in case they are assigned) regardless of CommandSel (10.01) setting.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.02 Direction (direction of rotation)

Binary signal for Direction. Direction (10.02) allows to change the direction of rotation by negating the speed reference in remote operation:

0 = NotUsed default

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

Signal and parameter list

Type: C Volatile: N

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

245

Index

Signal / Parameter name

10.03 Reset (Reset command)

Binary signal for Reset, UsedMCW (7.04) bit 7:

0 = NotUsed

1 = DI1

2 = DI2

3 = DI3

4 = DI4

5 = DI5

6 = DI6

7 = DI7

8 = DI8

9 = DI9

10 = DI10

Reset by rising edge (0

 1)

Reset by rising edge (0

 1)

Reset by rising edge (0

 1)

Reset by rising edge (0

 1)

Reset by rising edge (0

 1)

Reset by rising edge (0

 1), default

Reset by rising edge (0

 1)

Reset by rising edge (0

 1)

Reset by rising edge (0

 1), only available with digital extension board

Reset by rising edge (0

 1), only available with digital extension board

11 = DI11 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), only available with digital extension board

12 = MCW Bit11 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11

13 = MCW Bit12 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12

14 = MCW Bit13 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13

15 = MCW Bit14 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14

16 = MCW Bit15 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15

17 = ACW Bit12 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12

18 = ACW Bit13 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13

19 = ACW Bit14 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14

20 = ACW Bit15 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.04 SyncCommand (synchronization command for position counter encoder 1)

Activation of synchronization for pulse encoder 1 and setting of the binary input signal. At the synchronization event [AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 9 SyncCommand] the position counter is initialized with following values:

PosCountInitLo (50.08) is written into PosCountLow (3.07) and

PosCountInitHi (50.09) is written into PosCountHigh (3.08).

At the same time AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 5 SyncRdy is set to 1.

The synchronization can be inhibited by setting AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 10 SyncDisable to 1.

The synchronization event is selected by:

0 = NotUsed default

1 = DI7+

2 = DI7Hi&Z

3 = DI7Hi&Z Fwd rising edge (0

 1) taken from DI7

DI7 = 1 and rising edge (0

 1) taken from zero channel pulse encoder

DI7 = 1 and rising edge (0

 1) taken from zero channel pulse encoder,

4 = DI7Hi&Z Rev motor rotating forward

DI7 = 1 and rising edge (0

 1) taken from zero channel pulse encoder, motor rotating reverse

5 = DI7-

6 = DI7Lo&Z falling edge (1

 0) taken from DI7

DI7 = 0 and rising edge (0

 1) taken from zero channel pulse encoder

7 = DI7Lo&Z Fwd DI7 = 0 and rising edge (0

 1) taken from zero channel pulse encoder,

8 = DI7Lo&Z Rev motor rotating forward

DI7 = 0 and rising edge (0

 1) taken from zero channel pulse encoder,

9 = Z motor rotating reverse rising edge (0

 1) taken from zero channel pulse encoder

10 = SyncCommand rising edge (0

 1) taken from AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 9

Note:

Forward rotation means that encoder channel A pulses lead channel B pulses by 90° (electrical).

Reverse rotation means that encoder channel B pulses lead channel A pulses by 90° (electrical).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

246

Index

Signal / Parameter name

10.05 SyncCommand2 (synchronization command for position counter encoder 2)

Activation of synchronization for pulse encoder 2 and setting of the binary input signal. At the synchronization event [AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 9 SyncCommand] the position counter is initialized with following values:

PosCount2InitLo (50.21) is written into PosCount2Low (3.05) and

PosCount2InitHi (50.22) is written into PosCount2High (3.06).

At the same time AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 5 SyncRdy is set to 1.

The synchronization can be inhibited by setting AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 10 SyncDisable to 1.

The synchronization event is selected by:

0 = NotUsed default

1 = DI7+

2 = DI7Hi&Z

3 = DI7Hi&Z Fwd rising edge (0

 1) taken from DI7

DI7 = 1 and rising edge (0

 1) taken from zero channel pulse encoder

DI7 = 1 and rising edge (0

 1) taken from zero channel pulse encoder,

4 = DI7Hi&Z Rev motor rotating forward

DI7 = 1 and rising edge (0

 1) taken from zero channel pulse encoder, motor rotating reverse

5 = DI7-

6 = DI7Lo&Z falling edge (1

 0) taken from DI7

DI7 = 0 and rising edge (0

 1) taken from zero channel pulse encoder

7 = DI7Lo&Z Fwd DI7 = 0 and rising edge (0

 1) taken from zero channel pulse encoder,

8 = DI7Lo&Z Rev motor rotating forward

DI7 = 0 and rising edge (0

 1) taken from zero channel pulse encoder,

9 = Z motor rotating reverse rising edge (0

 1) taken from zero channel pulse encoder

10 = SyncCommand rising edge (0

 1) taken from AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 9

Note:

Forward rotation means that encoder channel A pulses lead channel B pulses by 90° (electrical).

Reverse rotation means that encoder channel B pulses lead channel A pulses by 90° (electrical).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.06 MotFanAck (motor fan acknowledge)

The drive trips with F523 ExtFanAck [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 6] if a digital input for an external fan is selected and the acknowledge is missing for 10 seconds:

0 = NotUsed no reaction board board board

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

10.07 HandAuto (Hand/Auto command)

Binary signal to switch between Hand (Local I/O) and Auto (MainCtrlWord) control. Thus the selection made by CommandSel (10.01) is overwritten:

0 = NotUsed default

247

17 = ACW Bit12 1 Auto, 0 = Hand, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12

18 = ACW Bit13 1 Auto, 0 = Hand, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13

19 = ACW Bit14 1 Auto, 0 = Hand, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14

20 = ACW Bit15 1 Auto, 0 = Hand, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.08 Off2 (Off2 command, electrical disconnect)

Binary signal for Off2 (Emergency Off / Coast Stop), UsedMCW (7.04) bit 1. For fastest reaction use fast digital inputs DI7 or DI8:

0 = NotUsed

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

248

Index

Signal / Parameter name

10.09 E Stop (emergency stop command)

Binary signal for Off3 (E-Stop), UsedMCW (7.04) bit 2. For fastest reaction use fast digital inputs

DI7 or DI8:

0 = NotUsed

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

249

Index

Signal / Parameter name

10.10 ParChange (parameter change)

Binary signal to release either Motor1/User1 or Motor2/User2. The choice to release Motor1/2

(shared motion) or macros User1/2 is defined by means of MacroChangeMode (16.05):

0 = NotUsed default

1 = DI1 switch

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0)

2 = DI2 switch

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0)

3 = DI3 switch

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0)

4 = DI4 switch

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0)

5 = DI5 switch

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0)

6 = DI6 switch

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0)

7 = DI7 switch

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0)

8 = DI8 switch

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0)

9 = DI9 switch

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0), only available with digital extension board

10 = DI10 switch

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0), only available with digital extension board

11 = DI11 switch

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0), only available with digital extension board

12 = MCW Bit11 switch Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11

13 = MCW Bit12 switch Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12

14 = MCW Bit13 switch Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13

15 = MCW Bit14 switch Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14

16 = MCW Bit15 switch Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15

17 = ACW Bit12 switch Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12

18 = ACW Bit13 switch Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13

19 = ACW Bit14 switch Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14

20 = ACW Bit15 switch Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0

 1), switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1

 0), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15

Note:

The macro (User1/User2) selection made by ParChange (10.10) overrides the selection made with

ApplMacro (99.08). It takes about 2 s, until the new parameter values are active.

Note:

If User1 is active AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 3 is set. If User2 is active AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 4 is set.

Note:

In case macro User1 or User2 is loaded by means of ParChange (10.10) it is not saved into the flash and thus not valid after the next power on.

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

250

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Note:

When changing parameters in a user macro first call the macro with ApplMacro (99.08), then change the parameters and save them with ApplMacro (99.08).

Note:

The motor (Motor1/Motor2) selection can be made in drive state RdyOn and RdyRun. It takes about 20 ms, to switch between values.

Note:

ParChange (10.10) itself is not overwritten.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.11 Unused

10.12 Unused

10.13 OvrVoltProt (over voltage protection triggered)

As soon as the overvoltage protection unit is triggered A120 OverVoltProt [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit

3] is set:

0 = NotUsed default

Note:

OvrVoltProt (10.13) is only released when drive is in field exciter mode.

OperModeSel (43.01) = FieldConv

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.14 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

10.15 OnOff1 (On/Off1 command)

Binary signal for OnOff1, UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0:

0 = NotUsed

1 = DI1

2 = DI2

3 = DI3

4 = DI4

5 = DI5

6 = DI6

7 = DI7

8 = DI8

9 = DI9

10 = DI10

On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1

On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1

On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1

On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1

On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1

On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1

On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1, default

On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1

On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1, only available with digital extension board

On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1, only available with digital extension

11 = DI11 board

On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1, only available with digital extension board

12 = MCW Bit11 On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11

13 = MCW Bit12 On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12

14 = MCW Bit13 On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13

15 = MCW Bit14 On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14

16 = MCW Bit15 On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15

17 = ACW Bit12 On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12

18 = ACW Bit13 On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13

19 = ACW Bit14 On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14

20 = ACW Bit15 On by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Off1, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15

21 = DI7DI8 On and Start by rising edge (0

 1) of DI7, Stop and Off1 by falling edge

(1

 0) of DI8. Following settings apply: OnOff1 (10.15) = StartStop (10.16)

= DI7DI8.

Note:

To give On and Run at the same time set OnOff1 (10.15) = StartStop (10.16).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

251

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

252

Index

Signal / Parameter name

10.16 StartStop (Start/Stop command)

Binary signal for StartStop, UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3:

0 = NotUsed

1 = DI1

2 = DI2

3 = DI3

4 = DI4

5 = DI5

6 = DI6

7 = DI7

8 = DI8

9 = DI9

10 = DI10

Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop

Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop

Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop

Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop

Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop

Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop

Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop

Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop, default

Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop, only available with digital extension board

Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop, only available with digital extension

11 = DI11 board

Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop, only available with digital extension board

12 = MCW Bit11 Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11

13 = MCW Bit12 Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12

14 = MCW Bit13 Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13

15 = MCW Bit14 Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14

16 = MCW Bit15 Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15

17 = ACW Bit12 Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12

18 = ACW Bit13 Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13

19 = ACW Bit14 Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14

20 = ACW Bit15 Start by rising edge (0

 1), 0 = Stop, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15

21 = DI7DI8 On and Start by rising pulse (0

 1) of DI7, Stop and Off1 by falling pulse

(1

 0) of DI8. Following settings apply: OnOff1 (10.15) = StartStop (10.16)

= DI7DI8.

Note:

To give On and Run at the same time set OnOff1 (10.15) = StartStop (10.16).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

10.17 Jog1 (jogging 1 command)

Binary signal for Jog1. Selects speed reference set in FixedSpeed1 (23.02):

0 = NotUsed default

253

Note:

Jog2 (10.18) overrides Jog1 (10.17)

Note:

CommandSel (10.01) = Local I/O:

 The drive has to be in state RdyRun (RdyRef is still zero). When Jog1 command is given the drives sets automatically RampOutZero = RampHold = RampInZero = 0 [see

MainCtrlWord (7.01)] and goes into state Running and turns with speed set in

FixedSpeed1 (23.02).

CommandSel (10.01) = MainCtrlWord:

 The drive has to be in state RdyRun (RdyRef is still zero). RampOutZero, RampHold and RampInZero have to be set to zero [see MainCtrlWord (7.01)]. When Jog1 command is given the drive goes into state Running and turns with speed set in

FixedSpeed1 (23.02) alternatively Inching1 [see MainCtrlWord (7.01)] can be used.

Note:

Acceleration and deceleration time for jogging is selected by JogAccTime (22.12) and JogDecTime

(22.13).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

254

Index

Signal / Parameter name

10.18 Jog2 (jogging 2 command)

Binary signal for Jog2. Selects speed reference set in FixedSpeed2 (23.03):

Selection see Jog1 (10.17).

Note:

Jog2 (10.18) overrides Jog1 (10.17)

Note:

CommandSel (10.01) = Local I/O:

 The drive has to be in state RdyRun (RdyRef is still zero). When Jog2 command is given the drives sets automatically RampOutZero = RampHold = RampInZero = 0 [see

MainCtrlWord (7.01)] and goes into state Running and turns with speed set in

FixedSpeed2 (23.03).

CommandSel (10.01) = MainCtrlWord:

 The drive has to be in state RdyRun (RdyRef is still zero). RampOutZero, RampHold and RampInZero have to be set to zero [see MainCtrlWord (7.01)]. When Jog2 command is given the drive goes into state Running and turns with speed set in

FixedSpeed2 (23.03) alternatively Inching2 [see MainCtrlWord (7.01)] can be used.

Note:

Acceleration and deceleration time for jogging is selected by JogAccTime (22.12) and JogDecTime

(22.13).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.19 Unused

The drive trips with F527 ConvFanAck [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 10] if a digital input for the converter fan is selected and the acknowledge is missing for 10 seconds.

As soon as the acknowledge is missing A104 ConvOverTemp [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 3] is set.

The alarm is reset automatically if the converter fan acknowledge is coming back before the 10 seconds are elapsed: extension board extension board

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

extension board

Type: C Volatile: N

10.21 MainContAck (main contactor acknowledge)

The drive trips with F524 MainContAck [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 7] if a digital input for the main contactor is selected and the acknowledge is missing for 10 seconds:

Selection see ConvFanAck (10.20).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

255

Index

Signal / Parameter name

10.22 DynBrakeAck (dynamic braking acknowledge)

The drive sets A105 DynBrakeAck [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 4] if a digital input for dynamic braking is selected and the acknowledge (dynamic braking active) is still present when On [UsedMCW

(7.04) bit 3] is set:

Selection see ConvFanAck (10.20).

A105 DynBrakeAck [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 4] should prevent the drive to be started while dynamic braking is active.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.23 DC BreakAck (DC breaker acknowledge)

The drive sets A103 DC BreakAck [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 2] if a digital input for the DC-breaker is selected and the acknowledge is missing:

Selection see ConvFanAck (10.20).

The motor will coast if A103 DC BreakAck [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 2] is set.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.24 Unused

Inversion selection for digital input 1:

0 = Direct

1 = Inverted

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Inversion selection for digital input 2:

0 = Direct

1 = Inverted

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C

Inversion selection for digital input 3:

0 = Direct

1 = Inverted

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C

Inversion selection for digital input 4:

0 = Direct

1 = Inverted

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C

Inversion selection for digital input 5:

0 = Direct

1 = Inverted

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C

Inversion selection for digital input 6:

0 = Direct

1 = Inverted

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C

Inversion selection for digital input 7:

0 = Direct

1 = Inverted

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C

Volatile: N

Volatile: N

Volatile: N

Volatile: N

Volatile: N

Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

256

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Inversion selection for digital input 8:

0 = Direct

1 = Inverted

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Inversion selection for digital input 9:

0 = Direct only available with digital extension board

1 = Inverted

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

only available with digital extension board

Type: C Volatile: N

10.34 DI10Invert (invert digital input 10)

Inversion selection for digital input 10:

0 = Direct

1 = Inverted

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

only available with digital extension board only available with digital extension board

Type: C Volatile: N

10.35 DI11Invert (invert digital input 11)

Inversion selection for digital input 11:

0 = Direct

1 = Inverted

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

only available with digital extension board only available with digital extension board

Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Speed reference inputs

11.01 Unused

11.02 Ref1Mux (speed reference 1 selector/multiplexer)

Speed reference 1 selector:

0 = Open

1 = Close switch for speed ref. 1 is fixed open switch for speed ref 1 is fixed closed, default

2 = DI1

3 = DI2

4 = DI3

5 = DI4

1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0

1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0

1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0

1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0

6 = DI5

7 = DI6

8 = DI7

1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0

1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0

1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0

9 = DI8

10 = DI9

1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0

1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; only available with digital extension board

11= DI10

12 = DI11

1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; only available with digital extension board

1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; only available with digital extension board

13 = MCW Bit11 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11

14 = MCW Bit12 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12

15 = MCW Bit13 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13

16 = MCW Bit14 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14

17 = MCW Bit15 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15

18 = ACW Bit12 1 = switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12

19 = ACW Bit13 1 = switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13

20 = ACW Bit14 1 = switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14

21 = ACW Bit15 1 = switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

0; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15

Type: C Volatile: N

257

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

258

Index

Signal / Parameter name

11.03 Ref1Sel (speed reference 1 select)

Speed reference 1 value:

0 = SpeedRef2301 SpeedRef (23.01), default

1 = AuxSpeedRef AuxSpeedRef (23.13)

2 = AI1 analog input AI1

3 = AI2

4 = AI3 analog input AI2 analog input AI3

5 = AI4

6 = AI5 analog input AI4 analog input AI5

7 = AI6 analog input AI6

8 = FixedSpeed1 FixedSpeed1 (23.02)

9 = FixedSpeed2 FixedSpeed2 (23.03)

10 = MotPot motor pot controlled by MotPotUp (11.13), MotPotDown (11.14) and

MotPotMin (11.15)

11 = AuxRef-AI1 AuxSpeedRef (23.13) minus value of AI1

12 = reserved reserved

13 = MinAI2AI4 minimum of AI2 and AI4

14 = MaxAI2AI4 maximum of AI2 and AI4

15 = AI1Direct+

16 = AI2Direct+

Fast speed reference input using analog input AI1. SpeedRefExt1 (2.30) is written directly onto the speed error summation. Thus the speed ramp is bypassed. The signal is forced to zero if RampOutZero = 0 or

RampInZero = 0 [see MainCtrlWord (70.1)].

Fast speed reference input using analog input AI2. SpeedRefExt1 (2.30) is written directly onto the speed error summation point. Thus the speed ramp is bypassed. The signal is forced to zero if RampOutZero = 0 or

RampInZero = 0 [see MainCtrlWord (70.1)].

17 = Enc2Direct+ Fast speed reference input using pulse encoder 2. SpeedRefExt1 (2.30) is written directly onto the speed error summation point. Thus the speed ramp is bypassed. The signal is forced to zero if RampOutZero = 0 or

RampInZero = 0 [see MainCtrlWord (70.1)].

18 = SpeedRef2315 Fast speed reference input using DirectSpeedRef (23.15). SpeedRefExt1

(2.30) is written directly onto the speed error summation point. Thus the speed ramp is bypassed. The signal is forced to zero if RampOutZero =

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

0 or RampInZero = 0 [see MainCtrlWord (70.1)].

Type: C Volatile: N

11.04 Unused

11.05 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

11.06 Ref2Sel (speed reference 2 select)

Speed reference 2 value:

0 = SpeedRef2301 SpeedRef (23.01), default

1 = AuxSpeedRef AuxSpeedRef (23.13)

2 = AI1 analog input AI1

3 = AI2

4 = AI3 analog input AI2 analog input AI3

5 = AI4

6 = AI5 analog input AI4 analog input AI5

7 = AI6 analog input AI6

8 = FixedSpeed1 FixedSpeed1 (23.02)

9 = FixedSpeed2 FixedSpeed2 (23.03)

10 = MotPot motor pot controlled by MotPotUp (11.13), MotPotDown (11.14) and

11 = AI2-AI3

12 = AI2+AI3

13 = AI1*AI2

14 = AI2*AI3

15 = MinAI2AI4

MotPotMin (11.15)

AI2 minus AI3

AI2 plus AI3

AI1 multiplied with AI2

AI2 multiplied with AI3 minimum of AI2 and AI4

16 = MaxAI2AI4 maximum of AI2 and AI4

17 = Encoder2

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

pulse encoder 2

Type: C Volatile: N

11.07 Unused

11.08 Unused

11.09 Unused

11.10 Unused

11.11 Unused

259

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

260

Index

Signal / Parameter name

11.12 Ref2Mux (speed reference 2 selector/multiplexer)

Speed reference 2 selector:

0 = Invert1102 Invert speed ref. 1 selection; implements a change over switch together with speed ref 2 selection. E.g. if speed ref. 1 selection switch is open the

1 = Open

2 = Close

3 = DI1

4 = DI2 switch for speed ref. 2 is closed and vice versa. switch for speed ref. 2 is fixed open, default switch for speed ref 2 is fixed closed

1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0

5 = DI3

6 = DI4

7 = DI5

8 = DI6

1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0

1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0

1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0

1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0

9 = DI7

10 = DI8

11 = DI9

1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0

1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0

1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0

1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

12= DI10

13 = DI11

0; only available with digital extension board

1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; only available with digital extension board

1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; only available with digital extension board

14 = MCW Bit11 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11

15 = MCW Bit12 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12

16 = MCW Bit13 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13

17 = MCW Bit14 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14

18 = MCW Bit15 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15

19 = ACW Bit12 1 = switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12

20 = ACW Bit13 1 = switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13

21 = ACW Bit14 1 = switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14

22 = ACW Bit15 1 = switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =

0; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

11.13 MotPotUp (motor pot up)

With the motor pot up function the motor speed is increased by means of the selected binary input.

The acceleration is limited by AccTime1 (22.01). MotPotDown (11.14) overrides MotPotUp (11.13):

0 = NotUsed default

261

board board board

Note:

The speed reference is selected by means of Ref1Sel (11.03) = MotPot respectively Ref2Sel

(11.06) = MotPot.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

262

Index

Signal / Parameter name

11.14 MotPotDown (motor pot down)

With the motor pot down function the motor speed is decreased by means of the selected binary input. The deceleration is limited by DecTime1 (22.02) until zero speed respectively MotPotMin

(11.15) is reached. MotPotDown (11.14) overrides MotPotUp (11.13):

0 = NotUsed default board board board

Note:

The speed reference is selected by means of Ref1Sel (11.03) = MotPot respectively Ref2Sel

(11.06) = MotPot.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

11.15 MotPotMin (motor pot minimum)

The motor pot minimum function releases the minimum speed level. The minimum speed level is defined by FixedSpeed1 (23.02). When the drive is started the motor accelerates to FixedSpeed1

(23.02). It is not possible to set the speed below FixedSpeed1 (23.02) by means of the motor pot function:

0 = NotUsed default

263

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

264

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Constant speeds

12.01 unused

12.02 ConstSpeed1 (constant speed 1)

Defines constant speed 1 in rpm. The constant speed can be connected by Adaptive Program or application program.

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type:

32767

20000

SI

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

Volatile: N

rpm

12.03 ConstSpeed2 (constant speed 2)

Defines constant speed 2 in rpm. The constant speed can be connected by Adaptive Program or application program.

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type:

32767

20000

SI

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

Volatile: N

rpm

12.04 ConstSpeed3 (constant speed 3)

Defines constant speed 3 in rpm. The constant speed can be connected by Adaptive Program or application program.

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type:

32767

20000

SI

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

Volatile: N

rpm

12.05 ConstSpeed4 (constant speed 4)

Defines constant speed 4 in rpm. The constant speed can be connected by Adaptive Program or application program.

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type:

32767

20000

SI

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

Volatile: N

rpm

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

265

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Analog inputs

13.01 AI1HighVal (analog input 1 high value)

+100 % of the input signal connected to analog input 1 is scaled to the voltage in AI1HighVal

(13.01).

Example:

 In case the min. / max. voltage (10 V) of analog input 1 should equal 250 % of

TorqRefExt (2.24), set:

TorqRefA Sel (25.10) = AI1

ConvModeAI1 (13.03) =

10 V Bi,

AI1HighVal (13.01) = 4000 mV and

AI1LowVal (13.02) = -4000 mV

Note:

To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-CON-4 or SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate

20 mA to 10 V.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

13.02 AI1LowVal (analog input 1 low value)

-100 % of the input signal connected to analog input 1 is scaled to the voltage in AI1LowVal

(13.02).

Note:

AI1LowVal (13.02) is only valid if ConvModeAI1 (13.03) =

10 V Bi.

Note:

To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-CON-4 or SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate

20 mA to 10 V.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: SI Volatile: N

13.03 ConvModeAI1 (conversion mode analog input 1)

The distinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on the SDCS-CON-4 or SDCS-

IOB-3 board:

0 =

10V Bi

-10 V to 10 V / -20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input, default

1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input

2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input

3 = 5V Offset 5 V / 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or

4 = 6V Offset

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

6 V / 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

Type: C Volatile: N

13.04 FilterAI1 (filter time analog input 1)

Analog input 1 filter time. The hardware filter time is

 2ms.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

13.05 AI2HighVal (analog input 2 high value)

+100 % of the input signal connected to analog input 2 is scaled to the voltage in AI2HighVal

(13.05).

Note:

To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-CON-4 or SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate

20 mA to 10 V.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

266

Index

Signal / Parameter name

13.06 AI2LowVal (analog input 2 low value)

-100 % of the input signal connected to analog input 2 is scaled to the voltage in AI2LowVal

(13.06).

Note:

AI2LowVal (13.06) is only valid if ConvModeAI2 (13.07) =

10V Bi.

Note:

To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-CON-4 or SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate

20 mA to 10 V.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: SI Volatile: N

13.07 ConvModeAI2 (conversion mode analog input 2)

The distinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on the SDCS-CON-4 or SDCS-

IOB-3 board:

0 =

10V Bi

-10 V to 10 V / -20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input, default

1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input

2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input

3 = 5V Offset 5 V / 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or

4 = 6V Offset

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

6 V / 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

Type: C Volatile: N

13.08 FilterAI2 (filter time analog input 2)

Analog input 2 filter time. The hardware filter time is

 2ms.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

13.09 AI3HighVal (analog input 3 high value)

+100 % of the input signal connected to analog input 3 is scaled to the voltage in AI3HighVal

(13.09).

Note:

To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

13.10 AI3LowVal (analog input 3 low value)

-100 % of the input signal connected to analog input 3 is scaled to the voltage in AI3LowVal

(13.10).

Note:

AI3LowVal (13.10) is only valid if ConvModeAI3 (13.11) =

10V Bi.

Note:

To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: SI Volatile: N

13.11 ConvModeAI3 (conversion mode analog input 3)

Analog input 3 on the SDCS-CON-4 is only working with voltage. The distinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on the SDCS-IOB-3 board:

0 =

10V Bi

-10 V to 10 V / -20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input, default

1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input

2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input

3 = 5V Offset 5 V / 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or

4 = 6V Offset

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

6 V / 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

Type: C Volatile: N

13.12 FilterAI3 (filter time analog input 3)

Analog input 3 filter time. The hardware filter time is

 2 ms.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

267

Index

Signal / Parameter name

13.13 AI4HighVal (analog input 4 high value)

+100 % of the input signal connected to analog input 4 is scaled to the voltage in AI4HighVal

(13.13).

Note:

To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

13.14 AI4LowVal (analog input 4 low value)

-100 % of the input signal connected to analog input 4 is scaled to the voltage in AI4LowVal

(13.14).

Note:

AI3LowVal (13.14) is only valid if ConvModeAI4 (13.15) =

10V Bi.

Note:

To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: SI Volatile: N

13.15 ConvModeAI4 (conversion mode analog input 4)

Analog input 4 on the SDCS-CON-4 is only working with voltage. The distinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on the SDCS-IOB-3 board:

0 =

10V Bi

-10 V to 10 V / -20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input, default

1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input

2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input

3 = 5V Offset 5 V / 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or

4 = 6V Offset

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

6 V / 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

Type: C Volatile: N

13.16 FilterAI4 (filter time analog input 4)

Analog input 4 filter time. The hardware filter time is

 2 ms.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

13.17 Reserved

13.18 Reserved

13.19 Reserved

13.20 Unused

13.21 AI5HighVal (analog input 5 high value)

+100 % of the input signal connected to analog input 5 is scaled to the voltage in AI5HighVal

(13.21).

Note:

To use current please set the DIP-switches (RAIO-01) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

13.22 AI5LowVal (analog input 5 low value)

-100 % of the input signal connected to analog input 5 is scaled to the voltage in AIO5LowVal

(13.22).

Note:

AI5LowVal (13.22) is only valid if ConvModeAI5 (13.23) =

10V Bi.

Note:

To use current please set the DIP-switches (RAIO-01) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

268

Index

Signal / Parameter name

13.23 ConvModeAI5 (conversion mode analog input 5)

The distinction between bipolar and unipolar respectively voltage and current is done via DIPswitches on the RAIO-01 board:

0 =

10V Bi

-10 V to 10 V / -20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input, default

1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input

2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input

3 = 5V Offset 5 V / 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

4 = 6V Offset 6 V / 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

Bipolar and unipolar:

Voltage and current:

Type: C Volatile: N Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

13.24 Unused

13.25 AI6HighVal (analog input 6 high value)

+100 % of the input signal connected to analog input 6 is scaled to the voltage in AI6HighVal

(13.25).

Note:

To use current please set the DIP-switches (RAIO-01) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

269

Index

Signal / Parameter name

13.26 AI6LowVal (analog input 6 low value)

-100 % of the input signal connected to analog input 6 is scaled to the voltage in AIO6LowVal

(13.26).

Note:

AI6LowVal (13.26) is only valid if ConvModeAI6 (13.27) =

10V Bi.

Note:

To use current please set the DIP-switches (RAIO-01) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: SI Volatile: N

13.27 ConvModeAI6 (conversion mode analog input 6)

The distinction between bipolar and unipolar respectively voltage and current is done via DIPswitches on the RAIO-01 board:

0 =

10V Bi

-10 V to 10 V / -20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input, default

1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input

2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input

3 = 5V Offset 5 V / 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or

4 = 6V Offset

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

6 V / 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

Type: C Volatile: N

Digital outputs

14.01 DO1Index (digital output 1 index)

Digital output 1 is controlled by a selectable bit - see DO1BitNo (14.02) - of the source

(signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert digital output,

xx = group and yy = index.

Examples:

 If DO1Index (14.01) = 801 (main status word) and DO1BitNo (14.02) = 1 (RdyRun) digital output 1 is high when the drive is RdyRun.

 If DO1Index (14.01) = -801 (main status word) and DO1BitNo (14.02) = 3 (Tripped) digital output 1 is high when the drive is not faulty.

Digital output 1 default setting is: command FansOn CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 0.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with DO1Index (14.02).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

14.03 DO2Index (digital output 2 index)

Digital output 2 is controlled by a selectable bit - see DO2BitNo (14.04) - of the source

(signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert digital output,

xx = group and yy = index.

Digital output 2 default setting is: command FieldOn CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 5.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with DO2Index (14.03).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

270

Index

Signal / Parameter name

14.05 DO3Index (digital output 3 index)

Digital output 3 is controlled by a selectable bit - see DO3BitNo (14.06) - of the source

(signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert digital output,

xx = group and yy = index.

Digital output 3 default setting is: command MainContactorOn CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 7.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with DO3Index (14.05).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

14.07 DO4Index (digital output 4 index)

Digital output 4 is controlled by a selectable bit - see DO4BitNo (14.08) - of the source

(signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert digital output,

xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with DO4Index (14.07).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

14.09 DO5Index (digital output 5 index)

Digital output 5 is controlled by a selectable bit - see DO5BitNo (14.10) - of the source

(signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert digital output,

xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with DO5Index (14.09).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

14.11 DO6Index (digital output 6 index)

Digital output 6 is controlled by a selectable bit - see DO6BitNo (14.12) - of the source

(signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert digital output,

xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with DO6Index (14.11).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

14.13 DO7Index (digital output 7 index)

Digital output 7 is controlled by a selectable bit - see DO7BitNo (14.14) - of the source

(signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert digital output,

xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with DO7Index (14.13).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

14.15 DO8Index (digital output 8 index)

Digital output 8 is controlled by a selectable bit - see DO8BitNo (14.16) - of the source

(signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert digital output,

xx = group and yy = index.

Digital output 8 default setting is: command MainContactorOn CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 7

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with DO8Index (14.15).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

271

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Analog outputs

15.01 IndexAO1 (analog output 1 index)

Analog output 1 is controlled by a source (signal/parameter) selected with IndexAO1 (15.01). The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate analog output, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

15.02 CtrlWordAO1 (control word analog output 1)

Analog output 1 can be written to via CtrlWordAO1 (15.02) using Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control if IndexAO1 (15.01) is set to zero. Further description see group 19

Data Storage.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

15.03 ConvModeAO1 (convert mode analog output 1)

Analog output 1 signal offset:

0 =

10V Bi

-10 V to 10 V bipolar output, default

1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V unipolar output

2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V unipolar output

3 = 5V Offset

4 = 6V Offset

5 V offset in the range 0 V to 10 V for testing or indication of bipolar signals

(e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

6 V offset in the range 2 V to 10 V for testing or indication of bipolar signals

(e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

5 = 0V-10V Abs absolute 0 V to 10 V unipolar output (negative values are shown positive)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

15.04 FilterAO1 (filter analog output 1)

Analog output 1 filter time.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

15.05 ScaleAO1 (scaling analog output 1)

100 % of the signal/parameter selected with IndexAO1 (15.01) is scaled to the voltage in

ScaleAO1 (15.05).

Example:

 In case the min. / max. voltage (10 V) of analog output 1 should equal 250 % of

TorqRefUsed (2.13), set:

IndexAO1 (15.01) = 213,

ConvModeAO1 (15.03) =

10V Bi and

ScaleAO1 (15.05) = 4000 mV

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

15.06 IndexAO2 (analog output 2 index)

Analog output 2 is controlled by a source (signal/parameter) selected with IndexAO2 (15.06). The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate analog output, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

15.07 CtrlWordAO2 (control word analog output 2)

Analog output 2 can be written to via CtrlWordAO2 (15.07) using Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control if IndexAO2 (15.06) is set to zero. Further description see group 19

Data Storage.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

272

Index

Signal / Parameter name

15.08 ConvModeAO2 (convert mode analog output 2)

Analog output 2 signal offset:

0 =

10V Bi

-10 V to 10 V bipolar output, default

1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V unipolar output

2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V unipolar output

3 = 5V Offset 5 V offset in the range 0 V to 10 V for testing or indication of bipolar signals

4 = 6V Offset

(e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

6 V offset in the range 2 V to 10 V for testing or indication of bipolar signals

(e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

5 = 0V-10V Abs absolute 0 V to 10 V unipolar output (negative values are shown positive)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

15.09 FilterAO2 (filter analog output 2)

Analog output 2 filter time.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

15.10 ScaleAO2 (scaling analog output 2)

100 % of the signal/parameter selected with IndexAO2 (15.06) is scaled to the voltage in

ScaleAO2 (15.10).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

15.11 IndexAO3 (analog output 3 index)

Analog output 3 is controlled by a source (signal/parameter) selected with IndexAO3 (15.11). The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate analog output, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

15.12 CtrlWordAO3 (control word analog output 3)

Analog output 3 can be written to via CtrlWordAO3 (15.12) using Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control if IndexAO3 (15.11) is set to zero. Further description see group 19

Data Storage.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

15.13 ConvModeAO3 (convert mode analog output 3)

Analog output 3 signal offset:

0 = 0mA-20mA Uni 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar output

1 = 4mA-20mA Uni 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar output, default

2 = 10mA Offset 10 mA offset in the range 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

3 = 12mA Offset 12 mA offset in the range 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

4 = 0mA-20mA Abs absolute 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar output (negative values are shown positive)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

15.14 FilterAO3 (filter analog output 3)

Analog output 3 filter time.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

15.15 ScaleAO3 (scaling analog output 3)

100 % of the signal/parameter selected with IndexAO3 (15.11) is scaled to the current in ScaleAO3

(15.15).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

15.16 IndexAO4 (analog output 4 index)

Analog output 4 is controlled by a source (signal/parameter) selected with IndexAO4 (15.16). The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate analog output, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

273

Index

Signal / Parameter name

15.17 CtrlWordAO4 (control word analog output 4)

Analog output 4 can be written to via CtrlWordAO4 (15.17) using Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control if IndexAO4 (15.17) is set to zero. Further description see group 19

Data Storage.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

15.18 ConvModeAO4 (convert mode analog output 4)

Analog output 4 signal offset:

0 = 0mA-20mA Uni 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar output

1 = 4mA-20mA Uni 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar output, default

2 = 10mA Offset 10 mA offset in the range 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

3 = 12mA Offset 12 mA offset in the range 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)

4 = 0mA-20mA Abs absolute 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar output (negative values are shown positive)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

15.19 FilterAO4 (filter analog output 4)

Analog output 4 filter time.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

15.20 ScaleAO4 (scaling analog output 4)

100 % of the signal/parameter selected with IndexAO4 (15.16) is scaled to the current in ScaleAO4

(15.20).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

System control inputs

16.01 Unused

16.02 ParLock (parameter lock)

The user can lock all parameters by means of ParLock (16.02) and SysPassCode (16.03):

 To lock parameters set SysPassCode (16.03) to the desired value and change ParLock

(16.02) from Open to Locked.

 Unlocking of parameters is only possible if the proper pass code (the value which was present during locking) is used. To open parameters set SysPassCode (16.03) to the proper value and change ParLock (16.02) from Locked to Open.

After the parameters are locked or opened the value in SysPassCode (16.03) is automatically changed to 0:

0 = Open

1 = Locked

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

parameter change possible, default parameter change not possible

Type: C Volatile: N

16.03 SysPassCode (system pass code)

The SysPassCode (16.03) is a number between 1 and 30,000 to lock all parameters by means of

ParLock (16.02). After using Open or Locked SysPassCode (16.03) is automatically set back to zero.

Attention:

Do not forget the pass code!

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

274

Index

Signal / Parameter name

16.04 LocLock (local lock)

Local control can be disabled by setting LocLock (16.04) to True. If LocLock (16.04) is released in local control, it becomes valid after the next changeover to remote control. No pass code is required to change LocLock (16.04):

0 = False local control released, default

1 = True

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

local control blocked

Type: C Volatile: N

The choice to release Motor1/2 (shared motion) or macros User1/2 is defined by means of

MacroChangeMode (16.05):

0 = User1/2 change between parameter sets User1 and User2, default see group 49)

ParChange (10.10) selects the binary signal to release either Motor1/User1 or Motor2/User2.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

16.06 ParApplSave (save/load parameters and enable/disable application programs)

If parameters are written to cyclic, e.g. from an overriding control, they are only stored in the RAM and not in the flash. By means of ParApplSave (16.06), all parameter values are saved from the

RAM into the flash.

ParApplSave (16.06) is also used to save/load a parameter set on/from the memory card and to enable/disable application programs:

0 = Done

1 = Save

3 = SaveToMemC parameters are saved or all other actions are finished, default saves the actual used parameters into the flash saves a complete parameter set - actual used parameters, User1 and

User2 - from control board to memory card

4 = LoadFromMemC loads a complete parameter set - actual used parameters, User1 and

User2 - from memory card to control board

4 = EableAppl

5 = DisableAppl enables the application program disables the application program

Deletes the application and the complete parameter set - actual used parameters, User1 and User2 - stored on the memory card. Also all user defined parameters will be erased from the actual parameter set. influenced.

In case an application will be loaded anew all user defined parameters are set to default.

This procedure can also be used to repair a memory card.

After an action (e.g. save, load, …) is finished ParApplSave (16.06) is changed back to Done. This will take max. 1 second.

Note:

Do not use the parameter save function unnecessarily

Note:

Parameters changed by DCS800 Control Panel or commissioning tools are immediately saved into the flash.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

16.07 Unused

16.08 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

16.09 USI Sel (selector for user interface)

The user interface for the DCS800 Control Panel (Compact/Extended parameter list) can be selected by USI Sel (16.09):

0 = Compact short parameter list (C), default

1 = Extended long parameter list (E)

Note:

USI Sel (16.09) works only for the DCS800 Control Panel. DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light always show the extended parameter list.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

16.10 Unused

Sets the time of the converter in minutes. The system time can be either set by means of

SetSystemTime (16.11) or via the DCS800 Control Panel.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 min Type: I Volatile: Y

16.12 Unused

16.13 Unused

16.14 ToolLinkConfig (tool link configuration)

The communication speed of the serial communication for the commissioning tool and the application program tool can be selected with ToolLinkConfig (16.14):

2 = 38400 38400 Baud, default

If ToolLinkConfig (16.14) is changed its new value is taken over after the next power up.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

275

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

276

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Data storage

This parameter group consists of unused parameters for linking, testing and commissioning purposes.

Example1:

A value can be send from the overriding control to the drive via groups 90 or 91 to individual parameters in group 19. The parameters of group 19 can be read with the DCS800 Control Panel, the commissioning tools, the Adaptive Program and application program.

Overriding control SDCS-CON-4

DDCS link via Ch0 of SDCS-COM-8

Dataset table

Dataset Value e.g. DriveWindow

Serial communication via slot 1 of SDCS-CON-4, see group 51

...

X+2

X+4

...

...

1

2

3

1

2

3

...

Address assignment of dataset

Group

90

Index

02

19.01

19.02

19.03

19.04

...

19.12

X see Ch0

DsetBaseAddr (70.24)

datset adr_a.dsf

Example2:

A value can be send from the drive to the overriding control from individual parameters in group 19 via groups 92 or 93 The parameters of group 19 can be written to with the DCS800 Control Panel, the commissioning tools, the Adaptive Program and application program.

Overriding control SDCS-CON-4

DDCS link via Ch0 of SDCS-COM-8

Dataset table

Dataset Value e.g. Control panel

Serial communication via slot 1 of SDCS-CON-4, see group 51

...

X+3

X+5

...

1

2

3

...

...

1

2

3

Address assignment of dataset

Group

92

Index

05

19.01

19.02

19.03

19.04

...

19.12

X see Ch0

DsetBaseAddr (70.24)

datset adr_a.dsf

Note:

This parameter group can be used as well for reading/writing analog inputs/outputs.

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

277

Index

Signal / Parameter name

19.01 Data1 (data container 1)

Data container 1 (see group description above). This data container is of is of the type retain. Its value will only be saved when the drive is de-energized. Thus it will not lose its value.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.02 Data2 (data container 2)

Data container 2 (see group description above). This data container is of is of the type retain. Its value will only be saved when the drive is de-energized. Thus it will not lose its value.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.03 Data3 (data container 3)

Data container 3 (see group description above). This data container is of is of the type retain. Its value will only be saved when the drive is de-energized. Thus it will not lose its value.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.04 Data4 (data container 4)

Data container 4 (see group description above). This data container is of is of the type retain. Its value will only be saved when the drive is de-energized. Thus it will not lose its value.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.05 Data5 (data container 5)

Data container 5 (see group description above)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.06 Data6 (data container 6)

Data container 6 (see group description above)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.07 Data7 (data container 7)

Data container 7 (see group description above)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.08 Data8 (data container 8)

Data container 8 (see group description above)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.09 Data9 (data container 9)

Data container 9 (see group description above)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.10 Data10 (data container 10)

Data container 10 (see group description above)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.11 Data11 (data container 11)

Data container 11 (see group description above)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.12 Data12 (data container 12)

Data container 12 (see group description above)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

278

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Limits

This parameter group consists of all user settable limits.

Torque limitation (3.3 ms)

TorqRef3

2.10

+

26.02

LoadComp

TorqRef4

2.11

26.08

26.09

26.10

Gear backlash compensation

GearStartTorq

GearTorqTime

GearTorqRamp

T

26.08

26.10

26.09

t

TorqRefUsed

2.13

+

26.13

TorqScale

20.18

20.05

TorqUsedMaxSel

TorqMax2005

AI1, …, AI6

M1CurLimBrdg1 20.12

FluxRefFldWeak

3.24

100%

CurSel

43.02

TorqUsedMax

2.22

Min

M1CurLimBrdg2

20.13

20.19

TorqUsedMinSel

20.06

TorqMin2006

AI1, …, AI6

Negate

-1

2.23 =

2.22 * (-1)

TorqUsedMin

2.23

Max

20.22

2.19

2.20

TorqGenMax

TorqMaxAll

TorqMinAll

TorqLimAct 2.26

26.15

TorqCorrect

NotUsed

AI1, …, AI6

2.14

TorqCorr

Motor 1 negative speed reference limit in rpm for:

SpeedRef2 (2.01)

SpeedRefUsed (2.17)

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm

Note:

M1SpeedMin (20.01) is must be set in the range of:

0.625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed (99.04).

If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 7] is generated.

Note:

M1SpeedMin (20.01) is also applied to SpeedRef4 (2.18) to avoid exceeding the speed limits by means of SpeedCorr (23.04). To be able to overspeed the drive (e.g. for winder) it is possible to switch off the speed limit for SpeedRef4 (2.18) by means of AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 4.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Motor 1 positive speed reference limit in rpm for:

SpeedRef2 (2.01)

SpeedRefUsed (2.17)

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

rpm to

20000

Note:

M1SpeedMax (20.02) is must be set in the range of:

0.625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed (99.04).

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm

If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 7] is generated.

Note:

M1SpeedMax (20.02) is also applied to SpeedRef4 (2.18) to avoid exceeding the speed limits by means of SpeedCorr (23.04). To be able to overspeed the drive (e.g. for winder) it is possible to switch off the speed limit for SpeedRef4 (2.18) by means of AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 4.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: N

When the Run command is removed [set UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3 to zero], the drive will stop as chosen by StopMode (21.03). As soon as the actual speed reaches the limit set by

M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the motor will coast independent of the setting of StopMode (21.03).

Existing brakes are closed (applied). While the actual speed is in the limit ZeroSpeed

[AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 11] is high.

Note:

In case FlyStart (21.10) = StartFrom0 and if the restart command comes before zero speed is reached A137 SpeedNotZero [AlarmWord3 (9.08) bit 4] is generated.

Internally limited from:

0

rpm to

( 2 .

29 )

rpm

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

20.04 Unused

20.05 TorqMax (maximum torque)

Maximum torque limit - in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) - for selector TorqUsedMaxSel (20.18).

Note:

The used torque limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. other torque limits, current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

20.06 TorqMin (minimum torque)

Minimum torque limit - in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) - for selector TorqUsedMinSel (20.19).

Note:

The used torque limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. other torque limits, current limits, field weakening). The limit with the largest value is valid.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

20.07 TorqMaxSPC (maximum torque speed controller)

Maximum torque limit - in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) - at the output of the speed controller:

TorqRef2 (2.09)

Note:

The used torque limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. other torque limits, current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

279

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

280

Index

Signal / Parameter name

20.08 TorqMinSPC (minimum torque speed controller)

Minimum torque limit - in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) - at the output of the speed controller.

TorqRef2 (2.09)

Note:

The used torque limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. other torque limits, current limits, field weakening). The limit with the largest value is valid.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

20.09 TorqMaxTref (maximum torque of torque reference A/B)

Maximum torque limit - in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) - for external references:

TorqRefA (25.01)

TorqRefB (25.04)

Note:

The used torque limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. other torque limits, current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

20.10 TorqMinTref (minimum torque of torque reference A/B)

Minimum torque limit - in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) - for external references:

TorqRefA (25.01)

TorqRefB (25.04)

Note:

The used torque limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. other torque limits, current limits, field weakening). The limit with the largest value is valid.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

20.11 Unused

20.12 M1CurLimBrdg1 (motor 1 current limit of bridge 1)

Current limit bridge 1 in percent of M1NomCur (99.03).

Setting M1CurLimBrdg1 (20.12) to 0 % disables bridge 1.

Note:

The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits, other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the largest value is valid.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

20.13 M1CurLimBrdg2 (motor 1 current limit of bridge 2)

Current limit bridge 2 in percent of M1NomCur (99.03).

Setting M1CurLimBrdg2 (20.13) to 0 % disables bridge 2.

Note:

The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits, other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.

Note:

M1CurLimBrdg2 (20.13) is internally set to 0 % if QuadrantType (4.15) = 2-Q (2-Q drive). Thus do not change the default setting for 2-Q drives.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

Maximum firing angle (

) in degrees.

The maximum firing angel can be forced using AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03) bit 7.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 deg Type: SI Volatile: N

20.15 ArmAlphaMin (minimum firing angle)

Minimum firing angle (

) in degrees.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 deg Type: SI

20.16 Unused

Volatile: N

20.17 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

TorqUsedMax (2.22) selector:

0 = TorqMax2005 TorqMax (20.05), default

1 = AI1

2 = AI2

3 = AI3

4 = AI4

5 = AI5

6 = AI6

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

analog input 1 analog input 2 analog input 3 analog input 4 analog input 5 analog input 6

Type: C Volatile: N

TorqUsedMin (2.23) selector:

0 = TorqMin2006 TorqMin (20.06), default

1 = AI1 analog input 1

2 = AI2

3 = AI3 analog input 2 analog input 3

4 = AI4

5 = AI5 analog input 4 analog input 5

6 = AI6 analog input 6

7 = Negate2018 negated output of TorqUsedMaxSel (20.18) is used

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

20.20 Unused

20.21 Unused

20.22 TorqGenMax (maximum and minimum torque limit during regenerating)

Maximum and minimum torque limit - in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) - only during regenerating.

Note:

The used torque limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. other torque limits, current limits, field weakening).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

281

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

282

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Start / stop

21.01 Unused

21.02 Off1Mode (off 1 mode)

Conditions for motor deceleration when UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0 On (respectively Off1N) is set to low:

0 = RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero. Thus the drive stops according to DecTime1 (22.02) or DecTime2 (22.10). When reaching

M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

In case TorqSelMod (26.03) = Auto and On is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control, default.

1 = TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero. Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit. When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

In case TorqSelMod (26.03) = Auto and On is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control.

2 = CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

3 = DynBraking dynamic braking

Note:

In case UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0 On and UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3 Run are set to low (run and on commands are taken away) at the same time or nearly contemporary Off1Mode (21.02) and

StopMode (21.03) must have the same setting.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

21.03 StopMode (stop mode)

Conditions for motor deceleration when UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3 Run is set to low:

0 = RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero. Thus the drive stops according to DecTime1 (22.02) or DecTime2 (22.10). When reaching

M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked.

In case TorqSelMod (26.03) = Auto and Run is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control, default.

1 = TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero. Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit. When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked.

In case TorqSelMod (26.03) = Auto and Run is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control.

2 = CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked.

3 = DynBraking dynamic braking

Note:

In case UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0 On and UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3 Run are set to low (run and on commands are taken away) at the same time or nearly contemporary Off1Mode (21.02) and

StopMode (21.03) must have the same setting.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

21.04 E StopMode (emergency stop mode)

Conditions for motor deceleration when UsedMCW (7.04) bit 2 Off3N (respectively E-stop) is set low:

0 = RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero. Thus the drive stops according to E StopRamp (22.04). When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

In case TorqSelMod (26.03) = Auto and Off3N is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control.

1 = TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero. Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit. When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

In case TorqSelMod (26.03) = Auto and Off3N is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control.

2 = CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped, default.

3 = DynBraking dynamic braking

Note:

E StopMode (21.04) overrides Off1Mode (21.02) and StopMode (21.03).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

283

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

284

Index

Signal / Parameter name

21.05 E StopDecMin (emergency stop minimum deceleration rate)

During an emergency stop the deceleration of the drive is supervised. This supervision starts after the drive has received an emergency stop and the time delay defined in DecMonDly (21.07) is elapsed. In case the drive isn’t able to decelerate within the window, defined by E StopDecMin

(21.05) and E StopDecMax (21.06), it is stopped by coasting and AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 2 E-

StopCoast is set high.

Note:

The supervision is disabled in case E StopDecMax (21.06) or E StopDecMin (21.05) is set to default.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 rpm/s Type: I Volatile: N

21.06 E StopDecMax (emergency stop maximum deceleration rate)

During an emergency stop the deceleration of the drive is supervised. This supervision starts after the drive has received an emergency stop and the time delay defined in DecMonDly (21.07) is elapsed. In case the drive isn’t able to decelerate within the window, defined by E StopDecMin

(21.05) and E StopDecMax (21.06), it is stopped by coasting and AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 2 E-

StopCoast is set high.

Note:

The supervision is disabled in case E StopDecMax (21.06) or E StopDecMin (21.05) is set to default.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 rpm/s Type: I Volatile: N

21.07 DecMonDly (delay deceleration monitoring)

Time delay before the deceleration monitoring of the emergency stop starts. See also E

StopDecMin (21.05) and E StopDecMax (21.06).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

21.08 Unused

21.09 Unused

21.10 FlyStart (flying start)

Selection of the desired operating response to a Run command [UsedMCW (7.04)) bit 3] during braking or coasting:

0 = StartFrom0 wait until the motor has reached zero speed [see M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03)], then restart. In case the restart command comes before zero speed is reached A137 SpeedNotZero [AlarmWord3 (9.08) bit 4] is generated.

1 = FlyingStart start motor with its actual speed, when the drive was stopped by RampStop,

TorqueLimit or CoastStop. Stop by DynBraking is not interrupted, wait until zero speed is reached, default

2 = FlyStartDyn start motor with its actual speed, when the drive was stopped by RampStop,

TorqueLimit, CoastStop or DynBraking. DynBraking is interrupted.

Attention:

When using FlyStartDyn make sure, that the hardware (e.g. the switch disconnecting the braking resistor) is able to disconnect the current.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

21.11 Unused

21.12 Unused

21.13 Unused

21.14 FanDly (fan delay)

After the drive has been switched off [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0

On = 0], both fans (motor and converter) mustn't switched off before FanDly (21.14) has elapsed. If motor or converter overtemperature is pending, the delay starts after the temperature has dropped below the overtemperature limit.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

21.15 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

285

Index

Signal / Parameter name

21.16 MainContCtrlMode (main contactor control mode)

MainContCtrlMode (21.16) determines the reaction to On and Run commands [UsedMCW (7.04) bits 0 and 3]:

0 = On main contactor closes with On = 1, default

1 = On&Run main contactor closes with On = Run = 1

2 = OnHVCB for high voltage AC circuit breaker configuration (for more information see chapter XXXX); not implemented yet

3 = DCcontact If a DC-breaker is used as a main contactor, it will be closed with On = 1.

Additionally the armature voltage measurements are adapted to an open DCbreaker by clamping SpeedActEMF (1.02), ArmVoltActRel (1.13), ArmVoltAct

(1.14) and EMF VoltActRel (1.17) to zero when the drive is Off.

The clamping is released: either 100 ms after an On command (MCW bit 0) is given in case

DCBreakAck (10.23) = NotUsed or when using the DC-breaker acknowledge with DCBreakAck (10.23) = DIx until the acknowledge signal indicates that the DC-breaker closed.

Note:

If the DC volt measurement is located at the motor terminals use 0 = On

(Modified D5 – D7 converters)

Note:

The DC-breaker (US style) K1.1 is a special designed DC-breaker with one normally closed contact for the dynamic braking resistor R

B

and two normally open contacts for C1 and D1. The

DC-breaker should be controlled by CurCtrlStart1 (6.03) bit 10. The acknowledge signal can be connected to either MainContAck (10.21) or DCBreakAck (10.23):

L1

U1 V1 W1 PE

Main contactor 6.03 b 7

Dyn Brake 6.03 b 8

DC Contact US 6.03 b 10

DCS800

Converter module

K1.1

+

C 1 D 1

_

'on board' field exciter

R

B

X10: 2

F+ F-

1

M

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

21.17 Unused

Type:

DC cont us.dsf

C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

286

Index

Signal / Parameter name

21.18 FldHeatSel (field heat selector)

FldHeatSel (21.18) releases the field heating for motor 1 and motor 2:

0 = NotUsed field heating is off, default

1 = On

2 = OnRun field heating is on, as long as: On = 0 [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0], Off2N = 1

[UsedMCW (7.04) bit 1] and Off3N = 1 [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 2] field heating is on as long as: On = 1, Run = 0 [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3],

Off2N = 1 and Off3N = 1

3 = ACW Bit12 field heating is on as long as: ACW Bit12 = 1 [AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12] and Run = 0

4 = ACW Bit13 field heating is on as long as: ACW Bit13 = 1 [AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13] and Run = 0

5 = ACW Bit14 field heating is on as long as: ACW Bit14 = 1 [AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14] and Run = 0

6 = ACW Bit15 field heating is on as long as: ACW Bit15 = 1 [AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15] and Run = 0

Note:

The field heating references are set with M1FldHeatRef (44.04) and M2FldHeatRef (49.06). Field heating for the individual motor can be disabled when the belonging reference is set to zero.

Field nominal currents are set with M1NomFldCur (99.11) and M2NomFldCur (49.05).

Note:

In case the field exciter is not connected via a separate field contactor following settings apply for field heating:

MainContCtrlMode (21.16) = On

FldHeatSel (21.18) = OnRun

Note:

When two motors in shared motion are used and field economy is needed for the dormant set

FldHeatSel (21.18) = NotUsed.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Speed ramp

22.01 AccTime1 (acceleration time 1)

The time within the drive will accelerate from zero speed to SpeedScaleAct (2.29):

 To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale (22.03)

AccTime1 (22.01) can be released with Ramp2Sel (22.11)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

22.02 DecTime1 (deceleration time 1)

The time within the drive will decelerate from SpeedScaleAct (2.29) to zero speed:

 To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale (22.03)

DecTime1 (22.02) can be released with Ramp2Sel (22.11)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

22.03 RampTimeScale (ramp time scaling)

Multiplier for AccTime1 (22.01) / AccTime2 (22.09) and DecTime1 (22.02) / DecTime2 (22.10) to expand the ramp time.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

22.04 E StopRamp (emergency stop ramp)

The time within the drive will decelerate from SpeedScaleAct (2.29) to zero speed. Either when emergency stop is released and E StopMode (21.04) = RampStop or as reaction to a fault of trip level 4 and FaultStopMode (30.30) = RampStop.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

22.05 ShapeTime (shape time)

Speed reference softening time. This function is bypassed during an emergency stop:

287

I Volatile: N Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 s Type:

22.06 Unused

22.07 VarSlopeRate (variable slope rate)

Variable slope is used to control the slope of the speed ramp during a speed reference change. It is active only with VarSlopeRate (22.07)

 0. Variable slope rate and the drive’s internal ramp are connected in series. Thus follows that the ramp times - AccTime1 (22.01) and DecTime1 (22.02) - have to be faster than the complete variable slope rate time. VarSlopeRate (22.07) defines the speed ramp time t for the speed reference change A:

Speed reference

SpeedRefUsed (2.17)

t = cycle time of the overriding control (e.g. speed reference generation)

A = speed reference change during cycle time t t

A

SpeedRef3 (2.02)

Time

Note:

In case the overriding control systems cycle time of the speed reference and VarSlopeRate (22.07) are equal the shape of SpeedRef3 (2.02) is a strait line.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

The output of the speed ramp can be forced to the value defined by BalRampRef (22.08). The function is released by setting AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 3 = 1.

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type:

32767

20000

SI

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

Volatile: N

rpm

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

288

Index

Signal / Parameter name

22.09 AccTime2 (acceleration time 2)

The time within the drive will accelerate from zero speed to SpeedScaleAct (2.29):

 To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale (22.03)

AccTime2 (22.09) can be released with Ramp2Sel (22.11)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

22.10 DecTime2 (deceleration time 2)

The time within the drive will decelerate from SpeedScaleAct (2.29) to zero speed:

 To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale (22.03)

DecTime2 (22.10) can be released with Ramp2Sel (22.11)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

22.11 Ramp2Select (ramp 2 selector)

Select active ramp parameters:

0 = Acc/Dec1 parameter set 1 [AccTime1 (22.01) and DecTime1 (22.02)] is active, default

1 = Acc/Dec2 parameter set 2 [AccTime2 (22.09) and DecTime2 (22.10)] is active

2 = SpeedLevel If

 |SpeedLev (50.10)|, then parameter set1 is active.

3 = DI1

4 = DI2

5 = DI3

6 = DI4

7 = DI5

8 = DI6

9 = DI7

10 = DI8

11 = DI9

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active

12 = DI10

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, only available with digital extension board

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, only available with digital extension board

13 = DI11 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, only available with digital extension board

14 = MCW Bit11 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 11

15 = MCW Bit12 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 12

16 = MCW Bit13 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 13

17 = MCW Bit14 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 14

18 = MCW Bit15 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 15

19 = ACW Bit12 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 12

20 = ACW Bit13 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 13

21 = ACW Bit14 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 14

22 = ACW Bit15 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 15

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

289

Index

Signal / Parameter name

22.12 JogAccTime (acceleration time jogging)

The time within the drive will accelerate from zero speed to SpeedScaleAct (2.29) in case of jogging:

 When using jog command Jog1 (10.17) or MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 8 speed is set by

FixedSpeed1 (23.02)

 When using jog command Jog2 (10.18) ) or MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 9 speed is set by

FixedSpeed2 (23.03)

 To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale (22.03)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

The time within the drive will decelerate from SpeedScaleAct (2.29) to zero speed in case of jogging:

 When using jog command Jog1 (10.17) or MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 8 speed is set by

FixedSpeed1 (23.02)

 When using jog command Jog2 (10.18) ) or MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 9 speed is set by

FixedSpeed2 (23.03)

 To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale (22.03)

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

Speed reference

23.01 SpeedRef (speed reference)

Main speed reference input for the speed control of the drive. Can be connected to SpeedRefUsed

(2.17) via:

Ref1Mux (11.02) and Ref1Sel (11.03) or

Ref2Mux (11.12) and Ref2Sel (11.06)

Internally limited from:

Int. Scaling: (2.29)

( 2 .

29 ) *

Type:

32767

20000

SI

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

Volatile: Y

rpm

FixedSpeed1 (23.02) is specifying a constant speed reference and overrides SpeedRef2 (2.01) at the speed ramp’s input. It can be released by Jog1 (10.17) or MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 8. The ramp times are set with JogAccTime (22.12) and JogDecTime (22.13).

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type:

32767

20000

SI

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

Volatile: N

rpm

FixedSpeed2 (23.03) is specifying a constant speed reference and overrides SpeedRef2 (2.01) at the speed ramp’s input. It can be released by Jog2 (10.18) or MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 9. The ramp times are set with JogAccTime (22.12) and JogDecTime (22.13).

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type:

32767

20000

SI

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

Volatile: N

rpm

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

290

Index

Signal / Parameter name

The SpeedCorr (23.04) is added to the ramped reference SpeedRef3 (2.02).

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm

Note:

Since this speed offset is added after the speed ramp, it must be set to zero prior to stopping the drive.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

Scaling factor SpeedRefUsed (2.17). Before speed ramp.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

23.06 SpeedErrFilt (filter for

n)

Speed error (

n) filter time 1. There are three different filters for actual speed and speed error (n):

SpeedFiltTime (50.06) is filtering the actual speed and should be used for filter times smaller than 30 ms.

SpeedErrFilt (23.06) and SpeedErrFilt2 (23.11) are filtering the speed error (n) and should be used for filter times greater than 30 ms. It is recommended to set SpeedErrFilt

(23.06) = SpeedErrFilt2 (23.11).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

291

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Idea of Window Control:

The idea of the Window Control is to block the speed controller as long as the speed error (

n) or speed actual remains within the window set by WinWidthPos (23.08) and WinWidthNeg (23.09).

This allows the external torque reference - TorqRef1 (2.08) - to affect the process directly. If the speed error (

n) or actual speed exceeds the programmed window, the speed controller becomes active and influences the process by means of TorqRef2 (2.09). To release window control set

TorqSel (26.01) = Add and AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 7 = 1.

This function could be called over/underspeed protection in torque control mode:

WinCtrlMode (23.12) = SpeedErrWin

TorqRef2 (2.09) = 0

WinWidthPos (23.08)

WinWidthNeg (23.09)

n

 n = 0

Window width

Time

WinCtrlMode (23.12) = SpeedActWin

= 0 TorqRef2 (2.09)

WinWidthPos (23.08)

speed actual

Window width

WinWidthNeg (23.09)

Time

Note:

to open a window with a width of 100 rpm set WinWidthPos (23.08) = 50 rpm and WinWidthNeg

(23.09) = -50 rpm.

Enables the integrator of the speed controller when window control is released:

0 = Off Integrator of the speed controller is blocked when window control is released

1 = On Integrator of the speed controller is enabled when window control is released

To release window control set TorqSel (26.01) = Add and AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 7 = 1.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

23.08 WinWidthPos (positive window width)

Positive speed limit for the window control, when the speed error (

n = n ref

- n act

) is positive.

Internally limited from:

Int. Scaling: (2.29)

( 2 .

29 )

Type:

*

32767

20000

I

rpm to

( 2

Volatile: N

.

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

292

Index

Signal / Parameter name

(negative window width)

Negative speed limit for the window control, when the speed error (

n = n ref

- n act

) is negative.

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

SpeedStep (23.10) is added to the speed error (

n) at the speed controller’s input. The given min./max. values are limited by M1SpeedMin (20.02) and M1SpeedMax (20.02).

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm

Note:

Since this speed offset is added after the speed ramp, it must be set to zero prior to stopping the drive.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

23.11 SpeedErrFilt2 (2 nd

filter for

n)

Speed error (

n) filter time 2.

There are three different filters for actual speed and speed error (

n).

SpeedFiltTime (50.06) is filtering the actual speed and should be used for filter times smaller than

30 ms.

SpeedErrFilt (23.06) and SpeedErrFilt2 (23.11) are filtering the speed error (

n) and should be used for filter times greater than 30 ms. It is recommended to set SpeedErrFilt (23.06) =

SpeedErrFilt2 (23.11).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

23.12 WinCtrlMode (window control mode)

Window control mode:

0 = SpeedErrWin Standard window control, Speed error (

n) has to be in a window

1 = SpeedActWin defined by WinWidthPos (23.08) and WinWidthNeg (23.09).

Typically used for torque followers to limit differential speed,

default.

Speed actual has to be in a window defined by WinWidthPos

(23.08) and WinWidthNeg (23.09).

Typically used for torque controlled test rigs to limit the no load speed.

Example1:

To get a window of 10 rpm width around the speed error (

n) set:

WinCtrlMode (23.12) = SpeedErrWin

WinWidthPos (23.08) = 5 rpm and

WinWidthNeg (23.09) = -5 rpm

Example2:

To get a window (e.g. 500 rpm to 1000 rpm) around speed actual set:

WinCtrlMode (23.12) = SpeedActWin

WinWidthPos (23.08) = 1000 rpm and

WinWidthNeg (23.09) = 500 rpm

To get a window (e.g. -50 rpm to 100 rpm) around speed actual set:

WinCtrlMode (23.12) = SpeedActWin

WinWidthPos (23.08) = 100 rpm and

WinWidthNeg (23.09) = -50 rpm

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

23.13 AuxSpeedRef (auxiliary speed reference)

Auxiliary speed reference input for the speed control of the drive. Can be connected to

SpeedRefUsed (2.17) via:

Ref1Mux (11.02) and Ref1Sel (11.03) or

Ref2Mux (11.12) and Ref2Sel (11.06)

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type:

32767

20000

SI

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

Volatile: Y

rpm

23.14 Unused

23.15 DirectSpeedRef (direct speed reference)

Direct speed input is connected to SpeedRef3 (2.02) by means of AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03) bit 10 = 1 and replaces the speed ramp output.

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm

Note:

Since this speed offset is added after the speed ramp, it must be set to zero prior to stopping the drive.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

Speed reference scaling. After SpeedRef3 (2.02) and before SpeedRef4 (2.18).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

293

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

294

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Speed control

The Speed controller is based on a PID algorithm and is presented as follows:

T ref

(

s

)

KpS

*

n ref

(

s

)

n act

(

s

)

*

1

1

s TiS

s s TD

TF

1



*

100 %

*

2 .

29

T n

with:

T ref

= torque reference

KpS = proportional gain [KpS (24.03)]

N ref

= speed reference

N act

= speed actual

TiS = Integration time [TiS (24.09)]

TD = Derivation time [DerivTime (24.12)]

TF = Derivation filter time [DerivFiltTime (24.13)]

T n

= nominal motor torque

(2.29) = actual used speed scaling [SpeedScaleAct (2.29)]

1 n ref speed reference

-

1 s TiS

100% * Tn

KpS * --------------

(2.29)

T ref torque reference s TD n act speed actual s TF + 1

24.01 Unused

24.02 DroopRate (droop rate)

Droop is used in certain applications to archive a speed drop depending on the load. This function may become necessary for proper load sharing between drives which are linked via material (e.g. paper, steel, foil) and running with a common speed reference.

The amount of speed drop caused by the load is determined by DroopRate (24.02). The result is a load dependent speed decrease in percent of SpeedScaleAct (2.29).

Example:

With DroopRate (24.02) = 3 % and TorqIntegRef (2.05) = 100 % (nominal motor torque) the actual speed decreases 3 % of SpeedScaleAct (2.29).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

295

Index

Signal / Parameter name

24.03 KpS (p-part speed controller)

Proportional gain of the speed controller can be released by means of Par2Select (24.29).

Example:

The controller generates 15 % of motor nominal torque with KpS (24.03) = 3, if the speed error (

n) is 5 % of SpeedScaleAct (2.29).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Load adaptive proportional gain: p-part

KpS (24.03)

KpSMin (24.04)

0

KpSWeakpFiltTime (24.06)

KpSWeakp

(24.05)

100%

TorqRef2 (2.09)

The adaptive proportional gain of the speed controller is used to smooth out disturbances which are caused by low loads and backlash. Moderate filtering of the speed error (

n) is typically not enough to tune the drive.

The load adaptation is valid for positive and negative torque.

24.04 KpSMin (minimum p-part speed controller)

KpSMin (24.04) determines the proportional gain when the speed controller output [TorqRef2

(2.09)] is zero. KpSMin (24.04) cannot be greater than KpS (24.03).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

24.05 KpSWeakp (weakening point of p-part speed controller)

The speed controller output value [TorqRef2 (2.09)], in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23), where the gain equals KpS (24.03).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

24.06 KpSWeakpFiltTime (filter time for weakening point of p-part speed controller)

Filter time to soften the proportional gains rate of change.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

24.07 Unused

24.08 Unused

24.09 TiS (i-part speed controller)

Integral time of the speed controller can be released by means of Par2Select (24.29). TiS (24.09) defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part.

Example:

The controller generates 15 % of motor nominal torque with KpS (24.03) = 3, if the speed error (

n) is 5 % of SpeedScaleAct (2.29). On that condition and with TiS (24.09) = 300 ms follows:

 the controller generates 30 % of motor nominal torque, if the speed error (n) is constant, after 300 ms are elapsed (15 % from proportional part and 15 % from integral part).

Setting TIS (24.09) to 0 ms disables the integral part of the speed controller and resets its integrator.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

24.10 TiSInitValue (initial value for i-part speed controller)

Initial value of the speed controller integrator, in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23). The integrator is set as soon as RdyRef [MainStatWord (8.01)] becomes valid.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

296

Index

Signal / Parameter name

External value in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23). Both, i-part and output of the speed controller are forced to BalRef (24.11) when AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 8 = 1.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

Speed controller derivation time. DerivTime (24.12) defines the time within the speed controller derives the error value. The speed controller works as PI controller, if DerivTime (24.12) is set to zero.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

24.13 DerivFiltTime (filter time for d-part speed controller)

Derivation filter time.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

AccCompDerTime (24.14) compensates the inertia by adding the derived and weighted

SpeedRef4 (2.18) to the speed controller output. The acceleration compensation is inactive, if

AccCompDerTime (24.14) is set to zero.

Example:

AccCompDerTime (24.14) equals the time required to accelerate the drive to SpeedScaleAct

(2.29) with motor nominal torque.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

24.15 AccCompFiltTime (filter time acceleration compensation)

Acceleration compensation filter time.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

24.16 Unused

Speed adaptive proportional gain and integral time: p-part, i-part

KpSValMinSpeed (24.19) p-part, i-part

TiSValMinSpeed (24.20)

KpS (24.03)

TiS (24.09) or

TiS (24.09)

KpS (24.03)

TiSValMinSpeed (24.20)

KpSTiSMinSpeed

(24.17)

KpSTiSMaxSpeed

(24.18)

ProcSpeed (1.41)

KpSValMinSpeed (24.19)

KpSTiSMinSpeed

(24.17)

KpSTiSMaxSpeed

(24.18)

ProcSpeed (1.41)

In certain applications it is useful to increase / decrease the proportional gain [KpS (24.03)] and decrease / increase the integral time [TiS (24.09)] at low speeds to improve the performance of the speed control. The linear increase and decrease of these parameters starts at KpSTiSMaxSpeed

(24.18) and ends at KpSTiSMinSpeed (24.17) by means of KpSValMinSpeed (24.19) and

TiSValMinSpeed (24.20).

The speed adaptation is valid for positive and negative speeds.

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

297

Index

Signal / Parameter name

The speed limit below which the proportional gain and the integral time are defined by

KpSValMinSpeed (24.19) and TiSValMinSpeed (24.20).The used speed is ProcSpeed (1.41).

Internally limited from:

Int. Scaling: (2.29)

0

rpm to

Type:

( 2 .

29 ) *

I

32767

rpm

20000

Volatile: N

The speed limit above which the proportional gain and the integral time become constant and are defined by KpS (24.03) and TiS (24.09). The used speed is ProcSpeed (1.41).

Internally limited from:

Int. Scaling: (2.29)

0

rpm to

Type:

( 2 .

29 ) *

I

32767

rpm

20000

Volatile: N

KpSValMinSpeed (24.19) determines the proportional gain percentage at the speed defined by parameter KpSTiSMinSpeed (24.17).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

TiSValMinSpeed (24.20) determines the integral time percentage at the speed defined by parameter KpSTiSMinSpeed (24.17).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

24.21 ZeroFreqRFE (zero frequency resonance frequency eliminator)

Frequency of zero.

The filter is located at the input of the speed controller.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 Hz Type: I Volatile: N

24.22 ZeroDampRFE (zero damping resonance frequency eliminator)

Damping of zero.

Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

24.23 PoleFreqRFE (pole frequency resonance frequency eliminator)

Frequency of pole.

The filter is located at the input of the speed controller.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 Hz Type: I Volatile: N

24.24 PoleDampRFE (pole damping resonance frequency eliminator)

Damping of pole.

Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

24.25 SpeedErrorScale (

n scaling)

Scaling factor speed error (

n).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

24.26 Unused

(2 nd

p-part speed controller)

2 nd

proportional gain of the speed controller can be released by means of Par2Select (24.29).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

(2 nd

i-part speed controller)

2 nd

integral time of the speed controller can be released by means of Par2Select (24.29).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

298

Index

Signal / Parameter name

24.29 Par2Select (selector for 2 nd

set of speed controller parameters)

Select active speed controller parameters:

0 = ParSet1 parameter set 1 [KpS (24.03) and TiS (24.09)] is active, default

1 = ParSet2 parameter set 2 [KpS2 (24.27) and TiS2 (24.28)] is active

2 = SpeedLevel If

 |SpeedLev (50.10)|, then parameter set1 is active.

|MotSpeed (1.04)| > |SpeedLev (50.10)|, then parameter set 2 is active.

3 = SpeedError If |SpeedErrNeg (2.03)|

 |SpeedLev (50.10)|, then parameter set1 is active.

4 = DI1

5 = DI2

6 = DI3

7 = DI4 active.

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active

8 = DI5

9 = DI6

10 = DI7

11 = DI8

12 = DI9

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, only available with digital extension board

13 = DI10

14 = DI11

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, only available with digital extension board

0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, only available with digital extension board

15 = MCW Bit11 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 11

16 = MCW Bit12 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 12

17 = MCW Bit13 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 13

18 = MCW Bit14 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 14

19 = MCW Bit15 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 15

20 = ACW Bit12 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 12

21 = ACW Bit13 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 13

22 = ACW Bit14 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 14

23 = ACW Bit15 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 15

Note:

Load and speed dependent adaptation parameters are valid regardless of the selected parameter set.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Torque reference

25.01 TorqRefA (torque reference A)

External torque reference in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23). TorqRefA (25.01) can be scaled by

LoadShare (25.03).

Note:

TorqRefA (25.01) is only valid, if TorqRefA Sel (25.10) = TorqRefA2501.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

25.02 TorqRefA FTC (torque reference A filter time)

TorqRefA (25.01) filter time.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: SI Volatile: N

25.03 LoadShare (load share)

Scaling factor TorqRefA (25.01).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

25.04 TorqRefB (torque reference B)

External torque reference in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23). TorqRefB (25.04) is ramped by

TorqRampUp (25.05) and TorqRampDown (25.06).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

25.05 TorqRampUp (torque ramp up)

Ramp time from 0 % to 100 %, of MotNomTorque (4.23), for. TorqRefB (25.04).

Int. Scaling: 100 = 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

25.06 TorqRampDown (torque ramp down)

Ramp time from 100 % to 0 %, of MotNomTorque (4.23), for. TorqRefB (25.04).

Int. Scaling: 100 = 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

25.07 Unused

25.08 Unused

25.09 Unused

25.10 TorqRefA Sel (torque reference A selector)

Selector for TorqRefExt (2.24):

0 = TorqRefA2501 TorqRefA (25.01), default

1 = AI1 analog input AI1

2 = AI2

3 = AI3

4 = AI4

5 = AI5 analog input AI2 analog input AI3 analog input AI4 analog input AI5

6 = AI6

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

analog input AI6

Type: C Volatile: N

299

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

300

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Torque reference handling

26.01 TorqSel (torque selector)

Torque reference selector:

0 = Zero zero control, torque reference = 0

3 = Minimum minimum control: min [TorqRef1 (2.08), TorqRef2 (2.09)]

4 = Maximum maximum control: max [TorqRef1 (2.08), TorqRef2 (2.09)]

5 = Add add TorqRef1 (2.08) +TorqRef2 (2.09), used for window control

6 = Limitation limitation control: TorqRef1 (2.08) limits TorqRef2 (2.09). If TorqRef1 (2.08) =

50%, then TorqRef2 (2.09) is limited to

50%.

The output of the torque reference selector is TorqRef3 (2.10). The currently used control mode is displayed in CtrlMode (1.25). If the drive is in torque control AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 10 is set.

Note:

TorqSel (26.01) is only valid, if TorqMuxMode (26.04) = TorqSel2601.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

26.02 LoadComp (load compensation)

Load compensation - in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) -added to TorqRef3 (2.10). The sum of

TorqRef3 (2.10) and the LoadComp (26.02) results in TorqRef4 (2.11).

Note:

Since this torque offset is added, it must be set to zero prior to stopping the drive.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

26.03 TorqSelMod (torque selector mode)

Mode setting for the torque selector:

0 = Auto the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control in

1 = Fix case the mode described in:

Off1Mode (21.02),

StopMode (21.03),

E StopMode (21.04),

LocalLossCtrl (30.27),

ComLossCtrl (30.28),

FaultStopMode (30.30),

M1TorqProvTime (42.10),

M2TorqProvTime (49.40),

Ch0 ComLossCtrl (70.05) or

Ch2 ComLossCtrl (70.15)

is active and the parameter is set to RampStop or TorqueLimit, default the torque selector is fixed to the value set by TorqSel (26.01),

TorqMuxMode (26.04) and TorqMux (26.05)

Note:

The setting of TorqSelMod (26.03) is especially affecting drives using torque control (e.g. masterfollower).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Torque selector:

2.09

TorqRef2

25.10

TorqRefA Sel

TorqRefB

25.01

5.03-5.08

TorqRefA2501

AI1…AI6

25.04

Torque ramp

25.05

25.06

TorqRampUp

TorqRampDown

TorqRefExt

2.24

Filter

25.02

TorqRefA FTC

25.03

LoadShare

26.05

TorqMux

NotUsed

DI1, …, DI11

MCW Bit 11, …, MCW Bit15

ACW Bit 12, …, ACW Bit 15

DW

DWL

+

Local

TorqRef2

2.09

20.09

20.10

2.19

2.20

TorqMaxTref

TorqMinTref

TorqMaxAll

TorqMinAll

MSW B2

2.08

TorqRef1

0

Torque selector

Speed 1

Torque 2

Min 3

2

1

3

4 5

0

6

Max 4

+

Add 5

+

Lim 6

CtrlMode

TorqSel

26.04

26.01

TorqMuxMode

TorqSel2601 (0…6)

Speed/Torq (1 or 2)

Speed/Min (1 or 3)

Speed/Max (1 or 4)

Speed/Limit (1 or 6)

26.03

21.02

21.03

21.04

30.27

30.28

30.30

42.10

49.40

70.05

70.15

TorqSelMod

Off1Mode

StopMode

E StopMode

LocalLoossCtrl

CommLossCtrl

FaultStopMode

M1TorqProvTime

M2TorqProvTime

Ch0 ComLossCtrl

Ch2 ComLossCtrl

1.25

TorqMuxMode (26.04) selects a pair of operation modes. The change between operation modes is done by means of TorqMux (26.05). Torque reference multiplexer:

0 = TorqSel2601 operation mode depends on TorqSel (26.01), default

1 = Speed/Torq operation mode depends on TorqMux (26.05):

- binary input = 0

 speed control (1)

- binary input = 1

 torque control (2)

2 = Speed/Min operation mode depends on TorqMux (26.05):

- binary input = 0

 speed control (1)

- binary input = 1

 minimum control (3)

3 = Speed/Max operation mode depends on TorqMux (26.05):

- binary input = 0

 speed control (1)

- binary input = 1

 maximum control (4)

4 = Speed/Limit operation mode depends on TorqMux (26.05):

- binary input = 0

 speed control (1)

- binary input = 1

 limitation control (6)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

301

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

302

Index

Signal / Parameter name

26.05 TorqMux (torque multiplexer)

TorqMux (26.05) selects a binary input to change between operation modes. The choice of the operation modes is provided by means of TorqMuxMode (26.04). Torque reference multiplexer binary input:

0 = NotUsed

1 = DI1

2 = DI2

3 = DI3 operation mode depends on TorqSel (26.01), default

0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04)

0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04)

0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04)

4 = DI4

5 = DI5

6 = DI6

7 = DI7

8 = DI8

9 = DI9

10= DI10

11 = DI11

0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04)

0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04)

0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04)

0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04)

0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04)

0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), only available with digital extension board

0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), only available with digital extension board

0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), only available with digital extension board

12 = MCW Bit11 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 11

13 = MCW Bit12 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 12

14 = MCW Bit13 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 13

15 = MCW Bit14 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 14

16 = MCW Bit15 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 15

17 = ACW Bit12 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 12

18 = ACW Bit13 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 13

19 = ACW Bit14 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 14

20 = ACW Bit15 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 15

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

26.06 Unused

26.07 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

26.08 GearStartTorq (gearbox starting torque)

Gear backlash compensation:

GearStartTorq (26.08) is the reduced torque limit - in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) - used after a torque direction change. The torque limit is reduced for the time defined by

GearTorqTime (26.09).

Torque

GearTorqRamp

(26.10)

GearStartTorq

(26.08) t t

GearTorqTime

(26.09)

Int. Scaling: 100 = 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

26.09 GearTorqTime (gearbox torque time)

Gear backlash compensation:

 When the torque is changing its direction, the torque limit is reduced for the time defined by GearTorqTime (26.09).

Int. Scaling: 1 = 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

26.10 GearTorqRamp (gearbox torque ramp)

Gear backlash compensation:

 When the torque is changing its direction, the torque limit is reduced for the time defined by GearTorqTime (26.09). After the time has elapsed, the torque limit is increased to its normal value according to the ramp time defined by GearTorqRamp (26.10).

GearTorqRamp (26.10) defines the time within the torque increases from zero- to

MotNomTorque (4.23).

Int. Scaling: 1 = 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

26.11 Unused

26.12 Unused

303

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

304

Index

Signal / Parameter name

26.13 TorqScale (torque scaling)

Scaling of TorqRefUsed (2.13) and MotTorq (1.08):

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3.24

FluxRefFldWeak

TorqScale

26.13

MotTorq

1.08

Filter

MotTorqFilt

1.07

internal scaling:

I mot nom

== 10000

I max

= 3.25 * I mot nom

97.20

TorqActFiltTime

MotCur

1.06

1.15

Armature current measurement

ConvCurActRel

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

26.14 Unused

26.15 TorqCorrect (torque correction)

Torque correction value in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23):

0 = NotUsed no torque correction used, default

1 = AI1 torque correction via AI1 (fast AI)

2 = AI2

3 = AI3 torque correction via AI2 (fast AI) torque correction via AI3

4 = AI4

5 = AI5

6 = AI6

Note:

torque correction via AI4 torque correction via AI5 torque correction via AI6

If TorqCorrect (26.15) = AI3 then AI3 is connected to TorqCorr (2.14) and thus added to

TorqRefUsed (2.13).

Note:

Since this torque offset is added, it must be set to zero prior to stopping the drive.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Fault functions

30.01 StallTime (stall time)

The time allowed for the drive to undershoot StallSpeed (30.02) and exceed StallTorq (30.03). A triggered stall protection leads to F531 MotorStalled [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 14].

The stall protection is inactive, if StallTime (30.01) is set to zero.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

30.02 StallSpeed (stall speed)

Actual speed limit used for stall protection.

Internally limited from:

0

rpm to

( 2 .

29 )

rpm

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

305

Index

Signal / Parameter name

30.03 StallTorq (stall torque)

Actual torque limit - in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) - used for stall protection.

Int. Scaling: 100 = 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

30.04 Unused

30.05 ResCurDetectSel (residual current detection selector)

The drive trips with F505 ResCurDetect [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 4] if the earth current exceeds

ResCurDetectLim (30.06) for ResCurDetectDel (30.07):

0 = NotUsed residual current detection is blocked, default

1 = AI4 The earth current is measured by means of a current difference sensor in combination with AI4 (X3:11 and X3:12) on the SDCS-IOB-3 board.

2 = DI1

3 = DI2

4 = DI3

The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender relays).

The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender relays).

The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender relays).

5 = DI4

6 = DI5

7 = DI6

8 = DI7

The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender relays).

The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender relays).

The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender relays).

The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender relays).

9 = DI8

10 = DI9

11 = DI10

The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender relays.

The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender relays). Only available with digital extension board

The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender relays. Only available with digital extension board

12 = DI11 The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender relays). Only available with digital extension board

Note:

If ResCurDetectSel (30.05) is connected to a digital input only ResCurDetectDel (30.07) remains valid. The trip limit ResCurDetectLim (30.06) is adjusted at the external device.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

30.06 ResCurDetectLim (residual current detection limit)

Residual current detection tripping level in amperes at the primary side of the current transformer

(ratio is 400 : 1). If ResCurDetectSel (30.05) is connected to a digital input ResCurDetectLim

(30.06) is deactivated, because the limit is adjusted at the external device.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: N

30.07 ResCurDetectDel (residual current detection delay)

Time delay for F505 ResCurDetect [FaultWord1 (9.01)].

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

The drive trips with F503 ArmOverVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 2] if ArmOvrVoltLev (30.08) - in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02) - is exceeded. It is recommended to set ArmOvrVoltLev (30.08) at least 20 % higher than M1NomVolt (99.02).

Example:

With M1NomVolt (99.02) = 525 V and ArmOvrVoltLev (30.08) = 120 % the drive trips with armature voltages > 630 V.

The overvoltage supervision is inactive, if ArmOvrVoltLev (30.08) is set to 328 % or higher.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

306

Index

Signal / Parameter name

The drive trips with F502 ArmOverCur [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 1] if ArmOvrCurLev (30.09) - in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - is exceeded. It is recommended to set ArmOvrCurLev (30.09) at least 25 % higher than M1NomCur (99.03).

Example:

With M1NomCur (99.03) = 850 A and ArmOvrCurLev (30.09) = 250 % the drive trips with armature currents > 2125 A.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

The drive trips with F539 FastCurRise [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 6] if ArmCurRiseMax (30.10) - in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - per 1 ms is exceeded.

Note:

This trip opens the main contactor and the DC-breaker, if present.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 %/ms Type: I Volatile: N

30.11 Unused

30.12 M1FldMinTrip (motor 1 minimum field trip)

The drive trips with F541 M1FexLowCur [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 8] if M1FldMinTrip (30.12) - in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11) - is still undershot when FldMinTripDly (45.18) is elapsed.

Note:

M1FldMinTrip (30.12) is not valid during field heating and field economy. In this case the trip level is automatically set to 50 % of M1FldHeatRef (44.04). The drive trips with F541 M1FexLowCur

[FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 8] if 50 % of M1FldHeatRef (44.04) is still undershot when FldMinTripDly

(45.18) is elapsed.

Note:

M1FldMinTrip (30.12) is not valid for FldCtrlMode (44.01) = Fix/Opti, EMF/Opti, Fix/Rev/Opti or

EMF/Rev/Opti. In this case the trip level is automatically set to 50 % of FldCurRefM1 (3.30). The drive trips with F541 M1FexLowCur [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 8] if 50 % of FldCurRefM1 (3.30) is still undershot when FldMinTripDly (45.18) is elapsed.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

30.13 M1FldOvrCurLev (motor 1 field overcurrent level)

The drive trips with F515 M1FexOverCur [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 14] if M1FldOvrCurLev (30.13) - in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11) - is exceeded. It is recommended to set M1FldOvrCurtLev

(30.13) at least 25 % higher than M1NomFldCur (99.11).

The field overcurrent fault is inactive, if M1FldOvrCurLev (30.13) is set to 135 %.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

The drive reacts according to SpeedFbFltSel (30.17) or trips with F553 TachPolarity [FaultWord4

(9.04) bit 4] if the measured speed feedback [SpeedActEnc (1.03), SpeedActTach (1.05) or

SpeedActEnc2 (1.42)] does not exceed SpeedFbMonLev (30.14) while the measured EMF exceeds EMF FbMonLev (30.15).

Internally limited from:

0

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm

Example:

With SpeedFbMonLev (30.14) = 15 rpm and EMF FbMonLev (30.15) = 50 V the drive trips when the EMF is > 50 V while the speed feedback is

 15 rpm.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

30.15 EMF FbMonLev (EMF feedback monitor level)

The speed measurement monitoring function is activated, when the measured EMF exceeds EMF

FbMonLev (30.15). See also SpeedFbMonLev (30.14).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

30.16 M1OvrSpeed (motor 1 overspeed)

The drive trips with F532 MotOverSpeed [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 15] if M1OvrSpeed (30.16) is exceeded. It is recommended to set M1OvrSpeed (30.16) at least 20 % higher than the maximum motor speed.

32767

Internally limited from:

0

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

rpm

20000

The overspeed fault for motor 1 is inactive, if M1OvrSpeed (30.16) is set to zero.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

307

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

308

Index

Signal / Parameter name

30.17 SpeedFbFltSel (speed feedback fault selector)

SpeedFbFltSel (30.17) determines the reaction to a speed feedback problem:

1 = Fault the drive trips according to SpeedFbFltMode (30.36) and sets F522

SpeedFb [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 5], default

2 = EMF/Fault

The speed feedback is switched to EMF, the drive stops according to E

StopRamp (22.11) and sets F522 SpeedFb [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 5]. In case speed actual is greater than base speed the drive trips according to

SpeedFbFltMode (30.36) and sets F522 SpeedFb [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 5].

3 = EMF/Alarm The speed feedback is switched to EMF and A125 SpeedFb [AlarmWord2

(9.07) bit 8] is set. In case speed actual is greater than base speed the drive trips according to SpeedFbFltMode (30.36) and sets F522 SpeedFb

[FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 5].

4 = Enc/Alarm This selection is only valid if 2 pulse encoders are connected. Depending on the setting of M1SpeeFbSel (50.03) the speed feedback is switched from pulse encoder 1 to pulse encoder 2 or vice versa in case of a problem and A125 SpeedFb [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 8] is set.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

Signal and parameter list

Type: C Volatile: N

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

CurRippleSel (30.18) determines the reaction when CurRippleLim (30.19) is reached:

1 = Fault

2 = Alarm the drive trips with F517 ArmCurRipple [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 0], default

A117 ArmCurRipple [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 0] is set

Note:

The current ripple function detects:

 a broken fuse, thyristor or current transformer (T51, T52)

 too high gain of the current controller

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

30.19 CurRippleLim (current ripple limit)

Threshold for CurRippleSel (30.18), in percent of M1NomCur (99.03). Typical values when a thyristor is missing:

 armature about 300 %

 high inductive loads (e.g. excitation) about 90 %

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

30.20 Unused

The action taken, when the mains voltage undershoots UNetMin2 (30.23):

0 = Immediately the drive trips immediately with F512 MainsLowVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit

1 = Delayed

11], default

A111 MainsLowVolt [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 10] is set as long as the

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

mains voltage recovers before PowrDownTime (30.24) is elapsed, otherwise F512 MainsLowVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 11] is generated

Type: C Volatile: N

30.22 UNetMin1 (mains voltage minimum 1)

First (upper) limit for mains undervoltage monitoring in percent of NomMainsVolt (99.10). If the mains voltage undershoots UNetMin1 (30.22) following actions take place:

 the firing angle is set to ArmAlphaMax (20.14),

 single firing pulses are applied in order to extinguish the current as fast as possible,

 the controllers are frozen,

 the speed ramp output is updated from the measured speed and

A111 MainsLowVolt [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 10] is set as long as the mains voltage recovers before PowrDownTime (30.24) is elapsed, otherwise F512 MainsLowVolt

[FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 11] is generated.

Note:

UNetMin2 (30.23) isn't monitored, unless the mains voltage drops below UNetMin1 (30.22) first.

Thus for a proper function of the mains undervoltage monitoring UNetMin1 (30.22) has to be larger than UNetMin2 (30.23).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

309

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

310

Index

Signal / Parameter name

30.23 UNetMin2 (mains voltage minimum 2)

Second (lower) limit for mains undervoltage monitoring in percent of NomMainsVolt (99.10). If the mains voltage undershoots UnetMin2 (30.23) following actions take place:

 if PwrLossTrip (30.21) = Immediately: o the drive trips immediately with F512 MainsLowVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 11]

 if PwrLossTrip (30.21) = Delayed: o field acknowledge signals are ignored, o the firing angle is set to ArmAlphaMax (20.14), o single firing pulses are applied in order to extinguish the current as fast as possible, o the controllers are frozen o the speed ramp output is updated from the measured speed and o

A111 MainsLowVolt [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 10] is set as long as the mains voltage recovers before PowrDownTime (30.24) is elapsed, otherwise F512

MainsLowVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 11] is generated.

Note:

UNetMin2 (30.23) isn't monitored, unless the mains voltage drops below UNetMin1 (30.22) first.

Thus for a proper function of the mains undervoltage monitoring UNetMin1 (30.22) has to be larger than UNetMin2 (30.23).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

30.24 PowrDownTime (power down time)

The mains voltage must recover (over both limits) within PowrDownTime (30.24). Otherwise F512

MainsLowVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 11] will be generated.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

30.25 Unused

30.26 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Overview local and communication loss:

Device Loss control

LocalLossCtrl (30.27)

DCS800

Control Panel

DW

DWL

R-type fieldbus ComLossCtrl (30.28)

DCSLink

Time out

fixed to 5 s

Related fault Related alarm

F546 LocalCmdLoss A130 LocalCmdLoss

-

-

FB TimeOut (30.35)

MailBoxCycle1 (94.13),

MailBoxCycle2 (94.19),

MailBoxCycle3 (94.25),

MailBoxCycle4 (94.31)

12P TimeOut (94.03)

FexTimeOut (94.07)

SDCS-COM-8

Ch0 ComLossCtrl (70.05) Ch0 TimeOut (70.04)

Ch2 ComLossCtrl (70.15) Ch2 TimeOut (70.14)

F528 FieldBusCom A128 FieldBusCom

F544 P2PandMFCom A112 P2PandMFCom

F535 12PulseCom

F516 M1FexCom

F519 M2FexCom

F543 COM8Com

-

-

A113 COM8Com

LocalLossCtrl (30.27) determines the reaction to a local loss (DCS800 Control Panel, DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light).

F546 LocalCmdLoss [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 13] is set with:

0 = RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero. Thus the drive stops according to E StopRamp (22.04). When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

In case TorqSelMod (26.03) = Auto and local loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control, default.

1 = TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero. Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit. When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

In case TorqSelMod (26.03) = Auto and local loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control.

2 = CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

3 = DynBraking dynamic braking

A130 LocalCmdLoss [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 13] is set with:

4 = LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed before the warning

5 = FixedSpeed1 the drive continuous to run with FixedSpeed1 (23.02)

Note:

The time out for LocalLossCtrl (30.27) is fixed to 10 s.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

311

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

312

Index

Signal / Parameter name

ComLossCtrl (30.28) determines the reaction to a communication control loss (fieldbusses - Rtype, DCSLink - drive-to-drive respectively master-follower) see also CommandSel (10.01).

Depending on the type of communication loss either F528 FieldBusCom [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit

11] or F544 P2PandMFCom [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 11] is set with:

0 = RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero. Thus the drive stops according to E StopRamp (22.04). When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

In case TorqSelMod (26.03) = Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control, default.

1 = TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero. Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit. When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

In case TorqSelMod (26.03) = Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control.

2 = CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

3 = DynBraking dynamic braking

Depending on the type of communication loss either A128 FieldBusCom [AlarmWord2 (9.02) bit

11] or A112 P2PandMFCom [AlarmWord1 (9.01) bit 11] is set with:

4 = LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed before the warning

5 = FixedSpeed1 the drive continuous to run with FixedSpeed1 (23.02)

Note:

The time out for ComLossCtrl (30.28) is set by:

FB TimeOut (30.35) for all R-type fieldbusses and

MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) to MailBoxCycle4 (94.31) for the DCSLink (drive-to-drive respectively master-follower communication).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

30.29 AI Mon4mA (analog input 4 mA fault selector)

AI Mon4mA (30.29) determines the reaction to an undershoot of one of the analog inputs under 4 mA / 2 V - if it is configured to this mode:

1 = Fault the drive stops according to FaultStopMode (30.30) and trips with F551

AIRange [FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 2], default

2 = LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed and sets A127 AIRange

[AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 10]

3 = FixedSpeed1 the drive continues to run with FixedSpeed1 (23.02) and sets A127

AIRange [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 10]

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

30.30 FaultStopMode (fault stop mode)

FaultStopMode (30.30) determines the reaction to a fault of trip level 4:

0 = RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero. Thus the drive stops according to E StopRamp (22.04). When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

In case TorqSelMod (26.03) = Auto and a trip of level 4 is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control, default.

1 = TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero. Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit. When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

In case TorqSelMod (26.03) = Auto and a trip of level 4 is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control.

2 = CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

3 = DynBraking dynamic braking

Note:

FaultStopMode (30.30) doesn’t apply to communication faults.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

30.31 ExtFaultSel (external fault selector)

The drive trips with F526 ExternalDI [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 9] if a binary input for an external fault is selected and 1:

0 = NotUsed no reaction, default

1 = DI1

2 = DI2

3 = DI3

4 = DI4

5 = DI5

6 = DI6

7 = DI7

8 = DI8

1 = fault, 0 = no fault

1 = fault, 0 = no fault

1 = fault, 0 = no fault

1 = fault, 0 = no fault

1 = fault, 0 = no fault

1 = fault, 0 = no fault

1 = fault, 0 = no fault

1 = fault, 0 = no fault

9 = DI9

10 = DI10

1 = fault, 0 = no fault, Only available with digital extension board

1 = fault, 0 = no fault, Only available with digital extension board

11 = DI11 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, Only available with digital extension board

12 = MCW Bit11 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11

13 = MCW Bit12 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12

14 = MCW Bit13 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13

15 = MCW Bit14 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14

16 = MCW Bit15 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15

17 = ACW Bit12 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12

18 = ACW Bit13 1 = fault, 0 = no fault; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13

19 = ACW Bit14 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14

20 = ACW Bit15 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

313

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

314

Index

Signal / Parameter name

30.32 ExtAlarmSel (external alarm selector)

The drive sets A126 ExternalDI [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 9] if a binary input for an external alarm is selected and 1:

0 = NotUsed

1 = DI1

2 = DI2

3 = DI3

4 = DI4

5 = DI5

6 = DI6

7 = DI7 no reaction, default

1 = fault, 0 = no fault

1 = fault, 0 = no fault

1 = fault, 0 = no fault

1 = fault, 0 = no fault

1 = fault, 0 = no fault

1 = fault, 0 = no fault

1 = fault, 0 = no fault

8 = DI8

9 = DI9

10 = DI10

11 = DI11

1 = fault, 0 = no fault

1 = fault, 0 = no fault. Only available with digital extension board

1 = fault, 0 = no fault. Only available with digital extension board

1 = fault, 0 = no fault. Only available with digital extension board

12 = MCW Bit11 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11

13 = MCW Bit12 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12

14 = MCW Bit13 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13

15 = MCW Bit14 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14

16 = MCW Bit15 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15

17 = ACW Bit12 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12

18 = ACW Bit13 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13

19 = ACW Bit14 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14

20 = ACW Bit15 1 = fault, 0 = no fault, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

30.33 ExtFaultOnSel (external fault on selector)

ExtFaultOnSel (30.33) determines the reaction to an external fault:

0 = Fault external fault is always valid independent from drive state, default

1 = Fault&RdyRun external fault is only valid when drive state is RdyRun [MainStatWord

(8.01) bit 1] for at least 6 s

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

30.34 ExtAlarmOnSel (external alarm on selector)

ExtAlarmOnSel (30.34) determines the reaction to an external alarm:

0 = Alarm external alarm is always valid independent from drive state, default

1 = Alarm&RdyRun external alarm is only valid when drive state is RdyRun [MainStatWord

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

(8.01) bit 1] for at least 6 s

Type: C Volatile: N

30.35 FB TimeOut (fieldbus time out)

Time delay before a communication break with a fieldbus is declared. Depending on the setting of

ComLossCtrl (30.28) either F528 FieldBusCom [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 11] or A128 FieldBusCom

[AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 11] is set.

The communication fault and alarm are inactive, if FB TimeOut (30.35) is set to 0 ms.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

30.36 SpeedFbFltMode (speed feedback fault mode)

SpeedFbFltMode (30.36) determines the reaction to a fault of trip level 3:

0 = CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

1 = DynBraking dynamic braking

Note:

SpeedFbFltMode (30.36) doesn’t apply to communication faults.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Motor 1 temperature

Thermal time constant for motor 1 with fan/forced cooling. The time within the temperature rises to

63% of its nominal value.

The motor thermal model is blocked, if M1ModelTime (31.01) is set to zero.

The value of Mot1TempCalc (1.20) is saved at power down of the drives electronics. With the very first energizing of the drives electronics the motor's ambient temperature is set to 30°C.

WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it is not properly cooled e.g. due to dust and dirt.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

31.02 M1ModelTime2 (motor 1 model time 2 constant)

Thermal time constant for motor 1 with fan/forced cooling if motor fan is switched off.

Temp

(31.01)

(31.02)

Torque fan on fan off

Time

Attention:

For motors without fan set M1ModelTime (31.01) = M1ModelTime2 (31.02).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

31.03 M1AlarmLimLoad (motor 1 alarm limit load)

The drive sets A107 M1OverLoad [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 6] if M1AlarmLimLoad (31.03) - in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - is exceeded. Output value for motor 1 thermal model is

Mot1TempCalc (1.20).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

The drive trips with F507 M1OverLoad [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 6] if M1FaultLimLoad (31.04) - in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - is exceeded. Output value for motor 1 thermal model is

Mot1TempCalc (1.20).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

315

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

316

Index

Signal / Parameter name

31.05 M1TempSel (motor 1 temperature selector)

M1TempSel (31.05) selects motor 1 measured temperature input. The result can be seen in

Mot1TemopMeas (1.22).

Connection possibilities for PT100:

 max. 3 PT100 for motor 1 and max. 3 PT100 for motor 2 or

 up to 6 PT100 for motor 1 only.

Connection possibilities PTC:

 max. 1 PTC for motor 1 and max. 1 PTC for motor 2 or

 up to 2 PTC for motor 1 only:

0 = NotUsed motor 1 temperature measurement is blocked, default

1 = 1PT100 AI2

2 = 2PT100 AI2 one PT100 connected to AI2 on SDCS-IOB-3 two PT100 connected to AI2 on SDCS-IOB-3

3 = 3PT100 AI2 three PT100 connected to AI2 on SDCS-IOB-3

4 = 4PT100 AI2/3 four PT100, 3 connected to AI2 and 1 connected to AI3 on SDCS-IOB-3

5 = 5PT100 AI2/3 five PT100, 3 connected to AI2 and 2 connected to AI3 on SDCS-IOB-3

6 = 6PT100 AI2/3 six PT100, 3 connected to AI2 and 3 connected to AI3 on SDCS-IOB-3

7 = 1PT100 AI7

8 = 2PT100 AI7 one PT100 connected to AI7 on second RAIO two PT100 connected to AI7 on second RAIO

9 = 3PT100 AI7 three PT100 connected to AI7 on second RAIO

10 = 4PT100 AI7/8 four PT100, 3 connected to AI7 and 1 connected to AI8 on second RAIO

11 = 5PT100 AI7/8 five PT100, 3 connected to AI7 and 2 connected to AI8 on second RAIO

12 = 6PT100 AI7/8 six PT100, 3 connected to AI7 and 3 connected to AI8 on second RAIO

13 = 1PTC AI2 one PTC connected to AI2 on SDCS-IOB-3

14 = 2PTC AI2/3 two PTC, 1 connected to AI2 and 1 connected to AI3 on SDCS-IOB-3

15 = 1PTC AI2/Con one PTC connected to AI2 on SDCS-CON-4

For more information see section

Motor protection

.

Note:

AI7 and AI8 have to be activated by means of AIO ExtModule (98.06).

Note:

In case only one PT100 is connected to an AI of the SDCS-IOB-3 the input range must be configured by jumpers to a gain of 10. Jumper settings for input range and constant current source see DCS800 Hardware Manual.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

The drive sets A106 M1OverTemp [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 5] if M1AlarmLimTemp (31.06) is exceeded. Output value for motor 1 measured temperature is Mot1TempMeas (1.22).

Note:

The unit depends on M1TempSel (31.05).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C / 1

/ 1

Type: SI Volatile: N

The drive trips with F506 M1OverTemp [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 5] if M1FaultLimTemp (31.07) is exceeded. Output value for motor 1 measured temperature is Mot1TempMeas (1.22).

Note:

The unit depends on M1TempSel (31.05).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C / 1

/ 1

Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

317

Index

Signal / Parameter name

31.08 M1KlixonSel (motor 1 klixon selector)

The drive trips with F506 M1OverTemp [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 5] if a digital input selected and the klixon is open:

0 = NotUsed no reaction, default

1 = DI1 0 = fault, 1 = no fault

2 = DI2

3 = DI3

0 = fault, 1 = no fault

0 = fault, 1 = no fault

4 = DI4

5 = DI5

6 = DI6

7 = DI7

0 = fault, 1 = no fault

0 = fault, 1 = no fault

0 = fault, 1 = no fault

0 = fault, 1 = no fault

8 = DI8

9 = DI9

10 = DI10

11 = DI11

0 = fault, 1 = no fault

0 = fault, 1 = no fault. Only available with digital extension board

0 = fault, 1 = no fault. Only available with digital extension board

0 = fault, 1 = no fault. Only available with digital extension board

Note:

It is possible to connect several klixons in series.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

DCS800 Control Panel display

Signal and parameter visualization on the DCS800 Control Panel:

D isp P a ram 1 S el (34 .01 )

D isp P a ram 2 S el (34 .08 )

D isp P a ram 3 S el (34 .15 )

LOC

15rpm

15.0

3.7

17.3

rpm

V

A

DIR MENU

Setting a display parameter to 0 results in no signal or parameter displayed.

Setting a display parameter from 101 to 9999 displays the belonging signal or parameter. If a signal or parameter does not exist, the display shows “n.a.”.

34.01 DispParam1Sel (select signal / parameter to be displayed in the DCS800 Control Panel row

1)

Index pointer to the source of the DCS800 Control Panel first display row [e.g. 101 equals

MotSpeedFilt (1.01)].

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

34.02 Unused

34.03 Unused

34.04 Unused

34.05 Unused

34.06 Unused

34.07 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

318

Index

Signal / Parameter name

34.08 DispParam2Sel (select signal / parameter to be displayed in the DCS800 Control Panel row

2)

Index pointer to the source of the DCS800 Control Panel second display row [e.g. 114 equals

ArmVoltAct (1.14)].

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

34.09 Unused

34.10 Unused

34.11 Unused

34.12 Unused

34.13 Unused

34.14 Unused

34.15 DispParam3Sel (select signal / parameter to be displayed in the DCS800 Control Panel l row

3)

ConvCurAct (1.16) .

34.16 Unused

34.17 Unused

34.18 Unused

34.19 Unused

34.20 Unused

34.21 Unused

PID control

Overview of the PID controller:

Reference input 1

PID Ref1Max

PID Ref1

PID Ref1Min

40.09

40.13

40.08

W

Actual input 1

PID Act1 40.06

X1

Reference input 2

PID Ref2Max

PID Ref2

PID Ref2Min

Actual input 2

PID Act2

40.11

40.14

40.10

40.07

W

X2

e1 e

PID controller

e2

40.12

PID Mux

PID1

PID2

DI1…DI11

MCW Bit11…Bit15

ACW Bit12…Bit15

40.01

40.02

40.03

40.04

KpPID

TiPID

TdPID

TdFiltPID

ACW2 B15

40.19

PID ResetIndex

40.20

PID ResetBitNo

PID OutMax

40.17

40.16

Reset & Hold

PID OutMin

PID Out

3.09

40.18

PID OutDest

DCS800 PID controller FW rev g.ppt

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

319

Index

Signal / Parameter name

40.01 KpPID ( p-part PID controller)

Proportional gain of the PID controller.

Example:

The controller generates 15 % output with KpPID (40.01) = 3, if the input is 5 %.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

40.02 TiPID (i-part PID controller)

Integral time of the PID controller. TiPID (40.02) defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part.

Example:

The controller generates 15 % output with KpPID (40.01) = 3, if the input is 5 %. On that condition and with TiPID (40.02) = 300 ms follows:

 the controller generates 30 % output, if the input is constant, after 300 ms are elapsed (15

% from proportional part and 15 % from integral part).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

40.03 TdPID (d-part PID controller)

PID controller derivation time. TdPID (40.03) defines the time within the PID controller derives the error value. The PID controller works as PI controller, if TdPID (40.03) is set to zero.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

40.04 TdFiltPID (filter time for d-part PID controller)

Derivation filter time.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

40.05 Unused

40.06 PID Act1 (PID controller actual input value 1 index)

Index pointer to the source of the PID controller actual input value 1. The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate actual input value 1, xx = group and yy = index [e.g. 101 equals MotSpeedFilt (1.01)].

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

40.07 PID Act2 (PID controller actual input value 2 index)

Index pointer to the source of the PID controller actual input value 2. The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate actual input value 2, xx = group and yy = index [e.g. 101 equals MotSpeedFilt (1.01)].

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

40.08 PID Ref1Min (PID controller minimum limit reference input value 1)

Minimum limit of the PID controller reference input value 1 in percent of the source of PID Ref1

(40.13).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

40.09 PID Ref1Max (PID controller maximum limit reference input value 1)

Maximum limit of the PID controller reference input value 1 in percent of the source of PID Ref1

(40.13).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

40.10 PID Ref2Min (PID controller minimum limit reference input value 2)

Minimum limit of the PID controller reference input value 2 in percent of the source of PID Ref2

(40.14).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

40.11 PID Ref2Max (PID controller maximum limit reference input value 2)

Maximum limit of the PID controller reference input value 2 in percent of the source of PID Ref2

(40.14).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

320

Index

Signal / Parameter name

40.12 PID Mux (PID controller reference input selector/multiplexer)

PID controller reference input selector:

0 = PID1 reference input 1 is selected, default

1 = PID2

2 = DI1

3 = DI2

4 = DI3

5 = DI4

6 = DI5

7 = DI6

8 = DI7

9 = DI8

10 = DI9

11= DI10 reference input 2 is selected

1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected

1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected

1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected

1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected

1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected

1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected

1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected

1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected

1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected; only available with digital extension board

1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected; only available with digital extension board

12 = DI11 1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected; only available with digital extension board

13 = MCW Bit11 1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected;

MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11

14 = MCW Bit12 1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected;

MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12

15 = MCW Bit13 1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected;

MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13

16 = MCW Bit14 1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected;

MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14

17 = MCW Bit15 1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected;

MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15

18 = ACW Bit12 1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected;

AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12

19 = ACW Bit13 1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected;

AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13

20 = ACW Bit14 1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected;

AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14

21 = ACW Bit15 1= reference input 2 is selected; 0 = reference input 1 is selected;

AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

40.13 PID Ref1 (PID controller reference input value 1 index)

Index pointer to the source of the PID controller reference input value 1. The format is -xxyy, with:

- = negate reference input value 1, xx = group and yy = index [e.g. 201 equals SpeedRef2 (2.01)].

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

40.14 PID Ref2 (PID controller reference input value 2 index)

Index pointer to the source of the PID controller reference input value 2. The format is -xxyy, with:

- = negate reference input value 2, xx = group and yy = index [e.g. 201 equals SpeedRef2 (2.01)].

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

40.15 Unused

40.16 PID OutMin (PID controller minimum limit output value)

Minimum limit of the PID controller output value in percent of the used PID controller input.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

40.17 PID OutMax (PID controller maximum limit output value)

Maximum limit of the PID controller output value in percent of the used PID controller input.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

40.18 PID OutDest (PID controller output value index)

Index pointer to the sink of the PID controller output value. The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate output value, xx = group and yy = index [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

40.19 PID ResetIndex (PID controller reset index)

The PID controller reset is controlled by a selectable bit - see PID ResetBitNo (40.20) - of the source (signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert reset signal, xx = group and yy = index.

Examples:

 If PID ResetIndex (40.19) = 701 (main control word) and PID ResetBitNo (40.20) = 12 then the PID controller reset is active when bit 12 is high.

 If PID ResetIndex (40.19) = -701 (main control word) and PID ResetBitNo (40.20) = 12 then the PID controller reset is active when bit 12 is low.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

40.20 PID ResetBitNo (PID controller reset bit number)

Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with PID ResetIndex (40.19).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

40.21 PID Reserved (PID reserved)

reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Brake control

Brake Control is activated by means of M1BrakeCtrl (42.01) and controls a mechanical brake automatically with the Run [MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 3] command. The internal logic is designed to meet the requirements of holding brakes, e.g. carriage drives or coilers, as well as the requirements for hanging load, e.g. cranes.

Overview brake control

321

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

322

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Following functions are included:

Mechanical open (lift), close (apply) and zero speed delays

Run

[UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3]

M1BrakeLiftDly (42.11)

M1ZeroSpeedDly (42.04)

open

Brake logic close

Brake open (lift) command

[ AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8]

Torque proving

MotCur (1.06)

Adaptive Program, application program

or overriding control

Run

[UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3

M1TorqProvTime (42.10)

Brake logic

TorqProvOK

[ AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03) bit 11]

BalRef (24.11) or

TorqSel (26.01)

BalSpeedCtrl

[

AuxCtrlWord (7.02)

bit 8] or TorqRefA (25.01)

Adjustable start torque

F556 TorqProv

[

FaultWord4 (9.04)

bit 7]

Brake faults, alarms and E-stop

BrakeFaultFunc (42.06)

M1BrakeAckSel (42.02)

Brake open (lift) command

[AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8]

M1BrakeFltTime (42.05)

M1BrakeLongTime (42.12)

BrakeEStopMode (42.09)

ack. open close

E-stop

Brake logic

A122 MechBrake

[AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 5]

F552 MechBrake

[FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 3]

A166 BrakeLongFalling

[AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 15]

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

All speed references have to be routed via the speed ramp.

With brake control On [M1BrakeCtrl (42.01)] and RdyRef [MainStatWord (8.01) bit 2] = 1 the torque proving is done, if selected. Afterwards the torque reference is set to StrtTorqRef (42.08) and the brake open (lift) command is given.

The brake open (lift) command BrakeCmd [AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8] is send delayed by

M1BrakeLiftDly (42.11) to the brake. Then M1BrakeLiftDly (42.11) and M1BrakeRefDly (42.03) are started at the same time. During M1BrakeRefDly (42.03) the speed ramp is clamped to zero and the torque reference equals StrtTorqRef (42.08). After M1BrakeRefDly (42.03) is elapsed and the brake acknowledge - if selected with M1BrakeAckSel (42.02) - is active, clamp of speed reference is removed. This function compensates for the mechanical open (lift) delay of the brake.

With Run [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3] = 0 and motor speed below M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03),

M1ZeroSpeedDly (42.04) starts to compensate for the time the drive needs to decelerate from

M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) to actual speed = 0. Until M1ZeroSpeedDly (42.04) is elapsed the brake is kept open (lifted).

After M1ZeroSpeedDly (42.04) is elapsed, the brake open (lift) command BrakeCmd

[AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8] is removed and the brake close (apply) delay M1BrakeStopDelay

(42.13) is started. During M1BrakeStopDelay (42.13) the motor control remains active with speed reference set to zero and the speed controller stays alive. This function compensates for the mechanical close (apply) delay of the brake.

The brake can be forced by ForceBrake [AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03) bit 12]

ForceBrake = 1 If ForceBrake is set the brake remains closed (applied).

ForceBrake = 0 state RdyOn or RdyRef [MainStatWord (8.01) bit 0 and 1], the brake logic will be started up to the point of the brake open (lift) command.

A drive in state Running [MainStatWord (8.01) bit 2] will be stopped by ramp, the brake will be closed (applied), but the drive will remain in state Running.

The brake is controlled by the internal brake logic in group 42 (Brake control).

42.01 M1BrakeCtrl (motor 1 brake control)

Releases the control of motor 1 brake:

0 = NotUsed

1 = On

2 = BrakeClose brake logic is blocked, default brake logic is released according to it’s parameter settings test mode, the brake logic will work, but the brake is always closed

(applied)

3 = BrakeOpen test mode, the brake logic will work, but the brake is always opened

(lifted)

Attention: A closed (applied) brake will open (lift) immediately! Do not use this mode with e.g. an unsaved crane drive!

The brake open (lift) command BrakeCmd is readable in AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8 and can be connected to the digital output controlling the brake.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

323

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

324

Index

Signal / Parameter name

42.02 M1BrakeAckSel (motor 1 brake acknowledge selector)

The drive sets either A122 MechBrake [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 5], F552 MechBrake [FaultWord4

(9.04) bit 3] or A116 BrakeLongFalling [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 15] depending on BrakeFaultFunc

(42.06 ) if a digital input is selected and the brake acknowledge fails:

0 = NotUsed

1 = DI1

2 = DI2

3 = DI3 brake acknowledge is blocked, default

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted)

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted)

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted)

4 = DI4

5 = DI5

6 = DI6

7 = DI7

8 = DI8

9 = DI9

10 = DI10

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted)

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted)

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted)

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted)

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted)

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), only available with digital extension board

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), only available with digital extension board

11 = DI11

12 = MCW Bit11

13 = MCW Bit12

14 = MCW Bit13

15 = MCW Bit14

16 = MCW Bit15

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), only available with digital extension board

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 11

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 12

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 13

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 14

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 15

17 = ACW Bit12

18 = ACW Bit13

19 = ACW Bit14

20 = ACW Bit15

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 12

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 13

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 14

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 15

Type: C Volatile: N

42.03 M1BrakeRefDly (motor 1 brake speed reference delay)

Speed reference delay. This function compensates for the mechanical open (lift) delay of the brake. During the start - Run [MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 3] = 1 - of the drive the speed reference is clamped (ramp output is set to zero) and the speed controller output is set to start torque [see

M1StrtTorqRefSel (42.07)] until M1BrakeRefDly (42.03) is elapsed.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

This function compensates for the time the drive needs to decelerate from M1ZeroSpeedLim

(20.03) to actual speed = 0. Until M1ZeroSpeedDly (42.04) is elapsed the brake is kept open

(lifted).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

42.05 M1BrakeFltTime (motor 1 brake fault time)

Brake open (lift) acknowledge monitor. During this time the brake open (lift) command BrakeCmd

[AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8] and the brake acknowledge signal [M1BrakeAckSel (42.02)] can be different without causing A122 MechBrake [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 5] or F552 MechBrake

[FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 3] depending on BrakeFaultFunc (42.06).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Selected motor, BrakeFaultFunc (42.06) determines the reaction to an invalid brake acknowledge:

0 = Alarm the drive sets A122 MechBrake [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 5] as reaction to an

1 = Fault invalid brake open (lift) or brake close (apply) acknowledge the drive trips with F552 MechBrake [FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 3] as reaction to an invalid brake open (lift) or brake close (apply) acknowledge, default

3 = Crane The drive trips with F552 MechBrake [FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 3] as reaction to an invalid brake open (lift) acknowledge. A116 BrakeLongFalling [AlarmWord1

(9.06) bit 15] is set as reaction to an invalid brake close (apply) acknowledge.

In case of A116 BrakeLongFalling [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 15] the speed reference is set to zero and the speed controller is kept active until the drive is stopped by either On = 0 [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0] or Off2N = 0 [UsedMCW

(7.04) bit 1, Emergency Off / Coast Stop].

Note:

If the brake open (lift) command BrakeCmd [AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8] and the brake acknowledge signal [M1BrakeAckSel (42.02)] are different for a longer time than set in M1BrakeFltTime (42.05) either A122 MechBrake [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 5] or F552 MechBrake [FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 3] is set depending on BrakeFaultFunc (42.06).

Note:

If the brake close (apply) command BrakeCmd [AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8] and the brake acknowledge signal [M1BrakeAckSel (42.02)] are different for a longer time than set in

M1BrakeLongTime (42.12) either A122 MechBrake [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 5], F552 MechBrake

[FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 3] or A116 BrakeLongFalling [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 15] is set depending on BrakeFaultFunc (42.06).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

42.07 M1StrtTorqRefSel (motor 1 start torque reference selector)

Motor 1, start torque selector:

0 = NotUsed start torque function is blocked and the start torque reference is fixed zero, default

1 = Memory Torque memory released. The minimum value equals the absolute value of

StrtTorqRef (42.08). The torque memory can be reset by means of

AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03) bit 13.

3 = AI1

4 = AI2

5 = AI3 analog input AI1 analog input AI2 analog input AI3

6 = AI4

7 = AI5 analog input AI4 analog input AI5

8 = AI6 analog input AI6

Note:

Torque memory is the presetting of the torque when starting with e.g. suspended load. The preset torque equals the actual torque stored when the brake open (lift) command is removed, if the stored torque is greater than the value in StrtTorqRef (42.08). Otherwise the value in StrtTorqRef

(42.08) is taken.

After energizing the drive the value of StrtTorqRef (42.08) is set as torque memory.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

42.08 StrtTorqRef (start torque reference)

Selected motor, start torque reference in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

325

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

326

Index

Signal / Parameter name

42.09 BrakeEStopMode (emergency stop mode brake)

Selected motor, BrakeEStopMode (42.09) determines the reaction when UsedMCW (7.04) bit 2

Off3N (respectively E-stop) is set low:

0 = Disable the brake is closed (applied) according to the standard brake control, default

1 = Enable the brake is closed (applied) immediately together with the E-stop command

Note:

If BrakeEStopMode (42.09) = Enable the E StopRamp (22.04) should be shorter than the time needed to stop the motor with the mechanical brake applied only.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

42.10 M1TorqProvTime (motor 1 torque proving time)

Brake torque proving acknowledge. The drive trips with F556 TorqProv [FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 7] if the Run [MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 3] command is set and the acknowledge TorqProvOK

[AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03) bit 11] is not set before M1TorqProvTime (42.10) is elapsed.

The torque proving is inactive, if M1TorqProvTime (42.10) is set to 0.

Note:

The acknowledge signal TorqProvOK has to be provided by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control and is set by means of a rising edge (0

 1).

The torque reference might be set by means of BalRef (24.11) or TorqSel (26.01) and

BalSpeedCtrl [AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 8] or TorqRefA (25.01). The reaction of the drive might be taken from MotCur (1.06).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

42.11 M1BrakeLiftDly (motor 1 brake lift delay)

Brake open (lift) delay. This function delays the brake open (lift) command BrakeCmd

[AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8] until M1BrakeLiftDly (42.11) is elapsed.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

Brake close (apply) acknowledge monitor. During this time the brake close (apply) command

BrakeCmd [AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8] and the brake acknowledge signal [M1BrakeAckSel (42.02)] can be different without causing either A122 MechBrake [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 5], F552

MechBrake [FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 3] or A116 BrakeLongFalling [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 15] depending on BrakeFaultFunc (42.06).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

42.13 M1BrakeStopDly (motor 1 brake stop delay)

Brake close (apply) delay. This function starts after the brake acknowledge - if selected with

M1BrakeAckSel (42.02) - is zero and compensates for the mechanical close (apply) delay of the brake. During the stop - Run [MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 3] = 0 - of the drive the speed reference is clamped (ramp output is set to zero) and the speed controller stays active until M1BrakeStopDly

(42.13) is elapsed.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

327

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Current control

43.01 OperModeSel (operation mode selector)

Converter mode selection:

0 = ArmConv

1 = FieldConv

6 pulse single armature converter, default field exciter mode; Attention: The digital input for the external overvoltage protection is assigned by means of OvrVoltProt (10.13).

2 = 12PParMaster 12-pulse parallel master

3 = 12PParSlave 12-pulse parallel slave

This parameter is write protected while Run [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3] = 1.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

43.02 CurSel (current reference selector)

CurSel (43.02) selector:

0 = CurRef311 CurRef (3.11) calculated from torque reference as armature current reference, default

1 = CurRefExt CurRefExt (43.03) as armature current reference

2 = AI1 analog input AI1 as armature current reference

3 = AI2

4 = AI3 analog input AI2 as armature current reference analog input AI3 as armature current reference

5 = AI4

6 = AI5 analog input AI4 as armature current reference analog input AI5 as armature current reference

7 = AI6 analog input AI6 as armature current reference

8 = FexCurRef FldCurRefM1 (3.30) from armature converter via DCSLink as field current reference, only available if OperModeSel (43.01) = FieldConv

9 = FluxRefEMF FluxRefEMF (3.27) from armature converter as field current reference, only if available OperModeSel (43.01) = FieldConv

10 = TorqRef213 TorqRefUsed (2.13) is directly used as armature current reference (torque

= current); Note: The flux adaption in field weakening is inactive (means no flux dependent armature current reference)

11 = FexCur+Ext FldCurRefM1 (3.30) from armature converter via DCSLink plus CurRefExt

(43.03) as field current reference, only available if OperModeSel (43.01) =

12 = CurZero

Note:

FieldConv forces single firing pulses and sets CurRefUsed (3.11) to zero

In case OperModeSel (43.01) is 12PParSlave CurSel (43.02) is overwritten by the current reference from the 12-pulse parallel master.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

43.03 CurRefExt (external current reference)

External current reference in percent of M1NomCur (99.03).

Note:

CurRefExt (43.03) is only valid, if CurSel (43.02) = CurRefExt.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

43.04 CurRefSlope (current reference slope)

CurRefSlope (43.04) in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) per 1 ms. The di/dt limitation is located at the input of the current controller.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 %/ms Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

328

Index

Signal / Parameter name

43.05 CtrlModeSel (control mode selector)

Current controller mode selection:

0 = Standard PI-controller with RL compensation of EMF based on current actual plus feed forward, default

1 = FeedFwdRef

2 = NoFeedFwd

PI-controller with RL compensation of EMF based on current reference plus feed forward

PI-controller without RL compensation of EMF. No feed forward takes place, should not be used for motoric applications.

3 = PowerSupply1 for more information see DCS800 Power Supply Control Manual

(3ADW000375)

4 = PowerSupply2 for more information see DCS800 Power Supply Control Manual

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

(3ADW000375)

Type: C Volatile: N

43.06 M1KpArmCur (motor 1 p-part armature current controller)

Proportional gain of the current controller.

Example:

The controller generates 15 % of motor nominal current [M1NomCur (99.03)] with M1KpArmCur

(43.06) = 3, if the current error is 5 % of M1NomCur (99.03).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

43.07 M1TiArmCur (motor 1 i-part armature current controller)

Integral time of the current controller. M1TiArmCur (43.07) defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part.

Example:

The controller generates 15 % of motor nominal current [M1NomCur (99.03)] with M1KpArmCur

(43.06) = 3, if the current error is 5 % of M1NomCur (99.03). On that condition and with

M1TiArmCur (43.07) = 50 ms follows:

 the controller generates 30 % of motor nominal current, if the current error is constant, after 50 ms are elapsed (15 % from proportional part and 15 % from integral part).

Setting M1TiArmCur (43.07) to 0 ms disables the integral part of the current controller and resets its integrator.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

43.08 M1DiscontCurLim (motor 1 discontinuous current limit)

Threshold continuous / discontinuous current in percent of M1NomCur (99.03). The actual continuous / discontinuous current state can be read from CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 12.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

43.09 M1ArmL (motor 1 armature inductance)

Inductance of the armature circuit in mH. Used for the EMF compensation:

EMF

U

A

R

A

*

I

A

L

A

*

dI

A dt

Attention:

Do not change the default values of M1ArmL (43.09) and M1ArmR (43.10)! Changing them will falsify the results of the autotuning.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 mH Type: I Volatile: N

43.10 M1ArmR (motor 1 armature resistance)

Resistance of the armature circuit in m

. Used for the EMF compensation:

EMF

U

A

R

A

*

I

A

L

A

*

dI

A dt

Attention:

Do not change the default values of M1ArmL (43.09) and M1ArmR (43.10)! Changing them will falsify the results of the autotuning.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 m

Type:

I

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

43.11 PropFbSel (p-part current feedback selection)

PropFbSel (43.11) chooses the armature current feedback type for the p-part of the armature current controller:

0 = PeakCur

1 = AverageCur

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

peak current measurement is used, default average current measurement is used

Type: C Volatile: N

43.12 Uk (relative short circuit impedance)

For more information contact Your ABB representative.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

43.13 FiringLimMode (firing limit mode)

FiringLimMode (43.13) selects the strategy for ArmAlphaMax (20.14):

0 = Fix the firing angle limit is defined by ArmAlphaMax (20.14)

1 = FixSingle The firing angle limit is defined by ArmAlphaMax (20.14). When

ArmAlphaMax (20.14) is reached single firing pulses are fired, default

2 = Calculated the firing limit is reduced from 165° to ArmAlphaMax (20.14) depending on the actual motor current and M1DiscontCurLim (43.08)

3 = CalcSingle function same as in Calculated, but single pulses are fired when the limit is reached degrees

( )

= 165°

ArmAlphaMax (20.14)

M1DiscontCurLim

(43.08)

actual motor current

Note:

Single firing pulses force discontinuous current automatically to zero.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

329

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

330

Index

Signal / Parameter name

43.14 RevDly (reversal delay)

RevDly (43.14) defines the delay time in ms for the bridge reversal after zero current has been detected - see CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 13.

I ref

CtrlRefUsed (3.12)

changes polarity

I act

Zero current detection

CurCtrlStat (6.03)

bit 13

CtrlStatMas (6.09)

RevDly

bit 12 is set

(43.14)

t

ZeroCurTimeOut

(97.19)

RevDly_a.dsf

The reversal delay starts when zero current has been detected - see CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 13 - after a command to change current direction - see CurRefUsed (3.12) - has been given. After a command to change the current direction the opposite current has to be reached before

ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) has been elapsed otherwise the drive trips with F557 ReversalTime

[FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 8].

RevDly (43.14) must have the same setting for 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave with one exception only:

 If there is no current measurement in the 12-pulse serial slave, set RevDly (43.14) in the

12-pulse serial slave to minimum (0 ms). Thus the 12-pulse serial slave uses the reversal command of the 12-pulse master for its own bridge changeover - see CtrlStatMas (6.09) bit 12. No additional reversal delay is added, since the master delays bit 12 according to its own RevDly (43.14).

Note:

12P RevTimeOut (47.05) must be longer than ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) and

ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) must be longer than RevDly (43.14).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

43.15 Unused

43.16 RevMode (reversal mode)

RevMode (43.16) defines the behavior of the speed ramp and speed controller during bridge and field reversal (torque reversal):

0 = Soft the speed ramp and speed controller are frozen during reversal --> bumpless reversal

1 = Hard the speed ramp and speed controller are released during reversal --> the drive follows the ramp, default

Note:

RevMode (43.16) is automatically set to Hard when RevDly (43.14) is equal or less than 25 ms.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Speed depending current limit:

ArmCurLimSpd1 (43.18)

ArmCurLimSpd2 (43.19)

ArmCurLimSpd3 (43.20)

ArmCurLimSpd4 (43.21)

ArmCurLimSpd5 (43.22)

I

0

MaxCurLimSpeed

(43.17) n max n n max

43.17 MaxCurLimSpeed (speed limit for maximum armature current)

Minimum speed level where the armature current reduction begins.

Internally limited from:

Int. Scaling: (2.29)

0

rpm to

Type:

( 2 .

29 ) *

I

32767

rpm

20000

Volatile: N

43.18 ArmCurLimSpeed1 (armature current at speed limit 1)

Armature current limit - in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - at MaxCurLimSpeed (43.17). Should be set to the maximum absolute value of M1CurLimBrdg1 (20.12) and M1CurLimBrdg2 (20.13).

Note:

The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits, other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

43.19 ArmCurLimSpeed2 (armature current at speed limit 2)

Armature current limit - in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - at speed:

( 43 .

17 )

1

4

*

n

max

( 43 .

17 )

 with: n max

= Max [|(20.01)|, |(20.02)|]

Note:

The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits, other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

43.20 ArmCurLimSpeed3 (armature current at speed limit 3)

Armature current limit - in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - at speed:

( 43 .

17 )

1

2

*

n

max

( 43 .

17 )

 with: n max

= Max [|(20.01)|, |(20.02)|]

Note:

The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits, other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

331

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

332

Index

Signal / Parameter name

43.21 ArmCurLimSpeed4 (armature current at speed limit 4)

Armature current limit - in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - at speed:

( 43 .

17 )

3

4

*

n

max

( 43 .

17 )

 with: n max

= Max [|(20.01)|, |(20.02)|]

Note:

The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits, other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

43.22 ArmCurLimSpeed5 (armature current at speed limit 5)

Armature current limit - in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - at n max

= Max [|(20.01)|, |(20.02)|].

Note:

The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits, other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

43.23 PwrConfig (power part configuration)

PwrConfig (43.23) defines the configuration of the connected power part:

0 = 6-pulse the connected power part is a B6 bridge, default

1 = reserved

2 = reserved

3 = reserved

4 = reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

43.24 PwrSupplyRefExt (external voltage reference power supply mode)

External voltage reference for power supply mode in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02). For more information see DCS800 Power Supply Control Manual (3ADW000375).

Note:

PwrSupplyRefExt (43.24) is only valid, if ControlModeSel (43.05) = PowerSupply1 or

PowerSupply2.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Field excitation

44.01 FldCtrlMode (field control mode)

Motor 1 field control mode selection:

0 = Fix constant field (no field weakening), EMF controller blocked, field reversal blocked, optitorque blocked, default

1 = EMF

2 = Fix/Rev field weakening active, EMF controller released, field reversal blocked, optitorque blocked constant field (no field weakening), EMF controller blocked, field reversal active, optitorque blocked

3 = EMF/Rev

4 = Fix/Opti

5 = EMF/Opti field weakening active, EMF controller released, field reversal active, optitorque blocked constant field (no field weakening), EMF controller blocked, field reversal blocked, optitorque active field weakening active, EMF controller released, field reversal blocked, optitorque active

6 = Fix/Rev/Opti constant field (no field weakening), EMF controller blocked, field reversal active, optitorque active

7 = EMF/Rev/Opti field weakening active, EMF controller released, field reversal active, optitorque active

Note:

The field control mode for motor 2 depends on the setting of M2RefFieldMode (45.13).

Note:

It is not possible to go into field weakening range when M1SpeeFbSel (50.03) = EMF.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

44.02 M1KpFex (motor 1 p-part field current controller)

Proportional gain of the field current controller.

Example:

The controller generates 15 % of motor nominal field current [M1NomFldCur (99.11)] with

M1KpFex (44.02) = 3, if the field current error is 5 % of M1NomFldCur (99.11).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

44.03 M1TiFex (motor 1 i-part field current controller)

Integral time of the field current controller. M1TiFex (44.03) defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part.

Example:

The controller generates 15 % of motor nominal field current [M1NomFldCur (99.11)] with

M1KpFex (44.02) = 3, if the field current error is 5 % of M1NomFldCur (99.11). On that condition and with M1TiFex (44.03) = 200 ms follows:

 the controller generates 30 % of motor nominal field current, if the current error is constant, after 200 ms are elapsed (15 % from proportional part and 15 % from integral part).

Setting M1TiFex (44.03) to 0 ms disables the integral part of the field current controller and resets its integrator.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

333

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

334

Index

Signal / Parameter name

44.04 M1FldHeatRef (motor 1 field heating reference)

Field current reference - in percent of M1NomFieldCur (99.11) - for field heating and field economy.

Field heating:

Field heating is released according to FldHeatSel (21.18).

Field economy:

Field economy is only available when 2 motors with 2 independent field exciters are connected to the drive. Field economy for motor 1 is released by means of M1FldHeatRef (44.04) < 100 % and activated, if:

On = 1 [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0] for longer than 10 s,

 the other motor is selected via ParChange (10.10),

 the other motor can be seen in MotSel (8.09) and

M1FldRefMode (45.05) = M2FldRefMode (45.13) = Internal.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

44.05 Unused

44.06 Unused

44.07 EMF CtrlPosLim (positive limit EMF controller)

Positive limit for EMF controller in percent of nominal flux.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

44.08 EMF CtrlNegLim (negative limit EMF controller)

Negative limit for EMF controller in percent of nominal flux.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

44.09 KpEMF (p-part EMF controller)

Proportional gain of the EMF controller.

Example:

The controller generates 15 % of motor nominal EMF with KpEMF (44.09) = 3, if the EMF error is

5% of M1NomVolt (99.02).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

44.10 TiEMF (i-part EMF controller)

Integral time of the EMF controller. TiEMF (44.10) defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part.

Example:

The controller generates 15 % of motor nominal EMF with KpEMF (44.09) = 3, if the EMF error is

5% of M1NomVolt (99.02). On that condition and with TiEMF (44.10) = 20 ms follows:

 the controller generates 30 % of motor nominal EMF, if the EMF error is constant, after

20 ms are elapsed (15 % from proportional part and 15 % from integral part).

Setting TiEMF (44.10) to 0 ms disables the integral part of the EMF controller and resets its integrator.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

44.11 Unused

44.12 FldCurFlux40 (field current at 40% flux)

Field current at 40 % flux in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

44.13 FldCurFlux70 (field current at 70% flux)

Field current at 70 % flux in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

44.14 FldCurFlux90 (field current at 90% flux)

Field current at 90 % flux in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

If the motor speed passes the field weakening point (== base speed) quickly, voltage overshoot may occur. To solve this problem the field weakening point can be lowered by means of

FldWeakDyn (44.15). FldWeakDyn (44.15) is set in percent of M1BaseSpeed (99.04).

Note:

The lowered field weakening point is compensated by the EMF controller in case of constant speed or slow speed change. EMF CtrlPosLim (44.07) has to be set high enough to allow the EMF controller to compensate.

Field current

FldWeakDyn (44.15)

335

n

Base

Volatile: N

Speed

FldweakDyn.dsf

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 %

44.16 Unused

Type: I

Selector for FldBoostSel (44.17):

0 = NotUsed field boost is blocked, default

1 = Run field boost starts with Run = 1 [MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 3]

2 = DI1

3 = DI2

4 = DI3

5 = DI4

6 = DI5

7 = DI6

8 = DI7

9 = DI8

10 = DI9

1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost

1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost

1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost

1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost

1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost

1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost

1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost

1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost

11 = DI10

1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost. Only available with digital extension board

1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost. Only available with digital extension board

12 = DI11 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost. Only available with digital extension board

13 = MCW Bit11 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11

14 = MCW Bit12 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12

15 = MCW Bit13 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13

16 = MCW Bit14 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14

17 = MCW Bit15 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15

18 = ACW Bit12 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12

19 = ACW Bit13 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13

20 = ACW Bit14 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14

21 = ACW Bit15 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

336

Index

Signal / Parameter name

44.18 FldBoostFact (field boost factor)

Field boost factor in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11). The resulting field boost current must be lower than the nominal current of the used field exciter. If the field boost current is out of range

A132 ParConflict [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 15] is generated.

Note:

If FldBoostFact (44.18) > 100 % and M1UsedFexType (99.12) = OnBoard to DCF804-0060 or

FEX-4-Term5A S M1FldSacle (45.20) has to be set accordingly.

Example:

M1NomFldCur (99.11) = 20 A and FldBoostFact (44.18) = 150 % then S M1FldSacle (45.20) = 30

A

Note:

If FldBoostFact (44.18) > 100 % and M2UsedFexType (49.07) = OnBoard to DCF804-0060 or

FEX-4-Term5A S M2FldSacle (45.21) has to be set accordingly.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

44.19 FldBoostTime (field boost time)

Time the field boost should last.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 s Type:

44.20 Unused

I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

337

Index

Signal / Parameter name

RevVoltMargin (44.21) - in percent of NomMainsVolt (99.10) - is a safety margin for the motor voltage during regenerative mode. Setting RevVoltMargin (44.21) to 0 provides no protection against commutation faults (shooting through).

The function of RevVoltMargin (44.21) is the following:

To prevent the drive from blowing fuses when going from motoring (using forward bridge) to generating (using reverse bridge) the armature voltage has to be lower than the corresponding mains voltage. This is automatically checked by the DCS800 and the reverse bridge is blocked as long as the armature voltage is too high. To lower the armature voltage two ways are possible:

 lowering the motor speed by idling or

 adapting the flux by lowering the field current - e.g. set FldCtrlMode (44.01) = EMF

Both options take time and thus delaying the current / torque reversal. For faster adapting of the motor voltage activate the field weakening function.

This can be supervised with CurCtrlStat2 (604) bit 3

U di generating

U genMax

: max. regenerative voltage ( ° motoring

U motMax

: max. motoring voltage ( = 15°)

U genMotor

: regenerative motor voltage with safety margin i

U genMotor

: regenerative motor voltage with safety margin

RevVoltMargin (44.21)

U motMax

: max. motoring voltage

( = 15°) motoring generating

U genMax

: max. regenerative voltage ( = 150°)

RevVoltMargin.dsf

For regenerative mode is valid:

U genMotor

|

U genMax

|

U

Safety with and

U genMax

1 .

35 * cos

 max

*

U

Mains

_

act

U genMax

U

Safety

1 .

35 *

( 44 .

21 ) cos ( 20 .

14 ) *

U

Mains

_

act follows

:

U genMotor

| 1 .

35 * cos ( 20 .

14 ) *

U

Mains

_

act

|

( 44 .

21 ) *

U

Mains

_

act

Example:

With ArmAlphaMax (20.14) = 150°, RevVoltMargin (44.21) = 10 % and U

Mains_act

= NomMainsVolt

(99.10) follows:

U genMotor

| 1 .

35 * cos 150

*

U

Mains

_

act

|

0 .

1 *

U

Mains

_

act

U genMotor

|

1 .

16 *

U

Mains

_

act

|

0 .

1 *

U

Mains

_

act follows

:

U genMotor

1 .

06 *

U

Mains

_

act

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

338

Index

Signal / Parameter name

44.22 VoltRefExt (external EMF voltage reference)

External EMF voltage reference in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02).

Note:

VoltRefExt (44.22) is only valid, if EMF RefSel (44.23) = VoltRefExt.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

44.23 EMF RefSel (EMF reference selector)

EMF RefSel (44.23) selector:

0 = Internal

1 = Ext4422 internally calculated EMF, default

VoltRefExt (44.22) external EMF voltage reference

2 = AI1

3 = AI2

4 = AI3 analog input AI1 analog input AI2 analog input AI3

5 = AI4

6 = AI5

7 = AI6

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

analog input AI4 analog input AI5 analog input AI6

Type: C Volatile: N

44.24 Unused

44.25 VoltCorr (EMF voltage correction)

EMF voltage correction in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02). Added to VoltRef1 (3.25).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

EMF voltage reference slope in percent M1NomVolt (99.02) per 1 ms. The dv/dt limitation is located at the input of the EMF controller.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 %/ms Type: I Volatile: N

44.27 FluxCorr (flux correction)

FluxCorr (44.27) in percent of nominal flux is added to the sum of the flux reference FluxRefSum

(3.28).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

44.28 MG ConfigWord (MG-set configuration word)

MG-set configuration word. For more information see DCS800 MG-set motor control

(3ADW000310).

Bit Name

B0 reserved

B1 reserved

Value Comment

1

0

1

0

B2 reserved

B3 reserved

1

0

1

0

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B4 reserved

B5 reserved

B6 reserved

1

0

1

0

1

B7 reserved

0

1

0

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B8 reserved 1

B9 reserved

B10 reserved

0

1

0

1

0

B11 reserved 1

0

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B12 reserved 1

0

B13 reserved

B14 SpeedController 1

1

0

Release speed controller

B15 reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

1

0

Type: I Volatile: Y

339

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

340

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Field converter settings

45.01 M1FreewhlLev (motor 1 freewheeling level)

Motor 1 field exciter free wheeling level [only when M1UsedFexType (99.12) = DCF804-0050 or

DCF804-0060] in percent / ms of the actual field exciter supply voltage. If 2 successive AC-voltage measurements differ more than M1FreewhlLev (45.01), the free-wheeling function is activated.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 %/ms Type: I Volatile: N

45.02 M1PosLimCtrl (motor 1 positive voltage limit for field exciter)

Positive voltage limit for motor 1 field exciter in percent of the maximum field exciter output voltage.

Example:

With a 3-phase supply voltage of 400 VAC the field current controller can generate a maximum output voltage of 521 VDC. In case the rated field supply voltage is 200 VDC, then it is possible to limit the controllers’ output voltage to 46 %. That means the firing angle of the field current controller is limited in such a way that the average output voltage is limited to a maximum of

240VDC.

Note:

4-Q field exciters which can reverse the field current will used M1PosLimCtrl (45.02) also as negative limit.

Int. Scaling: 100 = 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

45.03 Unused

45.04 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

341

Index

Signal / Parameter name

45.05 M1FldRefMode (motor 1 field current reference mode)

M1FldRefMode (45.05) selector:

0 = Internal motor 1 field current reference according to shared motion MotSel (8.09) or field heating FldHeatSel (21.18), default

1 = M2FldCurRef field current reference is taken from motor 2

2 = M1FldRefExt M1FldRefExt (45.06) external field current reference

Field current control (5 ms)

ParChange

10.10

FldHeatSel

M1FldRefMode

21.18

45.05

FldCurRefM1

-

3.30

Motor 1 field current controller

Optitorque and field reversal

(group 45)

M1FldHeatRef

M1FldRefExt

44.04

45.06

-

44.02

M1KpFex

FldCurTrim

45.17

-1

44.03

45.02

M1TiFex

M1PosLimCtrl

ParChange

FldHeatSel

M1FldRefMode

10.10

21.18

45.13

-

-

3.31

FldCurRefM2

Motor 2 field current controller

M2FldHeatRef

M2FldRefExt

49.06

45.14

49.10

M2KpFex

49.11

45.16

M2TiFex

M2PosLimCtrl

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

45.06 M1FldRefExt (motor 1 external field current reference)

Motor 1 external field current reference input in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11).

Note:

M1FldRefExt (45.06) is only valid, if M1FldRefMode (45.05) = M1FldRefExt.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

45.07 ForceFldDir (force field current direction)

Motor 1 field direction force command:

0 = NotUsed the field direction is controlled by FldCtrlMode (44.01) and TorqRefUsed

(2.13), default

1 = Forward

2 = Reverse field direction is forced to forward direction field direction is forced to reverse direction

3 = ExtReverse In case an external contactor in the field current loop is used to change the field direction, ForceFldDir (45.07) has to be switched between Forward

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

and ExtReverse. ExtReverse adapts the armature voltage and speed supervision. The external contactor interlocking and the control of

ForceFldDir (45.07) have to be done by means of Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

342

Index

Signal / Parameter name

45.08 FluxRevMonDly (flux reversal monitoring delay)

Maximum allowed time within Mot1FldCurRel (1.29) and the internal motor flux doesn’t correspond to each other during field reversal. During this time F522 SpeedFb [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 5] is disabled.

Note:

FluxRevMonDly (45.08) is only effective for FldCtrlMode (44.01) = Fix/Rev, EMF/Rev,

Fix/Rev/Opti or EMF/Rev/Opti.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

45.09 FldRevHyst (field current reversal hysteresis)

The sign of Mot1FldCurRel (1.29) is used to generate the field reversal acknowledge. To avoid signal noise problems a small hysteresis - in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11) - is needed.

Note:

FldRevHyst (45.09) is only effective for FldCtrlMode (44.01) = Fix/Rev, EMF/Rev, Fix/Rev/Opti or

EMF/Rev/Opti.

Int. Scaling: 100 = 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

45.10 FldRefHyst (field torque reference hysteresis)

To prevent the field reversal from continuous toggling due to a too small torque reference a

TorqRefUsed (2.13) hysteresis - in percent of MotNomTorque (4.23) - is available. The hysteresis is symmetrical and is set by FldRefHyst (45.10). The field reversal is controlled by the sign of

TorqRefUsed (2.13):

Note:

FldRefHyst (45.10) is only effective for FldCtrlMode (44.01) = Fix/Rev or EMF/Rev.

Int. Scaling: 100 = 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

45.11 FldRefGain (field current reference gain)

Optitorque calculates the field current reference depending on TorqRefUsed (2.13). Thus, the field current is reduced to a smaller value, if TorqRefUsed (2.13) is accordingly low. This speeds up the field reversal, assuming TorqRefUsed (2.13) is low during field reversal. Optitorque is activated by means of FldCtrlMode (44.01) and like field reversal only available for motor 1 field exciter.

The relation between TorqRefUsed (2.13) and FldCurRefM1 (3.30) is linear and without offset. It is defined by means of the FldRefGain (45.11). The gain is related to M1NomFldCur (99.11) as well as to MotNomTorque (4.23).

343

Example:

With FldRefGain (45.11) = 20 %, 100 % field current is generated at TorqRefUsed (2.13) = 20 %.

Note:

FldRefGain (45.11) is only effective for FldCtrlMode (44.01) = Fix/Opti, EMF/Opti, Fix/Rev/Opti or

EMF/Rev/Opti.

Int. Scaling: 100 = 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

45.12 Unused

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

344

Index

Signal / Parameter name

45.13 M2FldRefMode (motor 2 field current reference mode)

M2FldRefMode (45.13) selector:

0 = Internal motor 2 field current reference according to shared motion MotSel (8.09) or field heating FldHeatSel (21.18), default

1 = M1FldCurRef field current reference is taken from motor 1

2 = M2FldRefExt M2FldRefExt (45.14) external field current reference

Field current control (5 ms)

ParChange

10.10

FldHeatSel

M1FldRefMode

21.18

45.05

FldCurRefM1

-

3.30

Motor 1 field current controller

Optitorque and field reversal

(group 45)

M1FldHeatRef

M1FldRefExt

44.04

45.06

-

44.02

M1KpFex

FldCurTrim

45.17

-1

44.03

45.02

M1TiFex

M1PosLimCtrl

ParChange

FldHeatSel

M1FldRefMode

10.10

21.18

45.13

-

-

3.31

FldCurRefM2

Motor 2 field current controller

M2FldHeatRef

M2FldRefExt

49.06

45.14

49.10

M2KpFex

49.11

45.16

M2TiFex

M2PosLimCtrl

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

45.14 M2FldRefExt (motor 2 external field current reference)

Motor 2 external field current reference input in percent of M2NomFldCur (49.05).

Note:

M2FldRefExt (45.14) is only valid, if M2FldRefMode (45.13) = M2FldRefExt.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

45.15 M2FreewhlLev (motor 2 freewheeling level)

Motor 2 field exciter free wheeling level [only when M2UsedFexType (49.07) = DCF804-0050 or

DCF804-0060] in percent / ms of the actual field exciter supply voltage. If 2 successive AC-voltage measurements differ more than M2FreewhlLev (45.15), the free-wheeling function is activated.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 %/ms Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

45.16 M2PosLimCtrl (motor 2 positive voltage limit for field exciter)

Positive voltage limit for motor 2 field exciter in percent of the maximum field exciter output voltage.

Example:

With a 3-phase supply voltage of 400 VAC the field current controller can generate a maximum output voltage of 521 VDC. In case the rated field supply voltage is 200 VDC, then it is possible to limit the controllers’ output voltage to 46 %. That means the firing angle of the field current controller is limited in such a way that the average output voltage is limited to a maximum of

240VDC.

Note:

4-Q field exciters which can reverse the field current will used M2PosLimCtrl (45.16) also as negative limit.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

45.17 FldCurTrim (field current trimming)

The field current of motor 1 and motor 2 can be corrected by means of FldCurTrim (45.17) in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11) respectively M2NomFldCur (49.05):

 0 % to 20 %: The value is subtracted from motor 1 field current reference. The result is visible in FldCurRefM1 (3.30).

 -20 % to 0 %: The absolute value is subtracted from motor 2 field current reference. The result is visible in FldCurRefM2 (3.31).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

45.18 FldMinTripDly (delay field current minimum trip)

FldMinTripDly (45.18) delays F541 M1FexLowCur [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 8] respectively F542

M2FexLowCur [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 9]. If the field current recovers before the delay is elapsed

F541 / F542 will be disregarded:

M1FldMinTrip (30.12)

M2FldMinTrip (49.08)

Note:

FldMinTripDly (45.18) is blocked when OperModeSel (43.01) = FieldConv.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

45.19 Unused

45.20 S M1FldScale (set: motor 1 field current scaling factor)

Motor 1 field exciter scaling factor. S M1FldScale (45.20) is write protected, unless ServiceMode

(99.06) = SetTypeCode.

To use S M1FldScale (45.20) following inequation has to be valid:

M1NomFldCur (99.11)

S M1FldScale (45.20)  maximum field current of the used field exciter

 For S M1FldScale (45.20) > maximum field current of the used field exciter A132

ParConflict [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 15] is generated.

 For M1NomFldCur (99.11) > S M1FldScale (45.20) the scaling is automatically set by

M1NomFldCur (99.11).

 The scaling factor is released when M1NomFldCur (99.11) < S M1FldScale (45.20) and M1UsedFexType (99.12) = OnBoard to DCF804-0060 or FEX-4-Term5A.

If the scaling is changed its new value is taken over immediately.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: N

345

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

346

Index

Signal / Parameter name

45.21 S M2FldScale (set: motor 2 field current scaling factor)

Motor 2 field exciter scaling factor. S M2FldScale (45.21) is write protected, unless ServiceMode

(99.06) = SetTypeCode.

To use S M2FldScale (45.21) following inequation has to be valid:

M2NomFldCur (49.05)

S M2FldScale (45.21)  maximum field current of the used field exciter

 For S M2FldScale (45.21) > maximum field current of the used field exciter A132

ParConflict [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 15] is generated.

 For M2NomFldCur (49.05) > S M2FldScale (45.21) the scaling is automatically set by

M2NomFldCur (49.05).

 The scaling factor is released when M2NomFldCur (49.05) < S M2FldScale (45.21) and M2UsedFexType (49.07) = OnBoard to DCF804-0060 or FEX-4-Term5A.

If the scaling is changed its new value is taken over immediately.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: N

45.22 M1OperModeFex4 (motor 1 fex4 operation mode selector)

The FEX-425-Int, DCF803-0016 and DCF803-0035 can be connected to either a 3-phase supply or a single phase supply:

0 = 1-phase single phase supply

1 = 3-phase 3-phase supply, default

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

45.23 M2OperModeFex4 (motor 2 fex4 operation mode selector)

The FEX-425-Int, DCF803-0016 and DCF803-0035 can be connected to either a 3-phase supply or a single phase supply:

0 = 1-phase single phase supply

1 = 3-phase 3-phase supply, default

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

45.24 MultiFexCount (Multi fex count)

Number of connected field exciters. For more information see DCS800 MultiFex motor control

(3ADW000309).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

For more information see DCS800 MultiFex motor control (3ADW000309).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

For more information see DCS800 MultiFex motor control (3ADW000309).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

347

Index

Signal / Parameter name

12-pulse operation

47.01 12P Mode (12-pulse mode)

The setting of OperModeSel (43.01) determines the reaction of 12P Mode (47.01).

OperModeSel (43.01) = 12PParMaster respectively 12PParSlave:

0 = Normal 12-pulse parallel master and 12-pulse parallel slave use their own current controller independently, default

1 = Difference the 12-pulse parallel slave calculates the difference between the 12-pulse parallel master actual current and its own actual current and controls this difference to zero by means of its current controller, not implemented yet

2 = Sequential not used for 12-pulse parallel mode

3 = DiodeBridge not used for 12-pulse parallel mode

OperModeSel (43.01) = 12PSerMaster respectively 12PSerSlave:

0 = Normal 12-pulse serial master and 12-pulse serial slave are controlled by the same

1 = Difference firing angle, default not used for 12-pulse serial mode

2 = Sequential Sequential control of the firing angles. Only one unit changes its firing angle, while the other unit’s firing angle is fixed at the minimum- or maximum firing angle. See diagram below.

3 = DiodeBridge the 12-pulse serial slave converter is a diode bridge

ArmAlphaMin (20.15)

Firing angle of slave

Firing angle of master

ArmAlphaMax (20.14) output voltage of system minimum

DC-voltage maximum

DC-voltage

12P Mode (47.01) must have the same setting for 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave. In case of

DiodeBridge the setting is only possible in the 12-pulse master.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Permitted current difference between the converters in 12-pulse parallel configuration in percent of

M1NomCur (99.03).

The drive trips with

F534 12PCurDiff [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 1] if DiffCurLim (47.02) is still exceeded when DiffCurDly (47.03) is elapsed.

DiffCurLim (47.02) is only active in the 12-pulse parallel master.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

348

Index

Signal / Parameter name

47.03 DiffCurDly (current difference delay)

DiffCurDly (47.03) delays

F534 12PCurDiff [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 1]. If the current difference becomes smaller than DiffCurLim (47.02) before the delay is elapsed F534 will be disregarded:

DiffCurLim (47.02)

DiffCurDly (47.03) is only active in the 12-pulse parallel master.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

47.04 Unused

47.05 12P RevTimeOut (12-pulse reversal timeout)

In 12-pulse mode the current direction of both - master and slave - bridges is monitored. The drive trips with F533 12PRevTime [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 0] if the 2 converters have different bridges fired for more than 12P RevTimeOut (47.05).

The reversal fault for 12-pulse is inactive, if 12P RevTimeOut (47.05) is set to 999 ms or 1000 ms.

12P RevTimeOut (47.05) is only active in the 12-pulse master. less than less than

12P RevTimeOut (47.05) 12P RevTimeOut (47.05)

current direction

12 -pulse master current direction

12 -pulse slave

Note:

12P RevTimeOut (47.05) must be longer than ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) and

ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) must be longer than RevDly (43.14).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

Shared motion

49.01 M2NomVolt (motor 2 nominal DC voltage)

Motor 2 nominal armature voltage (DC) from the motor rating plate.

Note:

In 12-pulse serial mode, this parameter has to be set to the value of the voltage the converter itself is providing. This is usually 50 % of the rated motor voltage, if one motor is connected. In case 2 motors in series are connected it is 100 % of one motor’s rated voltage.

Note:

The hardware of the measuring circuit has to be adapted for motor voltages lower than 50 V.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

49.02 M2NomCur (motor 2 nominal DC current)

Motor 2 nominal armature current (DC) from the motor rating plate. If several motors are connected to the drive, enter the total current of all motors.

Note:

In 12-pulse parallel mode, this parameter has to be set to the value of the current the converter itself is providing. This is usually 50 % of the rated motor current, if one motor is connected. In case 2 motors in parallel are connected it is 100 % of one motor’s rated current.

Note:

In case the converter is used as a 3-phase field exciter use M2NomCur (49.02) to set the nominal field current.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: N

49.03 M2BaseSpeed (motor 2 base speed)

Motor 2 base speed from the rating plate, usually the field weak point. M2BaseSpeed (49.03) is must be set in the range of:

0.2 to 1.6 times of SpeedScaleAct (2.29).

If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 7] is generated.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 rpm Type: I Volatile: N

When the Run command is removed [set UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3 to zero], the drive will stop as chosen by StopMode (21.03). As soon as the actual speed reaches the limit set by

M2ZeroSpeedLim (49.04) the motor will coast independent of the setting of StopMode (21.03).

Existing brakes are closed (applied). While the actual speed is in the limit ZeroSpeed

[AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 11] is high.

Note:

In case FlyStart (21.10) = StartFrom0 and if the restart command comes before zero speed is reached A137 SpeedNotZero [AlarmWord3 (9.08) bit 4] is generated.

Internally limited from:

0

rpm to

( 2 .

29 )

rpm

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

Motor 2 nominal field current from the motor rating plate.

Note:

In case the converter is used as a 3-phase field exciter use M2NomCur (49.05) to set the nominal field current.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: N

49.06 M2FldHeatRef (motor 2 field heating reference)

Field current reference - in percent of M2NomFieldCur (49.05) - for field heating and field economy.

Field heating:

Field heating is released according to FldHeatSel (21.18).

Field economy:

Field economy is only available when 2 motors with 2 independent field exciters are connected to the drive. Field economy for motor 2 is released by means of M2FldHeatRef (49.06) < 100 % and activated, if:

On = 1 [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0] for longer than 10 s,

 the other motor is selected via ParChange (10.10),

 the other motor can be seen in MotSel (8.09) and

M1FldRefMode (45.05) = M2FldRefMode (45.13) = Internal.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

349

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

350

Index

Signal / Parameter name

49.07 M2UsedFexType (motor 2 used field exciter type)

Motor 2 used field exciter type:

0 = NotUsed no or third party field exciter connected

1 = OnBoard

2 = FEX-425-Int

3 = DCF803-0035

4 = DCF803-0050

5 = DCF804-0050

6 = DCF803-0060 integrated 1-Q field exciter (for sizes D1 - D4 only), default internal 1-Q 25 A field exciter (for size D5 only) used for field currents from 0.3 A to 25 A (terminals X100.1 and X100.3) external 1-Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0.3 A to 35 A

(terminals X100.1 and X100.3) external 1-Q 50 A field exciter (DCF803-0050 or DCF503B-0050) external 4-Q 50 A field exciter (DCF804-0050 or DCF504B-0050) external 1-Q 60 A field exciter; not implemented yet

7 = DCF804-0060

8 = DCS800-S01 external 4-Q 60 A field exciter; not implemented yet external 2-Q 3-phase field exciter

9 = DCS800-S02 external 4-Q 3-phase field exciter

10 = DCF803-0016 external 1-Q 16 A field exciter used for field currents from 0.3 A to 16 A

(terminals X100.1 and X100.3)

11 = reserved to

14 = reserved

15 = ExFex AITAC third party field exciter, acknowledge via AITAC

16 = ExFex AI1 third party field exciter, acknowledge via AI1

17 = ExFex AI2

18 = ExFex AI3

19 = ExFex AI4 third party field exciter, acknowledge via AI2 third party field exciter, acknowledge via AI3 third party field exciter, acknowledge via AI4

20 = FEX-4-Term5A internal 2-Q 25 A field exciter (FEX-425-Int), external 2-Q 16 A field exciter (DCF803-0016) or external 2-Q 35 A field exciter (DCF803-

0035) used for field currents from 0.3 A to 5 A (terminals X100.2 and

X100.3)

21 = reserved

22 = Exc-Appl-1 see DCS800 Series wound motor control (3ADW000311)

If the fex type is changed its new value is taken over after the next power-up.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

49.08 M2FldMinTrip (motor 2 minimum field trip)

The drive trips with F542 M2FexLowCur [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 9] if M2FldMinTrip (49.08) - in percent of M2NomFldCur (49.05) - is still undershot when FldMinTripDly (45.18) is elapsed.

Note:

M2FldMinTrip (49.08) is not valid during field heating and field economy. In this case the trip level is automatically set to 50 % of M2FldHeatRef (49.06). The drive trips with F542 M2FexLowCur

[FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 9] if 50 % of M2FldHeatRef (49.06) is still undershot when FldMinTripDly

(45.18) is elapsed.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

The drive trips with F518 M2FexOverCur [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 1] if M2FldOvrCurLev (49.09) - in percent of M2NomFldCur (49.05) - is exceeded. It is recommended to set M2FldOvrCurtLev

(49.09) at least 25 % higher than M2NomFldCur (49.05).

The field overcurrent fault is inactive, if M2FldOvrCurLev (49.09) is set to 135 %.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

49.10 M2KpFex (motor 2 p-part field current controller)

Proportional gain of the field current controller.

Example:

The controller generates 15 % of motor nominal field current [M2NomFldCur (49.05)] with

M2KpFex (49.10) = 3, if the field current error is 5 % of M2NomFldCur (49.05).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

351

Index

Signal / Parameter name

49.11 M2TiFex (motor 2 i-part field current controller)

Integral time of the field current controller. M2TiFex (49.11) defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part.

Example:

The controller generates 15 % of motor nominal field current [M2NomFldCur (49.05] with M2KpFex

(49.10) = 3, if the field current error is 5 % of M2NomFldCur (49.05). On that condition and with

M2TiFex (49.11) = 200 ms follows:

 the controller generates 30 % of motor nominal field current, if the current error is constant, after 200 ms are elapsed (15 % from proportional part and 15 % from integral part).

Setting M2TiFex (49.11) to 0 ms disables the integral part of the field current controller and resets its integrator.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

49.12 M2CurLimBrdg1 (motor 2 current limit of bridge 1)

Current limit bridge 1 in percent of M2NomCur (49.02).

Setting M2CurLimBrdg1 (49.12) to 0 % disables bridge 1.

Note:

The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits, other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

49.13 M2CurLimBrdg2 (motor 2 current limit of bridge 2)

Current limit bridge 2 in percent of M2NomCur (49.02).

Setting M2CurLimBrdg2 (49.13) to 0 % disables bridge 2.

Note:

The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits, other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.

Note:

M2CurLimBrdg2 (49.13) is internally set to 0 % if QuadrantType (4.15) = 2-Q (2-Q drive).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

49.14 M2KpArmCur (motor 2 p-part armature current controller)

Proportional gain of the current controller.

Example:

The controller generates 15 % of motor nominal current [M2NomCur (49.02)] with M2KpArmCur

(49.14) = 3, if the current error is 5 % of M2NomCur (49.02).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

49.15 M2TiArmCur (motor 2 i-part armature current controller)

Integral time of the current controller. M2TiArmCur (49.15) defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part.

Example:

The controller generates 15 % of motor nominal current [M2NomCur (49.02)] with M2KpArmCur

(49.14) = 3, if the current error is 5 % of M2NomCur (49.02). On that condition and with

M2TiArmCur (49.15) = 50 ms follows:

 the controller generates 30 % of motor nominal current, if the current error is constant, after 50 ms are elapsed (15 % from proportional part and 15 % from integral part).

Setting M2TiArmCur (49.15) to 0 ms disables the integral part of the current controller and resets its integrator.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

49.16 M2DiscontCurLim (motor 2 discontinuous current limit)

Threshold continuous / discontinuous current in percent of M2NomCur (49.02). The actual continuous / discontinuous current state can be read from CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 12.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

352

Index

Signal / Parameter name

49.17 M2ArmL (motor 2 armature inductance)

Inductance of the armature circuit in mH. Used for the EMF compensation:

EMF

U

A

R

A

*

I

A

L

A

*

dI

A dt

Attention:

Do not change the default values of M2ArmL (49.17) and M2ArmR (49.18)! Changing them will falsify the results of the autotuning.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 mH Type: I Volatile: N

49.18 M2ArmR (motor 2 armature resistance)

Resistance of the armature circuit in m

. Used for the EMF compensation:

EMF

U

A

R

A

*

I

A

L

A

*

dI

A dt

Attention:

Do not change the default values of M2ArmL (49.17) and M2ArmR (49.18)! Changing them will falsify the results of the autotuning.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 m

Type:

I

Motor 2 negative speed reference limit in rpm for:

SpeedRef2 (2.01)

SpeedRefUsed (2.17)

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm

Note:

M2SpeedMin (49.19) is must be set in the range of:

0.625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed (99.04).

If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 7] is generated.

Note:

M2SpeedMin (49.19) is also applied to SpeedRef4 (2.18) to avoid exceeding the speed limits by means of SpeedCorr (23.04). To be able to overspeed the drive (e.g. for winder) it is possible to switch off the speed limit for SpeedRef4 (2.18) by means of AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 4.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: N

Motor 2 positive speed reference limit in rpm for:

SpeedRef2 (2.01)

SpeedRefUsed (2.17)

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm

Note:

M2SpeedMax (49.20) is must be set in the range of:

0.625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed (99.04).

If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 7] is generated.

Note:

M2SpeedMax (49.20) is also applied to SpeedRef4 (2.18) to avoid exceeding the speed limits by means of SpeedCorr (23.04). To be able to overspeed the drive (e.g. for winder) it is possible to switch off the speed limit for SpeedRef4 (2.18) by means of AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 4.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

49.21 M2OvrSpeed (motor 2 overspeed)

The drive trips with F532 MotOverSpeed [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 15] if M2OvrSpeed (49.21) is exceeded. It is recommended to set M2OvrSpeed (49.21) at least 20 % higher than the maximum motor speed.

32767

Internally limited from:

0

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

rpm

20000

The overspeed fault for motor 2 is inactive, if M2OvrSpeed (49.21) is set to zero.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

49.22 M2SpeedScale (motor 2 speed scaling)

Motor 2 speed scaling in rpm. M2SpeedScale (49.22) defines the speed - in rpm - that corresponds to 20.000 speed units. The speed scaling is released when M2SpeedScale (49.22)

 10:

 20.000 speed units == M2SpeedScale (49.22), in case M2SpeedScale (49.22)  10

 20.000 speed units == maximum absolute value of M2SpeedMin (49.19) and

M2SpeedMax (49.20), in case M2SpeedScale (49.22) < 10 or mathematically

 If (49.22)  10 then 20.000 == (49.22) in rpm

 If (49.22) < 10 then 20.000 == Max [|(49.19)|, |(49.20)|] in rpm

The actual used speed scaling is visible in SpeedScale Act (2.29).

Note:

M2SpeedScale (49.22) has to be set in case the speed is read or written by means of an overriding control (e.g. fieldbus).

Note:

M2SpeedScale (49.22) is must be set in the range of:

0.625 to 5 times of M2BaseSpeed (49.03).

If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 7] is generated.

Commissioning hint:

 set M2SpeedScale (49.22) to maximum speed

 set M2BaseSpeed (49.03) to base speed

 set M2SpeedMax (49.20) / M2SpeedMin (49.19) to maximum speed

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 rpm Type: I Volatile: N

49.23 M2EncMeasMode (motor 2 encoder 1 measuring mode)

M2EncMeasMode (49.23) selects the measurement mode for pulse encoder 1:

0 = A+/B Dir channel A: rising edges for speed; channel A not: not used; channel B: direction;

1 = A+- channel B not: not used; speed evaluation factor = 1 channels A and A not: rising and falling edges for speed; channels B and B not: not used; speed evaluation factor = 2

2 = A+-/B Dir channels A and A not: rising and falling edges for speed; channel B: direction; channel B not: not used; speed evaluation factor = 2

3 = A+-/B+- channels A, A not and B, B not: rising and falling edges for speed and direction;

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

speed evaluation factor = 4, default

Type: C Volatile: N

353

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

354

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Motor 2 speed feedback selection:

0 = EMF speed is calculated by means of the EMF feedback with flux compensation, default

1 = Encoder speed is measured by means of pulse encoder 1 connected to either SDCS-

2 = Tacho

CON-4 or SDCS-IOB-3 speed is measured by means of an analog tacho

3 = External MotSpeed (1.04) is updated by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

4 = Encoder2 speed is measured by means of pulse encoder 2 connected to a RTAC-xx, see

Encoder2Module (98.01)

5 = EMF Volt speed is calculated by means of the EMF feedback without flux compensation

Note1:

It is not possible to go into field weakening range when M1SpeeFbSel (50.03) = EMF.

Note2:

When using EMF speed feedback together with a DC-breaker wrong voltage measurements can lead to F532 MotOverSpeed [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 15]. In case of an open DC-breaker the voltage measurement might show high values caused by leakage currents through the snubber circuits of the thyristors, because there is no load on the DC side. To prevent these trips set

MainContAck (10.21) = DCcontact.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

49.25 M2EncPulseNo (motor 2 encoder 1 pulse number)

Amount of pulses per revolution (ppr) for pulse encoder 1.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ppr Type: I Volatile: N

49.26 M2TachoAdjust (motor 2 tacho adjust)

Fine tuning of analog tacho. The value equals the actual speed measured by means of a hand held tacho:

M2TachoAdjust (49.26) = speed actual

HandHeldTacho

Internally limited to:

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

rpm

20000

Note:

Changes of M2TachoAdjust (49.26) are only valid during tacho fine tuning [ServiceMode (99.06) =

TachFineTune]. During tacho fine tuning M2SpeedFbSel (49.24) is automatically forced to EMF.

Attention:

The value of M2TachoAdjust (49.26) has to be the speed measured by the hand held tacho and

not the delta between speed reference and measured speed.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: Y

49.27 M2TachoVolt1000 (motor 2 tacho voltage at 1000 rpm)

M2TachoVolt1000 (49.27) is used to adjust the voltage the analog tacho is generating at a speed of 1000 rpm:

M2TachoVolt1000 (49.27)  1 V, the setting is used to calculate tacho gain

M2TachoVolt1000 (49.27) = 0 V, the tacho gain is measured by means of the speed feedback assistant

M2TachoVolt1000 (49.27) = -1 V, the tacho gain was successfully measured by means of the speed feedback assistant

Note:

Use ServiceMode (99.06) = TachFineTune

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

355

Index

Signal / Parameter name

49.28 M2BrakeCtrl (motor 2 brake control)

Releases the control of motor 2 brake:

0 = NotUsed brake logic is blocked, default

1 = On

2 = BrakeClose

3 = BrakeOpen brake logic is released according to it’s parameter settings test mode, the brake logic will work, but the brake is always closed

(applied) test mode, the brake logic will work, but the brake is always opened

(lifted)

Attention: A closed (applied) brake will open (lift) immediately! Do not use this mode with e.g. an unsaved crane drive!

The brake open (lift) command BrakeCmd is readable in AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8 and can be connected to the digital output controlling the brake.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

49.29 M2BrakeAckSel (motor 2 brake acknowledge selector)

The drive sets either A122 MechBrake [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 5], F552 MechBrake [FaultWord4

(9.04) bit 3] or A116 BrakeLongFalling [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 15] depending on BrakeFaultFunc

(42.06 ) if a digital input is selected and the brake acknowledge fails:

0 = NotUsed

1 = DI1

2 = DI2

3 = DI3 brake acknowledge is blocked, default

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted)

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted)

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted)

4 = DI4

5 = DI5

6 = DI6

7 = DI7

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted)

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted)

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted)

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted)

8 = DI8

9 = DI9

10 = DI10

11 = DI11

12 = MCW Bit11

13 = MCW Bit12

14 = MCW Bit13

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted)

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), only available with digital extension board

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), only available with digital extension board

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), only available with digital extension board

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 11

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 12

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 13

15 = MCW Bit14

16 = MCW Bit15

17 = ACW Bit12

18 = ACW Bit13

19 = ACW Bit14

20 = ACW Bit15

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 14

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), MainCtrlWord

(7.01) bit 15

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 12

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 13

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 14

0 = brake is closed (applied), 1 = brake is open (lifted), AuxCtrlWord

(7.02) bit 15

Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

356

Index

Signal / Parameter name

49.30 M2BrakeRefDly (motor 2 brake reference delay)

Brake open (lift) delay. This function compensates for the mechanical open (lift) delay of the brake.

During the start - Run [MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 3] = 1 - of the drive the speed reference is clamped

(ramp output is set to zero) and the speed controller output is set to start torque [see

M2StrtTorqRefSel (49.44)] until M2BrakeRefDly (49.30) is elapsed.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

This function compensates for the time the drive needs to decelerate from M2ZeroSpeedLim

(49.04) to actual speed = 0. Until M2ZeroSpeedDly (49.31) is elapsed the brake is kept open

(lifted).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

49.32 M2ModelTime (motor 2 model time constant)

Thermal time constant for motor 2 with fan/forced cooling. The time within the temperature rises to

63% of its nominal value.

The motor thermal model is blocked, if M2ModelTime (49.32) is set to zero.

The value of Mot2TempCalc (1.21) is saved at power down of the drives electronics. With the very first energizing of the drives electronics the motor's ambient temperature is set to 30°C.

WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it is not properly cooled e.g. due to dust and dirt.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

49.33 M2AlarmLimLoad (motor 2 alarm limit load)

The drive sets A110 M2OverLoad [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 9] if M2AlarmLimLoad (49.33) - in percent of M2NomCur (49.02) - is exceeded. Output value for motor 2 thermal model is

Mot2TempCalc (1.21).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

The drive trips with F510 M2OverLoad [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 9] if M2FaultLimLoad (49.34) - in percent of M2NomCur (49.02) - is exceeded. Output value for motor 2 thermal model is

Mot2TempCalc (1.21).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

49.35 M2TempSel (motor 2 temperature selector)

M2TempSel (49.33) selects motor 2 measured temperature input. The result can be seen in

Mot2TemopMeas (1.23).

Connection possibilities for PT100:

 max. 3 PT100 for motor 2 and max. 3 PT100 for motor 1 or

 up to 6 PT100 for motor 2 only.

Connection possibilities PTC:

 max. 1 PTC for motor 2 and max. 1 PTC for motor 1 or

 up to 2 PTC for motor 2 only:

0 = NotUsed motor 2 temperature measurement is blocked, default

1 = 1PT100 AI3

2 = 2PT100 AI3 one PT100 connected to AI3 on SDCS-IOB-3 two PT100 connected to AI3 on SDCS-IOB-3

3 = 3PT100 AI3 three PT100 connected to AI3 on SDCS-IOB-3

4 = 4PT100 AI3/2 four PT100, 3 connected to AI3 and 1 connected to AI2 on SDCS-IOB-3

5 = 5PT100 AI3/2 five PT100, 3 connected to AI3 and 2 connected to AI2 on SDCS-IOB-3

6 = 6PT100 AI3/2 six PT100, 3 connected to AI3 and 3 connected to AI2 on SDCS-IOB-3

7 = 1PT100 AI8

8 = 2PT100 AI8 one PT100 connected to AI8 on RAIO2 two PT100 connected to AI8 on RAIO2

9 = 3PT100 AI8 three PT100 connected to AI8 on RAIO2

10 = 4PT100 AI8/7 four PT100, 3 connected to AI8 and 1 connected to AI7 on RAIO2

11 = 5PT100 AI8/7 five PT100, 3 connected to AI8 and 2 connected to AI7 on RAIO2

12 = 6PT100 AI8/7 six PT100, 3 connected to AI8 and 3 connected to AI7 on RAIO2

13 = 1PTC AI3 one PTC connected to AI3 on SDCS-IOB-3

14 = 2PTC AI3/2 two PTC, 1 connected to AI3 and 1 connected to AI2 on SDCS-IOB-3

15 = 1PTC AI2/Con one PTC connected to AI2 on SDCS-CON-4

For more information see section

Motor protection

.

Note:

AI7 and AI8 have to be activated by means of AIO ExtModule (98.06).

Note:

In case only one PT100 is connected to an AI of the SDCS-IOB-3 the input range must be configured by jumpers to a gain of 10. Jumper settings for input range and constant current source see DCS800 Hardware Manual.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

49.36 M2AlarmLimTemp (motor 2 alarm limit temperature)

The drive sets A108 M2OverTemp [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 8] if M2AlarmLimTemp (49.36) is exceeded. Output value for motor 2 measured temperature is Mot2TempMeas (1.23).

Note:

The unit depends on M2TempSel (49.35).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C / 1

/ 1

Type: SI Volatile: N

49.37 M2FaultLimTemp (motor 2 fault limit temperature)

The drive trips with F509 M2OverTemp [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 8] if M2FaultLimTemp (49.37) is exceeded. Output value for motor 2 measured temperature is Mot2TempMeas (1.23).

Note:

The unit depends on M2TempSel (49.35).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C / 1

/ 1

Type: SI Volatile: N

357

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

358

Index

Signal / Parameter name

49.38 M2KlixonSel (motor 2 klixon selector)

The drive trips with F509 M2OverTemp [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 8] if a digital input selected and the klixon is open:

0 = NotUsed no reaction, default

1 = DI1 0 = fault, 1 = no fault

2 = DI2

3 = DI3

0 = fault, 1 = no fault

0 = fault, 1 = no fault

4 = DI4

5 = DI5

6 = DI6

7 = DI7

0 = fault, 1 = no fault

0 = fault, 1 = no fault

0 = fault, 1 = no fault

0 = fault, 1 = no fault

8 = DI8

9 = DI9

10 = DI10

11 = DI11

0 = fault, 1 = no fault

0 = fault, 1 = no fault. Only available with digital extension board

0 = fault, 1 = no fault. Only available with digital extension board

0 = fault, 1 = no fault. Only available with digital extension board

Note:

It is possible to connect several klixons in series.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

49.39 M2BrakeFltTime (motor 2 brake fault time)

Brake open (lift) acknowledge monitor. During this time the brake open (lift) command BrakeCmd

[AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8] and the brake acknowledge signal [M2BrakeAckSel (49.29)] can be different without causing A122 MechBrake [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 5] or F552 MechBrake

[FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 3] depending on BrakeFaultFunc (42.06).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

49.40 M2TorqProvTime (motor 2 torque proving time)

Brake torque proving acknowledge. The drive trips with F556 TorqProv [FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 7] if the Run [MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 3] command is set and the acknowledge TorqProvOK

[AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03) bit 11] is not set before M2TorqProvTime (49.40) is elapsed.

The torque proving is inactive, if M2TorqProvTime (49.40) is set to 0.

Note:

The acknowledge signal TorqProvOK has to be provided by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control and is set by means of a rising edge (0

 1).

The torque reference might be set by means of BalRef (24.11) or TorqSel (26.01) and

BalSpeedCtrl [AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 8] or TorqRefA (25.01). The reaction of the drive might be taken from MotCur (1.06).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

49.41 M2BrakeLiftDly (motor 2 brake lift delay)

Brake open (lift) delay. This function delays the brake open (lift) command BrakeCmd

[AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8] until M2BrakeLiftDly (49.41) is elapsed.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

Brake close (apply) acknowledge monitor. During this time the brake close (apply) command

BrakeCmd [AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8] and the brake acknowledge signal [M2BrakeAckSel (49.29)] can be different without causing either A122 MechBrake [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 5], F552

MechBrake [FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 3] or A116 BrakeLongFalling [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 15] depending on BrakeFaultFunc (42.06).

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

49.43 M2BrakeStopDly (motor 2 brake stop delay)

Brake close (apply) delay. This function starts after the brake acknowledge - if selected with

M2BrakeAckSel (49.29) - is zero and compensates for the mechanical close (apply) delay of the brake. During the stop - Run [MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 3] = 0 - of the drive the speed reference is clamped (ramp output is set to zero) and the speed controller stays active until M2BrakeStopDly

(49.43) is elapsed.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

49.44 M2StrtTorqRefSel (motor 2 start torque reference selector)

Motor 2, start torque selector:

0 = NotUsed start torque function is blocked and the start torque reference is fixed zero, default

1 = Memory torque memory released, the minimum value equals the absolute value of

StrtTorqRef (42.08)

3 = AI1

4 = AI2

5 = AI3

6 = AI4 analog input AI1 analog input AI2 analog input AI3 analog input AI4

7 = AI5

8 = AI6 analog input AI5 analog input AI6

Note:

Torque memory is the presetting of the torque when starting with e.g. suspended load. The preset torque equals the actual torque stored when the brake open (lift) command is removed. After energizing the drive the value of StrtTorqRef (42.08) is set as torque memory.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

359

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

360

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Speed measurement

50.01 M1SpeedScale (motor 1 speed scaling)

Motor 1 speed scaling in rpm. M1SpeedScale (50.01) defines the speed - in rpm - that corresponds to 20.000 speed units. The speed scaling is released when M1SpeedScale (50.01)

 10:

 20.000 speed units == M1SpeedScale (50.01), in case M1SpeedScale (50.01)  10

 20.000 speed units == maximum absolute value of M1SpeedMin (20.01) and

M1SpeedMax (20.02), in case M1SpeedScale (50.01) < 10 or mathematically

 If (50.01)  10 then 20.000 == (50.01) in rpm

 If (50.01) < 10 then 20.000 == Max [|(20.01)|, |(20.02)|] in rpm

The actual used speed scaling is visible in SpeedScale Act (2.29).

Note:

M1SpeedScale (50.01) has to be set in case the speed is read or written by means of an overriding control (e.g. fieldbus).

Note:

M1SpeedScale (50.01) is must be set in the range of:

0.625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed (99.04), because the maximum amount of speed units is 32.000.

If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 7] is generated.

Commissioning hint:

 set M1SpeedScale (50.01) to maximum speed

 set M1BaseSpeed (99.04) to base speed

 set M1SpeedMax (20.02) / M1SpeedMin (20.01) to  maximum speed

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 rpm Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

50.02 M1EncMeasMode (motor 1 encoder 1 measuring mode)

M1EncMeasMode (50.02) selects the measurement mode for pulse encoder 1:

0 = A+/B Dir channel A: rising edges for speed; channel A not: not used; channel B: direction; channel B not: not used;

1 = A+- speed evaluation factor = 1 channels A and A not: rising and falling edges for speed; channels B and B not: not used; speed evaluation factor = 2

2 = A+-/B Dir channels A and A not: rising and falling edges for speed; channel B: direction; channel B not: not used; speed evaluation factor = 2

3 = A+-/B+- channels A, A not and B, B not: rising and falling edges for speed and

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

direction; speed evaluation factor = 4, default

Type: C Volatile: N

Motor 1 speed feedback selection:

0 = EMF speed is calculated by means of the EMF feedback with flux compensation, default

1 = Encoder speed is measured by means of pulse encoder 1 connected to either SDCS-

CON-4 or SDCS-IOB-3

2 = Tacho speed is measured by means of an analog tacho

3 = External MotSpeed (1.04) is updated by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

4 = Encoder2 speed is measured by means of pulse encoder 2 connected to a RTAC-xx, see

Encoder2Module (98.01)

5 = EMF Volt speed is calculated by means of the EMF feedback without flux compensation

Note1:

It is not possible to go into field weakening range when M1SpeeFbSel (50.03) = EMF.

Note2:

When using EMF speed feedback together with a DC-breaker wrong voltage measurements can lead to F532 MotOverSpeed [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 15]. In case of an open DC-breaker the voltage measurement might show high values caused by leakage currents through the snubber circuits of the thyristors, because there is no load on the DC side. To prevent these trips set

MainContAck (10.21) = DCcontact.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

50.04 M1EncPulseNo (motor 1 encoder 1 pulse number)

Amount of pulses per revolution (ppr) for pulse encoder 1

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ppr Type: I Volatile: N

361

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

362

Index

Signal / Parameter name

50.05 MaxEncoderTime (maximum encoder time)

When an encoder is used as speed feedback device the actual speed is measured by counting the amount of pulses per cycle time. The cycle time for the measurement is synchronized with the mains (every 3.3 ms or 2.77 ms).

In case very small speeds have to be measured - that means there is less than one pulse per cycle time - it is possible to increase the measuring time by means of MaxEncoderTime (50.05). The speed is set to zero after MaxEncoderTime (50.05) is elapsed without a measured pulse.

Note:

MaxEncoderTime (50.05) is valid for motor 1, motor 2, encoder 1 and encoder 2.

Note:

Formula to calculate the maximum speed using an encoder:

n

max

300

kHz ppr

* 60

s

with: ppr = pulses per revolution - see M1EncPulseNo (50.04)

300 kHz are the maximum allowed input frequency

Note:

Formula to calculate the minimum speed resolution using an encoder:

n

min

k

*

60

s ppr

*

t cycle

with: k = speed evaluation factor - see M1EncMeasMode (50.02) ppr = pulses per revolution - see M1EncPulseNo (50.04) t cycle

= cycle time of the speed controller, either 3.3 ms or 2.77 ms

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

50.06 SpeedFiltTime (actual speed filter time)

Speed actual filter time for MotSpeed (1.04).

There are three different filters for actual speed and speed error (

n).

SpeedFiltTime (50.06) is filtering the actual speed and should be used for filter times smaller than

30 ms.

SpeedErrFilt (23.06) and SpeedErrFilt2 (23.11) are filtering the speed error (

n) and should be used for filter times greater than 30 ms. It is recommended to set SpeedErrFilt (23.06) =

SpeedErrFilt2 (23.11).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

50.07 PosCountMode (position counter mode)

The position counter is based on the pulse count of pulse encoder 1 and / or pulse encoder 2, with all pulse edges are counted. The 32-bit position value is divided into two 16-bit words for each pulse encoder:

0 = PulseEdges for the low words PosCountLow (3.07), PosCount2Low (3.04),

PosCountInitLo (50.08) and PosCount2InitLo (50.21) is valid:

1 == 1 pulse edge for the high words PosCountHigh (3.08), PosCount2High (3.05),

PosCountInitHi (50.09) and PosCount2InitHi (50.22) is valid:

1 == 65536 pulse edges

1 = Scaled for the low words PosCountLow (3.07), PosCount2Low (3.04),

PosCountInitLo (50.08) and PosCount2InitLo (50.21) is valid:

0 == 0° and 65536 == 360° for the high words PosCountHigh (3.08), PosCount2High (3.05),

PosCountInitHi (50.09) and PosCount2InitHi (50.22) is valid:

1 == 1 revolution, default

2 = Rollover for the low words PosCountLow (3.07), PosCount2Low (3.04),

PosCountInitLo (50.08) and PosCount2InitLo (50.21) is valid:

0 == 0° and 65536 == 360° for the high words PosCountHigh (3.08), PosCount2High (3.05),

PosCountInitHi (50.09) and PosCount2InitHi (50.22) is valid: always 0

363

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

364

Index

Signal / Parameter name

PosCountMode (50.07) = PulseEdges:

High word

65535

2

1

Low word

0 65535 edges

PosCountMode (50.07) = Scaled:

High word

65535

2

1

Low word

High word

65535

2

1

Low word

High word

65535

2

1

Low word

0 65535

0 360° 720° edges

0 360° 720°

PosCountMode (50.07) = Rollover:

High word = 0

Low word Low word

High word = 0

0 360° 720° 0 360° 720°

The position counter is controlled by SyncCommand (10.04), SyncCommand2 (10.05) and

AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bits 9 to 11.

The status can be seen from AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 5 SyncRdy.

The position control function has to be implemented by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

50.08 PosCountInitLo (Position counter encoder 1 low initial value)

Position counter initial low word for pulse encoder 1. Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode

(50.07):

PulseEdges

Scaled

Rollover

1 == 1 pulse edge

0 == 0° and 65536 == 360°

0 == 0° and 65536 == 360°

See also SyncCommand (10.04).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

365

Index

Signal / Parameter name

50.09 PosCountInitHi (Position counter encoder 1 high initial value)

Position counter initial high word for pulse encoder 1. Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode

(50.07):

PulseEdges

Scaled

1 == 65536 pulse edges

1 == 1 revolution

See also SyncCommand (10.04).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

When MotSpeed (1.04) reaches SpeedLev (50.10) the bit AboveLimit [MainStatWord (8.01) bit

10] is set.

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm

Note:

With SpeedLev (50.10) it is possible to automatically switch between the two p- and i-parts of the speed controller, see Par2Select (24.29) = SpeedLevel or SpeedError.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

50.11 DynBrakeDly (dynamic braking delay)

In case of dynamic braking with EMF feedback [M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) = EMF] or a speed feedback fault there is no valid information about the motor speed and thus no zero speed information. To prevent an interlocking of the drive after dynamic braking the speed is assumed zero after DynBrakeDly (50.11) is elapsed:

-1 s = the motor voltage is measured directly at the motor terminals and is thus valid during dynamic braking

0 s = no zero speed signal for dynamic braking is generated

1 s to 3000 s = zero speed signal for dynamic braking is generated after the programmed

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 s

time is elapsed

Type: I Volatile: N

5.01

AITachoVal

Analog tacho scaling

M1SpeedScale (50.01)

M1TachoAdjust (50.12)

M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13)

1.05

SpeedActTach

speed_act_tach_a.dsf

50.12 M1TachoAdjust (motor 1 tacho adjust)

Fine tuning of analog tacho. The value equals the actual speed measured by means of a hand held tacho:

M1TachoAdjust (50.12) = speed actual

HandHeldTacho

Internally limited to:

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

rpm

Note:

Changes of M1TachoAdjust (50.12) are only valid during tacho fine tuning [ServiceMode (99.06) =

TachFineTune]. During tacho fine tuning M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) is automatically forced to EMF.

Attention:

The value of M1TachoAdjust (50.12) has to be the speed measured by the hand held tacho and

not the delta between speed reference and measured speed.

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

366

Index

Signal / Parameter name

50.13 M1TachoVolt1000 (motor 1 tacho voltage at 1000 rpm)

M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13) is used to adjust the voltage the analog tacho is generating at a speed of 1000 rpm:

M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13)  1 V, the setting is used to calculate the tacho gain

M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13) = 0 V, the tacho gain is measured by means of the speed feedback assistant

M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13) = -1 V, the tacho gain was successfully measured and set by means of the speed feedback assistant

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: N

50.14 Unused

50.15 PosSyncMode (position counter synchronization mode)

Position counter synchronization mode for pulse encoder 1 and / or pulse encoder 2 [depends on the setting of SyncCommand (10.04) and SyncCommand2 (10.05)]:

0 = Single the next synchronization of the pulse encoders must be prepared by

1 = Cyclic

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

resetting SyncRdy [AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 5] with ResetSyncRdy

[AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 11], default the synchronization of the pulse encoders happens on every occurrence of the synchronization event

Type: C Volatile: N

50.16 Unused

50.17 WinderScale (winder scaling)

Speed actual scaling. Before speed error (

n) generation.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

50.18 Enc2MeasMode (encoder 2 measuring mode)

Enc2MeasMode (50.18) selects the measurement mode for pulse encoder 2:

0 = A+/B Dir channel A: rising edges for speed; channel A not: not used; channel B: direction; channel B not: not used; speed evaluation factor = 1

1 = A+- channels A and A not: rising and falling edges for speed; channels B and B not: not used; speed evaluation factor = 2

2 = A+-/B Dir channels A and A not: rising and falling edges for speed; channel B: direction; channel B not: not used; speed evaluation factor = 2

3 = A+-/B+- channels A, A not and B, B not: rising and falling edges for speed and

Int. Scaling:

direction; speed evaluation factor = 4, default

1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

367

Index

Signal / Parameter name

50.19 Enc2PulseNo (encoder 2 pulse number)

Amount of pulses per revolution (ppr) for pulse encoder 2, if a pulse encoder extension module

RTAC-xx is used.

In case a resolver is connected via an extension module RRIA-xx Enc2PulseNo (50.19) defines the number of pole pairs. Following formula is valid:

Enc

2

PulseNo

( 50 .

19 )

1024 *

number of pole pairs

Note:

The position counter 2 can be used with the resolver if following conditions are fulfilled:

 number of pole pairs = 1 and thus Enc2PulseNo (50.19) = 1024,

PosCountMode (50.07) = Rollover and

 the resolver’s gear ratio is 1:1 (this can be adapted by means of the application program - see block PosSetGear)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ppr Type: I Volatile: N

50.20 Unused

50.21 PosCount2InitLo (Position counter encoder 2 low initial value)

Position counter initial low word for pulse encoder 2. Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode

(50.07):

PulseEdges

Scaled

Rollover

1 == 1 pulse edge

0 == 0° and 65536 == 360°

0 == 0° and 65536 == 360°

See also SyncCommand2 (10.05).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

50.22 PosCount2InitHi (Position counter encoder 2 high initial value)

Position counter initial high word for pulse encoder 2. Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode

(50.07):

PulseEdges

Scaled

1 == 65536 pulse edges

1 == 1 revolution

0

See also SyncCommand2 (10.05).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Fieldbus

This parameter group defines the communication parameters for fieldbus adapters (F-type, R-type and N-type). The parameter names and the number of the used parameters depend on the selected fieldbus adapter (see fieldbus adapter manual).

Note:

If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR

REFRESH (51.27) = RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter.

51.01 Fieldbus1 (fieldbus parameter 1)

Fieldbus parameter 1

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type:

… …

C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

368

Index

Signal / Parameter name

51.15 Fieldbus15 (fieldbus parameter 15)

Fieldbus parameter 15

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I

51.16 Fieldbus16 (fieldbus parameter 16)

Fieldbus parameter 16

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I

… …

Volatile: N

Volatile: N

51.27 FBA PAR REFRESH (fieldbus parameter refreshing)

If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR

REFRESH (51.27) = RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter.

FBA PAR REFRESH (51.27) is automatically set back to DONE after the refreshing is finished.

0 = DONE default

1 = RESET refresh the parameters of the fieldbus adapter

Note:

This service is only available for R-type fieldbus adapters.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

… …

51.36 Fieldbus36 (fieldbus parameter 36)

Fieldbus parameter 36

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Modbus

This parameter group defines the communication parameters for the Modbus adapter RMBA-xx

(see also Modbus adapter manual).

Note:

If a Modbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon the next power up of the

Modbus adapter.

52.01 StationNumber (station number)

Defines the address of the station. Two stations with the same station number are not allowed online.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

52.02 BaudRate (baud rate)

Defines the transfer rate of the Modbus link:

0 = reserved

5 = 9600

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

9600 Baud, default

Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s). The same setting must be used in all online stations:

0 = reserved

1 = None1Stopbit no parity bit, one stop bit

2 = None2Stopbit no parity bit, two stop bits

3 = Odd

4 = Even

Int. Scaling:

odd parity indication bit, one stop bit even parity indication bit, one stop bit, default

1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Application program parameters

These parameter groups contain all parameters created by the application program.

369

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

370

Index

Signal / Parameter name

DDCS control

70.01 Ch0 NodeAddr (channel 0 node address)

Channel 0 is used for communication with the overriding control.

Node address channel 0:

 if APC2 or NCSA-01 (AC31) is used Ch0 NodeAddr (70.01) = 1

 if AC70 or AC80 is used via the optical module bus (adapters TB810 or TB811) Ch0

NodeAddr (70.01) is calculated from the POSTION terminal of the DRIENG data base element as follows:

1.

multiply the hundreds of the value POSITION by 16

2.

add the tens and ones of the value POSITION to the result

Example:

POSITION | Ch0 NodeAddr (70.01)

16*1+01 = 17

| 16*7+12 = 124

 if AC 800M is used via the optical module bus Ch0 NodeAddr (70.01) is calculated from the position of the DCS600 ENG hardware module as follows:

1.

multiply the hundreds of the value POSITION by 16

2.

add the tens and ones of the value POSITION to the result

Example:

POSITION | Ch0 NodeAddr (70.01)

16*1+12 = 28

16*5+03 = 83

APC / AC31

DDCS

1

DriveBus

-

Node address

ModuleBus

-

Ch0 DriveBus

(71.01)

No

AC80 DriveBus - 1-12 -

Yes

AC80 ModuleBus

FCI (CI810A)

-

-

-

-

17-124

17-124

No

No

CI858 - 1-12 - Yes

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.02 Ch0 LinkControl (channel 0 link control)

DDCS channel 0 light intensity control for transmission LEDs. When using the maximum allowed length of the fiber optic cable set the value to 15.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.03 Ch0 BaudRate (channel 0 baud rate)

Channel 0 communication speed. Ch0 BaudRate (70.03) must be set to 4 Mbits/s when ABB overriding control modules (e.g. FCI or AC 800M) are used. Otherwise the overriding control automatically sets the communication speed.

0 = 8 Mbits/s

1 = 4 Mbits/s, default

2 = 2 Mbits/s

3 = 1 Mbits/s

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

371

Index

Signal / Parameter name

70.04 Ch0 TimeOut (channel 0 timeout)

Time delay before a communication loss with channel 0 is declared. Depending on the setting of

Ch0 ComLossCtrl (70.05) either F543 COM8Com [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 10] or A113 COM8Com

[AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 12] is set.

The communication fault and alarm are inactive, if Ch0 TimeOut (70.04) is set to 0 ms.

Note:

The supervision is activated after the reception of the first valid message.

Note:

The time out starts when the link doesn’t update any of the first 2 receive data sets addressed by

Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).

Example:

When Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) = 10 the reception of data sets 10 and 12 is supervised.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

70.05 Ch0 ComLossCtrl (channel 0 communication loss control)

Ch0 ComLossCtrl (70.05) determines the reaction to a communication loss of channel 0 control.

F543 COM8Com [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 10] is set with:

0 = RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero. Thus the drive stops according to DecTime1 (22.02) or DecTime2 (22.10). When reaching

M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped, default.

In case TorqSelMod (26.03) = Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control, default.

1 = TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero. Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit. When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

In case TorqSelMod (26.03) = Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control, default.

2 = CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

3 = DynBraking dynamic braking

A113 COM8Com [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 12] is set with:

4 = LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed before the warning

5 = FixedSpeed1 the drive continuous to run with FixedSpeed1 (23.02)

Note:

The time out for Ch0 ComLossCtrl (70.05) is set by:

Ch0 TimeOut (70.04)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

70.06 CH0 HW Config (channel 0 hardware configuration)

CH0 HW Config (70.06) is used to enable / disable the regeneration of the Channel 0 optotransmitters in DDCS mode [Ch0 DriveBus (71.01) = No]. Regeneration means that the drive echoes all messages back. DDCS mode is typically used with APC2, AC70, AC80 and module bus of AC 800M.

0 = Ring Regeneration is enabled. Used with ring-type bus topology. Typically when

Channel 0 of all SDCS-COM-8 has been connected to a ring.

1 = Star Regeneration is disabled. Used with star-type topology. Typically with configurations using the NDBU-x5 branching units, default

Note:

This parameter has no effect in DriveBus mode [Ch0 DriveBus (71.01) = Yes].

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

372

Index

Signal / Parameter name

70.07 Ch1 LinkControl (channel 1 link control)

Channel 1 is used for communication with the AIMA-xx adapter. DDCS channel 1 light intensity control for transmission LEDs. When using the maximum allowed length of the fiber optic cable set the value to 15.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.08 Ch2 NodeAddr (channel 2 node address)

Channel 2 is used for point to point communication connections between drives (e.g. masterfollower communication). Node address channel 2:

1, …, 125 = Node addresses of slave drives, not valid if Ch2 MaFoMode (70.09) = Master

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.09 Ch2 MaFoMode (channel 2 master-follower mode)

Channel 2 can be used to send reference values (e.g. torque reference) from the master to one or several followers. Master-follower is an application in which machinery is run by several drives with all motor shafts coupled to each other by gears, chains, belts etc.

0 = reserved

1 = NotUsed channel 2 is not used for master-follower communication, default

2 = Master the drive is the master of the master-follower link and broadcasts via channel 2 the contents of data set 41 [defined by Ch2 MasSig1 (70.10) to Ch2 MasSig3

(70.12)]

3 = Follower the drive is a follower of the master-follower link and receives via channel 2 the contents of data set 41 [defined by Ch2 FolSig1 (70.18) to Ch2 FolSig3

(70.20)]

Note:

The follower’s node address is defined by Ch2 NodeAddr (70.08).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

70.10 Ch2 MasSig1 (channel 2 master signal 1)

Master signal 1 broadcasts via channel 2 as 1 st

value of data set 41 to all followers. The format is

xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Default setting of 701 equals MainCtrlWord (7.01).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.11 Ch2 MasSig2 (channel 2 master signal 2)

Master signal 2 broadcasts via channel 2 as 2 nd

value of data set 41 to all followers. The format is

xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Default setting of 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.12 Ch2 MasSig3 (channel 2 master signal 3)

Master signal 3 broadcasts via channel 2 as 3 rd

value of data set 41 to all followers. The format is

xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Default setting of 210 equals TorqRef3 (2.10).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.13 Ch2 LinkControl (channel 2 link control)

DDCS channel 2 light intensity control for transmission LEDs. When using the maximum allowed length of the fiber optic cable set the value to 15.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

373

Index

Signal / Parameter name

70.14 Ch2 TimeOut (channel 2 timeout)

Time delay before a communication loss with channel 2 is declared. Depending on the setting of

Ch2 ComLossCtrl (70.15) either F543 COM8Com [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 10] or A113 COM8Com

[AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 12] is set.

The communication fault and alarm are inactive, if Ch2 TimeOut (70.14) is set to 0 ms.

Note:

The supervision is activated after the reception of the first valid message.

Note:

The time out starts when the link doesn’t update the master-follower data set.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

70.15 Ch2 ComLossCtrl (channel 2 communication loss control)

Ch2 ComLossCtrl (70.15) determines the reaction to a communication loss of channel 2.

F543 COM8Com [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 10] is set with:

0 = RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero. Thus the drive stops according to DecTime1 (22.02) or DecTime2 (22.10). When reaching

M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped, default.

In case TorqSelMod (26.03) = Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control, default.

1 = TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero. Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit. When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

In case TorqSelMod (26.03) = Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control, default.

2 = CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current. When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked, the contactors are opened, field exciter and fans are stopped.

3 = DynBraking dynamic braking

A113 COM8Com [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 12] is set with:

4 = LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed before the warning

5 = FixedSpeed1 the drive continuous to run with FixedSpeed1 (23.02)

Note:

The time out for Ch2 ComLossCtrl (70.15) is set by:

Ch2 TimeOut (70.14)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

70.16 Unused

70.17 Unused

70.18 Ch2 FolSig1 (channel 2 follower signal 1)

Follower signal 1 receives via channel 2 the 1 st

value of data set 41 from the master. The format is

xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Default setting of 701 equals MainCtrlWord (7.01).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.19 Ch2 FolSig2 (channel 2 follower signal 2)

Follower signal 2 receives via channel 2 the 2 nd

value of data set 41 from the master. The format is

xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Default setting of 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

374

Index

Signal / Parameter name

70.20 Ch2 FolSig3 (channel 2 follower signal 3)

Follower signal 3 receives via channel 2 the 3 rd

value of data set 41 from the master. The format is

xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Default setting of 2501 equals TorqRefA (25.01).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.21 Ch3 HW Config (channel 3 hardware configuration)

CH3 HW Config (70.21) is used to enable / disable the regeneration of the Channel 3 optotransmitters. Regeneration means that the drive echoes all messages back.

0 = Ring Regeneration is enabled. Used with ring-type bus topology.

1 = Star Regeneration is disabled. Used with star-type topology. Typically with configurations using the NDBU-x5 branching units, default

Note:

This parameter has no effect in DriveBus mode [Ch0 DriveBus (71.01) = Yes].

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

70.22 Ch3 NodeAddr (channel 3 node address)

Channel 3 is used for communication with start-up and maintenance tools (e.g. DriveWindow). If several drives are connected together via channel 3, each of them must be set to a unique node address. Node address channel 3:

0, …, 75 valid node address for SDCS-COM-8

76, …, 124 reserved node address for NDBU-x5 branching units

125, …, 254 valid node address for SDCS-COM-8

Attention:

A new node address becomes only valid after the next SDCS-COM-8 power-up.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.23 Ch3 LinkControl (channel 3 link control)

DDCS channel 3 light intensity control for transmission LEDs. When using the maximum allowed length of the fiber optic cable set the value to 15.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.24 Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (channel 0 data set base address)

Data set number of the 1 st

data set used for the communication with the overriding control system

(e.g. field bus adapters, ABB overriding control). The data set addressed by Ch0 DsetBaseAddr

(70.24) is the 1 st

data set send from the overriding control to the drive, while the next - 2 nd

- data set is the first one send from the drive to the overriding control and so on. Up to 8 data sets for each direction are supported (addressing of the data sets see groups 90 to 93).

Examples:

Ch0 DsetBaseAddr(70.24) = 1 data set range 1, …, 16

Ch0 DsetBaseAddr(70.24) = 10 data set range 10, …, 25

Note:

The data sets for the APC-mailbox function (32 and 33) as well as for the master-follower communication (41) are not programmable.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Drivebus

71.01 Ch0 DriveBus (channel 0 drive bus)

Communication mode selection for channel 0. The DriveBus mode is used with the AC80 and AC

800M controllers.

0 = No DDCS mode (recommended when ModuleBus is used)

1 = Yes DriveBus mode, default

Note:

Before changing Ch0 DriveBus (71.01) the communication from the overriding control system has to be disabled e.g. by removing the fiber optic cables.

Note:

A new mode becomes only valid after the next SDCS-COM-8 power-up.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Adaptive Program control

83.01 AdapProgCmd (Adaptive Program command)

Selects the operation mode for the Adaptive Program:

0 = Stop

1 = Start stop, the Adaptive Program is not running and cannot be edited, default running, the Adaptive Program is running and cannot be edited

2 = Edit edit, the Adaptive Program is not running and can be edited

3 = SingleCycle The Adaptive Program runs only once. If a breakpoint is set with

BreakPoint (83.06) the Adaptive Program will stop before the breakpoint.

After the SingleCycle AdapProgCmd (83.01) is automatically set back to

Stop.

4 = SingleStep Runs only one function block. LocationCounter (84.03) shows the function block number, which will be executed during the next SingleStep. After a

SingleStep AdapProgCmd (83.01) is automatically set back to Stop.

LocationCounter (84.03) shows the next function block to be executed. To reset LocationCounter (84.03) to the first function block set AdapProgCmd

(83.01) to Stop again (even if it is already set to Stop).

A136 NoAPTaskTime [AlarmWord3 (9.08) bit 3] is set when TimeLevSel (83.04) is not set to 5

ms, 20 ms, 100 ms or 500 ms but AdapProgCmd (83.01) is set to Start, SingleCycle or

SingleStep

Note:

AdapProgCmd (83.01) = Start, SingleCycle or SingleStep is only valid, if AdapPrgStat (84.01)

Running.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

375

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

376

Index

Signal / Parameter name

83.02 EditCmd (edit command)

Edit Adaptive Program. EditCmd (83.02) is automatically set back to Done after the chosen action is finished:

0 = Done

1 = Push no action or edit of Adaptive Program completed, default

Shifts the function block in the spot defined by EditBlock (83.03) and all subsequent function blocks one spot forward. A new function block can be placed in the now empty spot by programming its parameter set as usual.

Example:

A new function block needs to be placed in between the function block number four (84.22) to (84.27) and five (84.28) to (84.33). In order to do this:

1.

set AdapProgCmd (83.01) = Edit

2.

set EditBlock (83.03) = 5 (selects function block 5 as the desired spot for the new function block)

3.

set EditCmd (83.02) = Push (shifts function block 5 and all subsequent function blocks one spot forward)

2 = Delete

3 = Protect

4.

Program empty spot 5 by means of (84.28) to (84.33)

D eletes the function block in the spot defined by EditBlock (83.03) and shifts all subsequent function blocks one spot backward. To delete all function blocks set EditBlock (83.03) = 17.

Turns all parameters of the Adaptive Program into protected mode

(parameters cannot be read or written to). Before using the Protect command set the pass code by means of PassCode (83.05).

Attention: Do not forget the pass code!

4 = Unprotect Reset of protected mode. Before the Unprotect command can be used,

PassCode (83.05) has to be set.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

83.03 EditBlock (edit block)

Defines the function block which is selected by EditCmd (83.02) = Push or Delete. After a Push or

Delete EditBlock (83.03) is automatically set back to 1.

Note:

To delete all function blocks set EditBlock (83.03) = 17.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

83.04 TimeLevSel (time level select)

Selects the cycle time for the Adaptive Program. This setting is valid for all function blocks.

0 = Off no task selected

1 = 5ms Adaptive Program runs with 5 ms

2 = 20ms Adaptive Program runs with 20 ms

3 = 100ms Adaptive Program runs with 100 ms

4 = 500ms Adaptive Program runs with 500 ms

A136 NoAPTaskTime [AlarmWord3 (9.08) bit 3] is set when TimeLevSel (83.04) is not set to 5

ms, 20 ms, 100 ms or 500 ms but AdapProgCmd (83.01) is set to Start, SingleCycle or

SingleStep.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C

Volatile: N

83.05 PassCode (pass code)

The pass code is a number between 1 and 65535 to write protect Adaptive Programs by means of

EditCmd (83.02). After using Protect or Unprotect PassCode (83.05) is automatically set back to zero.

Attention:

Do not forget the pass code!

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

83.06 BreakPoint (break point)

Breakpoint for AdapProgCmd (83.01) = SingleCycle.

The break point is not used, if BreakPoint (83.06) is set to zero.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Adaptive Program

84.01 AdapPrgStat (Adaptive Program status word)

Adaptive Program status word:

Bit Name Value Comment

B0 Bit 0 1

0

B1 Bit 1 1

0

Adaptive Program is running

Adaptive Program is stopped

Adaptive Program can be edited

Adaptive Program cannot be edited

B2 Bit 2 1 Adaptive Program is being checked

0 no

B3 Bit 3 1

0

B4 Bit 4 1

Adaptive Program is faulty

Adaptive Program is OK

Adaptive Program is protected

0 Adaptive Program is unprotected

Faults in the Adaptive Program can be:

 used function block with not at least input 1 connection

 used pointer is not valid

 invalid bit number for function block Bset

 location of function block PI-Bal after PI function block

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

The Adaptive Program will be checked before running. If there is a fault, AdapPrgStat (84.01) is set to “faulty” and FaultedPar (84.02) shows the faulty input.

Note:

In case of a problem check the value and the attribute of the faulty input.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

84.03 LocationCounter (location counter)

Location counter for AdapProgCmd (83.01) = SingleStep shows the function block number, which will be executed next.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

377

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

378

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Selects the type for function block 1 [Block Parameter Set 1 (BPS1)]. Detailed description of the type can be found in chapter ‘

Function blocks’

:

0 = NotUsed function block is not used

5 = Bset set

6 = Compare compare

12 = MaskSet mask

15 = MulDiv multiplication and division

17 = ParRead parameter

18 = ParWrite parameter

20 = PI-Bal initialization for PI-controller

21 = Ramp ramp

23 = SR flip-flop

24 = Switch-B switch

31 = Jump jump

32 = TachoAdjust adjust analog tacho

33 = Position position

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Selects the source for input 1 of function block 1 (BPS1). There are 2 types of inputs, signals/parameters and constants:

 Signals/parameters are all signals and parameters available in the drive. The format is -

xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Example:

To connect negated SpeedRef (23.01) set Block1In1 (84.05) = -2301 and Block1Attrib

(84.08) = 0h.

To get only a certain bit e.g. RdyRef bit 3 of MainStatWord (8.01) set Block1In1 (84.05) =

801 and Block1Attrib (84.08) = 3h.

 Constants are feed directly into the function block input and have to be declared by means of Block1Attrib (84.08).

Example:

To connect the constant value of 12345 set Block1In1 (84.05) = 12345 and Block1Attrib

(84.08) = 1000h.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Selects the source for input 2 of function block 1 (BPS1). Description see Block1In1 (84.05), except:

To get only a certain bit e.g. RdyRef bit 3 of MainStatWord (8.01) set Block1In2 (84.06) = 801 and

Block1Attrib (84.08) = 30h.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Selects the source for input 3 of function block 1 (BPS1). Description see Block1In1 (84.05), except:

To get only a certain bit e.g. RdyRef bit 3 of MainStatWord (8.01) set Block1In3 (84.07) = 801 and

Block1Attrib (84.08) = 300h.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

84.08 Block1Attrib (function block 1 attribute)

Defines the attributes of function block 1 for all three inputs [Block1In1 (84.05), Block1In2 (84.06) and Block1In3 (84.07)] (BPS1).

Block1Attrib (84.08) is divided into 4 parts:

 Bit number 0 - 3 for input 1 to get a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word.

 Bit number 4 - 7 for input 2 to get a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word.

 Bit number 8 - 11 for input 3 to get a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word.

 Bit number 12 - 14 for input 1 - 3 to feed a constant directly into the input

15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 Bit number

0 packed

Boolean

3. 2. 1.

To use an input as a constant

Function block

input 3 bit selection value, the bit belonging to the input must be set high.

Function block

input 2 bit selection

Function block

input 1 bit selection

This function offers the opportunity to isolate a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word. It is used to connect the Boolean inputs of a function block to a certain bit of a packed Boolean word. With:

Bit 0 == 0000 == 0h

Bit 1 == 0001 == 1h

Bit 15 == 1111 == Fh

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: h Volatile: N

Function block 1 output, can be used as an input for further function blocks.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

379

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

380

Index

Signal / Parameter name

84.10 to

84.99

The description of the parameters for function blocks 2 to 16 is basically the same as for function block 1. For Your convenience the following table shows the parameter numbers of all function blocks1:

Function block

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

BlockxType BlockxIn1 input 1

BlockxIn2 input 2

BlockxIn3 input 1

BlockxAttrib BlockxOutput signal

BlockxOut pointer

84.04 84.05 84.06 84.07 84.08 84.09 86.01

84.10 84.11 84.12 84.13 84.14 84.15 86.02

84.16 84.17 84.18 84.19 84.20 84.21 86.03

84.22 84.23 84.24 84.25 84.26 84.27 86.04

84.28 84.29 84.30 84.31 84.32 84.33 86.05

84.34 84.35 84.36 84.37 84.38 84.39 86.06

84.40 84.41 84.42 84.43 84.44 84.45 86.07

84.46 84.47 84.48 84.49 84.50 84.51 86.08

9 84.52 84.53 84.54 84.55 84.56 84.57 86.09

10 84.58 84.59 84.60 84.61 84.62 84.63 86.10

11 84.64 84.65 84.66 84.67 84.68 84.69 86.11

12 84.70 84.71 84.72 84.73 84.74 84.75 86.12

13 84.76 84.77 84.78 84.79 84.80 84.81 86.13

14 84.82 84.83 84.84 84.85 84.86 84.87 86.14

15 84.88 84.89 84.90 84.91 84.92 84.93 86.15

16 84.94 84.95 84.96 84.97 84.98 84.99 86.16

User constants

85.01 Constant1 (constant 1)

Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.02 Constant2 (constant 2)

Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.03 Constant3 (constant 3)

Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.04 Constant4 (constant 4)

Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.05 Constant5 (constant 5)

Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.06 Constant6 (constant 6)

Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.07 Constant7 (constant 7)

Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

85.08 Constant8 (constant 8)

Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.09 Constant9 (constant 9)

Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.10 Constant10 (constant 10)

Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.11 String1 (string 1)

Sets a string for the Adaptive Program. With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string (e.g. name of an event) with a maximum of 12 characters. This string is shown in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI/C Volatile: N

85.12 String2 (string 2)

Sets a string for the Adaptive Program. With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string (e.g. name of an event) with a maximum of 12 characters. This string is shown in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI/C Volatile: N

85.13 String3 (string 3)

Sets a string for the Adaptive Program. With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string (e.g. name of an event) with a maximum of 12 characters. This string is shown in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI/C Volatile: N

85.14 String4 (string 4)

Sets a string for the Adaptive Program. With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string (e.g. name of an event) with a maximum of 12 characters. This string is shown in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI/C Volatile: N

85.15 String5 (string 5)

Sets a string for the Adaptive Program. With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string (e.g. name of an event) with a maximum of 12 characters. This string is shown in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI/C Volatile: N

381

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

382

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Adaptive Program outputs

The value of function block 1 output [Block1Output (84.09)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter) by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

The value of function block 2 output [Block2Output (84.15)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter) by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

The value of function block 3 output [Block3Output (84.21)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter) by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

The value of function block 4 output [Block1Output (84.27)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter) by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

The value of function block 5 output [Block1Output (84.33)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter) by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

The value of function block 6 output [Block1Output (84.39)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter) by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

The value of function block 7 output [Block1Output (84.45)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter) by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

The value of function block 8 output [Block1Output (84.51)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter) by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

The value of function block 9 output [Block1Output (84.57)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter) by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

383

Index

Signal / Parameter name

86.10 Block10Out (block 10 output)

The value of function block 10 output [Block1Output (84.63)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter) by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.11 Block11Out (block 11 output)

The value of function block 11 output [Block1Output (84.69)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter) by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.12 Block12Out (block 12 output)

The value of function block 12 output [Block1Output (84.75)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter) by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.13 Block13Out (block 13 output)

The value of function block 13 output [Block1Output (84.81)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter) by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.14 Block14Out (block 14 output)

The value of function block 14 output [Block1Output (84.87)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter) by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.15 Block15Out (block 15 output)

The value of function block 15 output [Block1Output (84.93)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter) by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.16 Block16Out (block 16 output)

The value of function block 16 output [Block16Output (84.99)] is written to a sink

(signal/parameter) by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Internal

This parameter group contains internal variables and should not be changed by the user

88.01 Reserved

… …

88.24 Reserved

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

384

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Internally used tacho maximum speed for motor 1. This value is depending on the analog tacho output voltage - e.g. 60 V at 1000 rpm - and the maximum speed of the drive system - which is the maximum of SpeedScaleAct (2.29), M1OvrSpeed (30.16) and M1BaseSpeed (99.04).

This value should only be written to by:

 tacho fine tuning via ServiceMode (99.06) = TachFineTune,

 via M1TachVolt1000 (50.13),

 TachoAdjust block in Adaptive Program,

 TachoAdjust block in application program and

 parameter download

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type:

32767

20000

SI

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

Volatile: N

rpm

Internally used tacho maximum speed for motor 2. This value is depending on the analog tacho output voltage - e.g. 60 V at 1000 rpm - and the maximum speed of the drive system - which is the maximum of SpeedScaleAct (2.29), M2OvrSpeed (49.21) and M2BaseSpeed (49.03).

This value should only be written to by:

 tacho fine tuning via ServiceMode (99.06) = TachFineTune,

 via M2TachVolt1000 (49.27),

 TachoAdjust block in Adaptive Program,

 TachoAdjust block in application program and

 parameter download

Internally limited from:

( 2 .

29 ) *

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type:

32767

20000

SI

rpm to

( 2 .

29 ) *

32767

20000

Volatile: N

rpm

88.27 M1TachoTune (motor 1 tacho tuning factor)

Internally used tacho fine tuning factor for motor 1. This value should only be written to by:

 tacho fine tuning via ServiceMode (99.06) = TachFineTune,

 TachoAdjust block in Adaptive Program,

 TachoAdjust block in application program and

 parameter download

Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

88.28 M2TachoTune (motor 2 tacho tuning factor)

Internally used tacho fine tuning factor for motor 2. This value should only be written to by:

 tacho fine tuning via ServiceMode (99.06) = TachFineTune,

 TachoAdjust block in Adaptive Program,

 TachoAdjust block in application program and

 parameter download

Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

88.29 M1TachoGain (motor 1 tacho tuning gain)

Internally used tacho gain tuning for motor 1. This value should only be written to by:

 tacho gain tuning via ServiceMode (99.06) = SpdFbAssist,

M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13) and

 parameter download

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

385

Index

Signal / Parameter name

88.30 M2TachoGain (motor 2 tacho tuning gain)

Internally used tacho gain tuning for motor 2. This value should only be written to by:

 tacho gain tuning via ServiceMode (99.06) = SpdFbAssist,

M2TachoVolt1000 (49.27) and

 parameter download

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

88.31 AnybusModType (last connected serial communication module)

Internally used memory for the last attached serial communication module. This value should only be written to by:

 the DCS800 firmware and

 parameter download

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Receiving data sets addresses 1

Addresses for the received data transmitted from the overriding control to the drive.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

The data set base address is set in Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).

Overriding control SDCS-CON-4

Dataset table

DDCS link via Ch0 of SDCS-COM-8

Dataset Value

Signals and parameters

(e.g. data storage group 19)

Serial communication via slot 1 of SDCS-CON-4, see group 51

...

X+2

X+4

...

...

1

2

3

1

2

3

...

Address assignment of dataset

Group

90

Index

02

19.01

19.02

19.03

19.04

...

19.12

X see Ch0

DsetBaseAddr (70.24)

datset adr_a.dsf

90.01 DsetXVal1 (data set X value 1)

Data set X value 1 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).

Default setting of 701 equals MainCtrlWord (7.01).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.02 DsetXVal2 (data set X value 2)

Data set X value 2 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).

Default setting of 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.03 DsetXVal3 (data set X value 3)

Data set X value 3 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).

Default setting of 2501 equals TorqRefA (25.01).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

386

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Data set X+2 value 1 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 2.

Default setting of 702 equals AuxCtrlWord (7.02).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+2 value 2 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 2.

Default setting of 703 equals AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+2 value 3 (interval: 3 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 2.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+4 value 1 (interval: 3 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 4.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+4 value 2 (interval: 3 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 4.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+4 value 3 (interval: 3 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr(70.24) + 4.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+6 value 1 (interval: 3 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 6.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+6 value 2 (interval: 3 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 6.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+6 value 3 (interval: 3 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 6.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+8 value 1 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 8.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set x+8 value 2 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 8.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+8 value 3 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 8.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

387

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Data set X+10 value 1 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 10.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+10 value 2 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 10.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+10 value 3 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 10.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Receiving data sets addresses 2

Data set X+12 value 1 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 12.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+12 value 2 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 12.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+12 value 2 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 12.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+14 value 1 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 14.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+14 value 2 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 14.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+14 value 3 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 14.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

388

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Transmit data sets addresses 1

Addresses for the transmit data send from the drive to the overriding control.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

The data set base address is set in Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).

Overriding control SDCS-CON-4

Dataset table

DDCS link via Ch0 of SDCS-COM-8

Dataset Value

Signals and parameters

(e.g. data storage group 19)

Serial communication via slot 1 of SDCS-CON-4, see group 51

...

X+2

X+4

...

...

1

2

3

1

2

3

...

Address assignment of dataset

Group

90

Index

05

19.01

19.02

19.03

19.04

...

19.12

X see Ch0

DsetBaseAddr (70.24)

datset adr_a.dsf

Data set X+1 value 1 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 1.

Default setting of 801 equals MainStatWord (8.01).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+1 value 2 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 1.

Default setting of 104 equals MotSpeed (1.04).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+1 value 3 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 1.

Default setting of 209 equals TorqRef2 (2.09).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+3 value 1 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 3.

Default setting of 802 equals AuxStatWord (8.02).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+3 value 2 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 3.

Default setting of 101 equals MotSpeedFilt (1.01).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+3 value 3 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 3.

Default setting of 108 equals MotTorq (1.08).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

389

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Data set X+5 value 1 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 5.

Default setting of 901 equals FaultWord1 (9.01).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+5 value 2 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 5.

Default setting of 902 equals FaultWord2 (9.02).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+5 value 3 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 5.

Default setting of 903 equals FaultWord3 (9.03).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+7 value 1 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 7.

Default setting of 904 equals FaultWord4 (9.04).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+7 value 2 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 7.

Default setting of 906 equals AlarmWord1 (9.06).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+7 value 3 (interval: 3 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 7.

Default setting of 907 equals AlarmWord2 (9.07).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+9 value 1 (interval: 30 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 9.

Default setting of 908 equals AlarmWord3 (9.08).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+9 value 2 (interval: 30 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 9.

Default setting of 803 equals LimWord (8.03).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+9 value 3 (interval: 30 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 9.

Default setting of 805 equals DI StatWord (8.05).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+11 value 1 (interval: 30 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 11.

Default setting of 806 equals DO StatWord (8.06).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+11 value 2 (interval: 30 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 11.

Default setting of 124 equals BridgeTemp (1.24).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+11 value 3 (interval: 30 ms). Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 11.

Default setting of 112 equals Mot1TempMeas (1.22).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

390

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Transmit data sets addresses 2

Data set X+13 value 1 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 13.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+13 value 2 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 13.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+13 value 3 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 13.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+15 value 1 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 15.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+15 value 2 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 15.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Data set X+15 value 3 (interval: 30 ms).

Data set address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 15.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

DCSLink control

This parameter group defines the communication parameters for the DCSLink board SDCS-DSL-4.

For communication between the armature converter and the field exciters respectively 12-pulse communication only the basic communication parameters [(94.01) to (94.09)] have to be set.

For master-follower and drive-to-drive communication the basic communication parameters have to be set. The data transfer is done by means of the 4 available mailboxes [(94.12) to (94.35)].

Parameter settings, default values: single drive with excitation

12-pulse drive

Example parameter settings for:

DCSLinkNodeID (94.01) = 1

M1FexNode (94.08) = 21

M2FexNode (94.09) = 30

DCSLinkNodeID (94.01) = 1

12P SlaNode (94.04) = 31

M1FexNode (94.08) = 21 see example 1 see example 2 master-follower (94.01) field exciter (94.08)

12-pulse slave (94.04) and (94.01) drive-to-drive (94.01)

1

1

2

2

3

3

21 22 23 …

31 32 - -

-

11

Example 1:

Single drive with one or two field exciters and communication supervision see example 3

31 see example 3

- see example 4

- see example 5

Example 2:

12-pulse configuration and communication supervision

391

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

392

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Example 3:

Master-follower configuration (broadcast) with one mailbox activated and communication supervision

Example 4:

Two 12-pulse drives in master-follower configuration and communication supervision

Example 5:

Drive-to-drive configuration

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

94.01 DCSLinkNodeID (DCSLink node ID)

Defines the DCSLink node ID of the station. Two stations with the same node ID are not allowed.

Maximum allowed station count is 50. See also examples 1 to 5 above. The DCSLink node ID is inactive, if DCSLinkNodeID (94.01) is set to 0.

The drive trips with F508 I/OBoardLoss [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 7], if the SDCS-DSL-4 board is chosen, but not connected or faulty.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.02 BaudRate (baud rate)

Defines the transfer rate of the DCSLink. The transfer rate decreases with the total length of the

DCSLink cable:

0 = 20 kBit/s 20 kBit/s, total cable length max. 500 m

1 = 50 kBit/s 50 kBit/s, total cable length max. 500 m

2 = 125 kBit/s 125 kBit/s, total cable length max. 500 m

3 = 250 kBit/s 250 kBit/s, total cable length max. 250 m

4 = 500 kBit/s 500 kBit/s, total cable length max. 100 m, default

5 = 800 kBit/s 800 kBit/s, total cable length max. 50 m

6 = 888 kBit/s 888 kBit/s, total cable length max. 35 m

7 = 1 MBit/s 1 MBit/s, total cable length approximately 25 m

Note:

Maximum total cable length should not exceed 100 m. Maximum amount of connected stations is

50 (e.g. 25 drives including one external field exciter each).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

94.03 12P TimeOut (12-pulse timeout)

Time delay before a 12-pulse communication break is declared and F535 12PulseCom

[FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 2] is set.

12P TimeOut (94.03) is only active in the 12-pulse master.

The communication fault is inactive, if 12P TimeOut (94.03) is set to 0 ms.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

94.04 12P SlaNode (12-pulse slave node ID)

Defines the DCSLink node ID of the 12-pulse slave drive in the 12-pulse master drive. See also examples 2 and 4 above. The 12-pulse node ID is inactive, if 12P SlaNode (94.04) is set to 0.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.05 Unused

94.06 Unused

Time delay before a field exciter communication break is declared. Depending on the fex with the communication break either F516 M1FexCom [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 15] or F519 M2FexCom

[FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 2] is set.

FexTimeOut (94.07) is only active in the armature converter.

The communication fault is inactive, if FexTimeOut (94.07) is set to 0 ms.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

94.08 M1FexNode (motor 1 field exciter node ID)

Defines the DCSLink node ID of motor 1 field exciter in the drive. See also examples 1 to 4 above.

The field exciter node ID is inactive, if M1FexNode (94.08) is set to 0.

Note:

M1FexNode (94.08) is void, when M1UsedFexType (99.12) = NotUsed or OnBoard.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

393

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

394

Index

Signal / Parameter name

94.09 M2FexNode (motor 2 field exciter node ID)

Defines the DCSLink node ID of motor 2 field exciter in the drive. See also example 1 above. The field exciter node ID is inactive, if M2FexNode (94.09) is set to 0.

Note:

M2FexNode (94.09) is void, when M2UsedFexType (49.07) = NotUsed or OnBoard.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.10 Unused

94.11 Unused

The drive-to-drive and master-follower communication utilizes 4 mailboxes to transfer data. Thus data transfer to any station in the system is possible. Each mailbox can transmit / receive up to 4 values. Positive mailbox node ID numbers only transmit data, negative only receive data. To get communication mailbox node ID pairs are needed.

Example 6:

Drive-to-drive configuration, sending signals from drive 2 using MailBox3 (94.24) to drive 3 using

MailBox3 (94.24) by means of 5 to transmit data and -5 to receive data.

1 st

drive

P94.01 = 1

P94.12 = 1

P94.18 = -2

P94.24 = 3

P94.30 = -4

2 nd

drive

P94.01 = 2

P94.12 = -3

P94.18 = 4

P94.24 = 5

P94.30 = -6

3 rd

drive

P94.01 = 3

P94.12 = -1

P94.18 = 2

P94.24 = -5

P94.30 = 6

Example 7:

Master-follower configuration; send TorqRef3 (2.10) from the master drive via MailBox1 (94.12) to

TorqRefA (25.01) of the followers via MailBox2 (94.18).

Master drive

P94.01 = 1

P94.12 = 1

P94.14 = 210 (T ref3

)

1 st

follower drive

P94.01 = 2

P94.18 = -1

P94.20 = 2501 (T refA

)

2 nd

follower drive

P94.01 = 3

P94.18 = -1

P94.20 = 2501 (T refA

)

10 th

follower drive

P94.01 = 11

P94.18 = -1

P94.20 = 2501 (T refA

)

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

395

Index

Signal / Parameter name

94.12 MailBox1 (mailbox 1 node ID)

Mailbox 1 can transmit / receive up to 4 values [TrmtRecVal1.1 (94.13), TrmtRecVal1.2 (94.14),

TrmtRecVal1.3 (94.15) and TrmtRecVal1.4 (94.16)]. Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit data, negative receive data. To get communication, mailbox node ID pairs are needed. See also examples 6 and 7 above. The mailbox is inactive, if MailBox1 (94.12) is set to 0.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.13 MailBoxCycle1 (cycle time mailbox 1)

The function of MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) is depending on the setting of MailBox1 (94.12).

If MailBox1 (94.12) is positive:

 data will be transmitted

MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) sets the transmitting and receiving intervals

 if MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) is set to 3 ms the transmit and receiving intervals are synchronized with mains frequency, either 3.3 ms or 2.77 ms

 values from 1 - 2 ms are too fast and will generate a fault

 the communication is inactive, if MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) is set to 0 ms

If MailBox1 (94.12) is negative:

 data will be received

MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) sets the communication timeout. This is the time delay before a drive-to-drive or master-follower communication break is declared. Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl (30.28) either F544 P2PandMFCom [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 11] or

A112 P2PandMFCom [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 11] is set.

 the communication fault and alarm are inactive, if MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) is set to 0 ms

Attention:

The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time parameter.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

94.14 TrmtRecVal1.1 (mailbox 1 transmit / receive value 1)

Mailbox 1 transmit / receive value 1.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.15 TrmtRecVal1.2 (mailbox 1 transmit / receive value 2)

Mailbox 1 transmit / receive value 2.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.16 TrmtRecVal1.3 (mailbox 1 transmit / receive value 3)

Mailbox 1 transmit / receive value 3.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.17 TrmtRecVal1.4 (mailbox 1 transmit / receive value 4)

Mailbox 1 transmit / receive value 4.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.18 MailBox2 (mailbox 2 node ID)

Mailbox 2 can transmit / receive up to 4 values [TrmtRecVal2.1 (94.20), TrmtRecVal2.2 (94.21),

TrmtRecVal2.3 (94.22) and TrmtRecVal2.4 (94.23)]. Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit data, negative receive data. To get communication, mailbox node ID pairs are needed. See also examples 6 and 7 above. The mailbox is inactive, if MailBox2 (94.18) is set to 0.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

396

Index

Signal / Parameter name

94.19 MailBoxCycle2 (cycle time mailbox 2)

The function of MailBoxCycle2 (94.19) is depending on the setting of MailBox2 (94.18).

If MailBox2 (94.18) is positive:

 data will be transmitted

MailBoxCycle2 (94.19) sets the transmitting and receiving intervals

 if MailBoxCycle2 (94.19) is set to 3 ms the transmit and receiving intervals are synchronized with mains frequency, either 3.3 ms or 2.77 ms

 values from 1 - 2 ms are too fast and will generate a fault

 the communication is inactive, if MailBoxCycle2 (94.19) is set to 0 ms

If MailBox2 (94.18) is negative:

 data will be received

MailBoxCycle2 (94.19) sets the communication timeout. This is the time delay before a drive-to-drive or master-follower communication break is declared. Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl (30.28) either F544 P2PandMFCom [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 11] or

A112 P2PandMFCom [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 11] is set.

 the communication fault and alarm are inactive, if MailBoxCycle2 (94.19) is set to 0 ms

Attention:

The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time parameter.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

94.20 TrmtRecVal2.1 (mailbox 2 transmit / receive value 1)

Mailbox 2 transmit / receive value 1.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.21 TrmtRecVal2.2 (mailbox 2 transmit / receive value 2)

Mailbox 2 transmit / receive value 2.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.22 TrmtRecVal2.3 (mailbox 2 transmit / receive value 3)

Mailbox 2 transmit / receive value 3.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.23 TrmtRecVal2.4 (mailbox 2 transmit / receive value 4)

Mailbox 2 transmit / receive value 4.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.24 MailBox3 (mailbox 3 node ID)

Mailbox 3 can transmit / receive up to 4 values [TrmtRecVal3.1 (94.26), TrmtRecVal3.2 (94.27),

TrmtRecVal3.3 (94.28) and TrmtRecVal3.4 (94.29)]. Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit data, negative receive data. To get communication, mailbox node ID pairs are needed. See also examples 6 and 7 above. The mailbox is inactive, if MailBox3 (94.24) is set to 0.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

94.25 MailBoxCycle3 (cycle time mailbox 3)

The function of MailBoxCycle3 (94.25) is depending on the setting of MailBox3 (94.24).

If MailBox3 (94.24) is positive:

 data will be transmitted

MailBoxCycle3 (94.25) sets the transmitting and receiving intervals

 values from 1 - 4 ms are too fast and will generate a fault

 the communication is inactive, if MailBoxCycle3 (94.25) is set to 0 ms

If MailBox3 (94.24) is negative:

 data will be received

MailBoxCycle3 (94.25) sets the communication timeout. This is the time delay before a drive-to-drive or master-follower communication break is declared. Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl (30.28) either F544 P2PandMFCom [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 11] or

A112 P2PandMFCom [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 11] is set.

 the communication fault and alarm are inactive, if MailBoxCycle3 (94.25) is set to 0 ms

Attention:

The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time parameter.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

94.26 TrmtRecVal3.1 (mailbox 3 transmit / receive value 1)

Mailbox 3 transmit / receive value 1.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.27 TrmtRecVal3.2 (mailbox 3 transmit / receive value 2)

Mailbox 3 transmit / receive value 2.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.28 TrmtRecVal3.3 (mailbox 3 transmit / receive value 3)

Mailbox 3 transmit / receive value 3.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.29 TrmtRecVal3.4 (mailbox 3 transmit / receive value 4)

Mailbox 3 transmit / receive value 4.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.30 MailBox4 (mailbox 4 node ID)

Mailbox 4 can transmit / receive up to 4 values [TrmtRecVal4.1 (94.32), TrmtRecVal4.2 (94.33),

TrmtRecVal4.3 (94.34) and TrmtRecVal4.4 (94.35)]. Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit data, negative receive data. To get communication, mailbox node ID pairs are needed. See also examples 6 and 7 above. The mailbox is inactive, if MailBox4 (94.30) is set to 0.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

397

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

398

Index

Signal / Parameter name

94.31 MailBoxCycle4 (cycle time mailbox 4)

The function of MailBoxCycle4 (94.31) is depending on the setting of MailBox4 (94.30).

If MailBox4 (94.30) is positive:

 data will be transmitted

MailBoxCycle4 (94.31) sets the transmitting and receiving intervals

 values from 1 - 4 ms are too fast and will generate a fault

 the communication is inactive, if MailBoxCycle4 (94.31) is set to 0 ms

If MailBox4 (94.30) is negative:

 data will be receive

MailBoxCycle4 (94.31) sets the communication timeout. This is the time delay before a drive-to-drive or master-follower communication break is declared. Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl (30.28) either F544 P2PandMFCom [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 11] or

A112 P2PandMFCom [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 11] is set.

 the communication fault and alarm are inactive, if MailBoxCycle4 (94.31) is set to 0 ms

Attention:

The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time parameter.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

94.32 TrmtRecVal4.1 (mailbox 4 transmit / receive value 1)

Mailbox 4 transmit / receive value 1.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.33 TrmtRecVal4.2 (mailbox 4 transmit / receive value 2)

Mailbox 4 transmit / receive value 2.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.34 TrmtRecVal4.3 (mailbox 4 transmit / receive value 3)

Mailbox 4 transmit / receive value 3.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.35 TrmtRecVal4.4 (mailbox 4 transmit / receive value 4)

Mailbox 4 transmit / receive value 4.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

399

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Measurement

97.01 TypeCode (type code)

TypeCode (97.01) is preset in the factory and is write protected. It identifies the drives current-, voltage-, temperature measurement and its quadrant type. To un-protect the type code set

ServiceMode (99.06) = SetTypeCode. The change of the type code is immediately taken over and

ServiceMode (99.06) is automatically set back to NormalMode:

0 = None the type code is set by user, see S ConvScaleCur (97.02), S

ConvScaleVolt (97.03), S MaxBrdgTemp (97.04) and S BlockBridge2

(97.07) for e.g. rebuild kits type code, see table 1 = S01-0020-04 to

148 = S02-5200-05 type code, see table

The drive’s basic type code: DCS800-AAX-YYYY-ZZB

Product family: DCS800

Bridge type:

Module type:

Rated AC voltage:

X

YYYY

ZZ

= R0 Rebuild system

= E0 Panel solution

= A0 Enclosed converter

= 1 Single bridge (2-Q)

= 2 2 anti parallel bridges (4-Q)

= Rated DC current

= 04 230 VAC - 400 VAC

= 05 230 VAC - 525 VAC

= 06 270 VAC - 600 VAC

= 07 315 VAC - 690 VAC

= 08 360 VAC - 800 VAC

Power connection: B

= 10 450 VAC - 990 VAC

= 12 540 VAC - 1200 VAC

= - Standard D1 - D6

= L Left side D7

= R Right side D7

= a Second thyristor type D5, D6

Attention:

When using D1, D2, D3 or D4 modules the current and voltage range of the type code setting is limited to max 1000 ADC and max 600 VAC.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

400

Index

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

8

9

10

11

12

Type code table

0

None

1

2

S01-0020-04

S01-0020-05

3

4

5

6

7

S01-0045-04

S01-0045-05

S01-0065-04

S01-0065-05

S01-0090-04

S01-0090-05

S01-0125-04

S01-0125-05

S01-0180-04

S01-0180-05

S01-0230-04

S01-0230-05

S01-0315-04

S01-0315-05

S01-0290-06

S01-0405-04

S01-0405-05

S01-0470-04

S01-0470-05

S01-0590-06

S01-0610-04

S01-0610-05

S01-0740-04

S01-0740-05

S01-0900-04

S01-0900-05

S01-0900-06

S01-0900-07

S01-1200-04

S01-1200-05

S01-1500-04

S01-1500-05

S01-1500-06

S01-1500-07

S01-1900-08

S01-2000-04

S01-2000-05

S01-2000-06

S01-2000-07

S01-2050-05

S01-2050-06

S01-2050-07

S01-2500-04

S01-2500-05

S01-2500-06

S01-2500-07

S01-2500-08

S01-2050-10

Signal and parameter list

Signal / Parameter name

51

S01-2600-10

52

S01-2600-12

53

S01-3000-04

54

S01-3000-05

55

S01-3000-06

56

S01-3000-07

57

S01-3000-08

58

S01-3300-04

59

S01-3300-05

60

S01-3300-06

61

S01-3300-07

62

S01-3300-08

63

S01-3300-12

64

S01-4000-04

65

S01-4000-05

66

S01-4000-06

67

S01-4000-07

68

S01-4000-08

69

S01-3300-10

70

S01-4000-10

71

S01-4800-06

72

S01-4800-07

73

S01-4800-08

74

S01-5200-04

75

S01-5200-05

76

S02-0025-04

77

S02-0025-05

78

S02-0050-04

79

S02-0050-05

80

S02-0075-04

81

S02-0075-05

82

S02-0100-04

83

S02-0100-05

84

S02-0140-04

85

S02-0140-05

86

S02-0200-04

87

S02-0200-05

88

S02-0260-04

89

S02-0260-05

90

S02-0350-04

91

S02-0350-05

92

S02-0320-06

93

S02-0450-04

94

S02-0450-05

95

S02-0520-04

96

S02-0520-05

97

S02-0650-06

98

S02-0680-04

99

S02-0680-05

100

S02-0820-04

101

S02-0820-05

S02-3000-05

S02-2500-06

S02-2500-07

S02-3000-06

S02-3000-07

S02-2500-08

S02-3000-08

S02-3300-04

S02-3300-05

S02-3300-06

S02-3300-07

S02-3300-08

S02-3300-12

S02-4000-04

S02-4000-05

S02-4000-06

S02-4000-07

S02-4000-08

S02-3300-10

S02-4000-10

S02-4800-06

S02-4800-07

S02-4800-08

S02-5200-04

S02-5200-05

S01-4000-12

S02-4000-12

S02-1000-04

S02-1000-05

S02-0900-06

S02-0900-07

S02-1200-04

S02-1200-05

S02-1500-04

S02-1500-05

S02-1500-06

S02-1500-07

S02-1900-08

S02-2000-04

S02-2000-05

S02-2050-05

S02-2050-06

S02-2050-07

S02-2500-04

S02-2500-05

S02-2050-10

S02-2600-10

S02-2600-12

S02-3000-04

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

102

103

104

105

106

107

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

401

Index

Signal / Parameter name

97.02 S ConvScaleCur (set: converter DC current scaling)

Adjustment of DC current measuring channels (SDCS-PIN-4 or SDCS-PIN-51). S ConvScaleCur

(97.02) is write protected, unless ServiceMode (99.06) = SetTypeCode:

0 A = take value from TypeCode (97.01), default

1 A to 30000 A = take value from S ConvScaleCur (97.02)

This value overrides the type code and is immediately visible in ConvNomCur (4.05). ServiceMode

(99.06) has to be set back to NormalMode by the user.

Attention:

When using D1, D2, D3 or D4 modules the current and voltage range of the type code setting is limited to max 1000 ADC and max 600 VAC.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: N

97.03 S ConvScaleVolt (set: converter AC voltage scaling)

Adjustment of AC voltage measuring channels (SDCS-PIN-4 or SDCS-PIN-51). S ConvScaleVolt

(97.03) is write protected, unless ServiceMode (99.06) = SetTypeCode:

0 V = take value from TypeCode (97.01), default

1 V to 2000 V = take value from S ConvScaleVolt (97.03)

This value overrides the type code and is immediately visible in ConvNomVolt (4.04). ServiceMode

(99.06) has to be set back to NormalMode by the user.

Attention:

When using D1, D2, D3 or D4 modules the current and voltage range of the type code setting is limited to max 1000 ADC and max 600 VAC.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: N

97.04 S MaxBrdgTemp (set: maximum bridge temperature)

Adjustment of the converters heat sink temperature tripping level in degree centigrade:

0 °C = take value from TypeCode (97.01), default

1 °C to 149 °C = take value from S MaxBrdgTemp (97.04)

150 °C = the temperature supervision is inactive, if S MaxBrdgTemp (97.04) is set to 150 °C (e.g. for rebuild kits)

This value overrides the type code and is immediately visible in MaxBridgeTemp (4.17).

Note:

Maximum setting for converters size D6 and D7 is 55 °C, because the cooling air input temperature is measured. For more details see DCS800 Hardware Manual.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C Type: I Volatile: N

97.05 ConvTempDly (converter temperature delay)

Instead of measuring the converter temperature it is possible to measure the converter fan current by means of the PW-1002/3 board. ConvTempDly (97.05) avoids false fault messages during the fan acceleration:

0 s = Converter temperature measurement is released. The drive trips with F504

ConvOverTemp [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 4] in case of excessive converter temperature, default

1 s to 300 s = Converter fan current measurement is released when the drive is in On state

[UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0

On = 1]. The drive trips with F511 ConvFanCur

[FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 10] in case of missing or excessive converter fan current, after ConvTempDly (97.05) is elapsed.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

97.06 Unused

97.07 S BlockBridge2 (set: block bridge 2)

Bridge 2 can be blocked:

0 = Auto operation mode is taken from TypeCode (97.01), default

1 = BlockBridge2 block bridge 2 (== 2-Q operation), for e.g. 2-Q rebuild kits

2 = RelBridge2 release bridge 2 (== 4-Q operation), for e.g. 4-Q rebuild kits

This value overrides the type code and is immediately visible in QuadrantType (4.15).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

402

Index

Signal / Parameter name

97.08 Unused

Mains voltage compensation filter time constant. Is used for the mains voltage compensation at the current controller output.

Setting MainsCompTime (97.09) to 1000 ms disables the mains voltage compensation.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

97.10 Unused

97.11 Unused

97.12 CompUkPLL (phase locked loop to compensate for uk)

The measured phase angle of the firing unit's PLL can be corrected in order to compensate the error caused by the commutation related voltage drops. The compensation depends on the uk

(short circuit voltage) of the mains.

CompUkPLL (97.12) defines the mains short circuit voltage - in percent of NomMainsVolt (99.10) - which is caused by the converter’s nominal current for the PLL correction:

CompUkPLL

 uk *

S c

S t

* 100 % with: uk = related mains short circuit voltage,

S c

= apparent power of converter and

S t

= apparent power of transformer

Commissioning hint:

CompUkPLL (97.12) is used to compensate for the phase shift of the mains due to commutation notches, in case the mains are measured on the secondary side of the dedicated transformer.

The whole situation leads to unstable armature current during high motor loads. Increase

CompUkPLL (97.12) slowly (1 by 1) until the armature current becomes stable.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

97.13 DevLimPLL (phase locked loop deviation limit)

Maximum allowed deviation of the PLL controller. The current controller is blocked in case the limit is reached - see CurCtrlStat2 (6.04) bit 13:

 for 50 Hz mains is valid:

360

 

20

ms

1

50

Hz



20 .

000

 for 60 Hz mains is valid:

360

 

16 .

67

ms

1



16 .

667

60

Hz

The PLL input can be seen in PLLIn (3.20). The PLL output can be seen in MainsFreqAct (1.38).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 ° Type: I Volatile: N

97.14 KpPLL (phase locked loop p-part)

Gain of firing unit’s phase lock loop.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

97.15 TfPLL (phase locked loop filter)

Filter of firing unit’s phase lock loop.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

97.16 AdjIDC (adjust DC current)

AdjIDC (97.16) is used to cover drives with different current measuring circuits for bridge 1 and bridge 2. It rescales the measured armature current if bridge2 is active.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Offset value - in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - added to the armature current measurement.

OffsetIDC (97.17) adjusts ConvCurAct (1.16) and the real armature current.

Setting OffsetIDC (97.17) to 0 disables the manual offset.

Commissioning hint:

In case a 2-Q converter module is used and the motor turns with speed reference equals zero increase OffsetIDC (97.17) until the motor is not turning anymore.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

97.18 ZeroCurDetect (zero current detection)

Selects the zero current detection method. Use a binary signal, if the zero current detection is done by another converter:

0 = Current

1 = Voltage based on the converter’s own zero current detection resistors, default based on the converter’s own thyristor voltages, not valid when galvanic isolation is used

2 = CurAndVolt based on discontinuous current and thyristor voltages, not valid when

3 = DI1

4 = DI2

5 = DI3

6 = DI4

7 = DI5

8 = DI6

9 = DI7

10 = DI8

11 = DI9 galvanic isolation is used

1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero

1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero

1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero

1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero

1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero

1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero

1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero

1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero

1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, only available with digital

12 = DI10 extension board

1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, only available with digital extension board

13 = DI11 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, only available with digital extension board

14 = MCW Bit11 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11

15 = MCW Bit12 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12

16 = MCW Bit13 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13

17 = MCW Bit14 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14

18 = MCW Bit15 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15

19 = ACW Bit12 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12

20 = ACW Bit13 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13

21 = ACW Bit14 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14

22 = ACW Bit15 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15

Note:

If zero current is detected by means of the thyristor voltages either 10 % of MainsVoltAct (1.11) or

10 V is undershot.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

403

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

404

Index

Signal / Parameter name

After a command to change current direction - see CurRefUsed (3.12) - the opposite current has to be reached before ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) has been elapsed otherwise the drive trips with F557

ReversalTime [FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 8].

I ref

CtrlRefUsed (3.12)

changes polarity

I act

Zero current detection

CurCtrlStat (6.03)

bit 13

CtrlStatMas (6.09)

RevDly

bit 12 is set

(43.14)

t

ZeroCurTimeOut

(97.19)

RevDly_a.dsf

The reversal delay starts when zero current has been detected - see CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 13 - after a command to change current direction - see CurRefUsed (3.12) - has been given.

The time needed to change the current direction can be longer when changing from motoring mode to regenerative mode at high motor voltages, because the motor voltage must be reduced before switching to regenerative mode - see also RevVoltMargin (44.21).

ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) must have the same setting for 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave with one exception only:

If there is no current measurement in the 12-pulse serial slave, set ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) in the 12-pulse serial slave to maximum (12000 ms).

Note:

12P RevTimeOut (47.05) must be longer than ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) and

ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) must be longer than RevDly (43.14).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

97.20 TorqActFiltTime (actual torque filter time)

Torque actual filter time constant for MotTorqFilt (1.07). Is used for the EMF controller and the

EMF feed forward.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

405

Index

Signal / Parameter name

97.21 ResetAhCounter (reset ampere hour counter)

Binary signal to reset AhCounter (1.39):

0 = NotUsed default

1 = DI1

2 = DI2

3 = DI3

4 = DI4

5 = DI5

6 = DI6

7 = DI7

8 = DI8

9 = DI9

10 = DI10

Reset by rising edge (0

 1)

Reset by rising edge (0

 1)

Reset by rising edge (0

 1)

Reset by rising edge (0

 1)

Reset by rising edge (0

 1)

Reset by rising edge (0

 1)

Reset by rising edge (0

 1)

Reset by rising edge (0

 1)

Reset by rising edge (0

 1), only available with digital extension board

Reset by rising edge (0

 1), only available with digital extension board

11 = DI11 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), only available with digital extension board

12 = MCW Bit11 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11

13 = MCW Bit12 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12

14 = MCW Bit13 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13

15 = MCW Bit14 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14

16 = MCW Bit15 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15

17 = ACW Bit12 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12

18 = ACW Bit13 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13

19 = ACW Bit14 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14

20 = ACW Bit15 Reset by rising edge (0

 1), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

97.22 Unused

97.23 AdjUDC (adjust DC voltage)

AdjUDC (97.23) is used to cover drives with different voltage measuring circuits for armature and mains voltage. It rescales the armature voltage measurement.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

97.24 OffsetUDC (offset DC voltage measurement)

Offset value - in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02) - added to the armature voltage measurement.

OffsetUDC (97.24) adjusts ArmVoltAct (1.14) and the real armature voltage.

Setting OffsetUDC (97.24) to 5.1 % disables the manual offset.

If a DC-breaker is used set OffsetUDC (97.24) = 0

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

97.25 EMF ActFiltTime (actual EMF filter time)

EMF actual filter time constant for EMF VoltActRel (1.17). Is used for the EMF controller and the

EMF feed forward.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

97.26 HW FiltUDC (hardware filter DC voltage measurement)

Hardware filter for the UDC measuring circuit:

0 = FilterOff the filter time is set to 200

s

1 = FilterOn the filter time is set to 10 ms, default

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

406

Index

Signal / Parameter name

97.28 TestFire (type of thyristor diagnosis)

The thyristor diagnosis is started by setting ServiceMode (99.06) = ThyDiagnosis. TestFire

(97.28) defines which type of thyristor diagnosis should be used:

0 = Off

1 = V11

2 = V12

3 = V13

4 = V14

5 = V15

6 = V16

7 = V21

8 = V22

9 = V23

10 = V24

11 = V25

12 = V26 all thyristors are tested, the result is shown in Diagnosis (9.11), default firing pulses for thyristor V11 are released firing pulses for thyristor V12 are released firing pulses for thyristor V13 are released firing pulses for thyristor V14 are released firing pulses for thyristor V15 are released firing pulses for thyristor V16 are released firing pulses for thyristor V21 are released firing pulses for thyristor V22 are released firing pulses for thyristor V23 are released firing pulses for thyristor V24 are released firing pulses for thyristor V25 are released firing pulses for thyristor V26 are released

C1 (+)

V11

F11

V24 V13

F13

V26 V15

F15

V22

branching fuse

U1

V1

W1

F14

V14 V21

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

F16

V16

Type:

F12

V25

branch

V23

C

V12

Volatile: N

D1 (-)

principle_B6_a.dsf

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Option modules

98.01 Encoder2Module (encoder 2 extension module)

This parameter is used to activate an extension module for either a second encoder (RTAC-xx) or a resolver (RRIA-xx).

RTAC-xx / RRIA-xx extension module interface selection. Encoder2Module (98.01) releases pulse encoder 2 or a resolver.

The modules can be connected in option slot 1, 2, 3 or alternatively onto the external I/O module adapter (AIMA) connected via SDCS-COM-8. The node ID 0 (see Node ID selector S1) is only required for connection via AIMA:

0 = NotUsed no RTAC-xx / RRIA-xx is used, default

1 = Slot1

2 = Slot2

3 = Slot3

4 = AIMA

RTAC-xx / RRIA-xx is connected in option slot 1

RTAC-xx / RRIA-xx is connected in option slot 2

RTAC-xx / RRIA-xx is connected in option slot 3

RTAC-xx / RRIA-xx is connected onto the external I/O module adapter (AIMA), node ID = 0

The drive trips with F508 I/OBoardLoss [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 7], if the RTAC-xx / RRIA-xx extension module is chosen, but not connected or faulty.

Attention:

To ensure proper connection and communication of the RTAC-xx / RRIA-xx board with the SDCS-

CON-4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery.

Switches on RTAC-xx or RRIA-xx:

Node ID selector (S1) is only valid when plugged in an AIMA board

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

407

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

408

Index

Signal / Parameter name

98.02 CommModule (communication modules)

For the communication modules following selections are available:

5

6

7

8

Fieldbus (R-type) DDCS (e.g. AC 800M) DDCS (N-type fieldbus) Modbus (RMBA-xx)

0 - - - -

1 X

2 -

-

X

-

-

-

-

3 -

4 -

-

-

X

-

-

X

X (read only)

-

-

X

X

X

-

-

-

-

X

-

-

X (read only)

X (read only)

X /read only)

0 = NotUsed

1 = Fieldbus no communication used, default

The drive communicates with the overriding control via an R-type fieldbus adapter connected in option slot 1. The data set base address has to be set to 1, set Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) = 1. This choice is not valid for the Modbus.

2 = COM-8/AC800x The drive communicates with the ABB overriding control via SDCS-

COM-8 connected in option slot 3. The data set base address is

3 = COM-8/Nxxx selected by means of Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).

The drive communicates with the overriding control via SDCS-COM-8 connected in option slot 3 and an N-type fieldbus adapter. The data set base address has to be set to 1, set Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) = 1.

The drive communicates with the overriding control via the Modbus 4 = Modbus

(RMBA-xx) connected in option slot 1, for that set ModBusModule2

(98.08) = Slot1. The data set base address has to be set to 1, set Ch0

DsetBaseAddr (70.24) = 1.

5 = AC800xFldbus The drive communicates with the ABB overriding control via SDCS-

COM-8 connected in option slot 3. The data set base address is selected by means of Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).

An additional R-type fieldbus adapter connected in option slot 1 is used for monitoring purposes only. This choice is not valid for the Modbus.

6 = AC800xModbus The drive communicates with the ABB overriding control via SDCS-

COM-8 connected in option slot 3. The data set base address is selected by means of Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).

7 = NxxxModbus

An additional Modbus (RMBA-xx) connected in option slot 1 or 2 [see

ModBusModule2 (98.08)] is used for monitoring purposes only.

The drive communicates with the overriding control via SDCS-COM-8 connected in option slot 3 and an N-type fieldbus adapter. The data set base address is selected by means of Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).

An additional Modbus (RMBA-xx) connected in option slot 1 or 2 [see

ModBusModule2 (98.08)] is used for monitoring purposes only.

8 = FldBusModbus The drive communicates with the overriding control via an R-type fieldbus adapter connected in option slot 1. The data set base address has to be set to 1, set Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) = 1. This choice is not valid for the Modbus.

An additional Modbus (RMBA-xx) connected in option slot 2 or 3 [see

ModBusModule2 (98.08)] is used for monitoring purposes only.

The drive trips with F508 I/OBoardLoss [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 7], if the communication module configuration is not met.

Attention:

To ensure proper connection and communication of the communication modules with the SDCS-

CON-4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

98.03 DIO ExtModule1 (digital extension module 1)

First RDIO-xx extension module interface selection. DIO ExtModule1 (98.03) releases DI9, DI10,

DI11, DO9 and DO10.

The module can be connected in option slot 1, 2, 3 or alternatively onto the external I/O module adapter (AIMA) connected via SDCS-COM-8. The node ID 2 (see Node ID selector S1) is only required for connection via AIMA:

0 = NotUsed no first RDIO-xx is used, default

1 = Slot1

2 = Slot2

3 = Slot3

4 = AIMA first RDIO-xx is connected in option slot 1 first RDIO-xx is connected in option slot 2 first RDIO-xx is connected in option slot 3 first RDIO-xx is connected onto the external I/O module adapter (AIMA), node

ID = 2

The drive trips with F508 I/OBoardLoss [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 7], if the RDIO-xx extension module is chosen, but not connected or faulty.

Note:

For faster input signal detection disable the hardware filters of the RDIO-xx by means of dip switch

S2. Always have the hardware filter enabled when an AC signal is connected.

Note:

The digital outputs are available via DO CtrlWord (7.05).

Attention:

To ensure proper connection and communication of the RDIO-xx board with the SDCS-CON-4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery.

Switches on the 1 st

RDIO-xx:

409

Node ID selector (S1) is only valid when plugged in an AIMA board

ADDRESS

S1

Configuration switch (S2)

For faster detection the hardware filter of the digital input in question can be disabled. Disabling the hardware filtering will however reduce the noise immunity of the input.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

410

Index

Signal / Parameter name

98.04 DIO ExtModule2 (digital extension module 2)

Second RDIO-xx extension module interface selection. DIO ExtModule2 (98.04) releases DI12,

DI13, DI14, DO11 and DO12.

The module can be connected in option slot 1, 2, 3 or alternatively onto the external I/O module adapter (AIMA) connected via SDCS-COM-8. The node ID 3 (see Node ID selector S1) is only required for connection via AIMA:

0 = NotUsed no second RDIO-xx is used, default

1 = Slot1

2 = Slot2

3 = Slot3

4 = AIMA second RDIO-xx is connected in option slot 1 second RDIO-xx is connected in option slot 2 second RDIO-xx is connected in option slot 3 second RDIO-xx is connected onto the external I/O module adapter (AIMA), node ID = 3

The drive trips with F508 I/OBoardLoss [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 7], if the RDIO-xx extension module is chosen, but not connected or faulty.

Note:

For faster input signal detection disable the hardware filters of the RDIO-xx by means of dip switch

S2. Always have the hardware filter enabled when an AC signal is connected.

Note:

The digital inputs are available via DI StatWord (8.05)

The digital outputs are available via DO CtrlWord (7.05).

Attention:

To ensure proper connection and communication of the RDIO-xx board with the SDCS-CON-4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery.

Switches on the 2 nd

RDIO-xx:

Node ID selector (S1) is only valid when plugged in an AIMA board

ADDRESS

S1

Configuration switch (S2)

For faster detection the hardware filter of the digital input in question can be disabled. Disabling the hardware filtering will however reduce the noise immunity of the input.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

Signal and parameter list

Type: C Volatile: N

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

98.05 Unused

98.06 AIO ExtModule (analog extension module)

First RAIO-xx extension module interface selection. AIO ExtModule (98.06) releases AI5, AI6, AO3 and AO4.

The module can be connected in option slot 1, 2, 3 or alternatively onto the external I/O module adapter (AIMA) connected via SDCS-COM-8. The node ID 5 (see Node ID selector S1) is only required for connection via AIMA:

0 = NotUsed no first RAIO-xx is used, default

1 = Slot1 first RAIO-xx is connected in option slot 1

2 = Slot2

3 = Slot3

4 = AIMA first RAIO-xx is connected in option slot 2 first RAIO-xx is connected in option slot 3 first RAIO-xx is connected onto the external I/O module adapter (AIMA), node

ID = 5

The drive trips with F508 I/OBoardLoss [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 7], if the RAIO-xx extension module is chosen, but not connected or faulty.

Attention:

To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO-xx board with the SDCS-CON-4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery.

Switches on the 1 st

RAIO-xx:

411

Node ID selector (S1) is only valid when plugged in an AIMA board

ADDRESS

S1

Configuration switch (S2)

The operation of the analog inputs can be selected using the configuration DIP switch (S2) on the circuit board of the module. The drive parameters must be set accordingly.

Input mode selection:

In bipolar mode, the analog inputs can handle positive and negative signals. The resolution of the

A/D conversion is 11 data bits (+ 1 sign bit). In unipolar mode (default), the analog inputs can handle positive signals only. The resolution of the A/D conversion is 12 data bits.

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

412

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Input signal type selection:

Each input can be used with a current or voltage signal.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

98.07 Unused

Type: C Volatile: N

98.08 ModBusModule2 (Modbus module 2)

The Modbus module (RMBA-xx) can be connected in option slot 1, 2 or 3 [see also CommModule

(98.02)]:

0 = NotUsed no RMBA-xx is used, default

1 = Slot1

2 = Slot2

RMBA-xx is connected in option slot 1

RMBA-xx is connected in option slot 2

3 = Slot3 RMBA-xx is connected in option slot 3

4 = DSL reserved

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

98.09 Unused

98.10 Unused

98.11 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

98.12 AIO MotTempMeas (analog extension module for motor temperature measurement)

Second RAIO-xx extension module interface selection. AIO MotTempMeas (98.12) releases AI7,

AI8, AO5 and AO6. The analog in- and outputs are only used for motor temperature measurement

[see M1TempSel (31.05) and M2TempSel (49.33)].

The module can be connected in option slot 1, 2, 3 or alternatively onto the external I/O module adapter (AIMA) connected via SDCS-COM-8. The node ID 9 (see Node ID selector S1) is only required for connection via AIMA:

0 = NotUsed no second RAIO-xx is used, default

1 = Slot1

2 = Slot2

3 = Slot3

4 = AIMA second RAIO-xx is connected in option slot 1 second RAIO-xx is connected in option slot 2 second RAIO-xx is connected in option slot 3 second RAIO-xx is connected onto the external I/O module adapter (AIMA), node ID = 9

The drive trips with F508 I/OBoardLoss [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 7], if the RAIO extension module is chosen, but not connected or faulty.

Attention:

To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO-xx board with the SDCS-CON-4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery.

Switches on the 2 nd

RAIO-xx:

413

Node ID selector (S1) is only valid when plugged in an AIMA board

ADDRESS

S1

Configuration switch (S2)

For temperature measurement set the operating mode to unipolar and

DIP switch setting (unipolar)

Analog input AI1

ON

Analog input AI2

ON

Input signal type

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

0(4) ... 20 mA

0(2) ... 10 V

0 ... 2 V

(Default)

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Signal and parameter list

414

Index

Signal / Parameter name set the number of connected PT100 per channel.

DIP switch settings

Input signal type

Analog input AI1

ON ON

2 or 3 PT100 set the voltage signal to

0 … 10 V

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 PT100 set the voltage signal to

0 … 2 V

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

98.13 Unused

Type: C Volatile: N

98.14 Unused

98.15 IO BoardConfig (I/O board configuration)

IO BoardConfig (98.15) selects the optional interface boards (SDCS-IOB-2 and / or SDCS-IOB-3) for the standard I/O of the SDCS-CON-4:

0 = NotUsed no optional interface boards connected, default

1 = SDCS-IOB-2 only SDCS-IOB-2 connected

2 = SDCS-IOB-3 only SDCS-IOB-3 connected

3 = IOB-2+IOB-3 SDCS-IOB-2 and SDCS-IOB-3 connected

The drive trips with F508 I/OBoardLoss [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 7], if the IO board configuration is not met [e.g. one or two boards are physically connected, but not selected by IO BoardConfig

(98.15)].

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

98.16 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

415

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Start-up data

Select language:

0 = English default

1 = English AM not implemented yet

2 = Deutsch

3 = Italiano

4 = Español

5 = Português not implemented yet

6 = Nederlands not implemented yet

7 = Français

8 = Dansk not implemented yet

9 = Suomi

10 = Svenska not implemented yet not implemented yet

11 = Po-Russki not implemented yet

12 = Polski

13 = Turkish

14 = Cesky

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

not implemented yet not implemented yet

Type: C Volatile: N

99.02 M1NomVolt (motor 1 nominal DC voltage)

Motor 1 nominal armature voltage (DC) from the motor rating plate.

Note:

In 12-pulse serial mode, this parameter has to be set to the value of the voltage the converter itself is providing. This is usually 50 % of the rated motor voltage, if one motor is connected. In case 2 motors in series are connected it is 100 % of one motor’s rated voltage.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: N

99.03 M1NomCur (motor 1 nominal DC current)

Motor 1 nominal armature current (DC) from the motor rating plate. If several motors are connected to the drive, enter the total current of all motors.

Note:

In 12-pulse parallel mode, this parameter has to be set to the value of the current the converter itself is providing. This is usually 50 % of the rated motor current, if one motor is connected. In case 2 motors in parallel are connected it is 100 % of one motor’s rated current.

Note:

In case the converter is used as a 3-phase field exciter use M1NomCur (99.03) to set the nominal field current.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: N

99.04 M1BaseSpeed (motor 1 base speed)

Motor 1 base speed from the rating plate, usually the field weak point. M1BaseSpeed (99.04) is must be set in the range of:

0.2 to 1.6 times of SpeedScaleAct (2.29).

If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 7] is generated.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 rpm Type: I Volatile: N

99.05 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

416

Index

Signal / Parameter name

99.06 ServiceMode (service mode)

ServiceMode (99.06) contains several test modes, auto- and manual tuning procedures.

The drive mode is automatically set to NormalMode after an autotuning procedure or after the thyristor diagnosis is finished or failed. In case errors occur during the selected procedure A121

AutotuneFail [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 4] is generated. The reason of the error can be seen in

Diagnosis (9.11).

SetTypeCode is automatically set to NormalMode after the next power up.

0 = NormalMode

1 = ArmCurAuto normal operating mode depending on OperModeSel (43.01), default autotuning armature current controller

2 = FieldCurAuto autotuning field current controller

3 = EMF FluxAuto autotuning EMF controller and flux linearization

4 = SpdCtrlAuto autotuning speed controller

5 = SpdFbAssist test speed feedback, see M1EncMeasMode (50.02), M1SpeedFbSel

(50.03), M1EncPulseNo (50.04) and M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13)

6 = ArmCurMan

7 = FieldCurMan manual tuning of armature current controller manual tuning of field current controller

8 = ThyDiagnosis the thyristor diagnosis mode is set with TestFire (97.28), the result is shown in Diagnosis (9.11)

9 = FldRevAssist test field reversal

10 = SetTypeCode set type code, releases following parameters:

TypeCode (97.01)

S ConvScaleCur (97.02)

S ConvScaleVolt (97.03)

11 = SpdCtrlMan

12 = EMF Man

S M1FldScale (45.20)

S M2FldScale (45.21) manual tuning of speed controller manual tuning of EMF controller

13 = Simulation reserved

14 = TachFineTune tacho fine tuning, see M1TachoAdjust (50.12)

15 = LD FB Config reserved for future use (load fieldbus configuration file)

17 = FindDiscCur find discontinuous current limit

Note:

The reference chain is blocked while ServiceMode (99.06)

NormalMode.

Note:

Depending on MotSel (8.09) the field current of motor 1 or motor 2 is tuned.

Note:

A standard DCS800 converter used as field exciter cannot be tuned by means of its armature converter. Tune it by setting ServiceMode (99.06) = FieldCurAuto in the field exciter itself.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

99.07 ApplRestore (application restore)

Setting ApplRestore (99.07) = Yes starts the loading / storing of the macro (preset parameter set) selected by means of ApplMacro (99.08). ApplRestore (99.07) is automatically set back to Done after the chosen action is finished:

0 = Done no action or macro change completed, default

1 = Yes macro selected with ApplMacro (99.08) will be loaded into the drive

Note:

Macro changes are only accepted in Off state [MainStatWord (8.01) bit 1 = 0].

Note:

It takes about 2 s, until the new parameter values are active.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

417

Index

Signal / Parameter name

99.08 ApplMacro (application macro)

ApplMacro (99.08) selects the macro (preset parameter sets) to be loaded / stored into the RAM and flash. In addition to the preset macros, two user-defined macros (User1 and User2) are available.

The operation selected by ApplMacro (99.08) is started immediately by setting ApplRestore

(99.07) = Yes. ApplMacro (99.08) is automatically set back to NotUsed after the chosen action is finished. The selected macro is shown in MacroSel (8.10):

0 = NotUsed default

1 = Factory load macro factory (default parameter set) into RAM and flash - User1 and User2 will not be influenced

2 = User1Load load User1 into RAM and flash

3 = User1Save save actual parameter set form RAM into macro User1

4 = User2Load load User2 into RAM and flash

5 = User2Save

6 = Standard save actual parameter set form RAM into macro User2 load macro standard into RAM and flash

7 = Man/Const

8 = Hand/Auto

9 = Hand/MotPot

10 = reserved load macro manual / constant speed into RAM and flash load macro hand (manual) / automatic into RAM and flash load macro hand (manual) / motor potentiometer into RAM and flash reserved

11 = MotPot

12 = TorqCtrl load macro motor potentiometer into RAM and flash load macro torque control into RAM and flash

13 = TorqLimit load macro torque limit into RAM and flash

14 = DemoStandard load macro demo standard into RAM and flash

15 = 2WreDCcontUS load macro 2 wire with US style DC-breaker into RAM and flash

16 = 3WreDCcontUS load macro 3 wire with US style DC-breaker into RAM and flash

17 = 3WreStandard load macro 3 wire standard into RAM and flash

Note:

When loading a macro, group 99 is set / reset as well.

Note:

If User1 is active AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 3 is set. If User2 is active AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 4 is set.

Note:

It is possible to change all preset parameters of a loaded macro. On a macro change or an application restore command of the actual macro the macro depending parameters are restored to the macro’s default values.

Note:

In case macro User1 or User2 is loaded by means of ParChange (10.10) it is not saved into the flash and thus not valid after the next power on.

Note:

The DriveWindow backup function only saves the active macro. Thus both macros User1 and

User2 must be backed-up separately.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

99.09 DeviceName (device name)

The user can set a drive number by means of the DCS800 Control Panel or DriveWindow Light.

With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string (name) with a maximum of 12 characters. This name will override the numbers and is shown as well in the DCS800 Control Panel and in

DriveWindow.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I/C Volatile: N

Nominal mains voltage (AC) of the supply. The default and maximum values are preset automatically according to TypeCode (97.01) respectively S ConvScaleVolt (97.03).

Absolute max. is 1200 V

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

418

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Motor 1 nominal field current from the motor rating plate.

Note:

In case the converter is used as a 3-phase field exciter use M1NomCur (99.03) to set the nominal field current.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: N

99.12 M1UsedFexType (motor 1 used field exciter type)

Motor 1 used field exciter type:

0 = NotUsed

1 = OnBoard

2 = FEX-425-Int no or third party field exciter connected integrated 1-Q field exciter (for sizes D1 - D4 only), default internal 1-Q 25 A field exciter (for size D5 only) used for field currents

3 = DCF803-0035

4 = DCF803-0050

5 = DCF804-0050

6 = DCF803-0060

7 = DCF804-0060

8 = DCS800-S01 from 0.3 A to 25 A (terminals X100.1 and X100.3) external 1-Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0.3 A to 35 A

(terminals X100.1 and X100.3) external 1-Q 50 A field exciter (DCF803-0050 or DCF503B-0050) external 4-Q 50 A field exciter (DCF804-0050 or DCF504B-0050) external 1-Q 60 A field exciter; not implemented yet external 4-Q 60 A field exciter; not implemented yet external 2-Q 3-phase field exciter

9 = DCS800-S02 external 4-Q 3-phase field exciter

10 = DCF803-0016 external 1-Q 16 A field exciter used for field currents from 0.3 A to 16 A

(terminals X100.1 and X100.3)

11 = reserved to

14 = reserved

15 = ExFex AITAC third party field exciter, acknowledge via AITAC

16 = ExFex AI1

17 = ExFex AI2

18 = ExFex AI3

19 = ExFex AI4 third party field exciter, acknowledge via AI1 third party field exciter, acknowledge via AI2 third party field exciter, acknowledge via AI3 third party field exciter, acknowledge via AI4

20 = FEX-4-Term5A internal 2-Q 25 A field exciter (FEX-425-Int), external 2-Q 16 A field exciter (DCF803-0016) or external 2-Q 35 A field exciter (DCF803-

0035) used for field currents from 0.3 A to 5 A (terminals X100.2 and

X100.3)

21 = VariFexType see DCS800 MultiFex motor control (3ADW000309)

22 = Exc-Appl-1 see DCS800 Series wound motor control (3ADW000311)

If the fex type is changed its new value is taken over after the next power-up.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

99.13 Unused

99.14 Unused

Square wave generator

ServiceMode

99.06

Square wave generator

99.15

Pot1

99.16

Pot2

99.17

SqrWavePeriod

99.19

TestSignal

SquareWave

3.03

0

6

7*

11

99.18

3.12

3.30

2.17

SqrWaveIndex

CurRefUsed

FldCurRefM1

SpeedRefUsed

12

3.26

VoltRef2 all others, no connection

* (3.31) for Motor2 or

(3.12) in field exciter mode

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Index

Signal / Parameter name

Constant test reference 1 for the manual tuning functions - see ApplMacro (99.08) - and the square wave generator.

Note:

The value is depending on the chosen destination of the square wave [e.g. SqrWaveIndex (99.18)

= 2301 relates to SpeedScaleAct (2.29)]:

 100 % voltage == 10,000

 100 % current == 10,000

 100 % torque == 10,000

 100 % speed == SpeedScaleAct (2.29) == 20,000

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Constant test reference 2 for the manual tuning functions - see ApplMacro (99.08) - and the square wave generator.

Note:

The value is depending on the chosen destination of the square wave [e.g. SqrWaveIndex (99.18)

= 2301 relates to SpeedScaleAct (2.29)]:

 100 % voltage == 10,000

 100 % current == 10,000

 100 % torque == 10,000

 100 % speed == SpeedScaleAct (2.29) == 20,000

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

99.17 SqrWavePeriod (square wave period)

The time period for the manual tuning functions - see ApplMacro (99.08) - and the square wave generator.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

99.18 SqrWaveIndex (square wave index)

Index pointer to the source (signal/parameter) for the square wave generator. E.g. signal [e.g.

2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].

Note:

SqrWaveIndex (99.18) must not be used for the manual tuning functions - see ApplMacro (99.08).

Note:

After a power-up SqrWaveIndex (99.18) is set back to 0 and thus disables the square wave generator.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

99.19 TestSignal (square wave signal form)

Signal forms for the manual tuning functions - see ApplMacro (99.08) - and the square wave generator:

0 = SquareWave

1 = Triangle

2 = SineWave

3 = Pot1

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1

a square wave is used, default a triangle wave is used a sine wave is used a constant value set with Pot1 (99.15) is used

Type: C Volatile: Y

419

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

420

DCS800 Control Panel operation

Chapter overview

This chapter describes the handling of the DCS800 Control Panel.

Start-up

The commissioning configures the drive and sets parameters that define how the drive operates and communicates. Depending on the control and communication requirements, the commissioning requires any or all of the following:

 The Start-up Assistant (via DCS800 Control Panel or DriveWindow Light) steps you through the default configuration. The DCS800 Control Panel

Start-up Assistant runs automatically at the first power up, or can be accessed at any time using the main menu.

 Application macros can be selected to define common, system configurations.

 Additional adjustments can be made using the DCS800 Control Panel to manually select and set individual parameters. See chapter

Signal and parameter list

.

DCS800 Control Panel

Use the DCS800 Control Panel to control the drive, to read status data, to adjust parameters and to use the pre-programmed assistants.

Features:

The DCS800 Control Panel features:

 Alphanumeric LCD display

 Language selection for the display by means of Language (99.01)

 Panel can be connected or detached at any time

 Start-up Assistant for ease drive commissioning

 Copy function, parameters can be copied into the DCS800 Control Panel memory to be downloaded to other drives or as backup

 Context sensitive help

Fault- and alarm messages including fault history

DCS800 panel operation

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

Display overview

The following table summarizes the button functions and displays of the DCS800

Control Panel.

LCD display – Divided into three main areas:

Status LED:

• Green for normal operation

• Flashing green for alarms

• Red for faults lists.

display, if enabled.

421

Soft key 1 - Function varies, and is defined by the text in the lower-left corner of the LCD display.

Up – displayed in the middle of the

LCD display.

is selected.

upper-right corner is highlighted

(in reverse video).

Soft key 2 – Function varies, and is defined by the text in the lower-right corner of the LCD display.

Down –

• Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the middle of the LCD

Display.

• Decrements a value if a parameter is selected.

• Decrements the reference if the upper-right corner is highlighted (in reverse video).

LOC/REM – Changes between local and remote control of the drive.

STOP – Stops the drive in local control from DCS800 panel and when the Start-up Assistant is used.

START – Starts the drive in local control from DCS800 panel and when the Start-up assistant is used.

Help – Displays context sensitive information when the button is pressed. The information displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the middle area of the display.

DCS800 FW pan sum.dsf

General display features

Soft key functions:

The soft key functions are defined by the text displayed just above each key.

Display contrast:

To adjust display contrast, simultaneously press the MENU key and UP or DOWN, as appropriate.

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

DCS800 panel operation

422

Output mode

Use the output mode to read information on the drive’s status and to operate the drive. To reach the output mode, press EXIT until the LCD display shows status information as described below.

Status information:

LOC

15rpm

15.0

3.7

17.3

rpm

V

A

DIR MENU

Top: The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive:

 LOC indicates that the drive control is local from the DCS800 Control

Panel.

 REM indicates that the drive control is remote, via local I/O or overriding control.

indicates the drive and motor rotation status as follows:

DCS800 Control Panel display Significance

Rotating arrow (clockwise or

 Drive is running and at setpoint counter clockwise)

 Shaft direction is forward or reverse

Rotating dotted blinking arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint

Stationary dotted arrow Start command is present, but motor is not running. E.g. start enable is missing

 Upper right position shows the active reference, when in local from

DCS800 Control Panel.

Middle: Using parameter Group 34, the middle of the LCD display can be configured to display up to three parameter values:

 By default, the display shows three signals.

 Use DispParam1Sel (34.01), DispParam2Sel (34.08) and DispParam3Sel

(34.15) to select signals or parameters to display. Entering value 0 results

in no value displayed. For example, if 34.01 = 0 and 34.15 = 0, then only the signal or parameter specified by 34.08 appears on the DCS800 Control

Panel display.

Bottom: The bottom of the LCD display shows:

 Lower corners show the functions currently assigned to the two soft keys.

 Lower middle displays the current time (if configured to do so).

Operating the Drive:

LOC/REM: Each time the drive is powered up, it is in remote control (REM) and is controlled as specified in CommandSel (10.01).

To switch to local control (LOC) and control the drive using the DCS800 Control

Panel, press the button.

DCS800 panel operation

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

423

 When switching from local control (LOC) to remote control (REM) the drive’s status (e.g. On, Run) and the speed reference of the remote control are taken.

To switch back to remote control (REM) press the button.

Start/Stop: To start and stop the drive press the START and STOP buttons.

Shaft direction: To change the shaft direction press DIR.

Speed reference: To modify the speed reference (only possible if the display in the upper right corner is highlighted) press the UP or DOWN button (the reference changes immediately).

The speed reference can be modified via the DCS800 Control Panel when in local control (LOC).

Note:

The START / STOP buttons, shaft direction (DIR) and reference functions are only valid in local control (LOC).

Other modes

Below the output mode, the DCS800 Control Panel has:

 Other operating modes are available through the MAIN MENU.

 A fault mode that is triggered by faults. The fault mode includes a diagnostic assistant mode.

 An alarm mode that is triggered by drive alarms.

LOC

 MAIN MENU----------------1

PARAMETERS

ASSISTANTS

MACROS

EXIT ENTER

Access to the MAIN MENU and other modes:

To reach the MAIN MENU:

1. Press EXIT, as necessary, to step back through the menus or lists associated with a particular mode. Continue until you are back to the output mode.

2. Press MENU from the output mode. At this point, the middle of the display is a listing of the other modes, and the top-right text says “MAIN MENU”.

3. Press UP/DOWN to scroll to the desired mode.

4. Press ENTER to enter the mode that is highlighted.

Following modes are available in the MAIN MENU:

1. Parameters mode

2. Start-up assistants mode

3. Macros mode (currently not used)

4. Changed parameters mode

DCS800 panel operation

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

424

5. Fault logger mode

6. Clock set mode

7. Parameter backup mode

8. I/O settings mode (currently not used)

The following sections describe each of the other modes.

Parameters mode:

Use the parameters mode to view and edit parameter values:

1. Press UP/DOWN to highlight PARAMETERS in the MAIN MENU, then press ENTER.

LOC

 MAIN MENU----------------1

PARAMETERS

ASSISTANTS

MACROS

EXIT ENTER

2. Press UP/DOWN to highlight the appropriate parameter group, then press

SEL.

LOC  PAR GROUPS------------01

99 Start-up data

01 Phys Act Values

02 SPC Signals

03 Ref/Act Values

04 Information

EXIT SEL

3. Press UP/DOWN to highlight the appropriate parameter in a group, then press EDIT to enter PAR EDIT mode.

LOC  PARAMETERS--------------

9901 Language

9902 M1NomVolt

350 V

9903 M1NomCur

9904 M1BaseSpeed

Note:

EXIT EDIT

The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter.

4. Press UP/DOWN to step to the desired parameter value.

LOC  PAR EDIT---------------------

9902 M1NomVolt

60 V

CANCEL SAVE

Note:

To get the parameter default value press UP/DOWN simultaneously.

5. Press SAVE to store the modified value and leave the PAR EDIT mode or press CANCEL to leave the PAR EDIT mode without modifications.

6. Press EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups, and again to step back to the MAIN MENU.

DCS800 panel operation

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

425

Start-up assistants mode:

Use the start-up assistants mode for basic commissioning of the drive.

When the drive is powered up the first time, the start-up assistants guides you through the setup of the basic parameters.

There are seven start-up assistants available. They can be activated one after the other, as the ASSISTANTS menu suggests, or independently. The use of the assistants is not required. It is also possible to use the parameter mode instead.

The assistant list in the following table is typical:

1.

Name plate data

2.

Macro assistant

3.

Autotuning field current controller

4.

Autotuning armature current controller

5.

Speed feedback assistant

6.

Autotuning speed controller

 Enter the motor data, the mains (supply) data, the most important protections and follow the instructions of the assistant.

 After filling out the parameters of this assistant it is - in most cases - possible to turn the motor for the first time.

 Selects an application macro.

 Enter the field circuit data and follow the instructions of the assistant.

 During the autotuning the main respectively field contactor will be closed, the field circuit is measured by means of increasing the field current to nominal field current and the field current control parameters are set. The armature current is not released while the autotuning is active and thus the motor should not turn.

 When the autotuning is finished successfully the parameters changed by the assistant are shown for confirmation. If the assistant fails it is possible to enter the fault mode for more help.

 Enter the motor nominal current, the basic current limitations and follow the instructions of the assistant.

 During the autotuning the main contactor will be closed, the armature circuit is measured by means of armature current bursts and the armature current control parameters are set. The field current is not released while the autotuning is active and thus the motor should not turn, but due to remanence in the field circuit about 40% of all motors will turn (create torque). These motors have to be locked.

 When the autotuning is finished successfully the parameters changed by the assistant are shown for confirmation. If the assistant fails it is possible to enter the fault mode for more help.

 Enter the EMF speed feedback parameters, - if applicable - the parameters for the pulse encoder respectively the analog tacho and follow the instructions of the assistant.

 The speed feedback assistant detects the kind of speed feedback the drive is using and provides help to set up pulse encoders or analog tachometers.

 During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor - if existing - will be closed and the motor will run up to base speed

[M1BaseSpeed (99.04)]. During the whole procedure the drive will be in

EMF speed control despite the setting of M1SpeedFbSel (50.03).

 When the assistant is finished successfully the speed feedback is set. If the assistant fails it is possible to enter the fault mode for more help.

 Enter the motor base speed, the basic speed limitations, the speed filter time and follow the instructions of the assistant.

 During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor - if existing - will be closed, the ramp is bypassed and torque respectively current limits are valid. The speed controller is tuned by means of speed bursts up to base speed [M1BaseSpeed (99.04)] and the speed controller parameters are set.

Attention:

During the autotuning the torque limits will be reached.

 When the autotuning is finished successfully the parameters changed by the assistant are shown for confirmation. If the assistant fails it is possible to enter the fault mode for more help.

DCS800 panel operation

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

426

7.

Field weakening assistant

(only used when maximum speed is higher than base speed)

Attention:

This assistant is using the setting of M1SpeedFbSel (50.03). If using setting

Encoder, Encoder2 or Tacho make sure the speed feedback is working properly!

 Enter the motor data, the field circuit data and follow the instructions of the assistant.

 During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor - if existing - will be closed and the motor will run up to base speed

[M1BaseSpeed (99.04)]. The EMF controller data are calculated, the flux linearization is tuned by means of a constant speed while decreasing the field current and the EMF controller respectively flux linearization parameters are set.

 When the autotuning is finished successfully the parameters changed by the assistant are shown for confirmation. If the assistant fails it is possible to enter the fault mode for more help.

1. Press UP/DOWN to highlight ASSISTANTS in the MAIN MENU, then press

ENTER.

2. Press UP/DOWN to highlight the appropriate start-up assistant, then press

SEL to enter PAR EDIT mode.

3. Make entries or selections as appropriate.

4. Press SAVE to save settings. Each individual parameter setting is valid immediately after pressing SAVE.

5. Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU.

Macros mode:

Currently not used!

Changed parameters mode:

Use the changed parameters mode to view and edit a listing of all parameter that have been changed from their default values:

1. Press UP/DOWN to highlight CHANGED PAR in the MAIN MENU, then press ENTER.

2. Press UP/DOWN to highlight a changed parameter, then press EDIT to enter PAR EDIT mode.

Note:

The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter.

3. Press UP/DOWN to step to the desired parameter value.

Note:

To get the parameter default value press UP/DOWN simultaneously.

4. Press SAVE to store the modified value and leave the PAR EDIT mode or press CANCEL to leave the PAR EDIT mode without modifications.

Note:

If the new value is the default value, the parameter will no longer appear in the changed parameter list.

5. Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU.

Fault logger mode:

Use the fault logger mode to see the drives fault, alarm and event history, the fault state details and help for the faults:

DCS800 panel operation

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

427

1. Press UP/DOWN to highlight FAULT LOGGER in the MAIN MENU, then press ENTER to see the latest faults (up to 20 faults, alarms and events are logged).

2. Press DETAIL to see details for the selected fault. Details are available for the three latest faults, independent of the location in the fault logger.

3. Press DIAG to get additional help (only for faults).

4. Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU.

Clock set mode:

Use the Clock set mode to:

 Enable or disable the clock function.

 Select the display format.

 Set date and time.

1. Press UP/DOWN to highlight CLOCK SET in the MAIN MENU, then press

ENTER.

2. Press UP/DOWN to highlight the desired option, then press SEL.

3. Choose the desired setting, then press SEL or OK to store the setting or press CANCEL to leave without modifications.

4. Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU.

Note:

To get the clock visible on the LCD display at least one change has to be done in the clock set mode and the DCS800 Control Panel has to be de-energized and energized again.

Parameter backup mode:

The DCS800 Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters.

 AP will be uploaded and downloaded.

 The type code of the drive is write protected and has to be set manually by means of ServiceMode (99.06) = SetTypeCode and TypeCode (97.01).

The parameter backup mode has following functions:

UPLOAD TO PANEL: Copies all parameters from the drive into the DCS800

Control Panel. This includes both user sets (

User1 and User2) - if defined - and internal parameters such as those created by tacho fine tuning. The DCS800

Control Panel memory is non-volatile and does not depend on its battery. Can only be done in drive state

Off and local from DCS800 Control Panel.

DOWNLOAD FULL SET: Restores the full parameter set from the DCS800 Control

Panel into the drive. Use this option to restore a drive, or to configure identical drives. Can only be done in drive state

Off and local from DCS800 Control Panel.

Note:

This download does not include the user sets.

DOWNLOAD APPLICATION: Currently not used!

The general procedure for parameter backup operations is:

1. Press UP/DOWN to highlight PAR BACKUP in the MAIN MENU, then press

ENTER.

DCS800 panel operation

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

428

2. Press UP/DOWN to highlight the desired option, then press SEL.

3. Wait until the service is finished, then press OK.

4. Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU.

I/O settings mode:

Currently not used!

Maintenance

Cleaning:

Use a soft damp cloth to clean the DCS800 Control Panel. Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window.

Battery:

A battery is used in the DCS800 Control Panel to keep the clock function available and enabled. The battery keeps the clock operating during power interruptions.

The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years. To remove the battery, use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel. The type of the battery is CR2032.

Note

:

The battery is not required for any DCS800 Control Panel or drive functions, except for the clock.

DCS800 panel operation

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

429

Fault tracing

Chapter overview

This chapter describes the protections and fault tracing of the drive.

General

Fault modes

Depending on the trip level of the fault the drive reacts differently. The drive’s

reaction to a fault with trip level 1 and 2 is fixed. See also paragraph

Fault signals

of this manual. The reaction to a fault of level 3 and 4 can be chosen by means of

SpeedFbFltMode (30.36) respectively FaultStopMode (30.30).

Converter protection

Auxiliary undervoltage

If the auxiliary supply voltage fails while the drive is in RdyRun state (MSW bit 1), fault F501 AuxUnderVolt is generated.

Auxiliary supply voltage Trip level

230 VAC < 185 VAC

115 VAC < 96 VAC

Armature overcurrent

The nominal value of the armature current is set with M1NomCur (99.02).

The overcurrent level is set by means of ArmOvrCurLev (30.09).

Additionally the actual current is monitored against the overcurrent level of the converter module. The converter’s actual overcurrent level can be read from

ConvOvrCur (4.16).

Exceeding one of the two levels causes F502 ArmOverCur.

Converter overtemperature

The maximum temperature of the bridge can be read from MaxBridgeTemp (4.17) and is automatically set by TypeCode (97.01) or manually set by S MaxBrdgTemp

(97.04).

Note:

When setting the air entry temperature for D6 and D7 modules manually use

MaxBrdgTemp (97.04) = 50 °C as absolute maximum.

Exceeding this level causes F504 ConvOverTemp. The threshold for A104

ConvOverTemp is 5

C below the tripping level. The measured temperature can be read from BridgeTemp (1.24).

If the measured temperature drops below minus 10

C, F504 ConvOverTemp is generated.

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

430

Auto-reclosing (mains undervoltage)

Auto-reclosing allows continuing drive operation immediately after a short mains undervoltage without any additional functions in the overriding control system.

In order to keep the overriding control system and the drive control electronics running through short mains undervoltage, an UPS is needed for the 115/230 VAC auxiliary voltages. Without the UPS all DI like e.g. E-stop, start inhibition, acknowledge signals etc. would have false states and trip the drive although the system itself could stay alive. Also the control circuits of the main contactor must be supplied during the mains undervoltage.

Auto-reclosing defines whether the drive trips immediately with F512

MainsLowVolt or if the drive will continue running after the mains voltage returns.

To activate the auto-reclosing set PwrLossTrip (30.21) = Delayed.

Short mains undervoltage

The supervision of mains undervoltage has two levels:

1. UNetMin1 (30.22) alarm, protection and trip level

2. UNetMin2 (30.23) trip level

If the mains voltage falls below UNetMin1 (30.22) but stays above UNetMin2

(30.23), the following actions take place:

1. the firing angle is set to ArmAlphaMax (20.14),

2. single firing pulses are applied in order to extinguish the current as fast as possible,

3. the controllers are frozen,

4. the speed ramp output is updated from the measured speed and

5. A111 MainsLowVolt is set as long as the mains voltage recovers before

PowrDownTime (30.24) is elapsed, otherwise F512 MainsLowVolt is

generated.

If the mains voltage returns before PowrDownTime (30.24) is elapsed and the overriding control keeps the commands On (MCW bit 0) and Run (MCW bit 3) = 1, the drive will start again after 2 seconds. Otherwise the drive trips with F512

MainsLowVolt.

When the mains voltage drops below UNetMin2 (30.23), the action is selected by means of PwrLossTrip (30.21):

1. the drive is immediately tripped with F512 MainsLowVolt or

2. the drive starts up automatically, see description for UNetMin1 (30.22).

Below UNetMin2 (30.23) the field acknowledge signals are ignored and blocked

Note:

UNetMin2 (30.23) isn't monitored, unless the mains voltage drops below UNetMin1

(30.22). Thus, for proper operation, UNetMin1 (30.22) must be larger than

UNetMin2 (30.23).

Note:

If no UPS is available, set PwrLossTrip (30.21) to Immediately. Thus the drive will trip with F512 MainsLowVolt avoiding secondary phenomena due to missing power for AI’s and DI’s.

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

431

Drive behavior during auto-reclosing hold speed controller integrator speed ramp follows speed actual

AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 15

AutoReclosing

MainsVoltActRel (1.11)

UNetMin1 (30.22)

UNetMin2 (30.23)

2 s

PowrDownTime (30.24)

F512 MainsLowVolt, if

PwrLossTrip (30.21)

Immediately

=

A111 MainsLowVolt

PowrDownTime (30.24) is exceeded:

F512 MainsLowVolt

DCS800 FW aut recl.dsf

Auto-reclosing

Mains synchronism

As soon as the main contactor is closed and the firing unit is synchronized with the incoming voltage, supervising of the synchronization is activated. If the synchronization fails, F514 MainsNotSync will be generated.

The synchronization of the firing unit takes typically 300 ms before the current controller is ready.

Mains overvoltage

The overvoltage level is fixed to 1.3 * NomMainsVolt (99.10). Exceeding this level for more than 10 s and RdyRun = 1 causes F513 MainsOvrVolt.

Communication loss

The communication to several devices is supervised. The reaction to a communication loss can be chosen by means of LocalLossCtrl (30.27) or

ComLossCtrl (30.28).

The time out is set by the parameters listed in the table as well as all dependent fault- and alarm messages.

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

432

Overview local and communication loss:

Device Loss control Time out

fixed to 5s DCS800

Control Panel

LocalLossCtrl (30.27)

DW

DWL

R-type fieldbus

DCSLink

ComLossCtrl (30.28)

FB TimeOut (30.35)

-

-

MailBoxCycle1 (94.13),

MailBoxCycle2 (94.19),

MailBoxCycle3 (94.25),

MailBoxCycle4 (94.31)

12P TimeOut (94.03)

FexTimeOut (94.07)

SDCS-COM-8

Ch0 ComLossCtrl (70.05) Ch0 TimeOut (70.04)

Ch2 ComLossCtrl (70.15) Ch2 TimeOut (70.14)

Related fault

F546 LocalCmdLoss

F528 FieldBusCom

F544 P2PandMFCom

F535 12PulseCom

F516 M1FexCom

F519 M2FexCom

F543 COM8Com

Related alarm

A130 LocalCmdLoss

A128 FieldBusCom

A112 P2PandMFCom

-

-

A113 COM8Com

Overview local and communication loss

Fan, field and mains contactor acknowledge

When the drive is switched On (MCW bit 0), the firmware closes the fan contactor and waits for acknowledge. After it is received, the field contactor is closed respectively the field converter is started and the firmware waits for the field acknowledge. Finally the main contactor is closed and its acknowledge is waited for.

If the acknowledges are not received during 10 seconds after the On command

(MCW bit 0) is given, the corresponding fault is generated. These are:

1. F521 FieldAck, see Mot1FexStatus (6.12)

2. F523 ExtFanAck, see MotFanAck (10.06)

3. F524 MainContAck, see MainContAck (10.21)

4. F527 ConvFanAck, see ConvFanAck (10.20)

Note:

F521 FieldAck is the sum fault for all field related faults like:

1. F515 M1FexOverCur, see M1FldOvrCurLev (30.13)

2. F516 M1FexCom, see FexTimeOut (94.07)

3. F529 M1FexNotOK, fault during self-diagnosis

4. F537 M1FexRdyLost, AC voltage is missing or not in synchronism

5. F541 M1FexLowCur, see M1FldMinTrip (30.12)

External fault

The user has the possibility to connect external faults to the drive. The source can be connected to DI’s, MainCtrlWord (7.01) or AuxCtrlWord (7.02) and is selectable by ExtFaultSel (30.31). External faults generate F526 ExternalDI.

ExtFaultOnSel (30.33) selects the reaction:

1. external fault is always valid independent from drive state

2. external fault is only valid when drive state is RdyRun (MSW bit 1) for at least 6 s

Note:

In case inverted fault inputs are needed, it is possible to invert the DI’s.

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

433

Bridge reversal

With a 6-pulse converter, the bridge reversal is initiated by changing the polarity of the current reference - see CurRefUsed (3.12). Upon zero current detection - see

CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 13 - the bridge reversal is started. Depending on the

moment, the new bridge may be “fired” either during the same or during the next current cycle.

The switchover can be delayed by RevDly (43.14). The delay starts after zero current has been detected - see CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 13. Thus RevDly (43.14) is the length of the forced current gap during a bridge changeover. After the reversal delay is elapsed the system changes to the selected bridge without any further consideration.

This feature may prove useful when operating with large inductances. Also the time needed to change the current direction can be longer when changing from motoring mode to regenerative mode at high motor voltages, because the motor voltage must be reduced before switching to regenerative mode - see also

RevVoltMargin (44.21).

After a command to change current direction - see CurRefUsed (3.12) - the opposite current has to be reached before ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) has been elapsed otherwise the drive trips with F557 ReversalTime [FaultWord4 (9.04) bit

8].

Example:

Drive is tripping with F557 ReversalTime [FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 8]:

I ref

CtrlRefUsed (3.12)

changes polarity

I act

Zero current detection

CurCtrlStat (6.03)

bit 13

CtrlStatMas (6.09)

RevDly

bit 12 is set

(43.14)

t

ZeroCurTimeOut

(97.19)

RevDly_a.dsf

Bridge reversal

Analog input monitor

In case the analog input is set to 2 V to 10 V respectively 4 mA to 20 mA it is possible to check for wire breakage by means of AI Mon4mA (30.29).

In case the threshold is undershoot one of the following actions will take place:

1. the drive stops according to FaultStopMode (30.30) and trips with F551

AIRange

2. the drive continues to run at the last speed and sets A127 AIRange

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

434

3. the drive continues to run with FixedSpeed1 (23.02) and sets A127

AIRange

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

435

Motor protection

Armature overvoltage

The nominal value of the armature voltage is set with M1NomVolt (99.02).

The overvoltage level is set by means of ArmOvrVoltLev (30.08). Exceeding this level causes F503 ArmOverVolt.

Residual current detection

The residual current detection (earth fault) is based on:

 a sum current transformer at the AC-side of the converter or

 an external device (e.g. Bender relays).

If a current transformer (ratio is 400 : 1) is used its secondary winding is connected to AI4 (X3:11 and X3:12) on the SDCS-IOB-3 board. The sum current of all three phases has to be zero, otherwise a residual current is detected and F505

ResCurDetect is set.

ResCurDetectSel (30.05) activates the residual current detection and selects the

choice of connected hardware (transformer or external device).

The residual current detection tripping level, in amperes at the primary side of the current transformer, is set with ResCurDetectLim (30.06), if a sum current transformer is used. In case an external device is used ResCurDetectLim (30.06) is deactivated.

ResCurDetectDel (30.07) delays F505 ResCurDetect.

Measured motor temperature

General

The temperatures of motor 1 and motor 2 (parameter for motor 2 see group 49) can be measured at the same time. Alarm and tripping levels are selected by means of M1AlarmLimTemp (31.06) and M1FaultLimTemp (31.07). If the levels are exceeded A106 M1OverTemp respectively F506 M1OverTemp is set. The motor fan will continue to work until the motor is cooled down to alarm limit.

The measurement is configured by means of M1TempSel (31.05) and the measured temperature is shown in Mot1TempMeas (1.22). The unit of the measurement depends on the selected measurement mode. For PT100 the unit is degree Celsius and for PTC the unit is

.

The motor temperature measurement uses either AI2 and AI3 of the SDCS-IOB-3 or AI7 and AI8 of the RAIO. Additionally the SDCS-IOB-3 features a selectable constant current source for PT100 (5 mA) or PTC (1.5 mA).

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

436

Measurement selection

Connection possibilities for PT100:

 max. 3 PT100 for motor 1 and max. 3 PT100 for motor 2 or

 up to 6 PT100 for a single motor.

SDCS-IOB-3:

AI2 (motor 1) and AI3 (motor 2) are used for the temperature measurement with

PT100. In case only one PT100 is connected to an AI the input range must be configured by jumpers to a gain of 10. Jumper settings for input range and constant current source see DCS800 Hardware Manual. All parameters for AI2 and

AI3 in group 15 have to set to default.

X3: 5

SDCS-IOB-3

-

6

A/D

7

8

AI2

AI3

+

-

A/D

X4: 10 S5: 3-4

U

PT100 PT100 PT100

5 mA

Motor 1 Motor 2

PT100 and SDCS-IOB-3

single motor

For more information see section

Analog Inputs.

DCS800 FW PT100 and IOB3_a.dsf

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

437

RAIO for motor temperature measurement:

AI7 (motor 1) and AI8 (motor 2) are used for the temperature measurement with

PT100. AO5 and AO6 are used as current source. AI7 / AO5 and AI8 / AO6 have to be activated by means of AIO MotTempMeas (98.12).

X1: 2

1

4

3

AI7

-

+

AI8

A/D

A/D

X2: 4

3

2

1

AO6

AO5

D/A

D/A

Motor 1 Motor 2 single motor

DCS800 FW PT0100 and sec RAIO.dsf

PT100 and second RAIO

SDCS-IOB-3:

Connection possibilities for PTC:

 max. 1 PTC for motor 1 and max. 1 PTC for motor 2 or

 up to 2 PTC for a single motor.

AI2 (motor 1) and AI3 (motor 2) are used for the temperature measurement with

PTC. Jumper settings see DCS800 Hardware Manual. All parameters for AI2 and

AI3 in group 15 have to set to default.

X3: 5

SDCS-IOB-3

-

6

AI2 A/D

7

8

AI3 A/D

X4: 10

S5: 1-2

11

U

1.5 mA

Motor 1 Motor 2

PTC and SDCS-IOB-3

single motor

DCS800 FW PTC and IOB3_a.dsf

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

438

SDCS-CON-4:

Connection possibilities for PTC:

 max. 1 PTC for motor 1 or max. 1 PTC for motor 2.

Only AI2 can be used for the temperature measurement with PTC. Jumper settings see DCS800 Hardware Manual. All parameters for AI2 in group 15 have to set to default.

X3: 8

7

AI2

+

-

A/D

PTC

S3: 7- 8

X4: 10

4k75

U

DCS800 FW PTC and CON4_a.dsf

PTC and SDCS-CON-4

Klixon

The temperature of motor 1 and motor 2 can be supervised by means of klixons.

The klixon is a thermal switch, opening its contact at a defined temperature. This can be used for supervision of the temperature by means of connecting the switch to a digital input of the drive. The digital input for the klixon(s) is selected with

M1KlixonSel (31.08). The drive trips with F506 M1OverTemp when the klixon

opens. The motor fan will continue to work until the klixon is closed again.

Note:

It is possible to connect several klixons in series.

Motor thermal model

General

The drive includes two thermal models one for motor 1 and one for motor 2. The models can be used at the same time. Two models are needed in case one converter is shared by two motors (e.g. shared motion). During normal operation only one thermal model is needed.

It is recommended to use the thermal model of the motor if a direct motor temperature measurement isn't available and the current limits of the drive are set higher than the motor nominal current.

The thermal model is based on the actual motor current related to motor nominal current and rated ambient temperature. Thus the thermal model does not directly calculate the temperature of the motor, but it calculates the temperature rise of the motor. This is based on the fact that the motor will reach its end temperature

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

439

after the specified time when starting to run the cold motor (40°C) with nominal current. This time is about four times the motor thermal time constant.

The temperature rise of the motor behaves like the time constant which is proportional with the motor current to the power of two:

 

I

2

2

act

I

Motn

*

1

e

t



( 1 )

When the motor is cooling down, following temperature model is valid:

 

2

I act

I

2

Motn

*

e

t

( 2 ) with:

 alarm

= temperature rise == [M1AlarmLimLoad (31.03)]

2

 trip

= temperature rise == [M1FaultLimLoad (31.04)]

 = temperature rise == Mot1TempCalc (1.20)

2

I act

= actual motor current (overload e.g. 170%)

I

MotN

= nominal motor current (100%) t = length of overload (e.g. 60 s)

 = temperature time constant (in seconds) == M1ModelTime (31.01)

As from the formulas (1) and (2) can be seen, the temperature model uses the same time constant when the motor is heating or cooling down.

Alarm and tripping levels

Alarm and tripping levels are selected by means of M1AlarmLimLoad (31.03) and

M1FaultLimLoad (31.04). If the levels are exceeded A107 M1OverLoad

respectively F507 M1OverLoad is set. The motor fan will continue to work until the motor is cooled down under the alarm limit.

The default values are selected in order to achieve quite high overload ability.

Recommended value for alarming is 102 % and for tripping 106 % of nominal motor current. Thus the temperature rise is:

  alarm

== [M1AlarmLimLoad (31.03)]

2

= (102%)

2

= 1.02

2

= 1.04 and

  trip

== [M1FaultLimLoad (31.04)]

2

= (106%)

2

= 1.06

2

= 1.12.

The temperature rise output of the model is shown in Mot1TempCalc (1.20).

Thermal model selection

The activation of the thermal models is made by setting M1ModelTime (31.01) greater than zero.

Thermal time constant

The time constant for the thermal model is set by means of M1ModelTime (31.01).

If the thermal time constant of a motor is given by the manufacturer just write it into

M1ModelTime (31.01).

In many cases the motor manufacturer provides a curve that defines how long the motor can be overloaded by a certain overload factor. In this case the proper thermal time constant must be calculated.

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

440

Example:

The drive is desired to trip if the motor current exceeds 170 % of motor nominal current for more than 60 seconds.

Selected tripping base level is 106 % of nominal motor current, thus

M1FaultLimLoad (31.04) = 106 %.

Current I act

(%)

260

240

200

Example:

(31.04)

2

= trip

I act

= 170 %

I

Motn

= 100 % t = 60 s

= (106 %)

2

= 112

180

160

140

120

100

30 60 300 600 6000

Time (sec)

DCS800 FW mot load curv.dsf

Motor load curve

Note:

This is an example and does not necessarily correspond to any motor!

Using formula (1) we can calculate the correct value for

, when starting with a cold motor.

With:

( 31 .

04 )

2

 

trip

2

I act

2

I

Motn

*



1

e

t



Follows:

  l

n



1

t

( 31 .

04 )

2

*

I

Motn

2

I act

2



 

Set M1ModelTime (31.01) = 122 s.

60

s

l

n



1

1 .

06

2

1 .

0

2

*

1 .

7

2



122

s

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

441

Field overcurrent

The nominal value of the field current is set with M1NomFldCur (99.11).

The overcurrent level is set by means of M1FldOvrCurLev (30.13). Exceeding this level causes F515 M1FexOverCur.

Armature current ripple

The current control is equipped with a current ripple monitor. This function can detect:

1. a broken fuse or thyristor

2. too high gain (e.g. wrong tuning) of the current controller

3. a broken current transformer (T51, T52)

The current ripple monitor level is set by means of CurRippleLim (30.19).

Exceeding this level causes either F517 ArmCurRipple or A117 ArmCurRipple depending on CurRippleSel (30.18).

Current ripple monitor method is based on comparing positive and negative currents of each phase. The calculation is done per thyristor pair:

I snubber circuit

I not fired thyristor

I

1-6

I

1-2

I

3-2

I

3-4

I

5-4

I

5-6 t

DCS800 FW curr rip mon.dsf

Current ripple monitor method

CurRipple (1.09) is calculated as abs(I

1-6

-I

3-4

) + abs(I

1-2

-I

5-4

) + abs(I

3-2

-I

5-6

). By lowpass filtering with 200 ms CurRippleFilt (1.10) is generated and compared against

L1

CurRippleLim (30.19).

I

1-6 abs

I

3-4

CurRipple (1.09)

CurRippleFilt (1.10)

L2

I

1-2 abs

F517 ArmCurRipple

200 ms

A117 ArmCurRipple

I

5-4

L3

I

3-2 abs

CurRippleLim (30.19)

CurRippleSel (30.18)

I

5-6

Current ripple monitor calculation

Note:

DCS800 FW curr rip mon calc.dsf

The load influences the error signal CurRippleFilt (1.10).

Current near discontinuous level will create values of about 300 % *

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g

442

ConvCurActRel (1.15) if a thyristor is not fired.

High inductive loads will create values of about 90% * ConvCurActRel (1.15) if a thyristor is not fired.

Commissioning hint:

It is not possible to pre-calculate clear levels.

The current control reacts to unstable current feedback.

The load is continuously driving the current if a thyristor is not fired.

Speed feedback monitor

The speed feedback monitor supervises an attached analog tacho or encoder for proper function by means of measured speed and measured EMF. Above a certain

EMF the measured speed feedback must be above a certain threshold. The sign of the speed measurement must be correct as well:

Speed measurement supervision

The drive reacts according to SpeedFbFltSel (30.17) when:

1. the measured EMF